Home

Bartels AutoEngineer® User Manual

1. The autorouting procedures in BAE HighEnd are some 30 percent faster than in BAE Professional This performance boost is mainly achieved by optimized internal data structures HighSpeed Kernel in BAE HighEnd The current routing result is displayed graphically and through statistical readouts whilst routing is in progress The routing process can be stopped at any time by pressing a key causing the Autorouter to revert to the currently best routing result Single Pass Initial Routing The single pass Initial Router performs signal trace routing considering preferred routing directions a certain channel width and a maximum via count per two point connection The channel width is the maximum permitted deviance from preferred directions The channel width is specified in routing grid steps A zero channel width removes the restraints on deviating from the preferred direction i e the entire board area is then released for routing The maximum via count used by the Initial Router will never exceed the value set with the Maximum Via Count function from the Options menu see above The Initial Router places traces close together thus using minimum space in order to leave more room for subsequent traces trace hugging The Initial Router also uses advanced techniques of copper sharing where appropriate The Initial Router processes power layer connections and attributed nets with non def
2. LAYDOCLAYER lt layer gt lt text gt lt side gt lt rotate gt lt index gt where lt layer gt is the number of the documentary layer in a range of 1 to 100 The lt text gt entry is used for specifying an up to 18 character long name for the documentary layer eg Silkscreen Insertion Plan etc The documentary layer name is displayed in the documentary layer selection menus of the BAE layout system The lt side gt entry is used for specifying the query mode to be used with side selections when defining objects on the corresponding documentary layer The choices for lt side gt are enables interactive input on Side 1 of the documentary layer only eme enables interactive input on Side 2 of the documentary layer only BOTE enables interactive input on Both Sides of the documentary layer only causes the BAE layer menu functions to offer a submenu choice for selecting the documentary layer side on interactive input The lt rotate gt parameter specifies the mode of text to be created on the corresponding documentary layer The choices for lt rotate gt are LOGICAL text can be rotated and mirrored but remains readable eg for silkscreen PHYSICAL text can be fully mirrored and rotated but cannot be moved with the Move Name and or Move Attribute functions e g for insertion plan NOROTATE text with
3. Rip Up Trees Rip Up Depth Rip Up Retries The Rip Up Trees function sets the maximum number of traces allowed to be simultaneously ripped up per rip up cycle The rip up trees number is set to 2 on default and can range from 1 to 9 The function is used to control the persistence of the rip up process A high value will result in higher persistence The rip up depth value can range from 1 to 999 and is set to 50 on default The Rip Up Retries function sets the maximum number of rip up retries for routing a particular trace thus defining the local rip up router intensity The rip up retries number is set to 2 on default and can range from 0 to 99 Higher rip up control parameters increase the persistence and intensity of the rip up routing process and thus can be used for special problems such as completing 100 routing without intermediate optimizer passes or for routability check Once 99 5 routing completion is achieved the Rip Up parameters are automatically increased to Rip Up Trees 6 Rip Up Level 200 and Rip Up Retries 10 unless higher values are already set This helps to avoid the time consuming Optimizer cleanup passes between Rip Up passes if only a few open connections are left SMD Via Pre Place The SMD Via Pre Place function is used to activate option Nia Pre Place Onl or deactivate default option Nia Pre Place Off the initial routing algorithm f
4. Use the following commands to select Gerber format 2 4 and load the Gerber plot file demo 12 ger which has been generated in chapter 4 7 11 select layer 2 for both the line drawn and the flashed structures Settings Gerber Format Gerber 2 4 Format File Load Gerber Data Layer 2 Layer 2 Plot File Name demo I2 ger Use the following commands to repeat the Gerber load from above with an input offset of 3 2 inch in X direction Settings Input Offset X Offset 0 000 mm 3 2 Y Offset 0 000 mm 0 File Load Gerber Data Layer 2 Layer 2 Plot File Name demo I2 ger PCB Design CAD Page 4 146 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual View Display The View menu provides functions for changing general display options such as zoom window zoom scale display grid color settings etc The Display Mode function is used to select the mode for displaying Gerber data The Display Areas Only default option displays structures as pure areas Option Display Outlines also displays aperture outlines thus providing most information about how areas have been filled The Color Assignment function is used to select the mode of color assignment With default option D Code Assignmen colors can be assigned to D Codes and aperture drawing modes With option Layer Assignmeni colors can be assigned to layers The Change Colors function opera
5. After specifying the via D Code the function prompts for the file and element name where the layout should be written to Note that Create Layout overwrites previously existing layout elements nevertheless you can use the Layout Editor group functions to mix different layouts retrieved from Gerber data Further Layout Processing The sequence of the following operations is crucial for the creation of valid layout data After successfully running the Create Layout function from the CAM View File menu you should return to the BAE main menu use function Main Menu from the Biel menu and start the Layout Editor Within the Layout Editor you should load the layout and place all of the required parts use the Add New Par function from the Parts menu Note that User Language programs can be used for automatic placement instead of interactive placement if placement data ASCII files are available with appropriate formats After completing the placement the layout should be saved and then the function from the Utilities menu should be used to generate a net list with the same file and element names as were specified when creating the layout generates a net list from the copper placed on the currently loaded layout However Netlis works only on DDB file level i e it won t change the currently loaded net list You should re load the layout immediately after running refrain from activating any function which
6. Neural Rule System Page 6 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Drill Hole Power Layer Assignments The Other Functions submenu from the Text Drill Layout Editor menu provides the Drill Power Layers and Drill Heat Trape functions for assigning drill hole to power layer connection preferences The function can be used on padstack level for selecting the power layer s occupied by mouse selectable drill holes The Drill Heat Traps padstack level for assigning power layer specific drill hole connection modes such as heat trap mode default or direct connection mode to mouse selectable drill holes Both functions allow for repeated drill hole selection and drill hole power layer settings assignment in a dialog box User interfaces without dialog box support allow for power layer bit mask input function can be used on Drill hole power layer and heat trap rule assignments are important for blind and buried via definitions and are considered by the facilities for connectivity generation power layer display and CAM output Neural Rule System Page 6 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 7 Utilities This chapter describes the utility programs of the Bartels AutoEngineer software These utilities are additional programs that are run outside Bartels AutoEngineer i e at the operating system prompt or in a batch file With these
7. The Move Attribute function from the Ted and or Symbol menu can be used for moving and or placing selectable symbol attributes Attribute text offsets defined through Move Attribute override the global text offset set with Move Name The attribute to be moved is selected through a mouse click on the attribute text Since symbol names are internally stored as attributes the Move Attribute function can also be used to move symbol names without changing the placement of other symbol attributes Attribute value setting is performed either in the Schematic Editor using the function from the menu or by fixed attribute value assignment in the logical library A dialog box for simultaneously displaying up to 12 symbol attributes is provided with the Assign Value function under Windows and Motif For symbols with more than 12 attribute definitions and buttons are provided for forward and or backward scrolling The dialog box contains a line for each attribute This line consists of a No Value button an attribute value input edit field and the attribute name label display The No Value button can be used to clear the attribute value setting which is indicated through a not_set attribute value display Clearing the attribute value is different from specifying an empty string Empty string attribute values are assigned and transferred as such to the net list whilst clearing an attribute value prevents the s
8. DT GG Di a SC ps Figure 2 5 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections Circuit Design CAE Page 2 42 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Labels Labels are special symbols to be utilized for defining net names Labels can be applied for assigning certain signal names to connections Label defined signal names are known throughout all sheets of the schematics i e labels can also be applied for connecting nets on different sheets In chapter 2 2 3 we created the two label symbols vss 0V CMOS supply and vdd positive CMOS supply in our job file demo ddb l e these two symbols are available in the currently edited project file and can be loaded to the sheet using the function from the menu Use the following commands to define the signal Vss by placing the label symbol vss on the circuit drawing View Zoom All Zoom Window Move to Window Start Point 120 160 m Move to Window End Point 180 200 Symbols Add Label Net Name vss Move to 130 190 Use the following commands to connect pin 1 of capacitor C100 with signal Vss by creating a connection between the capacitor pin and the previously placed label Connections Add Connection Move to Label Pin 130 190 Move to Pin C100 1 140 190 Take care that the contact area of the label pin will extinguish in order to ensure a correct connection between the capacitor and signal Vss It is not necessary to explicitly connect a l
9. The Bartels AutoEngineer is capable of routing up to 12 power layers in addition to the signal layers l e the Bartels AutoEngineer can rout multilayer designs with a total of up to 24 layers The power layer routing algorithms are equipped with intelligent power plane detection features for split power plane routing When routing power layers the Autorouter correctly connects SMD pins to power layers and or active copper areas defined on such power layers Maximum Via Count The function is used to set the maximum number of vias per circuit trace The default maximum via count is 20 A maximum via count of 0 forces the Autorouter to rout the layout without vias The maximum via count can be changed between different router passes i e without the need of restarting the complete routing process Note however that restrictions introduced with maximum via count changes will never cause a deterioration of the current routing result at subsequent router passes l e the Autorouter will try to but not necessarily remove all previously placed vias Via Grid The Mia Grid function is used to set the grid for placing vias to 1 10 or 1 20 inch The No Grid option is used on default thus allowing unrestricted via placement according to the current Routing Grid setting see above The via grid can be changed between different router passes without the need of restarting the complete routing process Note however that restrictions introdu
10. Introduction Page 1 19 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 3 BAE Design Database 1 3 1 Database Concept The key feature of the Bartels AutoEngineer design system is its powerful design database It is a genuine object oriented database since this has been proven to be optimum for accessing and processing the complex data types of different size used throughout the AutoEngineer Powerful search algorithms are implemented for fast access to the database objects and a high sophisticated library management program provides simultaneous access to different symbol libraries The user is able to define both standard libraries and job specific libraries for particular projects These libraries can be stored with the job and completely and or partially transferred to or from a central standard system library Object Classes Hierarchy Each database entry is assigned to a predefined database class and is identified by an element name which is unique in this database class Each element contains the data defined on that element i e graphic items texts pin positions and pin designators on SCM and or layout symbols etc Higher level database entries can refer elements of subordinate database hierarchy levels Such a reference consists of the element placement coordinates a name referring the subordinate database symbol and the name of the placed element if it is a named reference E g a layout contains the named references of the part s
11. The Move Parl function is used to move parts which are already placed on the layout Pressing the right mouse button during part movement activates a submenu with special options for rotating and mirroring absolute or relative placement coordinates input etc The Delete Part function is used to delete placed parts from the layout You should test these functions on the currently loaded layout and use the Undo and Redo functions for estimating design modifications and returning to the original design stage as shown in figure 4 4 PCB Design CAD Page 4 53 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Alternate Part Package Type Assignment The Alternate Par option is provided with the Layout Editor submenus which can be called by pressing the right mouse button during interactive part placement This option can be used to change the part package type of the currently placed part The alternate package type can be selected from a list of layout part macros The alternate part list is either pre defined in the logical library using the LOGLIB utility program see chapter 7 11 or can be defined through an SCM symbol Splname attribute value assignment such as packagel package2 An error message such as No alternate part macros defined is issued if no alternate package types are defined for the currently processed part An error message such as Connected pins missing is issued if the pin definitio
12. 0 35 Relative Y Coordinate mm 0 Jump Relative X Coordinate mm 0 35 E Relative Y Coordinate mm o Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm 0 Relative Y Coordinate mm 1 Arc Left Jump Relative Ai X Coordinate mm 0 35 Relative Y Coordinate mm o Jump Relative E X Coordinate mm 0 35 EJ Relative Y Coordinate mm old Done File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 25 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual With the commands above a pad named so has been defined which will be used to define a standard SMD pin for SO small outline package types Use the following commands to copy the still loaded pad named so to a pad symbol named sosr small outline pad solder resist load the sosr pad and enlarge the copper area of sosr by 0 05mm File Save Element As LC e File Name Name EE Name sosr ban Load Element Pad File Name Element Name sosr Areas Resize Area Move to Area Corner Edge Expansion Distance mm 0 05 File Save Element Checking the File Contents Within this section we have created a series of pad symbols which we stored to DDB file demo dab Use the following commands to list the pad s defined in the demo ddb DDB file File File Contents Pad File Name An empty string input i e pressing the return key 5 to the file name prompt causes th
13. 1 mamamana 3 5 EE PAGKAGEN E 3 6 3 2 1 Starting the Packager cs NAKARAAN AA 3 6 3 2 2 Packager Main Menu sesse ee ee nanan R RREEE R RR EER RR RR RK ERGER RR Ee ARK ERGER RR ERGE AR RR EG e RR REG ER RR ERGER RR REG ee RR EE ee 3 6 3 2 3 Running the Package esse sees RR EER RR ER aan 3 7 324 0 EE 3 9 3 2 5 Messages i e es ESE EE se tinier ieee ett JANA Mapa ange entice aa 3 13 3 3 Se Ui ed ri ei ER EE EE EE EE TG NGA 3 28 3 3 1 Starting the Backannotation n Aa 3 28 3 3 2 8 Running the Backannotation maa 3 28 33 3 o OT 3 29 3 4 SEE UE 3 30 3 4 1 Importing Logical Net Liste uses sesse EE RR ERGE RE EER RR EER RR ERGE RR RR ERA napana nanan eaaa inaina nanagasa annant 3 30 3 4 2 Importing Physical Net Lists mm namana 3 30 3 4 3 Exporting Net List Data uses esse ee ERA RR nananana EER RR RE RE kA 3 30 EE Net Atirbutes RE ER N ER ER EE N OE EE aaiae 8 33 Figures Figure 3 1 Design Flow Packager BackannotatiON esse ee ee EER nanasa 3 5 Figure 3 2 Part CD4081 Data Sheet with Loglib Definition see ese Rae RE ER RE RE nananana 3 10 Figure 3 3 Net Attribute Definitions RR RE RR ERGER RR EER RR EER RR REG RR EE ARK RE RR RE ROER RR REG e RR RR ER e RR RE Ee 3 33 Packager Backannotation Page 3 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Packager Backannotation Page 3 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 1 General The schematic capture syste
14. 10 Element Height mm 10 The display now shows a square frame with a cross in the middle The frame describes the element boundaries of the marker and the cross marks the position of the element origin Defining the Contact Area Contact areas on pin symbols are utilized for displaying net list changes on SCM sheet level As soon as a pin is connected correctly the contact area defined on the corresponding pin marker will disappear Contact areas will not be plotted Use the following commands to define a square contact area with an edge length of 1mm on the currently loaded marker element Graphic Add Contact Area Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 5 Jump Relative Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm 0 Relative Y Coordinate mm 1 Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm 4 Relative Y Coordinate mm 0 Done Circuit Design CAE Page 2 13 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Defining the Reference Designator The graphical design of the marker symbol is completed now Nevertheless a pin reference designator should be defined on the marker For this purpose the S text string is utilized as a variable for indicating the name of corresponding references on superior hierarchy levels l e a text string placed on marker level displays pertinent pin reference names on symbol level a text string placed on symbol level displays pertinent part r
15. Select Via s Parts not found or of different type Cause not all net list parts are placed on the layout or there are net list parts placed with wrong package types Fix use Layout Editor Parts Delete Update to remove net list parts with wrong package types then use manual or interactive placement functions to complete the part placement Pin out of border lt partname gt Cause net list part s and or net list part pin s placed outside board outline Fix correct part placement Via out of border Cause pre placed fixed via s placed outside board outline Fix unfix and or delete via s outside board outline Trace out of border Cause pre routed fixed trace s placed outside board outline Fix unfix and or delete trace s outside board outline Invalid via padstack cannot use it Cause via list contains invalid via definition s Fix correct via definition s there must be at least one via for connecting all signal layers and each via must contain a drill hole and pads for at least two adjacent signal layers Double defined padstack Cause layout contains ambiguous library part definition s such as part s with more than one padstack placed at the same pin position Fix correct library part definition s Double defined pad Cause layout contains ambiguous library pad and or padstack definition s such as pad s with more than one copper connection area or padst
16. Settings Copper Fill Parameters The UIFSETUP User Language program replaces the parameter setup functions of the Windows and Motif pulldown menus with the above menu functions for activating the corresponding parameter setup dialogs Windows Motif Pulldown Menu Konfiguration When using pulldown menus under Windows and Motif the UIFSETUP User Language program configures the following modified Layout Editor main menu with a series of additional functions and features File Edit View Parts Traces Areas Text Drill Settings Utilities Help PCB Design CAD Page 4 12 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 1 5 In built Layout System Features Automatic Parameter Backup The Layout Editor provides an in built feature for automatically saving important design and operational parameters with the currently processed SCM sheet and or SCM library hierarchy level The following parameters are stored to the current design file when activating the Save Element function Autosave Time Interval Name of the currently loaded Layout Color Table Input Grid Display Grid Grid Angle Lock Coordinate Display Mode Wide Line Draw Start Width Group Display Mode Part Placement Default Rotation Angle Part Placement Default Mirror Mode Default Text Size Part Airline Display Mode Standard Trace Widths Trace Segment Move Mode Library File Name Mincon Function Type Placement Matri
17. 170 170 plname Return Attribute Value chip1210 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 38 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual If you have executed all work steps of this paragraph correctly then your circuit diagram should look like the one shown in figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 SCM Sheet with Symbols Moving Symbols Deleting Symbols Changing Symbol Names The Move Symbol Label function is used to move symbols already placed on the sheet The Schematic Editor applies an built in signal router for automatically rerouting connections to the moved symbol see below Pressing the right mouse button during symbol movement will activate a submenu with special options for rotating and mirroring absolute coordinates input activate and or deactivate the signal router etc The Del Symbol Label function is used to delete symbols Part names and or references can be changed with the Change Part Name function You should test these functions on the currently loaded sheet and use the Undo and Redo functions for estimating design modifications and returning to the original design stage Please note that the symbol pick function picks the symbol which is placed inside other symbols at the pick position to prevent from unintentionally selecting frame symbols Circuit Design CAE Page 2 39 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 3 3 Connections Labels Busses The Connection
18. 2 mamana 1 9 12 2 Function Selection aaa AN BANNA ARANGKADA TANAGA DAN ANAN 1 12 123 Basic System Funetionsg users SE ee EER ee Re EE EE ERGER Ee Gee LANA 1 15 EE od TEE 1 18 1 2 5 Special Remarks EE NE eie ag eek send se Rg bee eg ER ee EK ge ED eke ee ae BEE Ee Gee Ge ee Ps EP de 1 19 1 3 BAE Desidin Database iis siene ed od Ge ie ae eb ee Ee ee ble ed ie 1 20 1 3 1 Database Concept RR N EE N EE EE N IE EE N 1 20 1 3 2 SCM Database Hierarchy NAAN EERS AE D 1 22 1 3 3 Layout Database HierarChY use reses ER RE KERE RR KEER RR ERGE RR REG NASAAN ARK ERGER RR KEER RR ERGER RR ERGER RR RE Ge RR RE ee 1 23 1 34 Logical Library siandiena dek ed MR Ge ke be due KG Eg Ge eN Ne RA Ee Ave AA N Gee ke Ke OK Rg ede Ke ede N GE Ke ad 1 24 Figures Figure 1 1 Bartels AutoEngineer System Flow Diagram sesse esse ee Ee ER Rae RR ERA aa 1 7 Figure 1 2 BAE Pulldown Menu User Interface esse esse a 1 10 Figure 1 3 BAE Side Menu User Interface Figure 1 4 SCM Database Hierarchy Figure 1 5 Layout Database HierarChY esse esse ER ERGE RR EER RR ERGER a Figure 1 6 Part Data Sheet with Loglib Definition ees ese ee ER EER ER RE ER RE ER EA ER RE ER EA RR ERA RR EA ER RE e RR EA E Re e EE 1 24 Introduction Page 1 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Introduction Page 1 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 1 Product Information Bartels AutoEngineer BAE is a fully integrated EDA software system with powe
19. Display Layer Only Moving Picture On Moving Picture All deactivates the group movement display displays upper level group selected elements which are assigned to the group display layer the group display layer is a BAE setup parameter defined with the LAYGRPDISPLAY command of the BSETUP utility program see chapter 7 2 for a description of BSETUP Moving Picture On displays all group selected elements except for traces vias and drill holes during group movement Moving Picture All displays all group selected elements including traces vias and drill holes during group movement Moving Picture On is the default setting The Group Macro function is used to replace group selected part macros on layout level or padstack macros on part level This function is most useful for fast pin type replacement technology change on part level On layout level the function supports alternate part package type assignments for net list parts which include the specified part macro in their alternate part package type list Package types for non netlist parts however are changed without this check Fixing Releasing Elements Certain layout elements such as parts or traces can be fixed Fixed objects are not changed by subsequent automatic processes such as placement optimization automatic pin gate swap or autorouting It is strongly recommended to fix critical elements such as parts e g pl
20. UTILPROG Hypertext link to Bartels AutoEngineer utility program description new feature New features which are made available with regular weekly software updates builds are highlighted in the online documentation The character sequences mentioned above may regain original meaning when used in programming languages interpreter languages specification languages syntax description languages etc VII Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents NL lei II Organization of this Documentation ER RE ERA ER RA ER EER ER RA ER EER ER RAAR REG ER Re ER Re ER ERA ER Re e ER Rae ER Rae RR Rae ee II Related Documentation e anan AIRA DAN BINA AA IV Problems Questions SuggestiOnS sees Roe RR RE RE RR AR Re AA REG AR RE AR ERGE AA RR Re RR REGEER RR Ge ennnen Ke Gee IV Documentation Notati0nS EEN V Documentation CONVENTIONS iese RR RR RR RR RR RR RARR RARR RR RARR RARR AR RR RR RR RR RR RR AR RR RR AR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR AR RR RR RR RR Re Vil L ele ET CN IX Chapter 1 Introduction i s aaa NASIRANG ese Ee ET 1 1 1 2 1 3 Product Iniormati Dries oe AGA se SEE Ee EES Oes Dee Se Nee AGA 1 5 1 1 1 BAE Software Configurations a ERA ER KG RR Re ER Re RR Rae ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee ea ee 1 5 1 12 BAE System ComponentS users Ese Ese KERE ERA ERG ASSA NANANA 1 7 1 18 BAEDatabase Structure i ses u es ner eis en oer kie ien h
21. DMENMARK menu cursor disabled system is busy DFILMARK menu bar disabled system is busy popup menu text POPMBUTT popup menu button POPMBACK popup menu background POPMFRAM popup menu frame directory popup menu background Utilities Page 7 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The lt colornumber gt value is an integer between 1 and 15 The following table lists the color to color number assignments Color Number Color 1 blue 2 green 3 cyan 4 red 5 magenta brown 7 light gray dark gray light blue 10 light green 11 light cyan 12 light red 13 light magenta Utilities Page 7 12 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples The following listing shows the contents of the BAE standard setup file stdset def this file resides in the BAE programs directory and is used as template for the user defaults SETUP Bartels Auto Menu Layer Texts AYMENUTEX INE 1 ayer amp 1 Sotds 7 1 AYMENUTEX ENE 2 Layer amp 2 2 AYMENUTEX INE 3 Layer amp 3 3 AYMENUTEX INE 4 Layer amp 4 4 AYMENUTEXT TOPLAYER Layer n Par ts Documentary Layer Definitions AYDOCLAYER 1 Insertion Plan SIDE2 LOGICAL AYDOCLAYER 2 Solder Mask NONE PHYSICAL AYDOCLAYER 3 Drill Plan BOTH NOROTATE AYDOCLAYER 4 Film Markers B
22. The Abort Database not changed message at the end of the Packager protocol indicates that packaging was not successful Under Windows the text window for Packager messages is displayed with scrollbars to provide complete access to lengthy Packager protocols without having to view the bae 10g log file see below through an external text editor Hit the return key Elto return to the Packager main menu and use the following command to exit from BAE Exit BAE You are now back on operating system level The Packager report has been written to an ASCII file named bae log in the current directory You can examine this file with your editor or send it to your printer to interpret the Packager report The Packager process stopped with the following error message ERROR Part cd4081 not in library The error message above means that library demolib ddb does not contain any logical library entry for SCM symbol cd4081 cd4081 is the new SCM symbol created in chapter 2 2 2 The system only knows that this symbol is repeatedly referenced on SCM sheet sheet1 of the demo ddb project file and that the logical pins of cd4081 are named A B and Y The SCM symbol cd4081 represents only one of the four gates of the complete CD4081 part The Packager needs additional information such as the layout package associated with cd4081 logical to physical pin mapping predefined power supply pins and pin gate swap definitions SCM Sheet Packager Error Trac
23. Utilities Page 7 43 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The example above shows the definition of the gate 741800 which can be packed up to 4 times into a single di114 package The logical pins a b y can be assigned to either of the pin sets 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 12 11 or 10 9 8 Within the layout system this package type assignment can be changed to so14 A fixed attribute named partnumber has been assigned with attribute value A NAND X11B82 A fixed pin specific attribute named pintype is assigned to each pin thus designating the pin type to be either in input pin out output pin or sup supply pin i e power or ground Pin 14 of the di114 package is a pre defined power supply pin on signal vee whilst pin 7 can be connected to a signal net by assigning the desired net name such as vss to the groundnetname attribute of the 741s00 symbol on SCM level The swap command is applied to define the following pin gate swaps Pin Swap Ga and or 4 5 and or 13 12 and or 1079 Gate Swap 1 2 3 with 47576 or 13712711 or 20 978 Part Swap 1 2 3A 516 1a 12 1710978 The example loglib file above also contains the tx27 and tr be547 part definitions tx27 is assigned to default sot23 package with 1 1 pin mapping The tr be547 definition includes an assignment to part class npn transistor To compile loglib file example def and store the result to DDB file mylib ddb gt loglib example mylib The following exa
24. ddb back to the schematics Schematic Utilities Backannotation Backannotation displays the following messages ELS BACKANNOTATION UTILITY Design File Name Layout Element Name No error occurred The No error occurred message means that Backannotation has been successfully completed and the logical net list in project file demo dab has been annotated with the physical net list named board Hit any key to return to the Schematic Editor main menu and use the following commands to load the SCM sheet sheet1 from DDB file demo dab Load EI Sheet lam You can now examine the currently loaded SCM shee for modifications introduced by Backamnotation Particularly note the part name changes ZC1 instead of Ic10 v2 instead of V1000 etc and the pin assignment changes eg at the gates of IC1 or at the switches 51000 through 51003 PCB Design CAD Page 4 99 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 64 SCM Changes Redesign Bartels AutoEngineer provides features for modifying SCM sheets of an already completed design without the need to prepare a completely new layout This section describes how perform a redesign by making changes to the currently loaded SCM sheet Use the following commands to change the plname attribute value of the resistor R104 from minimelf to chip1206 Symbols Assign Value Move to r104 210 130 plname Er Attribute Value ch
25. 6 y 4 ic12 cd4081 a 11 b 4 y 9 ic13 cd4081 a 3 b 9 y 2 k10 rels al vdd a2 14 kk100 relc e vdd nc bus outil no bus out0 kk101 relc e vdd nG bus out3 no bus BULL BOOM r Ge 6 LOM Ce L e4 EIE r kt ELLOS r L 3 2 r104 r 2 e 8 L05 ie L ne Kee s1000 s Tarl L 7 net s1001 s 1dil1 1 5 net s1002 s 1dil1 1 1 AG s1003 s 1dil1 1 3 2 net s1004 s_ldil l net 2 vss s1005 s Tarl L net 2 vss s1006 s 1dil1 net 2 vss s1007 s 1dil1 net 2 vss ES IER sida l net 2 vss SOO 94ST Tail n eae vss v1 tr be517 b 8 c 14 e vss v1000 d SE vdd x1000 x subd9b l vss 4 bus out0 5 bus out1 6 bus out2 7 bus out3 9 vdd Packager Backannotation Page 3 32 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 4 4 Net Attributes The BAE Packager provides functions for transferring arbitrary net attributes These attributes are set with special user defined net attribute symbols on SCM sheet level using the Assign Value function from the Symbols menu Logical library entries must be defined for packaging the net attribute definitions Figure 3 3 illustrates how to define and use net attribute symbols and corresponding logical library entries see also chapter 7 11 for a detailed description of the LOGLIB utility program Net Attribute Symbols net minlen net ma
26. CAD Page 4 66 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 4 3 Initial Placement The system provides full automatic initial placement algorithms The initial placement functions automatically place all unplaced net list parts inside the board outline onto the currently selected input placement grid considering pre placed parts connectors LEDs etc keepout areas and net list preferences and also featuring automatic block capacitor and SMD device recognition Automatic SMD part mirroring can optionally be enabled to allow SMD placement on the solder side Either unrestricted or restricted automatic part rotation in 90 degree steps can be applied restricted part rotation can be used to simplify subsequent insertion processes A generally applicable part expansion value can optionally be defined to ensure minimum clearance between adjacent parts The placement algorithms are guarded by adjustable strategy parameters for net list preference control and for the consideration of part segment matching fitting Rip up and retry passes are automatically applied during the placement process to optimize board area yield The initial placement routines are integrated to the Auto Placement submenu which provides the following functions Parts m Auto Placement Full Autoplacer Cluster Placer Area Placer Single Pass Optimizer Multi Pass Optimizer Part Pin Factor Segment Fit Mirroring Mode Rotation Mode Part Expansion Number of Retries
27. Complete Initial Routing and a single pass Autorouter Batch Setup DESS New Batch Pass L F V S C R O s EJ Initial Pass Channel Width 4 EJ se mj New Batch Pass L F V S C R O c 3 New Batch Pass L F I S C R O o Optimizer Passes 1 No Change mj A dash string input to the New Batch Pass prompt can be used to remove the selected router pass from the batch The sequence of router passes to be processed by corresponds with the sequence of router passes defined with Batch Setup Use the Batch Star command to run all router passes previously defined with the Batch Setup function Autorouter Batch Start Router batches can also be started with the button from the Batch Setup dialog without having to leave the dialog and subsequently calling the Batch Star function The routing process for our example starts with SMD Via Pre Placement Subsequently a Complete Initial Routing pass is performed The initial Route will end up with 100 routing success Finally one Optimizer pass is activated Each routing pass automatically saves its routing result The following message is displayed in the status line after finishing the last pass Max 53 of 53 Routes Pins 76 Vias 5 The layout is now completely routed with 5 vias placed by the Autorouter
28. Figure 2 12 Hierarchical Circuit Design Top Level SCM Sheet ese esse Re RE ER ERA ER EA ER Ee RR Ee ER ee ea 2 62 Figure 3 1 Design Flow Packager BackannotatiON esse ee ee RE aaa 3 5 Figure 3 2 Part CD4081 Data Sheet with Loglib Definition ee see esse Re RE ER RE ERA ER ERA ER EA ER ERA RE ER EE EE 3 10 Figure 3 3 Net Attribute Detnttons sees ese ER ER RR EER aa 3 33 Figure 4 1 Layout Library Symbols a 4 21 Figure 4 2 Layout with Board Outline and Plot Markers cseccsesesseeesseeesseeenseeenseeeneeeeseeeeneeeesneeeneeeeeae 4 46 Figure 4 3 Layout Library Access ees ee RR ER ER ERGE aasa 4 49 Figure 4 4 Layout with Part Placement sees esse ER RE RR ERGER RR EER RR RE RR REG RR EER RR RE ARK RE Re R R RR EG e RR RR EER RR Ee 4 53 Figure 4 5 Routing with or without Via Offset sesse esse ER EER ER EER ER RE ER Re ER EA ER EG e ERA RR Re e KRAKE Ee RR Ee ER Ee e EE 4 79 Figure 4 6 Routing Traces Ongrid Offgrid ese ese ee Re RE ER EE EE RR EE AR RE AR RE RE AR RE A RR A RR e ER ee KEER EE 4 81 Figure 4 7 Layout after AutoroutiNg ees Ee RR EER RR EER RR EER ARK RE ARK ERGER RR EE e RR RR Rae e RR KERE ARK ERGER RR KERR RR RE Ee 4 93 Figure 4 8 Automatic Copper Fill Complexity sesse ee Re RE EE ER EE RR RE ER ERA RR EE ER RA RR EE ER RR RR EE ER EG RR Ee ER Rae ee 4 109 Figure 4 9 Layout with Filled Copper Areas ese esse Ee ER Re RR EE ER RE RR EE ER ERA RR EE ER EG RR
29. File Save Element Circuit Design CAE Page 2 27 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a new Label Symbol from an existing In this section we will create the label symbol vdd from the previously defined label symbol vss Use the following commands to copy the currently loaded label symbol vss to vdd and load the copied label symbol vdd File Save Element As File Name Name EE e Name vdd Za Load Element Label The display now shows the vdd label symbol which still looks like the vss label symbol We will now make some modifications to create the desired vdd symbol design Use the following commands to delete the text Vss and the rectangle shaped graphic area Text Delete Text Move to 2 6 EI Graphic Delete Graphic Move to 2 4 Use the following commands to move down the vertical graphic line Graphic Move Graphic Move to 0 3 EI Move to 0 5 E Use the following commands to move down the marker symbol Symbols Move Symbol Label Move to 0 0 Move to 0 5 Use the following commands to create a V shaped graphic area i e an arrow head pointing to top the angle lock display option must be switched off to create this irregularly shaped triangle Graphic Add Graphic Area Move to 1 2 Move to 1 2 Grids Rotation Rotation Off Move to 0 0 Done Circuit Design CAE Page 2 28 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following command to place t
30. Optimizer Use the following commands to run an additional Optimizer pass without pattern recognition but with high priority for considering preferred routing directions Control Optimizer Cleanup Optimizer Cleanup a Strategy Optimizer Direction Preferred Counter Dir Cost Counter Direction Cost Factor 1 0 5 Autorouter Optimizer Note how the Optimize pass routes traces according to preferred routing directions albeit at the price of an increased via count of 13 PCB Design CAD Page 4 91 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Exiting the Autorouter E Layout Editor functions from the File menu You can exit the Autorouter using one of the Exit BAE Main Menu O Exit BAE exits to the operating system Main Menu saves the currently processed layout and returns to the BAE main shell Layout Editor saves the currently processed layout and returns to the Layout Editor Use the Layout Editor function from the File menu to return to the Layout Editor File Em Layout Editor Re entrant Routing Using three routing layers for our simple example appears to be rather wasteful We want to route the layout again now with two routing layers instead of three We also want to apply to keep as much of the current routing result as possible Use the following commands to switch back to the Autorou
31. PRINT CONNECT CR FOR ALL NETS PRINT NETNAME PRINTFOR ALL PINS SEPERATOR ELEMENTS PARTNAME PINNAME PRINT CR PRINT END CR ENDSPEC Utilities Page 7 64 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The USERLIST script conconv usf can be applied as in gt userlist conconv design board where net list board of the job file design ddb is analyzed and the output net list file design con with the following contents is produced LAYOUT board PARTS el sd EA 1E eo lak allyl Ee be CONNECT gnd iecl 1 i1c2 2 ic3 9 ee ed Eie EES 7 5 END The part list generator part list usf EXTENSION ptl FOR ALL plname PRINT ATTRIBCOUNT ATTRIBVALUE CR ENDSPEC would create output file lt job gt pti with the following contents 3 cap50 4 dills 2 dill6 MENS Diagnosis The error messages issued by USERLIST are intended to be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 65 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 18 VALCONV Name valconv VALID to Bartels Conversion Synopsis valconv projectname Description The VALCONV utility program converts part lists and net lists from VALID format i e VALID schematic output to a BAE DDB Design DataBase file VALCONV accepts the BAE DDB destination file name projectname as first argument This file is
32. Settings Rotation Mode 0 90 Deg Rot 0 270 Deg Rot function to select the desired part rotation mode PCB Design CAD Page 4 69 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Part Size Part Expansion Block Capacitors Placement Grid The parts are placed onto the currently selected input grid to be set using the Input Grid function from the View menu The placement area required for each part i e the part size emerges from the element boundaries of the corresponding part macro This should be taken into consideration at the definition of element boundaries when creating part macro symbols It is recommended to refrain from defining unnecessarily large part macro element boundaries to avoid redundant placement area occupancy A generally applicable part expansion value can optionally be defined in order to ensure minimum clearance between adjacent parts on low density layouts Use the Parts Auto Placement m Settings Part Expansion Expansion Value 0 00mm function to set the desired part expansion value On default the part expansion value is set to 0 0mm i e no part expansion is applied Note that the specified part expansion value with no regard to different part macro type dimensions is equally applied on each part macro type except for block capacitors Block capacitors are automatically recognized and will be placed as close as possible to the ICs to be supp
33. The system will automatically check on missing library symbols and requested elements not available are copied and loaded from the currently selected library With this process consistent construction of job specific libraries without the need of storing redundant library elements in a job file is always ensured This concept introduces considerable advantages with regard to project archiving or independence from master library availability Modifications in a certain DDB file are reflected up the library hierarchy levels of that file without affecting any other DDB file and the functions for deleting library elements prevent from erasing DDB file elements which are referenced by other elements from the same DDB file l e data consistency throughout any particular DDB file is automatically ensured Nevertheless BAE provides powerful features for transferring library data between different DDB files such as the Update function from the menu which can be used for correlating job specific libraries with master library contents Introduction Page 1 20 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Manufacturing Process Control A further advantage of the BAE database concept is the possibility of adapting project specific libraries to special manufacturing processes For this purpose so called technology parts containing special pin and or padstack definitions can be defined in technology specific library files With a technology part a complete
34. Use the following commands to return from the Schematic Editor module to the BAE Main Menu BAE Shell File Main Menu am The currently loaded SCM element will automatically be saved when returning to the BAE Shell Use the following commands to return from the BAE Shell to the operating system Exit BAE Exiting BAE Use the following commands if you wish to exit BAE from the Schematic Editor File Exit BAE The function activates a confirmation prompt if the element currently loaded to the Schematic Editor has not yet been saved In this case you should abort the Exit BAE function save the current element and then call in Exit BAE again as File Em Exit BAE File Save Element File Exit BAE Please confirm Y N n Subsequent Tasks Use the following command from operating system level e g under DOS to list the project file s created in this chapter The job file demo dab contains the all SCM sheets of the schematic circuit as well as a logical unpacked net list The next task of the design cycle would be to apply the Packager for translating the logical net list into a physical packed net list see chapter 3 2 After successfully packaging the net list the printed circuit board design can be created using the BAE Layout modules see chapter 4 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 54 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 5 SCM Plot Output The SCM functions
35. amp connected Vias plots all inside layer pin pads and only connected inside layer via pads Mias amp connected Ping plots all inside layer via pads and only connected inside layer pin pads Inside layers are all signal layers except for layer 1 and the signal layer selected with the Set Top Layer function PCB Design CAD Page 4 123 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Symbol Tolerance The Symbol Tolerance function is used to set the plot accuracy for filling areas and or creating structures using the available set of tools It allows to plot elements to be smaller by the specified plot tolerance value if this creates more efficient output E g when photoplotting a round pad with 0 062 inch diameter and the plot tolerance set less than 0 002 inch then the 0 060 inch aperture is used to draw in a circle to produce the correct size if the tolerance is set greater than 0 002 inch then the 0 060 inch aperture is flashed since it is smaller than the required size but within the tolerance and much more efficient The plot tolerance is only calculated to the inside of the structures to be plotted since otherwise short circuits might be produced The default plot tolerance value is 0 15mm For structures which cannot be plotted correctly using the smallest aperture and or pen width the CAM Processor uses the smallest available tool to generate that str
36. cd c baejobs bae Move the menu cursor to the Layout menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button Layout The Layout Editor is activated and you can start to edit PCB layouts PCB Design CAD Page 4 42 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 3 1 Creating and Editing PCB Layouts Creating a new Layout Use the following commands to create a new layout in the demo dab DDB file with an element size of 3 2 2 9 inch File el New Layout File Name demo Element Name board Element Width mm 3 2 Element Height mm 2 9 A frame designating the element boundaries of the layout appears on the screen If the system issues an error message such as Element does already exist then a layout with the specified element name has already been generated In this case the requested element cannot be created but must be loaded see below It is strongly recommended to specify a layout element name identical to the name of the net list for which the layout should be designed because otherwise the system won t be able to correlate the layout data with the net list definitions Use the following commands to store the new layout element and return to the BAE main shell File Save Element File Main Menu PCB Design CAD Page 4 43 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Editing an existing Layout Call the Layout Editor again and use the following commands to reload the previously
37. connections on the currently loaded layout The Number of Short Circuits entry denotes the number of short circuits encountered by the Design Rule Check The Copper Distance Violations entry denotes the number of copper layer clearance distance violations online encountered by the Design Rule Check on the currently loaded element The Documentary Distance Violations entry denotes the number of clearance distance violations on documentary layers The Number of Power Layer Errors entry denotes number of copper area cross intersections on split power planes The Number of Missing Parts report entry denotes the number of net list parts not yet placed on the currently loaded layout The Number of Wrong Type Parts report entry denotes the number of net list parts placed with a wrong part package type macro on the currently loaded layout The Number of Missing Netlist Pins entry denotes the number of unplaced and or missing net list pins Missing net list pins can cause an erroneous open connections count An indicator is added to the open connections count if net list pins are missing The CHECKLNL User Language program can be used to track missing net list pins The Height Distance Violations entry denotes the number of part height design rule violations The Power Layers in Use and Signal Layers in Use report entries display the used power and signal layers Signal layer 1 to top layer are always assumed to be in use These entries help to identify power layers
38. familiar with the BAE system functions by working through the examples provided with this manual You should also have a close look at the BSETUP utility program and the AutoEngineer database concept before starting the design of real projects since the user definable setup parameters and database conventions have most considerable inpact on the design process and the possibilities of manufacturing data output Waiting for the Completion of Complex Functions Some of the more complex BAE functions such as loading or moving groups might require some CPU time Within the Windows version of the BAE software the mouse cursor will change to a sand clock symbol to indicate that the system is waiting for the completion of some function Within the BAE standard user interfaces the menu cursor changes its color to red to indicate that the system is currently busy This is also true for operations where the system expects some user input in the graphic workarea or via keyboard input After the completion of a particular function the menu bar color of the BAE standard user interface changes back to green to indicate that the user can activate another function More time consuming functions such as batch design rule check or connectivity generation will even report the percentage of completeness for better information lt is strongly recommended to wait for each BAE function to be successfully completed because interrupting a function by e g resetting your compu
39. from the corresponding distance value the length units inch or mm result from the current coordinate display mode selected with the Coordinate Display Settings menu function Use the following commands to apply measuring on the bottom right board outline edge and place the resulting distance value 2 2 on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer Text Drill Add Text Document Layer Em Insertion Plan Text 2 Move to Left Coordinate 0 6 0 3 Move to Right Coordinate 2 8 0 3 0 PCB Design CAD Page 4 56 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Documentary Lines Documentary Areas Use the following commands to create a documentary line and two arrow shaped documentary areas on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer to indicate the previously defined measuring Areas Add Document Line Insertion Plan Move to 0 6 0 15 m Move to 0 8 0 15 E Done Add Document Area Insertion Plan Move to 0 6 0 15 Move to 0 65 0 2 Move to 0 65 0 1 Done m Add Document Area Insertion Plan Move to 2 8 0 15 E Move to 2 75 0 2 Move to 2 75 0 1 Done Passive Copper Areas Use the following commands to create a circle shaped passive copper area on signal layer 2 Areas Add Passive Copper Layer 2 Move to 0 95 1 6 Arc Left Move to 0 8 1 6 Done Active Copper Areas Use the following commands to create
40. is still missing Use the following commands to define a symbol outline for the CD4081 Graphic Add Graphic Line Move to 4 1 Move to 4 11 Move to 10 11 Move to 10 1 E Move to 4 1 Done Use the following commands to draw a graphic line connecting pin A with the symbol outline Graphic Add Graphic Line m Move to Pin A 2 10 m Move to 4 10 Done With the commands above a horizontal line has been drawn from pin A to the symbol outline thus indicating that pin A is defined on symbol CD4081 Use the following commands to connect also pin B and pin Y with the symbol outline Graphic Copy Graphic Move to Pin A 2 10 Move to Pin B 2 2 Copy Graphic m Move to Pin A 2 10 Move to 10 6 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 18 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Text and Attributes The graphical design of the CD4081 part symbol is completed now Nevertheless some texts should be defined on the symbol First of all a reference designator should be placed on the symbol For this purpose the S text string is utilized as a variable for indicating the name of corresponding references on superior hierarchy levels l e a text string placed on symbol level will display pertinent part reference names e g 1C01 R20 V2 on the circuit drawing Use the following commands to place the text string with a size of 3mm on the symbol Text Em Add Text Text Text Size Tex
41. is the list of logical pin names Arbitrary net attribute names can be set with lt netatt gt but the following keywords have special meaning for the control of the Autorouting process routwidth net specific routing width in mm units powwidth pin specific routing width in mm units for the signals and or pins defined with the net command see above mindist net specific minimum clearance in mm units priority net specific routing priority in positive integer units the greater the value the higher the priority Utilities Page 7 40 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The route dab SCM library file is provided with the AutoEngineer route ddb contains virtual SCM symbols for setting net attribute values The corresponding loglib file route def includes the following definitions loglib part att ONE EN pin X netattr routwidth Sval x part att pw 3 virtual pin X netattr powwidth Sval x part att md virtual pin x metatcr mindise Mowat ee pare att pr 3 vitklall pin X netattr priority val x end With each of the above listed net attribute symbols a pin named x and a net attribute is defined Net attribute setting then is applied by connecting the desired net to the net attribute symbol s pin and setting the corresponding attribute value With arbitrary user specific net attribute definitions additional net information can be processed for spec
42. k1 relais Lives vdd To ae Le 0 9 11 2 12 3 13 9 14 vdd 2 net reer vss 8 11 9 4 al vdd a2 14 cl vdd c2 vdd ncl bus out1 ne2 bus out3 nol bus out0 no2 Dus outa r100 r04a25 r04a25 r04a25 r04a25 seca or POS v1000 x1000 9 d04a25 s1004 s1 xsubd9bl 6 1 7 2 6 1 5 2 4 1 id 2 da 1 838 2102 1 2 2 8 1 net 2 vdd 1 7 2 net 1 5 2 net 1 11 2 net 1 3 2 net 1 net 2 vss 1 net 2 vss 1 net 2 vss 1 net 2 vss 1 net 2 vss 1 net 2 vss 1 vss 2 8 3 14 a 14 k vdd 1 vss A4 bus out0 5 ibus out1 6 bus out2 7 bus sut 3 Packager Backannotation Page 3 31 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following USERLIST call to run the netlist usf USERLIST script to export the logical net list board Log from job file demo ddb to ASCII net list file demo n1 gt userlist netlist demo board log The above USERLIST call produces the demo n1 net list file with the following contents note the different pin designators and plname settings when comparing to the preceding example NETLIST board log e100 fe 1 vss Z vdd e101 Ze 1 vss 2 net ic10 cd4081 a 7 b net y 6 icll cd4081 a 5 b
43. menu are used for placing moving and deleting pins e marker symbols and for defining name patterns for the automatic part naming facility Connections The Connections menu is used on SCM sheet level to create the logical net list by generating and or manipulating connections and busses Circuit Design CAE Page 2 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Graphic The Graphid menu is used on any SCM hierarchy level for creating moving copying and deleting graphic items such as lines and areas Text The Tex menu is used on any SCM hierarchy level for defining changing moving and deleting text Groups The menu provides functions for selecting elements to group for moving copying deleting saving and loading groups and for replacing symbols in a group Parameter The menu provides functions for selecting the SCM library setting the origin of the currently loaded element defining the element boundaries selecting the pin symbol and the T connection marker defining the SCM sheet hierarchy for hierarchical circuit designs and activating the automatic design data backup feature Plot Output The Plot Output menu provides the functions for generating plot output in HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language HP Laser PCL Printer Command Language or Postscript format Utilities The Utilities menu provides functions for exiting BAE
44. note how the airlines jump to the nearest pins or copper corners during part movement Dynamic Airlines is the default Airlines Display option E E E The Net Visible and Net Invisible Mincon options allow for a net specific airline display i e it is possible to fade out Net Invisible and or fade in Net Visible net specific airlines by selecting the desired net s from a net name popup menu which optionally allows for multiple net selections through net name pattern specifications The All Nets Visible Mincon option forces the graphical display of all airlines whilst All Nets Invisible fades out all airlines The context menu which is available through the right mouse button during part placement provides the All Nets and Part Nets options for selecting either part specific or global airline display PCB Design CAD Page 4 54 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 3 3 Text and Graphic On layout hierarchy level text on documentary layers or on signal layers and graphic i e polygons such as documentary lines documentary areas passive copper areas active copper areas keepout areas copper fill workareas can be defined For the following operations it is recommended to set the input grid to 1 20 inch use the functions from the menu and to set the coordinate display mode to inch
45. opamps with variable power supply etc The requested backannotated part name rbname provides the same functionality like Srpname but without prohibiting subsequent layout part name changes l e the Layout Editor allows for rbname part names to be changed and the Backannotation transfers changed layout part names back onto the Srbname attributes of the corresponding SCM symbols The gate pin Sgp attribute can be used to assign SCM symbols to layout gate positions by setting the Sgp value to the desired gate s first pin name from the xlat command of the corresponding logical library definition see also LOGLIB When using gp assignments the gp value should be set for all gates of the layout part to avoid gate assignment conflicts The Sgp attribute allows for specific assignments of dual operation amplifier components and it can even be used to define connector pin symbols for single pins of multi pin connectors where each pin is defined as a gate and the Sgp attribute specifies the name of the connector pin Gate and pins assigned through the gp attribute are excluded from layout pin gate swaps The hierarchical block name blkname is used for hierarchical circuit design corresponding attribute values are automatically set by the Packager denoting the name of the hierarchical block where a certain part is referenced from The pltpagecnt can be used in the schematics to display the total number of schematic sheets of the
46. or simply select one of the following predefined symbol sizes Element Symbol Size Complex 50 x 90 mm Logic 30 x 30 mm Gate 15 x 15 mm Discrete 15 x10 mm Circuit Design CAE Page 2 16 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Selecting the Pin Symbol In the previous section we defined a marker symbol with the name p Use the following commands to select this marker as pin symbol for subsequent pin definitions on the currently loaded SCM symbol Settings Settings Select Pin Symbol Pin Marker Name pin p Parameter settings as shown above can be utilized for assigning different pin symbols on a single SCM part symbol On default the system uses the marker named pin make sure that this marker is available in the currently accessed SCM default symbol library see also the SCMDEFLIBRARY command of the BSETUP utility program Placing the Pins Now the pins of the symbol are to be defined The cD4081 part contains 4 equivalent AND gates with input pins A and B and output pin y These are the logical pin names other logical pins could be named INPUT OUT CLK etc Logical to physical pin assignment is applied with a corresponding logical library definition which can be translated with the LOGLIB utility program see the Packager description in chapter 3 2 of this manual for more details Equal names for logical and physical pins 1 1 pin assignments are also allowed The marker level is the lowest
47. returning to the BAE main shell producing a report for the currently loaded element and starting User Language programs Circuit Design CAE Page 2 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 1 4 Customized Schematic Editor User Interface Menu Assignments and Key Bindings The BAE software comes with User Language programs for activating a modified Schematic Editor user interface with many additional functions startups toolbars menu assignments key bindings etc The BAE ST User Language program is automatically started when entering the Schematic Editor BAE ST calls the UIFSETUP User Language program which activates predefined Schematic Editor menu assignments and key bindings Menu assignments and key bindings can be changed by modifiying and re compiling the UIFSETUP source code The HLPKEYS User Language program is used to list the current key bindings With the predefined menu assignments of UIFSETUP activated HLPKEYS can be called from the Key Bindings function of the Help menu Menu assignments and key bindings can be listed with the UIFDUMP User Language program The UIFRESET User Language program can be used to reset all currently defined menu assignments and key bindings UIFSETUP UIFDUMP and UIFRESET can also be called from the menu of the KEYPROG User Language program which provides additional facilities for online key programming and User Language program help info management Context sensitive Function Menus Pressi
48. systems 4 8 1 Starting the CAM View Module It is recommended to start the Bartels AutoEngineer from the directory where the design files should be generated since this considerably simplifies job file access If you intend to process the examples provided with this manual it is recommended to move to the BAE examples directory installed with the BAE software The CAM View module can be called from the Bartels AutoEngineer main shell Start the BAE shell by typing the following command to the operating system prompt gt bae E Move the menu cursor to the CAM View menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button CAM View The CAM View program module is loaded and the CAM View menu is activated If this fails to happen then check your BAE software installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for details on how to perform a correct installation PCB Design CAD Page 4 141 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 2 CAM View Main Menu The CAM View standard sidemenu user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering CAM View the menu is active and the menu cursor points to the Load Gerber Data function The Windows and Motif versions of the CAM View module can optionally be operated with a pull down menu user interface providing a horizontally arranged main menu bar on top The WINMENUMODE
49. update of the net list data Reliability on correct net list data recognition is achieved with an internally managed list of changes which is also used for controlling the facilities BAE utilizes contact areas for indicating unconnected pins Contact areas will automatically disappear with correct connections to the corresponding pins This feature provides most useful graphical utility for controlling net list data whilst editing circuit diagrams The system is also able to recognize T shaped connections and a junction point marker is automatically placed for the indication of T connections With Bartels AutoEngineer SCM symbols can be freely defined without restrictions referring to symbol size symbol drawing information number of pins on a part symbol etc The user can utilize but is not necessarily restricted to some standard A series of extensive SCM symbol libraries is delivered with the Bartels AutoEngineer The symbol placement functions provide features such as rotating the symbol at any angle symbol mirroring specifying arbitrary placement coordinates etc Signal names can be freely defined Inverted signal names are displayed with a line on top of the corresponding text User definable label symbols are automatically loaded when referencing the corresponding signal names e g a ground label symbol can be defined for indicating ground connections Bartels AutoEngineer provides full capability of checking connectivity with busses bu
50. usf are faded out from the plot file menus for data security reasons New plot file names can be typed in via keyboard Plot Scale The Plot Scale function is used to specify a scale factor for the plot output The default scale factor value is 1 0 Plot scale factor value specifications can range from 0 1 to 100 0 Plot Rotate The Rotate Plot function provides the options No Rotate and Rotate Lett The No Rotate option sets the 0 degree plot rotation which is the default The Rotate Lef option will produce a 90 degree counter clockwise rotated plot output Negative output coordinates might be produced when rotating plots Some printers or plotters refuse to process negative coordinates Positive output coordinates can be enforced however by replacing the origin of the plot element l e the Set Origin function from the Settings menu can be used to set the origin to the upper left element corner before producing a rotated plot Circuit Design CAE Page 2 55 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 5 2 HP GL Pen Plot The Botter Pen Width function is used to define the pen width for generating the HP GL output data The default plotter pen width is 0 3mm Pen width value specifications can range from 0 01mm to 10 0mm The Plotter Speed function is used to control the pen plotter speed i e the speed at wh
51. 6 Power Layers When plotting power layers the CAM Processor automatically generates negative plots using special power layer plot parameters Text placed on power layers is plotted using the standard line width or the selected pen width When editing power layers the Layout Editor obviously does not know about the power plot parameters which will later be set in the CAM Processor l e the Layout Editor s DRC cannot perform complete electric checking on power layer plot data generated in the future It is strongly recommend to perform extensive visual checks on power layer plots before passing such plot data to the film and or PCB manufacturer use the CAM View module Connectivity changing isolations might be produced if the power plot isolation width parameters are set too large Power Layer Border The function from the menu is used to define the PCB power layer border width i e the copper free PCB boundary area to be generated when plotting power layers The default value for the power layer border width is 2 1mm If the PCB board outline contains arc shaped segments then an appropriate tool aperture standard line width or pen for drawing the board outline with the specified power layer border width is required Split Power Planes and Power Plane Isolation Both active and passive power planes placed on power layers are generated by plotting the power plane outline which then is the isolation line of the power plane Processing active
52. 7 46 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 12 NETCONV Name netconv Logical Netlist Conversion Utility Synopsis netconv projectfile Description The NETCONV utility program is used for transferring logical e unpacked net list data from BAE ASCII format to internal Bartels AutoEngineer format ready for processing with the BAE Packager NETCONV accepts the net list file name project file as first argument This file must have an extension of net but this extension must not be included with the command line NETCONV converts logical ASCII net list data from input file sprojectfile net to a BAE logical net list with the name netlist in a DDB Design DataBase file named sprojectfile ddb This internal logical net list can be converted to a physical net list with the Packager in the same way as information from the BAE schematic It will as a result be possible to perform pin and gate swaps in the subsequent layout process Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The net list file format must start with the keyword NETLIST and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and Part list The part list section is expected after the NETLIST command and must start with the keyword PARTS Each part is defined by a command in the form lt part gt lt llname gt where lt part gt is the part name e g C1 R1 IC15 etc and lt llname gt is the logical library name of th
53. Activation through the middle mouse button is even possible whilst performing a graphical manipulation such as placing or moving an object The View or Display menu provides useful functions for changing display options such as zoom window zoom scale input and or display grids grid and or angle lock color settings etc The View or Display menu also contains advanced display functions such as Find Pari and Query Element Files The Fies menu provides functions for creating loading saving copying replacing and deleting DDB elements The Fites menu also allows to load and or store color tables or to call important database management functions such as listing DDB file contents and performing library update Parts The provides functions for defining part placement groups for manual part placement for part renaming for automatic part placement matrix placement initial placement and for manual and automatic placement optimization component swap pin gate swap The function for selecting the via s for subsequent routing is also provided in this menu On part level the Parts menu is used for placing moving deleting and renaming pins e padstack symbols On padstack level the Parts menu is used for placing moving and deleting pads Traces The Traces menu provides functions for interactive routing i e for manually creating
54. BAE programs directory gt ule dp ulprog newprog di test lib Generate User Language library 1ibs11 from source file libbae ulh optimizer is activated listing output is directed to file libbae 1st gt ulc libbae ulh cl libsll 120 Compile all current directory files with extension ulc and statically link the generated program machine codes with library libs11 macro USELIB is defined for controlling conditional compilation optimizer is activated gt ulc ulc Define USELIB lib libsll 0 Generate libraries Libstd and stdlib from source file std ulh optimizer is activated warning severity level is set to 2 gt ule wa O el Tibstd stdlib source std wilh Generate library Liblay from source file baeulc lay ulh with library Libstd dynamically linked optimizer is activated warning severity level is set to 3 Compiler messages are directed to log file genlib rep instead of ulc log gt ulc wO cl liblay S baeulc lay ulh dll libstd log genlib rep Generate programs laypcr and tracerep from source files laypcr old and tracerep ulc with library liblay dynamically linked optimizer is activated gt ule laypcr old dii Tila Kep O s tracerep Utilities Page 7 56 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Files ulcprog vdb BAE User Language database in BAE programs directory See also USERLIST User Language Interpreter Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide Diagnose The error
55. CAD Page 4 142 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 3 Customized CAM View User Interface Menu Assignments and Key Bindings The BAE software comes with User Language programs for activating a modified CAM View user interface with many additional functions startups toolbars menu assignments key bindings etc The BAE ST User Language program is automatically started when entering the CAM View module BAE ST calls the UIFSETUP User Language program which activates predefined CAM View menu assignments and key bindings Menu assignments and key bindings can be changed by modifiying and re compiling the UIFSETUP source code The HLPKEYS User Language program is used to list the current key bindings With the predefined menu assignments of UIFSETUP activated HLPKEYS can be called from the Key Bindings function of the Help menu Menu assignments and key bindings can be listed with the UIFDUMP User Language program The UIFRESET User Language program can be used to reset all currently defined menu assignments and key bindings UIFSETUP UIFDUMP and UIFRESET can also be called from the menu of the KEYPROG User Language program which provides additional facilities for online key programming and User Language program help info management Cascading Windows Motif Pulldown Menus The Windows and Motif pulldown menu user interfaces of the CAM View module provide facilities for cascading submenu definitions Le submenus can be
56. DDB file elements which are not referenced by any other element from the same DDB file Introduction Page 1 16 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Automatic Design Data Backup A feature for optionally performing automatic design data saving is implemented with the Schematic Editor the Layout Editor and the Neural Router This feature is controlled with the Autosave function from the Settings menus The Autosavel function requires a positive integer input designating the autosave time interval in minutes On zero or dash input the automatic save facility will be deactivated With Autosavel activated the system automatically saves the currently processed element to a backup file at the specified time intervals However to prevent Autosavel from overwriting backup files in situations where an element is only loaded for viewing checking purposes the backup is only performed if the currently loaded element was modified during the autosave interval The name of the backup file is automatically derived from the current job file name and has the extension bak Autosaved elements can be restored using features such as the Savel Element As function from the File menu or the COPYDDB utility program Automatic Parameter Backup Important design and operational parameters such as autosave time interval name of the currently loaded co
57. DOCUMENTED 001 Invalid call This error message is issued if the Packager logpack exe and or logpack is called directly from a DOS and or UNIX Linux shell The Packager must be called from the BAE user interface to ensure that the required setup file and library path names are known and that the Packager can change back to the other BAE modules 046 Invalid logical library name for symbol symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 024 Invalid logical netlist format NOT YET DOCUMENTED 051 Invalid logical part format symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 067 Invalid minimum distance for pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 048 Invalid physical assignment for symbol symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 047 Invalid physical library name for symbol symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 18 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 065 Invalid power width for pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 068 Invalid route priority for pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 066 Invalid route width for pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 058 Invalid swap data for pin layoutpartpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 009 Layout Element Name layoutnetlistname This message displays the name of the layout netlist to be created by the Packager The same element name should be specif
58. Drill Plan Both Sides ME Move to Desired Color light blue 00 Solder Mask Both ma Sides Solder Mask Side 1 MO Move to Desired Color dark gray 000 Solder Mask Side 2 W00 Move to Desired Color light gray BO Exit CD Changing some item specific color is accomplished by selecting the desired display item using the left mouse button and then selecting the desired color button from the Change Colors function from the View menu In the layout system the Change Colors menu provides a feature for fast display item fade out fade in Activating and or deactivating some item specific display is accomplished by selecting the desired display item entry with the right mouse button which works as a toggle between fade out and fade in The system won t loose information on currently defined colors of faded out display items strike through color buttons are used for notifying currently faded out display items Move to Desired Color white 000 Move to Desired Color gray Use the following commands to store the currently defined color table with name stackedit to the ged dat system file in the BAE programs directory View Save Colors Element Name stackedit Once a color table has been saved it can be reloaded at any time using the Load Colors function from the View menu Special color tables e g for library
59. EE EE ER EE OE BA naaa 2 56 2 5 3 AE ige RR OU EE EI EN AR EE EE EN EE FA ER BOERE KEN 2 57 2 5 4 Ee e LEE 2 58 2 5 5 Generic Output under Windows 2 X anna 2 59 2 5 6 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard e esse ese Re ER EER RE ER EE AE EE ER EE AR Re ER EER REGEER Ee RR Ee EE 2 59 2 6 Hierarchical Circuit Design seders seke Gee dd eed GE AG NANG NGAA NANG 2 60 2 6 1 Sub block Circuit Drawings En ege Seege be ee Rg Reed ee oek nd 2 60 2 6 2 Sub block Reference Symbol and Logical Sub block Reference sesse see RE RE EE EE EE 2 61 NAN AE Ee er dor LT EE EE Ge GE nanenane 2 62 2 1 BackannolalOM is EER GERGEN EG Ge GR EG GR ee ER GE eN eb 2 63 Tables Table 2 1 Special BAE Attributes u s ANAKAN ERG EER Ee EE EE Ee Ed AA 2 20 Figures Figure 2 1 SCM Library Symbols EE 2 12 Figure 2 2 SCM Symbol Kei e E ENEE 2 16 Figure 2 3 5CM Library ACCESS aa ARNAN ARA 2 33 Figure 2 4 SCM Sheet with Symbols sees se ese anan EE naaasar 2 39 Figure 2 5 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections esse ese ee ee RE RR EE AE RE AR RE RE AR RE AE Re AR RE Re AR EE ER ee EE 2 42 Figure 2 6 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections Labels 0000200annauuauuaananasasanananaanasannanasasanan 2 44 Figure 2 7 SCM Bus Gonnections AARAL Aa 2 47 Figure 2 8 SCM Sheet Demo Sheet1 ese ese see ER RE ER RE ER RE ERA ER RA ERG ER RAAR RA ER EG A ERA ER RGe ER EA KERE AK RE ERGE EE 2 51 Figure 2 9 SCM
60. Ke nananana 3 5 Packager GN N ER N RE OR RR OR N OR OP 3 6 3 2 1 Starting the Package iss esse GEE EE EK Ge Ge EN EEGENEN 3 6 3 2 2 Packager Main Menu sees ee ee RR RE RE RR ER RR EER RR RR R RK ERGER RR RE Ge ARK ERGER RR ERGE RR R KOR RR REG R RR KERE RR RR ERGER RR EE ee 3 6 3 2 8 Running the Package esse ees ER EER RE RE RR EER ARE ERGER NAA 3 7 324 oi EE EE OE EE ER N N EE OE EE EE EE EN 3 9 3 2 5 EE EE EE EE EE EE N EE EE EE iiaa 3 13 BackannolatiGm NANA ANAN APANG Ee HE ENE Se NA AGA AA ee Ee AE NN 3 28 3 3 1 Starting the Backannotation sesse ese Rae ER RE ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER ERA ERROR ERA ER RO ER EE RR Re ER Re A RR Ree E Re nnii ninapas 3 28 3 3 2 Running the Backannotation ma naaa 3 28 3 3 3 Example sesse E E A E E 3 29 Net List Uiilities sessie ses Ee ee ge ge ie Be EE Ee Ee AA AA 3 30 3 4 1 Importing Logical Net Liste sesse aa 3 30 3 4 2 Importing Physical Net Lists mm namana 3 30 3 4 3 Exporting Net List Data m amaanananuaaaawanananasaaanasaNNAA ANAN 3 30 3 44 Net At d TT 3 33 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual ER 4 PCB Design CAD a aaa Ca 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 EI E AA KANAN ALAN 4 5 4 1 1 Components and Features siese vas ERGE ARALAN KAANAK ANAKAN 4 5 4 12 Starting the Layout System users Re ER Re ER EE RR RA ER RE RR ERA NANANA 4 9 4 1 3 Layout Editor Main Menu sees sesse see Ee AA 4 10 4 1 4 Cus
61. Layer IsolatiON ee sesse ese ee Re ER EE ER RE ER EE ER EE RR EE ER ERA RR EE ER EG RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae RR Ee ek ae ee 4 126 PCB Design CAD Page 4 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 1 General The Bartels AutoEngineer PCB layout system essentially consists of an interactive Layout Editor with integrated layout symbol editor and functions for automatic part placement and automatic copper fill the Bartels AutoEngineer for fully automated PCB routing and CAM Processor and CAM View program modules for generating and processing CAM output and manufacturing data for PCB production The following sections of this manual describe in detail how to use these modules 4 1 1 Components and Features Layout Editor The floating point database used throughout the BAE Layout Editor allows for the mixed specification of metric and imperial coordinate units All placement coordinates including rotation angles can be specified with floating point values There are no restrictions at the definition and placement of pads copper areas parts traces texts etc The user interface provides a genuine display even for the more complex structures such as circles or arcs Area visibility can be defined according to mirror modes thus supporting SMD pins with different pad shapes for component and solder side The Design Rule Check DRC operates in grid free mode with a precision of eight digits behind the decimal point The DRC provides constant
62. Number of Passes Number of Passes 2 1 99 Multi Pass Optimizer During optimization a status line message instantly reports the number of parts processed by the current optimizer pass Placement optimization can be interrupted at any time by pressing an arbitrary key on the keyboard Wait until all optimizer passes are completed and use the function to estimate how placement optimization did change the complexity of the ratsnest unroutes Fixed parts are excluded from placement optimization It is strongly recommended to fix critical parts before running the placement optimization Critical parts are those which must not be replaced e g plugs switches LEDs etc or where pin gate swaps are not allowed e g relays multi opamps etc Parts can be fixed using Layout Editor group functions Please note that automatic pin gate swap should only be performed if all of the swap definitions stored with the logical library are permitted Select the Only Part Swap option from the P G Swap Method function to switch off automatic pin gate swap if you are in doubt about the correctness of swap definitions Consider please that usually no pin gate swap is allowed for plugs Swaps for parts with special attribute values e g resistor networks with attribute va1 must be defined internal to prevent the system from swapping gates between parts with different values See chapter 7 11 of this manual for a description of the LOGLIB utility program
63. PA E E E Kl E 2 53 2 46 Cl UE 2 53 2 4 7 Exiting the Schematic Editor ees esse esse ee Rae ER Re ER EA ER RE ER RE ERROR ERA ERROR ee EER e ER Ree ERA ER ee EE ER ee EE 2 54 SCM Plot OUTPUT i s souse sere ee ee Gee dye ee GE Re RD GR Re ee Rae RD gees 2 55 2 5 1 General Plot Parameters iis ER EE Ee ER Ge GENRE REED ee ee ee dk ee Ee Ee Ge ee Ee GENRE 2 55 2 5 2 HP GL Pen biet uir verse ese eke anaana audia eranan kaadaa EEN ee bl ensues NADAANAN exten 2 56 2 5 3 vHP Laser Output is eel EE GA AN GAD ee ANG 2 57 EA BEN eie ed oi EE ER RE N N EER OE ER EE EE dee 2 58 2 5 5 Generic Output under Windows use esse esse Ee ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER ERA ER RA ER ERA KERE ER ERA KERE ER RA KRAKE ee KERE ER ee EE 2 59 2 5 6 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard esse ese Ee EK EER EE ER EE AK EE ER EE AR Re RR EE AR Ee KEER ERGE EE 2 59 Hierarchical Circuit D signe aosan aia aeaa aaa RE RE ainoaa Sai RR RE 2 60 2 6 1 Sub block Circuit Drawing NGANGA 2 60 2 6 2 Sub block Reference Symbol and Logical Sub block Reference sees see RR RE EE EE EE 2 61 NAN AE Ee rr dor LT EE EE GE mannanna 2 62 ore ET ae EL ee EE ENEE SEN 2 63 Chapter 3 Packager Backannotation RR RR RR RR RR ee ee ee ee ee ee OWT 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Genera RE EE EE rercrerePererercPrecrerctrertrecterereectecrrerctrrerrertrerrer tree rere rere 3 5 3 1 1 Components and Feature sesse esse ese see ee Re ER Re EE EER Ee Ee
64. Part Name 13 Library Element Name Move to 0 15 0 30 Add Part Part Name 4f Library Element Name Move to 0 10 0 30 Use the following commands to create two insertion Plan Side 2 documentary lines for indicating the part contour Areas Add Document Line Insertion Plan Move to 0 100 0 100 Move to 0 425 0 100 Move to 0 425 0 300 Move to 0 075 0 300 Move to 0 075 0 125 Move to 0 100 0 100 Done Add Document Line Insertion Plan Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 39 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Frequently certain distances between SMD parts are required by the manufacturing process to avoid solder bridging An appropriate SMD part clearance check can be supported by defining corresponding keepout areas on a certain documentary layer The Layout Editor DRC will then mutually check these keepout areas and indicate distance violations in case of overlaps Use the following commands to define a keepout area on documentary layer Insertion Plan Side 2 for the SMD part clearance check Areas Add Keep Out Area Document Layer Insertion Plan Move to 0 05 0 05 Move to 0 45 0 05 Move to 0 45 0 35 Move to 0 05 0 35 Done Use the following commands to set the part origin to the part center point i e to the pin gravity point Settings Set Origin Move to 0 25 0 20 Use the following commands to place the text strin
65. Points Logical Library definitionname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 010 The file names contain invalid characters Either the specified project file name or the specified library file name contains invalid control characters or and or characters or the project file name Settings Design File Name was not set Please set a project file name and or use file names without special characters to avoid this problem Packager Backannotation Page 3 26 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 116 The layout element name contains invalid characters The layout element net list name specified through Settings Layout Element Name is either empty or contains invalid control characters or and or characters Please set a valid layout element without special characters to avoid this problem 062 Variant part layoutpartname symbolname name conflict with Srpname List NOT YET DOCUMENTED 061 Variant symbol symbolname xlat with gates not allowed NOT YET DOCUMENTED 118 Variant variantnumber sub symbol symbolname not placed NOT YET DOCUMENTED 119 Variant variantnumber sub symbol symbolname placed NOT YET DOCUMENTED 034 Virtual variant parts not allowed symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 059 xlat pin layoutpartpinname not found on layout part macro NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 27 Barte
66. SCM Labels Label symbols are used on SCM sheet level to define signals and or net names Labels can be utilized to connect signals from different schematic sheets of the same job file The add Label function from the Symbols menu is used for placing labels onto the currently loaded SCM sheet If a label symbol is available with the same name as specified for the signal name then the corresponding label symbol is loaded thus displaying special graphic e g for the ground signal If no label symbol with the specified net name is available then the label symbol named standard is used on default The standard label symbol should always contain a reference text for displaying the net name BAE uses two more predefined label symbols named bustap and port respectively The bustap label symbol is used for tapping bus connections use the Tap Bus function from the Connections menu The port label symbol is used for defining module ports in hierarchical circuit designs use the Add Module Port function from the Symbols menu In this section we will create two label symbols named vss and vdd in DDB file demo dab These symbols are intended especially for CMOS ground and power supply Creating a new Label Symbol Use the following commands to produce a new label symbol i e a new element of type label named vss in the DDB file demo ddb if an element of demo dab is curr
67. Sheet Demo Sheet2 scssccsseeesseessseessseeseseeesseesaseeesseesaseasnseesaseasaceesaseaenenesaseessenesaseaeeas 2 52 Figure 2 10 Hierarchical Circuit Design Sub Block SCM Sheet BLOCK esse ese esse esse ee Ee Ee ee Ke ee 2 60 Figure 2 11 Hierarchical Circuit Design Block Symbol DFF with Loglib Definition 2 61 Figure 2 12 Hierarchical Circuit Design Top Level SCM Sheet eene esse Re EE ER Re ER EA ER EE REEKS 2 62 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Circuit Design CAE Page 2 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 21 General The schematic capture system of the Bartels AutoEngineer essentially consists of an interactive Schematic Editor with integrated SCM symbol editor and integrated Backannotation and the Packager program module for converting logical into physical netlists Forward Annotation The following sections of this manual describe in detail how to use the Schematic Editor for creating and editing SCM symbols and schematic circuitry 2 1 1 Components and Features Schematic Editor When working with a Schematic Editor the user expects the net list to agree exactly with the circuit drawing The Schematic Editor of the Bartels AutoEngineer is not just a simple drawing program but is also capable of instantly controlling and correlating the net list data with the circuit diagram Every single net list change results in an incremental
68. The examples presented with this chapter introduce the concepts and advanced features of the BAE Schematic Editor in a logical sequence and will take the user through the design and modification of library symbols and a circuit drawing which will be subject to further processing in the subsequent chapters The reader should work through this chapter without missing any sections to gain full understanding of the BAE Schematic Editor Once a command has been used and or explained the operator is assumed to have understood its function and be able to perform it again Subsequent instructions containing this command will be less verbose for easier reading and more speedy learning Circuit Design CAE Page 2 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Circuit Design CAE Page 2 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents Sa 2 Circult Design CAE 3 icc keene 2A General Re DR ee De Ge we ee Ke RR WER ee VR Ee ee Ge We Ge ee 2 5 2 1 1 Components and Features sccssecsseeesssesseeesseeesseeesseenseeeeseeeeseeseseeeaseesaseaeaseesaseeeaseeseseesaseesaseesases 2 5 2 1 2 Starting the Schematic EditOF sees see eene ee sae ee Ee ER Rae RR Re ER Re RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae ek Ke REK Rae ER Ee ER ae 2 6 21 3 Schematic Editor Main Men iseer sies eers gee DESEN 2 7 2 14 Customized Schematic Editor User Interface esse esse see EER ER Re KEER ER Re RR EA RR Ee e RR A EER ee RR e RR ee Ra 2 9 2 1
69. Trace Move to Trace e g 2 35 0 9 Settings Set Power Layers Lr 1 vss End Net Name Note how the deleted trace and power layer definition are replaced with airlines Use the following commands to add a trace to connect the pins 2 and 1 of the parts named R100 and R101 Traces Add Trace Move to R100 2 1 4 2 4 Move to R101 1 1 6 2 4 Done The system now indicates a short circuit error Use the following commands to save the layout run to generate a net list with the same file and element name and immediately re load the layout again Back Netlis stores to DDB file without changing the currently loaded net list data File Save Element Utilities Back Netlist EI File Name Element Name File Load Element Layout File Name Element Name Now the system performs a connectivity generation to correlate the layout with the net list which was previously generated with Back Netlisi Note that there are no airlines displayed anymore after completing the connectivity generation The layout does not contain any open connections and or short circuits anymore you can check this with Batch DRC and Report from the Utilities menu Deleting the trace which was previously causing a short circuit would now result in an airline display Another useful application of the Back Netis function net list generation from Gerber data which was previously lo
70. after obtaining a 100 routing The Optimizer passes count can range from 0 to 99 2 Optimizer passes are activated on default Router Cleanup Optimizer Cleanup The Router Cleanup function is used to activate default option Rip Up Cleanup On or deactivate option Rip Up Cleanup Of cleanup passes during rip up routing The Optimizer Cleanup function is used to activate default option Optimizer Cleanup Onl or deactivate option Optimizer Cleanup Of cleanup passes during optimization When running cleanup passes note message Pattern Search issued by the routing progress report the Autorouter makes use of a unique pattern search recognition algorithm for identifying disturbing traces during rip up and cross net optimization The Autorouter is able to select and remove disturbing traces during rip up and perform cross net changes during optimization Cleanup during cross net optimization requires more computing time but dramatically reduces via counts and thus is also called if the rip up router temporarily fails to find an acceptable solution It is recommended to refrain from turning off cleanup when running rip up on complex designs or optimizing dense boards Turning cleanup off results in sequential processing of the connections and can produce contenting results when running final Optimizer passes on certain layouts however more passes are then required for pushing and or straightening trace bunches
71. an active copper area on signal layer 1 and assign this copper area to net Vdd Areas Add Active Copper oa ELI Layer 1 Move to 2 4 1 7 Move to 2 7 1 7 Move to 2 7 2 2 Move to 2 6 2 3 Move to 2 4 2 3 Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 57 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Keepout Areas Use the following commands to define a keepout area on signal layer 1 and a keepout area on signal layer All Layers keepout areas define layer specific regions on the PCB where no traces no copper areas no texts etc are allowed to be placed Areas Em Add Keep Out Area E Layer 1 Move to 1 8 1 2 Move to 2 2 1 2 I Move to 2 2 0 9 Move to 1 7 0 9 Done Add Keep Out Area All Layers Move to 0 6 2 6 Move to 0 6 2 1 Move to 0 9 2 1 E Move to 0 9 2 6 Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 58 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 434 Traces Routing The fraces menu provides functions for interactive routing on layout and or part hierarchy level i e for manually creating new traces and for modifying or deleting existing traces and or trace segments Arbitrary track widths can be defined for individual trace segments or complete routing paths Special or critical nets such as the power supply can be pre routed and then fixed to prevent the Autorouter from rerouting such nets Graphic Control Functions Input Grid Display During manual routi
72. an area No area can contain intercrossing segments because otherwise basic operations like checking polygon intersection for clearances and short circuits polygon filling features area size changes etc would not be possible The polygons created by the Bartels AutoEngineer are not just simple line drawings but intelligent arbitrary shaped polygons The system is fully capable of applying complex operations on these polygons such as move copy enlarge shrink the polygon move delete insert polygon corner points and or polygon segments perform automatic copper fill and or hatching perform design rule checking etc Redundant polygon points should be avoided because they might cause trouble e g when generating certain CAM data In this context the definition of full circles in BAE is worthwhile to be mentioned here especially A full circle is created by defining a point on the circle then choose either Arc Lei or Arc Righi from the submenu and select the circle center point and finish the definition with the Done submenu function Alternatively the key can be pressed to set the circle center point and then a second point can be selected to set the circle radius Introduction Page 1 18 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 2 5 Special Remarks The preceding paragraphs explained the basic concepts of operating the BAE design system Now you can become more
73. and release operations the Layout Editor provides a specific highlight for indicating currently fixed elements The Layout Editor trace functions for interactive routing keeps traces and vias fixed when processing pre routed fixed traces l e when manipulating pre routed fixed traces there is no need of re fixing such traces to prevent the Autorouter from re routing and or rejecting pre routed traces PCB Design CAD Page 4 62 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 44 Autoplacement The BAE layout system is equipped with powerful Autoplacement functions The part set functions are used for selecting and or deselecting parts for subsequent placement operations The matrix placement facilities are used for placing selectable part sets onto definable placement grids Initial placement functions are provided for performing fully automated part placement The system also provides placement optimization functions for automatic part and pin gate swap The Autoplacement functions are available from the Part Sef Auto Placement and Matrix Placement submenus of the Layout Editor menu Start the Layout Editor if it is not yet active and load the layout board from the demo dab DDB file Use the Delete Pari function from the Parts menu to delete the resistors named x100 and r101 and apply group functions to delete the switches named s1000 through s1009 Paris Delete Part Move to r100 1 0 2 4 Delete
74. be assigned to clusters with corresponding power connections afterwards This method of cluster building automatically involves block capacitor recognition thus featuring appropriate block capacitor placement nearby corresponding ICs Parts and or part clusters are assigned and or processed due to alphabetical part name order It is recommended to introduce part type grouping by choosing appropriate type specific part name patterns i e to insert connectors at the end of the part name list to avoid block capacitor assignment to connectors and or plugs e g by using name pattern x for connectors and or plugs ic for integrated circuits etc Area Placer The Area Placer function performs area placement with interactively selectable placement start point Area placement does not consider any net list preferences i e only part dimensions are considered as placement criteria The Area Placer function can be used to estimate part placement area requirements i e to check whether the board area is large enough to place all parts Part Pin Factor The part pin factor is used to control the sequence of parts and or clusters to be placed The next part to be placed is selected by applying a combination of two strategies The first strategy simply selects the part with the maximum number of pins connected to already placed parts The second strategy selects the part with the maximum ratio of number of part pins
75. command of the BSETUP utility program is used to switch between SIDEMENU and PULLDOWN Windows Motif menu configurations See chapter 7 2 for more details The following main menu is always available whilst processing CAM data with CAM View Display Files Parameter Utilities Display The View or Display menu can either be activated by selecting the corresponding main menu item or by pressing the middle mouse button The View or Display menu provides useful functions for changing display options such as zoom window zoom scale input and display grid color settings drawing mode coordinate display mode etc Files The File menu provides functions for loading moving and writing Gerber drilling or milling data sets for generating layouts from Gerber data and for deleting the currently loaded CAM data from main memory Parameter The Parameter menu provides functions for setting input offsets and mirror modes for subsequent data load processes defining the via D Code for generating layouts from Gerber data selecting the Gerber format the circle mode the coordinate format and activating and or deactivating Extended Gerber format or Gerber optimization when loading and or writing Gerber data Utilities The menu provides functions for exiting BAE returning to the BAE main shell sorting drill data reporting aperture usage and listing DDB file contents PCB Design
76. connected to already placed parts to total part pin count The part pin factor value designates which strategy has higher priority Use the Parts Auto Placement Settings Part Pin Factor Pin Count Weight 0 0 1 0 0 90 function to set the desired part pin factor value in the range 0 0 for considering connection counts only to 1 0 for considering connection count to total pin count ratios only On default the part pin factor value is set to 0 9 A high part pin factor value usually results in a better distribution of nets but could cause excessive placement area fragmentation on high density layouts by early placement of small parts which might prevent from placing larger parts afterwards PCB Design CAD Page 4 68 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Segment Fit The segment fit value is used to control on how much part edge length matching should be considered by the placement algorithm i e whether preference should be given on placing parts with equal edge lengths side by side Use the Parts Auto Placement Cl Settings m Segment Fit Segment Fit 0 0 1 0 0 10 function to set the weight factor for considering part edge length matching Valid segment fit values are in the range 0 0 no segment fit preference to 1 0 high segment fit preference On default the segment fit value is set to 0 1 High segment fit values usually result in better looking layouts and can increase the routability of layouts with many b
77. corresponding menu item and pressing the left mouse button The menu item strings usually contain underlined characters to denote hotkeys for fast activation of the corresponding menu and or function Le main menu items can also be activated and or selected by pressing the denoted character together with the fait key and pull down menu functions can be activated and or selected by simply pressing the denoted hotkey The middle mouse button provides instant access to the View menu i e pressing the middle mouse button is possible at any time and from any other function and provides fast access to frequently required display functions such as zoom and pan changing color setup setting the input and or display grid etc Pressing the middle mouse button will also cause a status line display of the current file and element name if no other menu function is currently active The middle mouse button interaction can also be simulated by simultaneously holding down both the left and the right mouse button l e it is possible to activate the online display menu even if only a two button mouse is installed and or configured Any currently active menu function can be immediately aborted and or canceled by pressing the escape key Esd ASCII code 27 abort hotkey To call the Layout Editor function add Part activate the Parts function menu by selecting the main menu item Parts then select the Add Par function from the Parts
78. could store the still empty net list currently held in main memory A connectivity generation is automatically carried out after re loading the layout and then the layout is ready for processing by the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB Design CAD Page 4 151 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 5 IC ASIC Design NOTE The software modules described in this chapter are only available in Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design This chapter describes how to use the Chip Editor IC Mask Editor Cell Placer and Cell Router program modules for the physical design of IC and or ASIC mask layouts The GDS View and CIF View program modules for importing and or checking cell libraries and or IC mask data in GDS and CIF format are also introduced Unfortunately we can t provide real design examples in this chapter because the IC manufacturing process parameters and the cell libraries of logical primitives are usually provided by the manufacturer Although your manufacturer is unlikely to charge anything for the provision of such data in a format suitable for import into the Bartels AutoEngineer such as GDS the publication of this data is usually strictly prohibited by a non disclosure agreement NDA Manufacturing Data CAM Page 5 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Manufacturing Data CAM Page 5 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents Chapter 5 IC ASIC
79. created layout element you are now accessing an existing element thus you can select the file and element name via popup menu and mouse pick File a Layout m The system should load the previously created layout An error message such as File not found is issued if the requested DDB file is not available An error message such as Element not found is issued if the requested element is not available in the selected DDB file When entering the Layout Editor the system knows the name of the file previously processed in any other BAE module On subsequent file name queries this global project name can alternatively be specified by selecting the Project button of the file name popup menu or by entering an empty string i e by pressing the return key E to the file name prompt Selecting the Projed button of the element name popup menu or entering an empty string e pressing the return key Ch to the element name prompt causes the system to use the default layout element name defined with the setup see also chapter 7 2 for a description of the BSETUP utility program and how to use the LAYDEFELEMENT command The function for loading a layout does not only load the pertinent data from the lower hierarchy levels parts padstacks and pads but also the corresponding net list The net list data is correlated with all geometrical data on the layout Connectivity Generation This indeed presupposes identical names for bo
80. definition has a maximum of up to 32 corner points At the end of each character definition header line a comment is printed for showing the ASCII representation of the character Utilities Page 7 29 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples To extract the data of font standard from the font library file ged Ent font data output is directed to ASCII file standard fon gt fontextr standard ged Files ged fnt BAE font library file in BAE programs directory See also FONTCONV Diagnosis The error messages issued by FONTEXTR are intended to be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 30 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 9 INSTALL Name install Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Utility Synopsis install install c srcfile pattern dstfile directory Description The INSTALL utility program is applied for installing the Bartels AutoEngineer PC software or parts of it to the PC hard disk INSTALL can also be used for packing compressing and or unpacking decompressing selectable files The INSTALL utility program is the one and only tool feasible for performing a correct PC installation since the BAE PC software files are stored in compressed format on the disks of the BAE install media Modes of Operation BAE Software Installation The BAE PC software installation process can be started with the install command where the current directory must contain the contents of the BAE install med
81. deselect single elements of a certain type part trace area or text by picking the desired items The Group Elements function is active as long as valid pick elements are selected thus allowing for the selection of a series of objects of a certain type The Reset Group function is used to deselect all items from the current group All group selected elements are subject to subsequent group functions such as Save Group Move Group Copy Group and Delete Group The Fix Group and Unfix Group functions only work on group selected parts traces and vias The number of modified elements is displayed with the feedback messages of Reset Group Group Polygon Delete Group and Unfix Group functions This information can be used to check whether the group function was applied as intended The Save Group function is used to save the currently defined group The Save Group function prompts for a group origin selection which becomes the origin of the new element gt The group origin is also used as the reference point for group load commands Saved groups are stored as an element of the same type as that from which the group was selected To prevent from unintentionally overwriting existing database elements Save Group prompts for confirmation if the specified element already exists in the destination file The Load Group function can be used to reload p
82. fixed mirror and rotate mode i e the part can be rotated and mirrored but the text position remains fixed e g for drill plan The lt index gt parameter is optional and specifies the color palette and layer menu output index for the documentary layer Documentary layer output index numbers start at 1 Documentary layers without output index assignments are automatically assigned to free index output positions This feature allows for frequently used documentary layers to be placed at the top of the documentary layer selection menus and or to group documentary layer definitions within layer menus according to their functionality DOCMENU Command The DOCMENU command can be used to assign frequently used docmentary layers to the top levels of the layer selection menus in the layout system The formal syntax of the DOCMENU command is as follows DOCMENU lt menuline gt lt layer gt lt menuline gt specifies the line and or position for displaying the documentary layer lt layer gt in the top level layer menus Utilities Page 7 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual USERUNITS Command The USERUNITS command is used for setting the default units for the BAE layout system Once set this default is used whenever the user is prompted for size or coordinate input The formal syntax of the USERUNITS command is USERUNITS METRIC and or USERUNITS IMPERIAL where METRIC applies for mm units and I
83. for experienced users designing large projects with replicated parts of the circuitry Hierarchical circuit design usually is applied for the development of integrated circuits such as gate arrays standard cells or ASICs 2 61 Sub block Circuit Drawing The schematics for the sub block can be defined on one or more sheets The Bub Block option of the Set Sheet Blockname function from the Settings dialog is used for assigning a sub block name to the sub block circuit drawing Identical sub block names must be set for different sheets defining the same sub block Figure 2 10 shows an example for a sub block circuit drawing named BLOCK Connections to higher hierarchy levels i e the sub block s pins are defined by module ports The system uses a standard label symbol named port for module ports The function from the menu is used for defining and placing module ports The Move Symbol Label and Delete Symbol Label functions from the Symbols menu can be used for moving and or deleting module ports In figure 2 10 the module ports S R Q Q and HYPER are defined Within hierarchical circuit design there is a difference between global and local net names A local net is defined by preceding the net name with an ampersand el character Hence the nets named amp ABC and amp ABC in figure 2 10 are defined locally in all sheets with the same blockname Standard net name allocation such as at Vcc introduces a global net definition which connects o
84. for net netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 035 Multiple placements for variant variant number symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 126 Net netname Snettype mixed hence nettypel lt gt nettype2 of symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 086 Net netname is connected to inputs only NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 120 Net netname multiple values attributename valuel value2 of symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 056 Net assigned pin layoutpartpinname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 20 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 055 Net assignment attribute attributename invalid NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 054 Net assignment attribute attributename not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 064 Net attribute missing for pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 124 Net name collision netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 125 Net name for layoutpartname layoutpartpinname too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 023 Netlist netlistname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 037 No assignment for symbol pin symbolpinname found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 017 No error occurred NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 071 No schematic sheet with block name blockname found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 016 Not enough memory There was not enough main memory available for successfully p
85. gate groups swaps to increase routability This can significantly reduce the time required for achieving a 100 autorouting completion Placement optimization is selective i e swaps with a high potential to simplify the routing problem are carried with higher priority Swap operations which cause a deterioration of the current routing result rejected by the router s backtracking process Only unfixed parts are subject to swap operations and the admissibility of any pin gate swap is controlled through the corresponding logical library part definitions Pin gate swaps create a backannotation request which triggers automatic when loading SCM plans to the Schematic Editor see chapter 2 7 Backannotation requests also prevent the Packager from forward annotation without confirmation see chapter 3 2 3 Security Copy The Security Copy function is used to activate default or deactivate automatic security copy of intermediate routing results PCB Design CAD Page 4 83 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 7 Autorouter Strategy The Strategy menu provides functions for setting routing strategies such as via cost pin channel cost packing cost bus bending cost dynamic density cost etc These settings should be used with care Only change one or two at a time Poor routing results are often found to be caused by random strategy parameter settings The default settings will work best in the vast majority of cases It is stron
86. heat trap Otherwise the heat trap is drawn using the smallest round aperture valid for line strokes Use the following commands to set the power layer border width to 0 3mm the power plane isolation width to 0 25 mm the minimum pin isolation width to 0 35mm with a tolerance of 0 4mm i e maximum pin isolation width 0 75mm and the heat trap distance to 0 35 mm with 0 45 tolerance i e maximum heat trap distance 0 8mm Plot Parameters Power Layer Border EI Power Layer Border Width 2 10mm 0 3 Power Layer Isol Power Layer Isolation Width 0 30mm 0 25 P IS Min Distance pon Min Distance Isolation to Drill Hole 0 40mm 0 35 P IS Tolerance H Tolerance Isolation to Drill Hole 0 50mm 0 4 P HT Min Distance EI Min Distance Heat Trap to Drill Hole 0 40mm 0 35 P HT Tolerance 000 Tolerance Heat Trap to Drill Hole 0 50mm 0 45 EJ PCB Design CAD Page 4 127 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 7 HP GL Output The HP GL Output function from the Control Plo menu is used to produce pen plots in HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language format The Plotter Pen Width function is used to define the pen width for generating HP GL output data Structures smaller than the plotter pen width cannot be drawn without overdraw errors The default plotter pen width is 0 3mm Pen width value specifications can range from 0 01mm to 10 0mm The Plotter Speed function is use
87. if neither option dp nor option d1 see below is specified Static Link Option lib libname The static link option lib requires one or more library name specifications and at least one valid source file specification see option Source above The machine code of the libraries specified with the lib option must be available in the ulcprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory i e the required libraries must be compiled before they can be linked The built in linker of the User Language Compiler binds the machine code of these libraries to the machine code currently to be translated Dynamic Link Option dll libname The dynamic link option d11 requires one or more library name specifications and at least one valid source file specification see option Source above The machine code of the libraries specified with the d11 option must be available in the uicprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory i e the required libraries must be compiled before they can be linked The built in linker of the User Language Compiler stores dynamic link request information with the machine code for the User Language Interpreter to perform dynamic linking of the requested libraries at runtime Utilities Page 7 53 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Create Program Library Option cp cl dstname The create option can be used to designate the type of machine code to be generated The User Language Compiler can create eith
88. is always plotted with the All Layers mode The formal syntax of the LAYPLTMARKLAY command is LAYPLTMARKLAY lt layer gt where lt layer gt is the documentary layer number we recommend the Plot Markers layer LAYGRPDISPLAY Command The LAYGRPDISPLAY command is applied for defining a documentary layer to be used for displaying layout groups at movement with the group Display Mode set to Display Layer Only The formal syntax of the LAYGRPDISPLAY command is LAYGRPDISPLAY lt layer gt where lt layer gt is the documentary layer number Utilities Page 7 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual LAYDOCLAYER Command The LAYDOCLAYER command is used to define up to 100 documentary layers for the BAE layout system Each documentary layer can have information relevant to either or both sides of the PCB I e each documentary layer consists of three sides sub layers named Side 1 solder side bottom layer Side 2 component side top layer and Both Sides both component and solder side This layer structure enables mirroring of SMT parts with all documentary text and graphic from the component side to the solder side and vice versa When plotting Side 4 or Side 2 of a documentary layer with the All Layer mode the elements automatically are added to the output i e they are plotted together with ide 1 and or Side 3 The formal syntax of the LAYDOCLAYER command is
89. libraryfile as second argument This file must have an extension of ddb but this extension must not be included with the command line The libraryfile is expected to be in BAE DDB Design DataBase format and should contain the layout part definitions Usage The LOGLIB utility program must be used to update the logical library whenever a new SCM symbol is added to the library or when an SCM symbol and or a layout part definition has been modified in a way that changes the relationship between them e g change of a pin name Usually the SCM symbol is the first to be designed or edited Then the layout part will be defined if not yet existing Finally the loglib file is created and the logical library definitions herein are translated to the layout library using the LOGLIB program Utilities Page 7 34 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The LOGLIB input file format must start with the keyword LOGLIB and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and part Command The part command is applied for assigning an SCM symbol to a layout symbol The formal syntax of the part command is part lt llname gt lt plname gt where lt liname gt is the logical library name e the name of the SCM symbol and lt piname gt is the physical library name i e the layout package type Keyword default can optionally be set before lt plname gt to enable d
90. line by a progress message suchas Pass 1 1 Part lt p gt lt n gt The autoplacement process can be stopped by keystroke Each autoplacement stop request is verified with user confirmation and will be denoted by a message such as Autoplace aborted Note that there might be a short delay on stop requests since any currently active autoplacer rip up and retry pass must be completed A message such as Operation completed without errors is issued after completing an initial placement function to indicate that all parts have been successfully placed If the autoplacer fails to complete 100 part placement using the current parameter settings then a message such as lt n gt parts could not be placed is issued denoting the number lt n gt of yet unplaced parts On incomplete initial placement it is recommended to change placement parameters use smaller placement grid reduce part expansion use unrestricted part rotation allow SMD mirroring see below on how to set placement parameters and restart the autoplacer after Undo and or selecting a different placement start point to achieve 100 part placement PCB Design CAD Page 4 67 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Full Autoplacer The Eu Autoplacer function performs cluster placement see below with automatic placement start point selection and subsequently applies multi pass placement optimization see chapter 4 4 4 below using the currently selected placement optimi
91. messages issued by ULC are intended to be self explanatory Warnings ULC is a powerful software tool for implementing programs for the manipulation of DDB file contents and for generating CAM data Even the BAE user interface can be considerably changed and or extended with User Language programs It is advisable to test each new User Language program in a non critical environment test software installation test jobs backup of real jobs etc until confidence in the program is established for unrestricted use on real jobs It is also strongly recommended to ensure security e g to prevent foreign persons from implanting destructive User Language programs to ulcprog vdb Utilities Page 7 57 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 716 User Language Interpreter Description The Bartels User Language Interpreter is used for executing Bartels User Language programs which have been compiled with the Bartels User Language Compiler The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated in most of Bartels AutoEngineer modules Le Bartels User Language programs can be called from each of these BAE modules Starting User Language Programs When calling a User Language program the name of the program to be executed must be specified and this program must be available in the uicprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory The program name can be specified either explicitly or implicitly An explicit User Language program call is applied with the BAE
92. mm 1 Element Height mm 2 EJ Use the following commands to place the pad symbols so on component side Layer n Parts and sosr on Solder Mask Side b documentary layer Parts Add Part Library Element Name so Select Input Layer Layer n Parts LO Done EI Add Part Library Element Name sosr Select Input Layer EI Document Layer Solder Mask Side 2 Done Use the following commands to create a documentary line on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer for indicating the pin outline Areas m Add Document Line Insertion Plan Move to 0 0150 0 0350 Move to 0 0150 0 0350 Move to 0 0150 0 0350 Move to 0 0150 0 0350 Move to 0 0150 0 0350 Done The definition of padstack symbol so is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 32 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a Padstack Drill Symbol Use the following commands to create a padstack symbol named dri113 0 with an element size of 3 3mm in DDB file demo ddb File New Padstack Element Width mm 3 Element Height mm 3 Use the following commands to create a drill hole with a diameter of 3 0mm and assign that drill hole to drilling class z this drilling class can be utilized in the CAM Processor to perform selective output
93. monitoring of copper against net list with visual indication of distance violations and short circuits The system supports both Online and Batch DRC Online DRC performs incremental checks i e only the modified items are checked real time thus saving a lot of computation time The Undo Redd facilities allow to use the Layout Editor without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone by applying the Undo function and then reprocessed with the Redo function Undo Redo ensures data security and provides a powerful feature for estimating design alternatives Arbitrary parts of the layout can be selected to groups and then moved rotated mirrored copied or saved and subsequently used as templates Fast interactive part placement with instant connections update guarantees an optimum exploitation of the layout area Part connections unroutes airlines are dynamically calculated and instantly displayed during placement Parts can be rotated at arbitrary angles and they can be mirrored for SMT applications Parts can be placed at arbitrary coordinates and polar coordinates are supported for placing parts on a circle The part library supports part specific preferences for part rotation and part mirroring During manual placement an alternate package type can be selected for the currently processed part The system supports genuine net orientated Connectivity This means
94. only performs an automatic keystroke program calls if the corresponding program is available in uicprog vdb A special method of implicit User Language program call is provided with the startup sequence of the interpreter environment This feature automatically executes a User Language program with a predefined name when starting an interpreter environment scm st in Schematic Editor ged st in Layout Editor ar st in Autorouter cam st in CAM Processor cv st in CAM View thus e g allowing for automatic system parameter setup Bartels User Language also provides system functions for performing key programming and menu assignments Using these functions e g in User Language startup programs provides a convenient way of dynamically changing the Bartels AutoEngineer user interface Another special User Language system function is provided for calling User Language programs from other User Language programs Examples Call the User Language program named ulprog File Run User Script Program Name ulprog Utilities Page 7 58 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Files ulcprog vdb BAE User Language database in BAE programs directory See also User Language Compiler Schematic Editor Layout Editor Autorouter CAM Processor CAM View USERLIST Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide Diagnosis The error messages issued by
95. output such as plated and or non plated drill holes or drill holes defined on blind and buried vias whichever is assigned with the selected drill class Use the following commands to set the drill tool tolerance to 0 05mm generate the drill data output file demo dr1 for the drill class Z which is used on the currently loaded layout and write the drill tool table file demo to1 Drilling Insertion Tool Range H Drill Tolerance Range 0 1mm 0 05 Drill Output mon New Drilling Class A Z Drill Data File Name demo drl Tool Table Output Tool Table File Name demo tol A dash string input to the drilling class prompt selects those drill holes for output which are not assigned to any specific drill class The CAM Processor issues a Drill data write done message after successfully generating the drill data output PCB Design CAD Page 4 138 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual With the commands above a drill tool table file named demo to1 with the following contents is generated Drill Number Drill Diameter mm 0 50 80 T90 00 30 00 With the commands above a drill data file named demo dr1 with the following contents is generated z X1016Y762T6 X1016Y6350 M30 PCB Design CAD Page 4 139 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 14 Insertion Data The Drilling Insertion menu provides functions for generating output data for automatic in
96. pad by moving in a circular path Finger pads rectangles with semi circles at two opposite sides are plotted like trace segments i e line draws with matching circular apertures are applied on finger pads Area fill techniques are applied for pads which don t meet the above specification A draw is used for trace widths matching a round aperture For trace widths that don t match an aperture overlapping lines are drawn using the next smallest round aperture Irregularly shaped areas are always generated using fill techniques PCB Design CAD Page 4 132 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Gerber Aperture Table The Load Aperture Table Save Aperture Table and Del Aperture Table functions from the Gerber Photoplof menu are used to load save and delete Gerber aperture tables The function provides a list of all of the available Gerber aperture tables The Load Aperture Table function issues an error message such as Gerber aperture table overflow when trying to load aperture tables containing more than 900 apertures Such errors indicate a corrupt cam dat file since the Bartels AutoEngineer it is not capable of creating and or processing aperture tables with more than 900 apertures When starting the CAM Processor the aperture table named standard is automatically loaded Table 4 4 lists all apertures defined with the standard aperture table Table 4 4 Ger
97. positioning of SMD parts during the soldering process T shaped connections are automatically generated full copper sharing PCB Design CAD Page 4 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The routing progress can be watched both graphically and on statistical readout on the Autorouter user interface The Autorouter can be stopped at any time and then continued or re started with changed parameters on demand Features are provided for automatically adapting layouts to placement and or net list changes re entrant routing where the Autorouter evaluates pre routed traces identifies and removes wrong and redundant paths and then routes open connections to achieve a correct 10096 solution Subsequently the modified layout can be optimized again All of today s advanced PCB technologies are fully supported by the Bartels Autorouter The Autorouter is able to consider and or connect arbitrarily shaped pads traces copper areas power planes and keepout areas The built in off grid recognition allows off grid placement of parts and pre routed traces The Autorouter supports standard routing grids with optional half grid routing 1 20 inch to 1 100 and or 1 200 inch arbitrary routing grids for special pin pitches and grid free routing Multilayer SMD technologies are supported by the Autorouter s SMD via preplace and BGA Ball Grid Array fanout routing algorithms which can optionally be used if via pre allocation is required for connecting SMD
98. power planes with specific net assignment generates split power planes whilst passive power planes without net assignment result in isolated areas on the power layer The width of the power plane isolation can be adjusted with the Power Layer Isolation function from the Plot Parameters menu The default power plane isolation width is 0 3mm PCB Design CAD Page 4 125 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Power Layer Pin Isolation Pins not connected to the power layer and or the power plane net are isolated by placing filled circles at the corresponding pin drill holes The isolation circle diameters are calculated from the drill hole diameters and the plot parameters to be set with the P iS Min Distance and P IS Tolerance functions from the Plot Parameters menu The P iS Min Distance function is used to specify the minimum distance between the edge of the drill hole and the outside of the isolation circle placed in the power layer The default value for the power layer isolation minimum distance is 0 4mm The P IS Tolerance function is used to specify the outward tolerance of the isolation area The default value for the power layer isolation is 0 5mm The minimum isolation circle diameter is calculated as in Drill Diameter 2 x P IS Min Distance The maximum isolation circle diameter is calculated as in Drill Diameter 2 x P IS Min Distance 2 x P IS Tolerance Figure 4 11 illustrates the ef
99. pull down menu The left mouse button provides fast access to the previously processed function i e pressing the left mouse button re activates the same function as was processed with the previous operation The function currently assigned to the left mouse button is displayed in the BAE window title bar Right clicking the toolbar button fj provides quick access to the 16 last called menu functions The Windows pull down menus as well as the menu functions are context sensitive i e they are only selectable when currently applicable otherwise they are faded out ghost menus Menu separator lines are used throughout the Windows pull down menu system to separate function groups The Windows and Motif versions provide context menus with element specific functions which can be activated by right clicking elements in the graphic workarea The fj properties key activates a dialog for displaying and or modifying the properties of the element at the current mouse position For certain functions such as file name selection the BAE Windows Motif user interfaces provide Windows and or Motif specific dialogs or popup menus instead of BAE standard popup menus Scrollbars are displayed with BAE Windows and Motif workarea text popups to provide unrestricted access to the contents of lengthy listings and or protocols The cursor arrow keys can be used under Windows and Motif to scroll the BAE display by hal
100. set of technology dependent pin definitions can be defined e g SMD pad definitions for a special SMT soldering process or annular pad shapes for manual drilling Functions such as Replace Element Or Update Library can be utilized for copying a technology part to a certain project file in order to include pin and or pad definitions requested for a special manufacturing process Creating Library Elements The New function from the File menu is used in both the Schematic Editor and the Layout Editor for creating new BAE library and design elements After specifying the new element library hierarchy level the user is asked for the name of the DDB file where the element is to be stored the name of the element to be created and the element boundaries Subsequently the element is defined by placing elements from subordinate library hierarchy levels and by creating additional objects such as documentary graphic text drill holes contact areas keepout areas etc whichever is permissible on the currently edited library hierarchy level SQL Functions Relational Databases Bartels User Language provides SQL Structured Query Language functions for maintaining relational databases thus introducing powerful software tools for programming database management systems These tools e g can be utilized for integrating a component database to the Bartels AutoEngineer to perform stock and cost expenditure analysis on differe
101. set the CAM origin to an arbitrary point inside the element boundaries It is always possible to avoid negative output coordinates which certain output devices might not be able to understand and or process The plot parameter dialog of the CAM Processor Windows and Motif versions provides a button for resetting the CAM origin to its default position Plot CAM Rotate The function provides the options No Rotate and Left Rotate The No Rotate option sets the 0 degree plot rotation which is the default The Rotate Lei option produces a 90 degree counter clockwise rotated plot output Negative output coordinates might be produced when rotating plots Some printers or plotters refuse to process negative coordinates The Rotate Left option automatically moves the CAM origin from the lower left to the upper left corner of the element or vice versa thus ensuring positive output coordinates only However does not change arbitrary CAM origin settings i e positive output coordinates must then be enforced by replacing the CAM origin manually see above To indicate CAM rotation mode settings a mirror mode specific example text and an arrow are placed at the CAM origin marker if CAM mirroring and or rotation is selected PCB Design CAD Page 4 122 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Plot CAM Mirror The Plot CAM Mirror function provides options for mirroring the CAM output Plot Parameter
102. signal layers Clearance Check Parameters The pistance functions from the Settings menu are used to set the clearance check parameters for the currently loaded layout Different Distance functions can be activated from the Settings menu Settings Distance TR TR Distance TR CO Distance CO CO The Distance TR TR function is used to set the minimum trace to trace distance Distance TR CO is used to set the minimum trace to copper distance and Distance CO CO is used to set the minimum copper to copper distance checking parameter When creating new layouts the default spacing value is set to 0 8mm for each clearance check parameter The distance check parameters are applied by the Design Rule Check and should be set according to manufacturing requirements before starting with the layout design Note that too tolerant spacing parameters will produce wasted PCBs thus involving expensive redesign and re manufacturing requirements Non default net specific minimum distance settings introduced with the MINDIST net attribute are also considered by the Design Rule Check when performing clearance checks on traces and or active copper areas PCB Design CAD Page 4 47 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 3 2 Parts Placement On layout hierarchy level the Paris menu provides functions for placing moving and deleting parts for changing part names and for man
103. specification Single character option specifications optionally followed by a mode or toggle number are often known as switches or flags Listing Option 1 The 1 option is used to control the listing file output Omitting this option suppresses listing output The 1 option generates a rule compilation listing file The listing output file name is derived from the corresponding source code file name with the original file name extension replaced by 1st The listing file is for user information purposes only i e it is not required by system Examples Files Compilation of the rules defined in rout std rul the compiled rules are stored with the name routstd to the brules vdb file of the BAE programs directory gt rulecomp routstd Compilation of the rules defined in rout std rul with listing file output to rout std 1st the compiled rules are stored with the name routstd to the brules vdb file of the BAE programs directory gt rulecomp routstd 1 brules vdb BAE rules data file in BAE programs directory See also Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 6 Utilities Page 7 50 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Diagnosis The error messages issued by RULECOMP are intended to be self explanatory Warnings RULECOMP is a powerful software tool for implementing rules for automatically generating and or manipulating Bartels AutoEngineer design data It is strongly recommended to test each new rule in a no
104. started with explicit program name specification using the Run User Script function from the File menu empty string or question mark input to the program name query activates a User Language program selection menu User Language programs can also be called by simply pressing special keys of the keyboard This method of implicit User Language program call is supported at any time unless another interactive keyboard input request is currently pending The name of the User Language program to be called is automatically derived from the pressed key i e pressing a standard and or function key triggers the activation of a User Language program with a corresponding name such as cam 1 for digit key fi cam r for standard key f cam for standard key f cam 11 for function key F1 cam f2 for function key F2 etc The CAM Processor User Language Interpreter environment also features event driven User Language program calls where User Language programs with predefined names are automatically started at certain events and or operations such as CAM ST at CAM Processor module startup CAM LOAD after loading a design element CAM SAVE before saving a design element CAM TOOL at the selection of a toolbar item and CAM ZOOM at the change of the zoom factor The module startup User Language program call method is most useful for automatic system parameter setup as well as for key programming and menu assignments The element save and load program call method
105. superfluous i e the full circle definition can be completed with the Donel submenu function to be activated after setting the arc center point The algorithm for picking polygon corners and polygon segments picks the polygon element with minimum distance from the pick point if more than one possible pick element is within snapping distance This allows for reliable selection of polygon elements even when working in small zoom overview display modes PCB Design CAD Page 4 18 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Project and Version Control Attributes The pltfname element file path name pltfsname element file name and pltename element name texts can be placed to display the project file path name the project file name without directory path and the element name of the currently loaded element The Splttime current time p1tdatede current date German notation and pltdateus current date US notation system attributes are substituted with the current time and or date when displayed and or plotted on layout level The Spltstime save time pltsdatede save date German notation and Spltsdateus save date US notation system attributes are substituted with the time and date at which the currently loaded layout was last saved Automatic time and date substitutions are applied throughout all database hierarchy levels pad padstack part layout unless other attribute va
106. system functions for performing key programming changing menu assignments and defining toolbars These powerful features can be applied for user interface modifications Please note that a large number of additional functions included with the Schematic Editor menu are implemented through the User Language programs delivered with the BAE software See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language chapter 4 2 lists all User Language programs provided with the BAE software Neural Rule System A series of advanced Bartels AutoEngineer features are implemented through the integrated Neural Rule System See chapter 6 3 1 for the rule system applications provided with the Schematic Editor Circuit Design CAE Page 2 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 2 SCM Library Symbol Design The Bartels AutoEngineer is shipped with a series of extensive SCM libraries Nevertheless you might require a certain symbol which has not yet been defined in these libraries This section shows in detail how to create SCM library symbols Some example symbols are created step by step starting with the lowest DDB hierarchy level l e first of all a pin symbol on marker level is defined subsequently an SCM part symbol on symbol level is defined and finally two label symbols on label level are defined All these symbols will be stored to a DDB file named demo ddb Use the following commands to mov
107. that electrical connections can be realized through copper areas instead of traces connecting Traces and copper areas can be created in grid free mode with floating point precision Highlight is used to indicate the selected and or processed signal and each point of the signal can be connected The system also supports arc shaped traces as well as blind and buried vias with automatic via type selection The BAE layout system provides powerful automatic copper fill functions Copper areas can optionally be generated with line or cross hatching The BAE layout system also supports power layer definitions Arbitrarily shaped active copper areas can be placed on power layers thus featuring split power planes High frequency and analogous applications are supported by useful facilities for shrinking and or enlarging copper areas at arbitrary expansion values Trace segment lengths and copper area edge lengths can automatically be determined or measured for test or documentation purposes With the Bartels User Language integrated to the Layout Editor the user is able to implement enhanced CAD functions and macros user specific post processors report and test functions etc User Language programs can be called by applying the Run User Script function from the Biel menu or by pressing a key on the keyboard hot key PCB Design CAD Page 4 5 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Autoplacement The BAE layout system is equ
108. that workspaces larger than necessary are worsening performance at screen redraw zoom pan and certain other functions It is a good idea to shrink each element s workspace element workspaces can easily be enlarged at any time lateron Group Functions The Bartels AutoEngineer group functions allow powerful manipulation in both the Schematic Editor and the Layout Editor The group functions are featuring set principles Groups can be defined either by selecting individual items or by defining the area around the items that you want to select Choice of item types and the ability to de select with the same technique makes it easy to define a group Group selected elements are marked by highlight and these are the only objects to be affected by subsequent group functions Groups can be moved copied deleted or saved and loaded When saved they are stored as an element of the same type as that from which the group was selected and can be accessed by the appropriate editor When saved a group origin must be defined which becomes the origin of the new element and is used as the reference point for group load commands Group facilities can be used for a variety of tasks such as replicating circuitry and or tracking saving and loading standard SCM blocks or PCB templates stealing from existing and proven designs etc Undo Redo With the Undo and Redo functions from the Edi menu the Bartels AutoEngineer can be use
109. the PCB manufacturer since there might be PCBs produced containing short circuits The CAM View module of the Bartels AutoEngineer can be used to perform visual checks and panelization on the generated Gerber data see chapter 4 8 for a description of the CAM View module PCB Design CAD Page 4 137 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 13 Drill Data The Drilling insertion menu provides functions for generating drilling data output in Excellon II and or Sieb amp Meier format The CAM View module can be used to perform visual checks coordinates sorting and panelization on the generated drilling data see chapter 4 8 for more details Excellon The Excellon Drill Oui function from the Drillingsinsertion menu is used for generating drilling data in Excellon Il format With Excellon Il format both the drilling data and the drilling tool table are stored to a single output file The Drill Data Device function can be used to specify a default name for the Excellon output file The Tool Range function is used to define the tolerance for selecting drill tools The default value for the drill tolerance is 0 10mm With the function the drill class must be specified thus providing a feature for selecting different types of drill holes for output such as plated and or non plated drill holes or drill holes defined on blind and buried vias whichever is assigned with the selected drill class A dash string input t
110. the User Language Interpreter are intended to be self explanatory Warnings The Bartels User Language Interpreter is a powerful tool for starting programs for the manipulation of DDB file contents and for generating CAM data Even the BAE user interface can be considerably changed and or extended with User Language programs It is advisable to test each new User Language program in a non critical environment test software installation test jobs backup of real jobs etc until confidence in the program is established for unrestricted use on real jobs It is also strongly recommended to ensure security e g to prevent foreign persons from implanting destructive User Language programs to ulcprog vdb Utilities Page 7 59 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 17 USERLIST Name userlist User Programmable List Generator Synopsis userlist scriptfile projectfile jobname Description The USERLIST utility program is a user programmable ASCII list generator USERLIST interprets the user defined USERLIST script lt scriptfile gt usf analyzes the net list named lt jobname gt from the requested job file lt projectfile gt ddb and produces a text output listing file named lt projectfile gt lt ext gt The listing file extension lt ext gt the output format and the type of net list information to be extracted are defined in the lt scriptfile gt usf userlist script Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The USERLIST s
111. the part contour Areas Add Document Line Insertion Plan Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 1 6 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Arc Right Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Done The definition of the hole3mm part symbol is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 41 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 3 Designing PCB Layouts The layout level is the top hierarchy level of the BAE PCB design system database On layout level the PCB contour is defined the parts from the subordinate layout part level are placed keepout areas power planes and copper areas are defined the traces are routed and finally the CAM output is generated Drawing items and text can be created on layout level for such things as plot registration markers measurement project identification etc This section explains how to use the basic functions for creating layouts placing parts creating text and documentary graphic and performing manual routing A layout named board will be created in the demo ddb DDB file and the layout symbols generated in the preceding chapters will be used on that layout Use the following commands to move to the BAE examples directory i e where the example job file demo ddb resides e g c baejobs and start the Bartels AutoEngineer c El
112. the source file name specification if wildcard recognition is activated see option wcon above Source file names can be specified with or without file name extension On source file name specifications without extension the Compiler automatically assumes and or appends file name extension ulc l e source file names with non default extension must be specified with their extension respectively It is possible to e g generate User Language libraries from include files usually named with extension ulh The type of User Language machine code to be generated is designated with either option cp User Language programs see below or option c1 User Language libraries see below The name of the machine code element to be generated is derived from the source file name by stripping the directory path and the file name extension from the source file name Non default destination program and or library element names can be specified with options cp and c1 see below The Source and or S option keywords are not required with source file specifications where file names cannot be intermixed with other name specifications e g if source file names are the first names specified on the ULC command line However the Source and or s option can be used for explicit source file specification to avoid ambiguities in case where source file names are not the first name specifications on the ULC command line At least one source file specification is required
113. the system to interpret the value in Radians instead of default Degree units All numeric input fields of the BAE dialogs support simple arithmetic expressions with add subtract multiply and divide operators and round brackets An equal sign at the end of the expression causes the system to calculate and display the result immediately in the input field Otherwise the expression is evaluated when the dialog box closes successfully This allows for e g a Jump relative to be carried out through a Jump absolute dialog with the relative coordinates added to the absolute coordinates using the operator File Management Most of the BAE functions require an element e g SCM sheet layout board library symbol etc to be loaded A particular element is specified by element type file name and element name The element name is the unique name of the element in the selected design database DDB file The process of loading an element is activated after specifying the element name There are two methods for specifying file and element names Either select the file and or element name with popup menu and mouse pick or perform direct keyboard input by typing in the name to the corresponding input line prompt The file name of the currently loaded element is used if you select the popup menu button or if you type in an empty string by pressing the return key 5 to the file name prompt DDB file name queries in the Schematic Edito
114. to define a drill symbol by creating a documentary line on the Drill Plan Both Sides documentary layer it is recommended to select the inch coordinate display mode and to set the input grid to 1 80 inch during polygon definition the polygon corner point coordinates can be taken from the info field displayed on the right top of the user interface Settings Coordinate Display Display Inch Grids Rotation Set Input Grid 1 80 Inch Grid Rotation On Areas Add Document Line E Drill Plan Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 I Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Done Defining a Keepout Area Use the following commands to create a circle shaped keepout area with a diameter of 0 9mm on the rill Plan Both Sides documentary layer Areas Add Keep Out Area Document Layer Drill Plan Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 45 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Arc Left Move to Origin 0 0 Done The Design Rule Check will mutually check keepout areas on documentary layers l e the keepout area definition from the example above will cause the DRC to indicate distance errors at via drill hole overlaps inadvertently introduced by manual routing Saving the Element The definition of the via padstack symbol is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element P
115. to set special display attributes for selectable areas The Visible always option is the default display mode for any area Visible always defines the selected area to be always visible The Misiole unmirrored option defines the selected area to be visible only when unmirrored i e when placed on the component side The Visible mirrored option defines the selected area to be visible only when mirrored e when placed on the solder side The Mirror Display function can be used on part padstack and pad level lt is possible to define SMD parts with differently shaped pads or keepout areas depending on which side of the board the part is placed for supporting different soldering processes on solder and or component side Use the following commands to load the pad symbol p1206 from the demo ddb DDB file File Load Element Pad File Name demo Element Name p1206 There is finger shaped contact area defined on the currently loaded p1206 pad Use the following commands to define this copper area to be visible only when unmirrored i e when placed on the component side Areas Em Mirror Display Move to Area Edge Visible unmirrored Now the component side pad shape is defined Use the following commands to define a rectangle shaped passive copper area to be visible only when mirrored i e when placed on the solder side Areas Add Passive Copper Jump Absolute Absolute
116. type prompt causes the system to delete the selected entry from the aperture table After specifying the aperture type the system prompts for the diameter and or the edge length s of the aperture The aperture size can be input in either mm or inch units and is automatically be converted to mm units in the aperture table The next prompt is used for specifying the aperture drawing mode where Flash defines the aperture to be used for flashes only 1 Line defines the aperture to be used for line drawing only and a All defines for either flash or line drawing whatever is appropriate The last aperture definition prompt is used for specifying the Gerber D Code number of the aperture where valid D Codes range from 10 to 999 It is strongly recommended to ensure unique D Codes in each Gerber aperture table to prevent the CAM Processor from random use of multiple defined D Codes Note that square shaped and rectangular aperture can be used for flashing orthogonal placed pads only It is also strongly recommended to check whether the PCB manufacturer supports rectangular apertures PCB Design CAD Page 4 134 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to define a round line aperture with 0 3mm diameter and D Code 10 at aperture table index 1 Gerber Photoplot Edit Aperture Table Gerber Aperture Table Index 1 900 1 Aperture R ound S Q uare T hermal S pecial A rea a r Aperture Diameter S
117. value settings which prompt the Packager to assign gates to layout parts with matching unique attribute values only The swap commands adhere to such assignments and swap gates only between layout parts with matching unique attribute values l e the lunique setting can be used to control the packaging of gates with different attribute values without using Srpname attributes This is useful for certain part types such as resistor arrays part ra sol6r sol r 1 newattr Sval unique pin 1 16 swap internal CO LO 27S KS TANA ISO CES TA NG KAEO CT O NG UK ad EO Ne Utilities Page 7 39 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The following example illustrates the application of the unique value in the definition of an opamp with power supply assignents through attribute values part op Im324 dill4 pin io net Svplus 4 net Svminus 11 newattr Svplus unique newattr Svminus unique zlat AE i 0 wo da Se db or 9 10 8 or Ei Swap internal 2737107 6 ar 7 2 TO BN IS MAMA netattr Command The netattr command can be used for the design of special SCM symbols for setting net attributes The formal syntax of the netattr command is netattr lt netatt gt S lt attname gt lt pinlist gt where lt netatt gt is the name of the net attribute lt attname gt is the name of the part attribute to be mapped to the net attribute and lt pinlist gt
118. without global net assignment hence with split power planes to be considered by connectivity PCB Design CAD Page 4 94 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual DRC Error Display The Betings dialog from the Layout Editor View menu provides the DRC Error Display parameter for selecting DRC distance and height rule violation error display modes and or colors The option displays error boxes using the error color selected with the Change Colors function the default of which is white The Highlight Layer setting displays error rectangles using the color selected for the layer on which the erroneous element is placed Errors on layers which are faded out through Change Colors are not displayed The Layout Editor Utilities menu provides the DRC Error List function for displaying the DRC distance and height rule violation error lists The DRC errors are listed in a popup menu indicating error type error layer and error coordinates for each error A Zoom Window to the error position ist triggered when selecting an error from the list using the left mouse button The f and keys can be used to move the zoom window through the error position list in either direction Note that the modified BAE HighEnd data structure for storing the layout connectivity data allows for a selective shortcut display i e shortcuts between two nets are displayed by
119. 0 Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name r Move to 60 130 The Next Symbol function is used to place an automatically named part which refers the same symbol as with the preceding symbol load operation Use the following commands to place three more resistor symbols on the circuit diagram Symbols Next Symbol Label H Move to 100 130 Ma Next Symbol Label TI Move to 140 130 ia Next Symbol Label H Move to 180 130 aia Next Symbol Label H Move to 210 130 aia Circuit Design CAE Page 2 34 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Pressing the right mouse button during symbol placement will activate a submenu which provides functions such as specifying absolute placement coordinates symbol rotation and symbol mirroring Use the following commands to load another resistor symbol rotate it and place it at coordinate 170 170 Symbols Lei Next Symbol Label Rotate Left Move to 170 170 E The Schematic Editor provides a function for setting a default rotation angle for symbol placement operations If you intend to place a series of symbols at a special rotation angle and or mirror mode it is most useful to set the default rotation angle accordingly thus avoiding the need of explicitly specifying the rotation angle for each symbol Use the following commands to set the default symbol placement rotation angle to 90 degree Symbols Set Default Angle m 90 Degree
120. 04 minimelf P E105 chipi1206 P s1000 sldilo U s1001 sldilo U s1002 Sidilo U s1003 sldilo U s1004 sldilo U s1005 sidilo U s1006 sldilo Beeler U s1008 sldilo U s1009 51dilo Wis vd T092 P v1000 d04a25 P x11000 xsubd9bl P End Each part is listed with part name library name and placement status respectively The placement status is indicated using either of the characters U P or S U indicates that the part is neither placed nor selected for placement P indicates that the part is already placed on the layout S indicates that the part is not yet placed but selected for subsequent placement operations Press fx and the return key Elto exit from the parts list Use the following commands to select all unplaced parts with part names starting with an r Parts Part Set Part s Select Part Name Part Name The Select and Deseleci part set selection options from the Pari s function also provide a popup menu for part selections With the Select option the popup menu only displays unselected parts whilst with the Deselect option only selected parts are displayed A part name pattern can be entered for part set selections The above commands selected the two resistors r100 and r101 for subsequent placement operations You can check this with the function see placement status s for these two parts The Wl function can be used to select all unplaced parts for place
121. 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 084 Part layoutpartname different values for attributename variantnumber valuel lt gt value2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED 033 Part layoutpartname double defined NOT YET DOCUMENTED 090 Part layoutpartname mainpart unused NOT YET DOCUMENTED 082 Part layoutpartname multiple values for attributename valuel lt gt value2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED 085 Pin layoutpartname layoutpartpinname diff values for attributename variantnumber valuel lt gt value2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED 083 Pin layoutpartname layoutpartpinname multiple values for attributename valuel lt gt value2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED 069 Pin layoutpartpinname invalid pin function pinfunctionspecification NOT YET DOCUMENTED 053 Pin layoutpartpinname multiple section assignment NOT YET DOCUMENTED 075 Pin layoutpartpinname not found for attribute attributename assignment NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 23 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 038 Pin layoutpartpinname used more than once or differently NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 073 Pin symbolbuspinname bus name too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 063 Pin symbolpinname assignment not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 039 Pin symbolpinname connected differently NOT YET
122. 5 2 12 Starting the Schematic EditOF sesse eene ee sae ee Ee ER Rae RR Re ER Rae RR Re ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae ek Ee AE REG RE RE ee ER ae 2 6 21 3 Schematic Editor Main Men ana ese esse Ee ee Seg see KS EK ek Ee ek eo ee ee Re Ke Ee aaa 2 7 2 14 Customized Schematic Editor User Interface esse esse see RE ER Re KEER ER Re AK RE RR Ee e RR e KRRee KRAKE ee ka 2 9 2 1 5 In built Schematic Editor System Features esse esse esse ee Re ER EE RR AR RE AR Ee ER Re AR Re ek EER REGEER Ee RR Ee EE 2 10 SCM Library Symbol Design ide ai ee eek ek ed Naa 2 12 2 2 1 Creating SCM Markers is ie cast ices eden vases EE sede EES EE DNE eene EE EDGE EE 2 13 2 2 2 Creating SCM Symbols GEELEN NAA KANA BKA AA 2 16 223 Creating e AMET 2 26 Designing SCM Circuits sissies sk EE GR NEGE EE Ge Gee Eed Ek KG de eek es ed 2 30 2 3 1 Creating and Editing SCM Plans 1 1 esse ee EE AE RE AR EE AE RE AR EE AK Re AR EE AK Re AR EE AR Re RR EER KERE RR Ee AR Ee EE 2 31 vie RENE Se ER GE ER AA Da aa paa 2 32 2 3 3 Connections Labels BUSSES aaa EN GE Gee GESKEER ER GEL EG Ek ERG Re Ge SEENEN ee ED 2 40 2 34 Textand MET UE 2 48 Special SCM Function sessies seke sade Ge eks AE ERG Ed SG OR EE Ke Ge GR N GN de eN ke Ge de dd 2 49 2 4 1 Virtual Symbols N N EL EE OE EE N RE EE 2 49 242 E 0 ANA NANANA A ee EE EE ER ee eee EE De 2 50 2 4 3 Plug Pin Assignment esse Aa 2 52 2 4 4 d d aa EE RE ER N EE EE N TEE 2 53
123. 5 In built Schematic Editor System Features eise esse esse ee Re ER EER RR ER EER RE RR Ee AR Re RR Ee RR Re KEER REG EE 2 10 2 2 SCM Library Symbol Design EER EER RR RE EE ER RR GG GEE RRR RR E ER RR Ge Gee ee RR 2 12 2 2 1 Creating SCH Markers NAAN EE EE OR EE 2 13 2 2 2 Creating SCM Symbols iss esse se ve EENEG EK Ee Re N KG GEE n Wa Gee EER GR Ge We Ee Ke ee Bee EE ee EG EE Ke Ge Ee eke 2 16 223 Creating SCM Labele esse GE EE BEE Heg Ee Ed RE Ee KEEL De ee GEE be kn ek Be GRAD 2 26 23 Designing SCM Circuit iss esse se KG dee eke dB ee Gee eN Sk ek Ge ed Ne ee ee 2 30 2 3 1 Creating and Editing SCM Plans 1 122 ee EE AE RE AR EER RE AR EER Re ER RE AR Ee AR EE AR Ee RR EER KERE eR nunne 2 31 23 2 Symbols EERS KAR s RO ee eege NA a 2 32 2 3 3 Connections Labels BUSS S aaa aNG AA 2 40 2 34 Text and GraphiG NN NALANG Ad 2 48 2 4 Special SCM FunclionS ANAKAN ke ae de RGN DR AA RS ee ede LR AE 2 49 2 4 1 ROER dd EE NE OR EE RE OR AA 2 49 24 2 GrOUDS KANAN NENA NA NGA T RE N ee ee ee EE SE DE De 2 50 2 4 3 Plug Pin Assignment esse ee a 2 52 2 44 Net AftributeS ier RR nananana 2 53 24 5 Tag Kl e E 2 53 ZAG Kl UE 2 53 2 4 7 Exiting the Schematic Editor ccsccssecsseeeseeeeeseeeeseeenseesnseeenseeeaseesnseeseeeassenesaseesaseesseeeeaseeeneeneas 2 54 2 5 SCM Plot IBU aa AA AA AA AA Re WEE RA vi 2 55 2 5 1 General Plot Parameters AKN BAGA ee Eed EE sk ee 2 55 252 HPGL MOE ER EE OK
124. 6 and copy that group to the right Groups Group Polygon All Select Move to 50 10 Move to 110 10 Move to 110 80 Move to 50 80 Doe EI Copy Group Move to 70 70 Move to 130 70 Reset Group With the commands above three symbols and two labels have been placed and a series of connections have been generated Note that the system has performed automatic part naming on the copied symbols Circuit Design CAE Page 2 50 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual If you have executed all operations of this paragraph correctly then sheet 1 of your circuit diagram should look like the one shown in figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 SCM Sheet Demo Sheet1 Don t forget to save the circuit drawing with the following commands File IW Save Element HD The save operation can be activated at any time It is recommended to save the design generally after a certain time of editing to minimize any possible loss of data caused by power failure hardware crash etc Group Symbol Numbering The submenus to be activated during group placement with the Load Group and functions provide the New Names option This option renames and or renumbers all currently selected parts according to their symbol part name patterns with part numbering starting at 1 and collisions with existing part names being avoided This feature can be used for creating consecutive part numbering for the currently selected symbol group Circuit Desig
125. AD Page 4 85 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Diagonal Routing Cost The Optimizer considers the Diagonal Cost setting on routing layers where the Diagonal routing option is selected see Optimize function above A high diagonal routing cost factor causes the Optimizer to use more diagonal routes A low diagonal routing cost factor results in less diagonal routing The diagonal cost value can range from 0 to 10 the default value is 5 Off Grid Routing Cost The Off Grid Cost setting is used by the Router and the Optimizer and is considered when routing with the half grid option see above A high off grid routing cost factor results in less use of the sub grid A low off grid routing cost factor permits frequent use of the sub grid The off grid routing cost value can range from 0 to 5 the default value is 2 Prefered Grid Anti Prefered Grid Cost The Prefered Grid parameter is used for setting a prefered routing grid values range from 0 to 7 0 switches the prefered grid of higher values cause the router to pefer the use of every 2nd 4th 8th 16th 32nd 64th or 128th grid point The Anti Prefered Grid Cost parameter value range 1 to 10 default value 1 is used to set a cost factor for routing outside the prefered grid Prefered grid routing spreads the routing density and takes only effect on layouts with large unoccupied areas Prefered grid routing parameters should be set before the first
126. AM Processor insertion Output function can then be used to print all insertion data layer texts with coordinates and rotation angles l e the insertion data text position must exactly match the appropriate part pick point for the automatic insertion equipment and it is also recommended to disable reference text movement by setting the PHYSICAL text mode for the insertion data documentary layer see chapter 7 2 for the description of the BSETUP utility program and how to define documentary layers Defining the Origin Use the following commands to set the part symbol origin to pin 1 Settings Set Origin Move to Pin 1 0 1 0 1 Cl The part origin is the reference point for placing the part on the layout On packages with drilled pins usually the first pin position is used whilst on SMD packages the origin is usually set to the part center point i e the pin gravity point It is recommended to refrain from off grid origin settings in order to avoid off grid pin placement on the layout since on grid items make the job much easier for the Autorouter and of course for the manufacturing process Saving the Element The definition of the r04a25 part symbol is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 37 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating an SMD Part Use the following commands to create a new part symbol named so14 14 pi
127. Applications A series of advanced Bartels AutoEngineer features are implemented through the integrated Neural Rule System This chapter describes the rule system applications provided with the Schematic Editor and the PCB layout system 6 3 1 Circuit Design Rule System Applications Antenna Highlight Mode Assigning the scm pin drc rule on SCM sheet or project file level causes pins to be highlighted which only have a short single segment connection Usually such pins are highlighted to provide a function for fading out pins which are not to be connected The sem pin drc rule is defined in the scm rul rule definition file from the User Language directory baeulc The SCMRULE User Language program supports rule assignments to SCM paln elements and or project files SCMRULE can be called through or through the function from the menu if UIFSETUP is activated Warning The antenna highlight mode can only be activated if the sem cul rule definition file and thus the scm pin dre rule has been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory l e the rules are not saved with the design When transferring the design onto a different computer the scm pin drc rule must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise antenna highlight mode assignments won t work Bus Display Mode Assigning the scm bus fill rule on SCM sheet level causes busses to be display
128. Autorouter run Later changes to these parameters require multiple time consuming optimizer runs Note also that high cost factors could cause detouring routes Outside Net Type Area Cost BAE HighEnd The Outside Net Type Area Cost strategy parameter is only supported in BAE HighEnd A high cost factor prevents nets from being routed outside their net specific routing areas a low cost factor allows for nets to be routed outside their routing areas more frequently The net area cost factor can range from 0 to 5 the default value is 1 PCB Design CAD Page 4 86 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 8 Autorouter Functions The Autorouter supports various routing algorithms and autorouter procedures such as Full Autorouter initial routing SMD fanout routing rip up retry routing Optimizer re entrant routing etc These routing procedures can be activated from the Autoroute menu functions Full Autorouter Optimizer Load Layout Batch Setup Batch Start the Control menu SMD Via Pre Place function and the interaction menu Route Single Ne Route Single Pari Place and Route Activating an autorouting procedure after changing basic routing parameters such as signal layer count routing grid half grid option standard trace width standard minimum distance or pin contact mode discards the currently unfixed traces and vias and re routes the layout with changed options
129. Backannotation Page 3 13 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 076 Attribut data for symbol symbolname sheet sheetname is missing NOT YET DOCUMENTED 027 Block instance of net name netname too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 026 Block instance of port name moduleportname too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 028 Block instance of symbol name symbolname too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 044 Cannot change library name for symbolname Missing default command in logical definition NOT YET DOCUMENTED 040 Cannot translate logical pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 060 Cannot translate symbol symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 127 Conflicting Snetname net name assignments netnamel netname2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED 013 Connection list changed in layout layoutname projectfilename Run Packager anyway NOT YET DOCUMENTED 102 Database limit exceeded NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 Packager Backannotation Page 3 14 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 094 Database read write error filename NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 093 Database read write error NOT YET DOCUMENTED 106 Database record elementname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 105 Database record not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 098 Database structure corrupt filename NOT YET DOCUMENTED 097
130. CB Design CAD Page 4 29 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a Padstack Symbol for plated through Pins Use the following commands to create a padstack symbol named q1 4 with an element size of 242mm in DDB file demo ddb File New Padstack File Name demo el Element Name mg 48 Element Width mm 2 6E Element Height mm 2 E Use the following commands to place the pad symbols q1 4 on All Layers signal layer and q1 4sx on Solder Mask Both Sides documentary layer Parts Add Part aaa Select Input Layer All Layers Done Add Part Library Element Name oi Aer Select Input Layer Document Layer Cell Solder Mask Both Sides LC Done Use the following commands to create a documentary line on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer for indicating the pin outline Areas Add Document Line EI Insertion Plan m Move to 0 025 0 025 REI Move to 0 025 0 025 m Move to 0 025 0 025 Move to 0 025 0 025 Move to 0 025 0 025 Done Use the following commands to define a drill hole with a diameter of 0 9mm Text Drill Place Drill Hole O Dise 0 9 5 Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 30 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to define a drill symbol by creating a documentary line on the Drill Plan Both Sides documentary layer Areas Add Docu
131. Check the Bartels Website at http www bartels de for our address IV Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Documentation Notations The reader should be familiar with the following notations used throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer documentation Mouse pointing device mouse trackball etc to be used for moving the menu and graphic cursors as well as for selecting functions menu field on the right top of the screen for displaying system status messages function menu permanently available in the upper right screen area used for selecting a subordinate function menu function menu in the lower right screen area currently selected from main menu subordinate function menu in the lower right screen area activated intermediately whilst using another menu function Graphic Workarea workarea for graphic interaction in the upper left screen area Status Line lower left screen line used for displaying system status messages and for performing interactive user queries Menu Cursor rectangle shaped cursor for selecting a menu function Graphic Cursor cross shaped cursor in the graphic workarea crosshairs Menu Prompt user query in the status line Popup Menu menu optionally displayed on top of the graphic workarea for selecting function specific objects or for activating menu specific functions selectable popup menu entry for choosing a certain menu element or for activating a menu specific function Select Function
132. Cl Move to 290 40 Move to 220 40 Move to 220 10 m Done Add Dot Line Move to 290 20 Move to 220 20 Done Use the following commands to enter the text strings DEMO with text size 10mm and sheet1 with text size 4mm to the previously defined legend box Text Add Text Cl Text DEMO Text Size Text Size 4 00mm 10 Move to 230 25 Add Text Text sheet Text Size Text Size 10 00mm 4 Move to 230 13 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 48 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 4 Special SCM Functions 2 4 1 Virtual Symbols Special design items such as legend boxes company logos etc can also be defined as virtual symbols and then placed to the circuit drawing Use the following commands to place the Logo symbol for displaying the Bartels company logo Symbols Add Symbol aaa rer B Move to 190 10 EI Circuit Design CAE Page 2 49 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 4 2 Groups Group functions belong to the most powerful BAE features These functions can be used for tasks such as move copy delete or replicate arbitrarily selectable parts of the design The group functions are featuring set principles Elements can be added selected to or removed deselected from the currently defined group Highlight display is used to indicate group selected items The Group Polygon function is used to select and or deselect parts traces areas texts or elements of any ty
133. Consequently the Packager was aborted without writing a layout net list to the project file If a layout net list with the selected element name already existed in the project file then this net list is left unchanged and can be reused Please examine the Packager transcript and or log file for the exact error cause s 019 Active Block Schematic Sheet nnn blockname blocksheetname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 018 Active Schematic Sheet sheetname The SCM sheet with the name sheet name is currently being processed Subsequently listed error and warning messages relate to symbols on this sheet 005 Alternate Library File Name alternativelibraryname This message displays the file name of the alternative layout and logical library used by the Packager The Packager fetches and copies required layout part macros and logical library definitions from the alternative library to the project file if these definitions are neither in the project file nor in the default layout library Since the Packager copies required layout part symbols to the project file these part macros are available for subsequent part placement operations in the Layout Editor The Packager saves the alternative library file name parameter in the project file thus eliminating the need for specifying the same parameter again in subsequent Packager runs 121 Assignment for Sgp layoutpartpinname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager
134. DOCUMENTED 074 Pin symbolpinname not found for gate group request NOT YET DOCUMENTED 072 Port pin layoutpartpinname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 117 Questionable Multi Part layoutpartname divergent Snoplc Status NOT YET DOCUMENTED 122 Questionable Part layoutpartname Pin layoutpartpinname pinfunctionname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 113 Questionable Part layoutpartname A problem occurred when processing the layout part with the name Layoutpartname Please examine subsequent error message for more detailed information 114 Questionable Symbol symbolname A problem occurred when processing the schematic symbol with the name symbolname Please examine subsequent error message for more detailed information Packager Backannotation Page 3 24 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 115 Questionable Variant Part layoutpartname A problem occurred when processing the variant layout part with the name layoutpartname Please examine subsequent error message for more detailed information 131 Respectively no pin named layoutpartpinname on part macro layoutpartmacroname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 025 Single Sub Block blockname multiple usage NOT YET DOCUMENTED 057 Swap defined pin layoutpartpinname not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 137 Symbol symbolname attributename not unique valuel lt gt value2 Th
135. DRC parameters etc BICSET accepts the setup file name setupfile as argument this file must have the extension def however this file name extension should be omitted in the command line BICSET translates the setup file and stores the defined setup parameters to a file named bsetup dat in the current directory These parameters are loaded and or activated from the bsetup dat file in the BAE programs directory when starting any of the program modules of the Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design system Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The setup file format must start with the keyword SETUP and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and Sorry this information is currently being updated Utilities Page 7 16 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples The Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design system comes with the following setup file icset def see BAE programs directory SETUP Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design Setup Sorry this information is currently being updated END You can adapt the settings in icset def to your specific requirements and use the BICSET utility program to compile and activate these settings gt bicset icset Files bsetup dat Setup parameter file in BAE programs directory icset def Setup file template See also BAE Shell Chip Editor Cell Placer Cell Router Diagnosis The error messages issued by BICSET are intended t
136. Database structure corrupt NOT YET DOCUMENTED 077 Definition assigned to symbol symbolname has invalid class symbolmacroclass lt gt definitionclass NOT YET DOCUMENTED 003 Design File Name projectfilename This message displays the currently processed project file name The Packager converts the connections and symbols from the schematic sheets of the project file into a layout part and net list 138 Destination layout layoutname loaded by user username NOT YET DOCUMENTED 014 Error calling program module NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 15 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 092 Error creating design database file filename NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 091 Error creating design database file NOT YET DOCUMENTED 110 Error writing ASCII file Error writing free list NOT YET DOCUMENTED 015 Error writing design database NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 100 Errors in file structure filename NOT YET DOCUMENTED 099 Errors in file structure NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 011 Fatal internal error errornumber The Packager aborted due to an unexpected error e g a list element search failed immediately after the element was saved in the list There is likely to be either a hardware problem or an unknown error occurred which is not yet handled by the Packager Please submit t
137. Design a GAGANA 5 1 Manufacturing Data CAM Page 5 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 6 Neural Rule System This chapter describes the Bartels Neural Rule System i e how to define neural rules with the Bartels Rule Specification Language how to compile rule specification source files using the Bartels Rule System Compiler and how to apply neural rules throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer design process Neural Rule System Page 6 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Neural Rule System Page 6 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents SE 6 Neural Rule System sesde CARE Os vd de ve de dek de 6 1 General SEE EE SA RR RE RE ET 6 5 Rul NIE lt e OE 6 6 6 2 1 Bartels Rule Specification Language ese esse ee Re ER Re ER EE ER RA RR ERA ER RA RR EE ER EG RR Ee ER Rae NANANA 6 6 6 2 2 Bartels Rule System Compiler iese esse ee Re ER EE EE RE ER EG EE RE ER EA RR ERA ER KG RR ERA ER KG ER EG ER EG RR Ee ER EG RR Ee ea 6 6 6 3 Rule System Applications sesse ke dee de ks NE Re De N de Re ee eke eed Ki ee 6 7 6 3 1 Circuit Design Rule System Applications esse esse ek ana 6 7 6 3 2 PCB Design Rule System Applications sesse esse ee maana 6 9 Neural Rule System Page 6 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Neural Rule System Page 6 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 6 1 General A Neural Rule System is integrated to the Bartels AutoEngineer This allows for the de
138. E Ge 4 96 4 6 3 Layout Net List ChangeS e iss esse Ese RE EE RA EE AREA REGEER RE KEER ERGER RE RR RE A REG RR EER REG RR EER REG ANAKAN 4 97 4 64 SCM Changes RedesigN e sees ee ee RR RR EE ER EE RR EE ER RA RR EE ER EG RR Ee ER Rae RR Re ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae RR Rae RR Rae KERE ae 4 100 4 6 5 Defining and Editing Power LayerS uses sesse ee EER RR EER RR RE RR ERGER RR EER RR ERGE RR RE GER RR Ee RR RR EER RR RE Rae 4 103 4 6 6 8 Autorouter Via Keepout AreaS sees ere RR RR KERE RR ERGER RR EER RR KEER RR ERGER RR KEER RR KERE ARK REG e RR RR EE RR REGEER 4 104 4 6 7 Area Mirror Mode 1112007 ra 4 105 4 68 Automatic Copper il aa ANG a BAG KANNADA 4 107 4 6 9 Library Update users ER RE RE EER aan RE NAA 4 112 46 10 Back Mettet BANA LA AA aan 4 114 4 6 11 Blind and Buried Via using NAAN 4 115 4 6 12 Exiting the Layout System u s IBA N Ke GE Ke ee See gek ee AA 4 116 GAM PrO ESS EE 4 117 4 7 1 Starting the CAM ProcesSOF eege NAG AA 4 117 4 7 2 CAM Processor Main Menu 21 na 4 118 4 7 3 Customized CAM Processor User Interface cccsecseecsseeeseeeeeeeeesseeesseeaseeeaseeeaseeenseesaeeeeaseenees 4 119 4 7 4 in built CAM Processor System Features cccseccsseesseeesseeesseeenseeesseaeneeeeeneeeaseeeseeeeaseeeneeaeneeeneas 4 120 4 7 5 Plot PararmeterS cscccsssseesessneesesscneeesscceeseneneeseseecensnseceeseseneseusensesensneesenseneneaseeeeseseneesensnenenseeees 4 122 47 6 AE VEE
139. EE EE OE E SEENEN EE 4 125 AA EE lU TEEN 4 128 47 8 HR Laser Qutpu hi AA aaa 4 129 4 7 9 Postscript ii EE N RB EE ER EE 4 130 4 7 10 Windows Generic Output see aaa 4 131 4 7 11 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard 2 1 1 mamamana 4 131 442 Gerber PROtOPlOt is EER ER Ee oe Re Ee N RB padapa tanan 4 132 BARE vi GO OE EE EE NE N EE OE EE EE 4 138 4 7 14 Insertion Data uses ee RR ERA RR REGEER ERA ARK ERA ASAN 4 140 PCB Design CAD Page 4 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 RTE 4 141 4 8 1 Starting the CAM View Module esse esse ese EER ER RE EER ER RE ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER RA ERROR RA RR Re ER ERA KR R ee ER ERA ea 4 141 4 8 2 CAM View Main EL Aa 4 142 4 8 3 Customized CAM View User Interface e sesse ee Ee ee Re ER EE ER EE RR EE ER RA KANA 4 143 4 8 4 in built CAM View System Features esse esse ee Ee ER Re RR EE ER Ee RR EE ER Rae RR Re ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ek Ee ek ae 4 144 4 8 5 _ Processing Gerber Data NAAN GN ANA 4 145 4 8 6 Processing Drilling and Milling Data RE RE RR EER RR EER RR ERGER RR KEER RR KERE RR ERGER RR EER RR KEER 4 149 4 8 7 Retrieving Layouts from Gerber Data esse esse Re RE ER RE ERA ER RA ERA ER RE RE RR RE KEER RR AR RE ER Ee ee Ee 4 151 Tables Table 4 1 Autorouter GridS EE Eg Re oe NABANG RENA NANANA aa 4 78 Table 4 2 Autorouter Strategy Parameters sesse ese EER RE RR EE KEER KEER Re RR RE AR Re RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee e K
140. ER EE ER RE RR EE ER RA RR RR ER Re RR Rae ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae ER Rae ek ae 4 143 4 8 4 in built CAM View System Features esse esse Ee ER RE RR EE ER EE RR EE ER Rae RR Re ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ek Rae ek Rae ek ae 4 144 4 8 5 Processing Gerber Data nA ANT LARA 4 145 4 8 6 Processing Drilling and Milling Data ER E RR EEE RRR EEER R RR RGE R R RR EER RR KERE RR ERGER RR EER RR REGEER 4 149 4 8 7 Retrieving Layouts from Gerber Data esse esse Re RE ER RA ERA ER RE ER EA ER ERA RE AA 4 151 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 5 IC ASIC Design wesssiccasicciciedcsenvavsisvivevecsennetedsenededenentansieniiensnies 5 1 Chapter 6 Neural Rule System RR RR RR RR RR ER ER RR RR RR RR RR RR RR ER 6 1 GEE ER ER EN 6 5 6 2 Rule Definition Soe 6 6 6 2 1 Bartels Rule Specification Language ese esse Re ER Re ER EE ER RE ER ERA ER EG RR RE ER EG RR ER ER EG RR Ee RR Rae RR Ee ER Ge ee 6 6 6 2 2 Bartels Rule System Compiler iese esse ee Re ER EER EE RE ER RE RE RA ER RA RR RE ER RA RR ERA ER EG RR ERA ER EG RR EG nnana Ee ea 6 6 6 3 Rule System Applications eer EER RR RE ER ER REGEER RR RR EER RR GG Gee ER RR RE EE EE 6 7 6 3 1 Circuit Design Rule System Applications sesse ese eke RR RE ER RE RR ERA ER KAR RR ERA ER EG ER Re ER Re RR ERA ER Rae RR Ke ee Rae 6 7 6 3 2 PCB Design Rule System Applications sesse esse ana 6 9 Sg F UUES ANAN 7 1 BABHEEP AA EE RR EENS NEE
141. ERR KEER Ee ee 4 84 Table 4 3 Pick Preference Layer Color Tables and Short Layer Names 1 1 10200n eaanaununanananununanaunaunn 4 96 Table 4 4 Gerber Aperture Table standard esse esse ee Ee ER RE ER EE ER EE RR EE ER EER RR RE ER EG RR Rae ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ek ae 4 133 Figures Figure 4 1 Layout Library Symbols esse aa 4 21 Figure 4 2 Layout with Board Outline and Plot Marker cssecssesesseeesseeesseeenseeesseeeaseeesneesneeeseeeeeneeeeeae 4 46 Figure 4 3 Layout Library Access ees ee RR ER ER ERGE RR KEER AA 4 49 Figure 4 4 Layout with Part Placement ee RE RR RE R RR EER RR RE EA RRR ERGER RR EER RR RE RR KERSE RR REG e RR RR EER RR RE Ee 4 53 Figure 4 5 Routing with or without Via Offset sesse esse EER ER RE ER RE ER EER ER Re ER EA ER EG e RR RR ERA RR EA ER Ee AK RE e ER nnna 4 79 Figure 4 6 Routing Traces Ongrid Offgrid ees ese ee Re RE ER EE RE RR RE AR RE AR RE EE AR EE RR ERK RE e RR e RE Ee ERGE ee 4 81 Figure 4 7 Layout after Autorouting aasa 4 93 Figure 4 8 Automatic Copper Fill Complexity sesse ee ee Re EE EE ER EE RE RE ER RA RR RE ER EE RR EE AR EG RR Rae ER Ee RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 109 Figure 4 9 Layout with Filled Copper Areas esse esse Ee ER RE ER EE ER RE RR EE ER Ee RR RE ER EG RR Ee ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER EG ee 4 111 Figure 4 10 GAM Mirror Modes 3 NANA AE Rea Re dee Ra wee GE see Ro 4 123 Figure 4 11 CAM Power
142. Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae RR Ee ek ae ee 4 111 Figure 4 10 CAM Mirror Modes ee esse esse see RE nanan 4 123 Figure 4 11 CAM Power Layer Isolation 1 7 772 asanasaaanaa ER EE RR RE ER EER RR EE AR RE RR Ee ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR EG ER EG ee 4 126 XII Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter describes the Bartels AutoEngineer system architecture provides general operating instructions and introduces the design database Introduction Page 1 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Introduction Page 1 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents Chapter 1 Introduetlon issie de aaa aaa aaa 1 4 Product lniormaHON ER EE EER EER EER KERE SR WK SE EE KA WW GE We ei 1 5 1 1 1 BAE Software Configurations esse ek Rae ER Rae ER ERA ER Re ER Ee ER RO RR ERA KRAKE ee ER Rae RR Ee ER Rae RR Ee RR Ee RR EER EG ee 1 5 LC BAE System Component uses ineen erk geen onson Ken Rek SE Re Ke ege Zeg 1 7 1 1 3 BAE Database Structure ANAN 1 7 1 1 4 BAE Data Types and Application Concepts esse esse esse Re ER EE KERE AR EE AK Re AR Ee AE Re RR EER REGEER Ee RR Ee EE 1 8 1 1 5 Exchanging Data with other Systems esse esse ER RE AR RE RE AR EE ERGE AK RE e REK R E ee KEER Re e KEER REGEER Gee 1 8 1 2 Operating the Bartels AutoEngineer cccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 1 2 1 BAE Startup and BAE User Interface
143. Element Returning to Main Menu The following commands can be used from each program module of the BAE layout system except for the Autorouter to return to the BAE Main Menu BAE Shell File Main Menu The Main Menu function automatically saves the currently loaded layout element From the BAE Shell the following command can be used to return to the operating system Exit BAE Exiting BAE The following commands can be used from each program module of the BAE layout system to return to the operating system i e to exit the Bartels AutoEngineer File Exit BAE The Ext BAE function activates a confirmation request if the currently loaded element has not yet been saved In this case you should abort the Exit BAE function save the current element and then call Ext BAE again as in File Exit BAE Please confirm Y N n File Save Element File Exit BAE PCB Design CAD Page 4 116 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 CAM Processor 4 7 1 Starting the CAM Processor Before starting the CAM Processor for generating real project manufacturing data you should always perform a complete design rule check using the Batch DRC function from the Layout Editor Utilities menu Subsequently the DRC result should be examined with the Reporl function It is strongly recommended to refrain from generating and or releasing any CAM Processor output if clearance violations short circuits or
144. GESKOK GE Ee Re Ke Og ER Wee ested Ee eed see eN Ee Ee 4 115 4 6 12 Exiting the Layout System 2 mmunananunana nananana NANANA AA 4 116 CAM E EE 4 117 4 7 1 Starting the CAM ProceSSOF esse esse ese RE EER ERA EER EER EE REAGEER Ge EERBARE Ge ER EG ER ERA EE waaa 4 117 4 7 2 CAM Processor Main Menu 11 1 1mm 4 118 4 7 3 Customized CAM Processor User Interface sees ese Re RR EE ER RA RR RE ER Re RR ER ER Rae AA 4 119 4 7 4 in built CAM Processor System Features sesse esse RR ERA ER ERA RR EA ER RE A KRAKE RE e RR Ee ER Re e KRAKE Ee Ka 4 120 4 7 5 Plot PararmeterS scccsssseeseseneesessenesenscceeseseneeseseecesensnceesesenesensencesensneesensenensuseeeeseneneesensenenenseeeess 4 122 aa EE VEE ER EE EE EE EE EE EE N EE E 4 125 Ah HP GL Qu TEE 4 128 A278 HP Laser Out pu RA EE ER N LA EE EN 4 129 4 7 9 Postscript Out eege Eeer a 4 130 4 7 10 Windows Generic Output 4 131 4 7 11 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard ee ese esse Re RE ER RE ER EA ER RA ERA RR RE RR EA RR RE e RR ER RE EK Ee 4 131 ZC Gerber Pho lOp T NIN LNG ANA a LANG 4 132 ARE RE 4 138 AM Ihserlon Data nna EE RE N AANR Ad 4 140 CAM ViCW EE ER EE EE EE EE 4 141 4 8 1 Starting the CAM View Module esse esse ene RR ER RE KERE ER RE ER RE ER ERA RR RE ER RA ERROR ERA ER EG e K EER e ER Rae ER Rae ER ae 4 141 4 8 2 CAM View Main Menu sees eene ee aa 4 142 4 8 3 Customized CAM View User Interface e sees ese Re
145. Hatch Copper Area Move to Active Copper Area vdd Signal Layer 1 2 5 2 0 The Hatch Copper Area function generates a special layout polygon type called hatched copper area The hatching and the hatching area outline are generated using traces with a trace width according to the hatching width setting The traces are strongly connected with the hatched copper polygon to support general Layout Editor polygon functions such as Move Areal Or Delete Areal PCB Design CAD Page 4 110 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The PCB layout example should now look like the one shown in figure 4 9 if you correctly executed all operations Figure 4 9 Layout with Filled Copper Areas This might be a good time to save the layout File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 111 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 9 Library Update The Update Library function is one of the most powerful features of the Bartels AutoEngineer Update Library is usually used to update a job specific library in order to correlate it with the contents of some master library Use the following commands to copy the currently loaded layout to the democopy ddb DDB file with default layout element name and load the copied layout File Save Element As File Name democopy Element Name Load Element Layout Em File Name democopy Element Name Now the copied layout appears on
146. K 15 FRAMECOLOR EFILMARK 8 FRAMECOLOR DFILMARK 4 Popup Menu Color Setup FRAMECOLOR POPMTEXT 3 FRAMECOLOR POPMBUTT 14 FRAMECOLOR POPMBACK 8 FRAMECOLOR POPMFRAM 15 FRAMECOLOR POPMFILL 1 Text Programs Color Setup FRAMECOLOR DIALLINE 10 FRAMECOLOR OUTLINES 14 FRAMECOLOR HEADLINE 12 END It is recommended to change the setup def file to define required setup parameters such as library path settings layer assignments etc Then apply the BSETUP utility program to convert the setup file stdset def to the bsetup dat file as in gt bsetup stdset Files bsetup dat Setup parameter file in BAE programs directory stdset def Setup file template See also BAE Shell Schematic Editor Layout Editor Autorouter CAM Processor CAM View Packager Diagnosis The error messages issued by BSETUP are intended to be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 15 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 3 BICSET IC Design Name bicset Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design Setup Utility Synopsis bicset setupfile Description The BICSET utility program is used for the definition and or configuration of Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design system parameters such as standard cell dimensions for automatic placement layer assignments and layer menu definitions
147. Line Width Gerber Fill Mode Gerber Arc Plotting Mode Drilling Data Output File Name Device Drilling Tool Table Output File Name Device Drilling Tool Tolerance Accuracy Insertion Data Output File Name Device Parameter sets are stored with special names according to the currently processed layout database hierarchy level The layout element name is used for layout elements parameter set name part is used for layout part symbol elements padstack is used for layout padstack elements and pad is used for layout pad elements When loading an element the corresponding parameter set is automatically loaded as well thus providing a convenient way of activating a default parameter set suitable for processing the selected design and or library element type PCB Design CAD Page 4 120 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Output Device The Plot Device functions from the Control Plot and Gerber Photoplof menus are used to specify the CAM data output device The output can either be written to a file or directly to the plotter and or printer When plotting to a file the desired output file name must be specified When writing directly to the plotter the name of the output port where the plotter is connected e g com2 1pt1 under DOS must be specified Take care that enough disk space is available when writing to a file and that the corresponding interface is correctly initialized when directing output to a hardware device CAM
148. MARCONI for MARCONI format Each net in the Bartels AutoEngineer format is defined by a command in the form lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt and or lt net gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt where lt part gt is the part name as defined in the part list lt pin gt is the pin name of that part and lt net gt is the net name The BAE net list format supports optional net attribute definitions to be specified after the lt net gt command in the following form PRIORITY lt prior gt MINDIST lt dist gt ROUTWIDTH lt width gt The net attributes are used for controlling the Autorouting process lt prior gt is the net specific routing priority lt dist gt is the net specific minimum distance and lt width gt is the net specific routing width With each pin a pin specific routing width can be defined optionally this value must be enclosed in parentheses behind the lt pin gt specification lt prior gt must be in positive integer units the greater the value the higher the routing priority all other net attribute values are assumed to be in positive mm units Each net in the CALAY format is defined by a command in the form pake Spin Paru on spar PIT and or lt net gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt The CALAY format supports optional pin specific routing widths in mm unit
149. N 7 5 to BAESETUP BSETUP oes sees ae NANA ANA see NANA NANA Eet 7 6 7 3 BICSET IC Design ie RR Ee Ee Ee Ee ee ee Ge ee ee ee ee ee ee de dee die 7 16 7 4 BLDRING IC Design sesse seed gee e Ee vee ed ve ee Ed Ve ve ed ve eed Ve Vee ve eed Ve ede 7 18 2 5 oo eo N 7 19 mo GOPYDDB EEN 7 24 1 1 FONTCONN ee ee Se Ge suc GN Se eat ute read ee Re Ge as 7 27 7 8 EONTEXTR ER 7 29 Ts CINSTALL EE 7 31 TAO LISTDDB ee 7 33 AAN EO 1E E E E E EE EE EE EE 7 34 AN NETCONN VE 7 47 GAS 39 GAAN AAP a aaa Sk GE 7 49 7 14 RULEGOMP siese es See N OE EE GER RR EE ER GER RR ee Ee GER Ge ee GR GER ee EE ee de 7 50 7 15 ULC User Language Compiler iese ER RR EER KK KK KK R EER E EER GG ee ee RR Ee 7 52 7 16 User Language Interpreter eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeee 7 58 1 17 HSERLIS EEN 7 60 LAB NENNEN 7 66 XII Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Tables Table 2 1 Special BAE Attributes XANDER 2 20 Table 4 1 Autorouter Gidder aa N aa a aang 4 78 Table 4 2 Autorouter Strategy Parameters essens esse EER EE RR EE AR EE AR EER Re RR RE AR Re RR EER REG e NANANA KANA RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 84 Table 4 3 Pick Preference Layer Color Tables and Short Layer Names c cssecesessseeeeseeeseeseseeneeees 4 96 Table 4 4 Gerber Aperture Table standard ese esse ee Ee ER RE RR EE ER EE RR EE ER EA RR ERA ER Re RR Ee ER Rae RR Rae ER Rae ek Ee ek ae 4 133 Fig
150. NCH applies for inch units Alternate units can always be used by adding either for inches or mm for mm to the input value SCMDEFLIBRARY Command The SCMDEFLIBRARY command is used to set the default SCM library path and the name of the SCM library file containing all the standard SCM symbol definitions such as bustap standard label pin symbol module port etc The formal syntax of the SCMDEFLIBRARY command is SCMDEFLIBRARY lt libpath gt lt stdlib gt where lt libpath gt is the path to the directory which contains the SCM symbol library files and lt std1ib gt specifies the name lt std1ib gt dab of the SCM standard symbol library file in that directory Please note the use of the slash as directory and database hierarchy delimiter instead of backslash as in DOS With the SCM library path properly set any SCM symbol can be accessed either by selecting the library file and symbol from the Add Symbol popup menu or by specifying the symbol at the corresponding Add Symbol function prompt as in lt scmlib gt lt symbolname gt where lt scmlib gt dab is the name of a SCM library file in the SCM library directory e g 741s 741s90 for symbol 741890 in library 741s ddb passiv r for symbol r in library passiv ddb etc The SCM command elect Library see menu Seitings can be used to redefine the standard SCM library path input resets the library and or input restores the libra
151. Number of Passes P G Swap Method The Full Autoplacer and function can be used to perform automatic part placement Only the parts from the current part set see chapter 4 4 1 are placed Placed parts which are not selected to the current part set are treated like fixed parts This feature allows for automatic placement of selectable part groups The first part selected for placement will be positioned at the placement start point The Full Autoplacer function automatically designates the placement start point The Cluster Placer and Area Placer functions prompt the user for the placement start point prompt Select placement start point The placement of the first part determines the placement of subsequent parts l e the selected placement start point position has crucial meaning for the complete placement process with regard to 100 completion success and or the quality of the achieved placement If the first part cannot be placed at the placement start point then no subsequent part can be placed either If the placement start point is selected outside the board outline then no part can be placed at all If no board outline is defined then there are no restrictions on selecting the placement start point however parts could then be placed even outside the boundaries of the currently loaded layout element After starting an initial placement function the placement progress is indicated in the status
152. OTH PHYSICAL AAYDOCLAYER 5 Floor Plan BOTH LOGICAL AYDOCLAYER 6 Part DRC SIDE2 LOGICAL AYDOCLAYER 7 Pin Number SIDE2 LOGICAL AYDOCLAYER 8 Solder Paste SMT SIDE2 LOGICAL AYDOCLAYER 9 Measure Notes SIDE2 LOGICAL Pad Layer Query LAYPADLAYI ER DISABLE Film Markers Doc Level LAYPLTMARKLAY 4 Engineer Standard Setup Utilities Page 7 13 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Group Load Display Doc Level LAYGRPDISPIAY 5 Standard Search Paths and Names SCMDEFLIBRARY baelib stdsym AYDEFLIBRARY baelib laylib AYDEFELEM Default ENT s1 User Measure Units USERUNITS Windows METRIC Motif Menu Type WINMENUMOD E PULLDOWN Standard Graphic Color Setup FRAMECOLOR DIALAREA 11 FRAMECOLOR LISTAREA 14 Side Menu Color Setup FRAMECOLOR ENUHEAD 10 FRAMECOLOR ENUHEAD BACK 8 FRAMECOLOR FRAMECOLOR FRAMECOLOR FRAMECOLOR AIN El Es G 12 AIN Ei E BACK 8 SUBMENUA 10 SUBMENUA BACK 8 Utilities Page 7 14 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Menu Cursor Color Setup FRAMECOLOR EMENMARK 2 FRAMECOLOR DMENMAR
153. PCB Design CAD Page 4 65 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 4 2 Matrix Placement Matrix placement is a special initial placement process for automatically placing selected parts on certain matrix defined insertion positions Use the following commands to select all parts with library name s1dilo i e the switches named s1000 through s1009 for subsequent placement operations Parts Part Set Select Macro Select Cl Library Element Name s1dilo Library Element Name Set the default placement rotation angle to 270 degree without mirroring the Default Angle option is probably located in the group of the Settings dialog from the menu when working with customized BAE user interfaces Parts Default Angle m 270 Degrees Left Use the following commands to define a placement matrix place all selected parts onto this matrix and delete the placement matrix definition again Parts Matrix Placement Define Matrix Move to Matrix Origin 0 2 2 3 Move to Matrix Element Size Designation 0 3 2 1 E Move to Matrix Size Designation 0 2 0 5 Place Matrix Delete Matrix The Place Matrix function automatically places all parts of the currently defined part set onto the placement matrix also considering the current default placement rotation angle and mirror mode settings Now all net list parts are placed You might want to check this with the List Parts function PCB Design
154. Part Move to r101 1 6 2 4 Groups an Group Polygon m Parts Select Move to 0 1 0 4 Move to 0 6 0 4 Move to 0 6 2 4 Move to 0 1 2 4 Done m Delete Group Autoplacement features and functions are used throughout the following sections to place the deleted parts back onto the layout PCB Design CAD Page 4 63 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 4 1 Part Set The Part Sej submenu provides features for selecting the parts to be subsequently placed Parts can be selected and or deselected according to set principles either by specifying part names c1 r2 ic15 etc or by specifying package types di114 so20 plcc44 etc where wildcards are also permitted The user can also select parts from certain blocks of a hierarchical circuit design With the Part Set functions the user is able to control the placement process in a way that e g first the plug s can be placed then the DIL packages then the capacitors etc Use the following commands to deselect all unplaced parts Parts Part Set LC All Deselect Deselect all parts j Abort Now you might want to use the List Parts command to have a look at the part list Parts Part Set List Parts The function provides verbose output of all net list parts File demo ddb Layout board Parts 23 C100 chip1210 p SE chipl206 P aKARo dil14 P k1 relais P E1100 r04a25 U oT r04a25 U F NOZ r04a25 P ke r04a25 P r1
155. SCM database hierarchy level Each SCM part symbol consists of markers defining the part pins l e the marker is the part symbol to be used on symbol level This principle is applied on all database levels thus enabling basic functions such as symbol placement to work in different database levels Placing markers on symbol level will produce SCM part symbols whilst placing SCM symbols on SCM sheet level produces circuitry Use the following commands to place the pins A B and Y at coordinates 2 10 2 2 and 12 6 on the currently loaded symbol Symbols Add Symbol Part Name ad Move to 2 10 Add Symbol Part Name b Move to 2 2 Add Symbol Part Name y Move to 12 6 The markers placed with the commands above are representing the pins A B and Y of the cD4081 gate Instant placement coordinates display is provided in the status line and or info field whilst performing interactive placement operations A slash preceding the part name causes a line to be displayed on top of the name and or text This feature can be used to name negated signals and or pin names such as y This also works for normal text Circuit Design CAE Page 2 17 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Graphic The symbol now consists of all pin definitions required for the CD4081 gate but symbol geometry and or graphical information for documentation purposes such as symbol outline pin connection designators function indicator etc
156. This is usually more important than designating SCM parts according to some devised rules since adequate SCM documentation is achieved by displaying the part and or circuit function with appropriate symbol definitions We recommend to apply the automatic part naming features at the placement of SCM symbols and to perform renaming on the layout only Functions for changing net list part names and or for automatic part numbering are provided with both the Layout Editor and the Autoplacement Circuit Design CAE Page 2 24 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Modifying the Element Boundaries Use the following commands to set the upper right corner of the element boundaries to coordinate 14 14 Settings Upper Right Border Move to 14 14 EI The symbol origin refers to the pick point in superior hierarchy levels This is the point of the SCM symbol where it is picked for placement and or movement on the SCM sheet Usually it makes sense to set the origin at a certain pin coordinate e g left top or left bottom Use the following commands to define the origin on pin A coordinate 2 10 of the currently loaded CD4081 symbol Defining the Origin Settings Set Origin Move to Pin A 2 10 Saving the Symbol The definition of symbol CD4081 is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element Circuit Design CAE Page 2 25 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 2 3 Creating
157. X Coordinate mm 0 6 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 9 Jump Relative X Coordinate mm 1 2 6 Relative Y Coordinate mm o EJ Jump Relative NN mm ole Relative Y Coordinate mm 1 8 EJ Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm 1 2 Relative Y Coordinate mm o Done Areas Mirror Display Move to Area Corner Edge Visible mirrored PCB Design CAD Page 4 105 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to save the currently loaded pad symbol and re load the layout File Save Element Load Element Layout File Name Element Name board The system accomplishes a connectivity generation to correlate the library modifications with the current net list definition The p1206 pad is used on the s1206 padstack symbol which in turn is used on the chip1206 part symbol Note how the layout system uses different pad shapes for the mirrored parts R104 and C101 and for the unmirrored part R105 The Mirror Display function can be applied on any copper keepout or documentary polygon defined on a library element which can be mirrored You can also use this feature to define part keepout areas on documentary layers to perform different part clearance checks depending on which side of the board the parts are placed Reflow Reflow SMT SMD Soldering Support A control for setting the Area Mirror Display parameter is provi
158. a verification menu which allows to backannotate the currently processed design The Backannotation request is See chapter 3 for a detailed description on how is applied Circuit Design CAE Page 2 63 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 3 Packager Backannotation This chapter describes how to use the Packager program module and the Backannotation function from the Schematic Editor for performing forward and backward annotation of net list data The examples presented with this chapter introduce the basic concepts of net list data processing and annotation in the Bartels AutoEngineer in a logical sequence The circuit design of the preceding chapter will be prepared for further processing in the subsequent chapters The reader should work through this chapter without missing any sections to gain full understanding of Packager and Backamnotatior Once a command has been used and or explained the operator is assumed to have understood its function and be able to perform it again Subsequent instructions containing this command will be less verbose for easier reading and more speedy learning Packager Backannotation Page 3 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Packager Backannotation Page 3 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents Chapter 3 Packager Backannotation 2 ccsccccceeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees OUI Sit CU maDL 3 5 3 1 1 Components and Features
159. abel if the label is placed to a connection corner point Use the following commands to load the label symbol Vdd and connect this label to the connection between capacitor C100 and resistor R105 Symbols Add Label Net Name vdd Move to Connection Corner Point 170 190 Again take care that the contact area of the label pin will extinguish Circuit Design CAE Page 2 43 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual If no special label symbol for the requested net name is defined and or available then the system uses the default label symbol named standard presuming that at least this label symbol is available in the project file or in the selected library Use the following commands to assign signal name NET to the connection at pin 1 of switch s1004 KR Zoom All Ei KR Zoom Window m Move to Window Start Point 10 40 Move to Window End Point 100 100 Symbols m Add Label Net Name net Set Angle m Angle Deg R ad 180 Move to Connection Corner Point 70 70 EI On default the standard label symbol is used when placing labels for net names without name matching label symbol This default label symbol can be changed through the parameter setting of the dialog from the Settings menu This feature allows for the assignment of different label symbols to certain net names and or net types without having to define a net specific label symbol for each of these nets As sh
160. above menu functions for activating the corresponding parameter setup dialogs Windows Motif Pulldown Menu Konfiguration When using pulldown menus under Windows and Motif the UIFSETUP User Language program configures the following modified Schematic Editor main menu with a series of additional functions and features File Edit View Symbols Connections Graphic Text Plot Output Settings Utilities Help Circuit Design CAE Page 2 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 1 5 In built Schematic Editor System Features Automatic Parameter Backup The Schematic Editor provides an in built feature for automatically saving important design and operational parameters with the currently processed SCM sheet and or SCM library hierarchy level The following parameters are stored to the current design file when activating the Save Element function Autosave Time Interval Name of the currently loaded SCM Color Table Input Grid Display Grid Grid Angle Lock Coordinate Display Mode Symbol Label Placement Default Rotation Angle Symbol Label Placement Default Mirror Mode Symbol Label Placement Signal Routing On Off Mode Default Bus Tap Swap Flag Default Text Size Symbol Library File Name Logical Library File Name Plot File Name Parameter sets are stored with special names according to the currently processed SCM database hierarchy level Parameter set name plan is used for SCM sheet elements symbol is used fo
161. ack s with more than one pad placed on same layer Fix correct library pad and or padstack definition s Other error messages might be issued if the layout contains short circuits caused by pre routed fixed traces PCB Design CAD Page 4 73 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 2 Autorouter Main Menu The Autorouter standard sidmenu user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering the Autorouter the menu cursor points to the Elemen function The Windows and Motif versions of the Autorouter can optionally be operated with a pull down menu user interface providing a horizontally arranged main menu bar on top The WINMENUMODE command of the BSETUP utility program is used to switch between SIDEMENU and PULLDOWN Windows Motif menu configurations see chapter 7 2 for more details The following main menu is always available whilst processing layouts with the Autorouter Undo Redo Display Preplacement Autorouter Interaction Options Control Strategy Parameter Utilities The functions provided with the Undo Redo menu allow to use the Autorouter without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone using and then reprocessed with Redo This is true even for complex processing such as complete autorouting passes or User Language program execution Undo Redo ensures
162. activate the BAE standard user interface with side menus WINMENUMODE SIDEMENU Use the following command to activate the BAE user interface with pull down menus context menus through left mouse button function repetition through right mouse button for Windows and or Motif versions of the BAE software WINMENUMODE PULLDOWN Use the following command to activate the BAE user interface with pull down menus context menus through right mouse button function repetition through left mouse button for Windows and or Motif versions of the BAE software WINMENUMODE PULLDOWN_RMB_CONTEXT The BAE standard user interface is activated with the DOS and or X11 versions of the BAE software or if the WINMENUMODE command is omitted in the BAE setup file Utilities Page 7 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual FRAMECOLOR Command The FRAMECOLOR command is applied for defining the BAE menu color setup The formal syntax of the FRAMECOLOR command is FRAMECOLOR lt screenarea gt lt colornumber gt where lt screenarea gt designates the workarea of the BAE user interface and lt colornumber gt defines the color for the corresponding workarea The lt screenarea gt choices for the user interfaces of the BAE graphic program modules BAE Shell Schematic Editor Layout Editor Autorouter CAM Processor CAM View are identifier Workarea Seen men cursor enables stem was orn
163. ad can be assigned to a signal and or documentary layer thus designating contact areas for the routing or defining pad shapes for solder resist SMD masks etc A drill hole and drill plan info can be created optionally for the definition of vias or drilled pins Keepout areas can be utilized for controlling the pin contact mode Documentary lines or areas can serve as pin designators on the silk screen or insertion plan and reference texts can be used for displaying pin names on part and or layout level On layout pad level the pad shapes i e the pin contact areas are defined by creating passive copper areas Different pad symbols can be assigned to different layers on a single padstack symbol thus defining a particular layout pin type Layout Level PARTS VIAS PADSTACKS Traces Board Outline Keepout Areas e Active Copper Areas elalalz a kor man Passive Copper Areas ke d Wa Na Copper Fill Areas f a Documentary Areas paaa Documentary Lines BBEEBEEBBES Text TES D e ai Ta d nm i a aam LL EC Part Level PINS PADSTACKS EEEE SEES VIAS PADSTACKS Traces KeepoutAreas Aneu NDEN Passive Copper Areas Documentary Areas Documentary Lines Text Padstack Level PADS Drilling Keepout Areas Passive Copper Areas Documentary Areas Documentary Lines Tet Pad Level Passive Copper Areas Documentary Areas Documentary Lines Te
164. ad of the Round Corners default option from the function to reduce the complexity and number of fill areas This allows for trace corners and or full circles to be isolated like octagons thus also reducing the amount of Gerber data if no Gerber arc commands can be used To avoid long response times after unintentionally activating the copper fill function automatic copper fill can be canceled by pressing any key and confirming the abort request with a verification menu Note however that canceling is not possible anymore at the final stage of connectivity generation and that areas generated before the abort request must be explicitly eliminated using the Undo function Using the copper fill function considerably increases the number of copper areas and polygon points This raises the CPU time requirements for the function if the function type is set to a corner to corner airline calculation see chapter 4 3 2 of this manual In such cases it can be worthwhile to use a pin to pin calculation method to reduce Mincon CPU time requirements The Mincon Function from the Layout Editor Setting menu is used to set the Mincon function type PCB Design CAD Page 4 109 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Copper Area Hatching The Copper Fill submenu provides the Hatch Copper Area function for transforming copper areas into line or cross hatched areas with user defi
165. aded with the CAM View module for more details see chapter 4 8 of this manual PCB Design CAD Page 4 114 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 11 Blind and Buried Vias Blind and buried vias are partial vias which can be used for layer changes when routing multilayer layouts Routing with blind and buried vias can considerably increase the routability of multilayer layouts with four or more signal layers The BAE Layout Editor features arbitrary pad layer assignment see also chapter 4 2 2 for more details on creating padstacks and drill classes to support the definition of blind and buried vias Drill classes should be assigned to certain layer sets to support CAM drill data output for selectable layer sets see also chapter 4 7 for more details on drill data output There are no system imposed restrictions on how to define and or assign drill classes You can e g use drill class A for layer set 1 2 drill class B for layer set 2 3 drill class cC for layer set 3 4 etc Note however that the drill class assignment must be considered for correct drill data output by the CAM Processor and that the layout top layer setting see also chapter 4 3 1 gains special meaning when using blind and buried vias A typical configuration for 4 layer layouts is the definition of the vias via for all layers via 12 for layer set 1 2 via 23 for layer set 2 3 and via 34 for layer set 3 4 All these vias are simultaneously available
166. ads would intersect with keepout areas on layer 3 The layer assignments except for the signal layer count can be changed between different router passes i e without the need of restarting the complete routing process Note however that restrictions introduced with layer assignment changes will never cause a deterioration of the current routing result at subsequent router passes l e the Autorouter will try to but not necessarily remove all previously routed traces from prohibited layers if those layers were available for routing before Changing layer assignments between different router passes introduces highest flexibility at the routing of complex PCB technologies Best success at the routing of certain multilayer SMT boards is often achieved when using outside layers solder and component side with highest priority for connecting SMD pins to inside signal layers This can be accomplished with SMD Via Pre Place passes to be subsequently activated with dynamically adapted layer assignments and increasing routing channel widths use the Batch Setup and Batch Start functions to apply single router passes After completing the SMD Via Pre Placement some Initial passes with via and or channel width restrictions can be applied to route the signal inside layers only prohibit the outside layers Finally the outside layers can be released again for subsequent router passes such as Complete Initial pass Optimizer rip up routing etc
167. age programs The Utilities menu can also be used for loading layout elements listing DDB file contents setting the display grid and the coordinate display mode or removing error markers PCB Design CAD Page 4 118 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 3 Customized CAM Processor User Interface Menu Assignments and Key Bindings The BAE software comes with User Language programs for activating a modified CAM Processor user interface with many additional functions startups toolbars menu assignments key bindings etc The BAE ST User Language program is automatically started when entering the CAM Processor BAE ST calls the UIFSETUP User Language program which activates predefined CAM Processor menu assignments and key bindings Menu assignments and key bindings can be changed by modifiying and re compiling the UIFSETUP source code The HLPKEYS User Language program is used to list the current key bindings With the predefined menu assignments of UIFSETUP activated HLPKEYS can be called from the Key Bindings function of the Help menu Menu assignments and key bindings can be listed with the UIFDUMP User Language program The UIFRESET User Language program can be used to reset all currently defined menu assignments and key bindings UIFSETUP UIFDUMP and UIFRESET can also be called from the menu of the KEYPROG User Language program which provides additional facilities for online key programming and User Language program help i
168. al layers the electrical conductivity of the PCB is defined by creating and or placing traces pads and passive or active copper areas Top Layer All Layers and Middle Layers are special signal layers The Top Layer can be dynamically assigned to a certain signal layer during the layout design process On default the Top Layer is assigned to signal layer 2 The Top Layer is most useful when generating library symbols for multilayer designs with an arbitrary number of layers The Bet Top Layer function from the Settings menu is used to assign the PCB top layer thus defining the number of PCB layers The mirror functions e g for mirroring parts will always consider the current top layer setting i e signal layers beyond the top layer are not affected by mirror functions Note that the menu item text for selecting the Top Layer can be changed with the BAE setup to provide a user specific menu text such as Component Side or insertion Layer See the description of the BSETUP utility program for more details on customizing the layout signal layer menus The All Layers signal layer includes all signal layers from signal layer 1 solder side to the currently defined top signal layer component side Objects defined on All Layers are considered to be placed on all signal layers and are checked and plotted accordingly The signal l
169. and how to introduce pin gate swap definitions to the logical library PCB Design CAD Page 4 71 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 Autorouter With real jobs you should make sure that all of the required power layers are defined use the Set Power Layers function from the Layout Editor Setings menu the top signal layer setting is correct use the Bet Top Layer function from the Layout Editor Settings menu and pre routed critical traces such as power supply are fixed before starting the autorouting process After finishing the autorouting you should always run a Batch DRE from the Layout Editor before generating manufacturing data with the CAM Processor The user interface of the Bartels Autorouter is similar to the one of the Layout Editor The Bartels Autorouter provides standard autorouting functions full and initial routing rip up and retry routing optimizer and a series of enhanced placement and routing features such as automatic pre placement with placement optimization single net routing net group routing component routing area and or block routing mixed grid routing selective component and pin gate swap during rip up routing etc The Autorouter version provided with the BAE HighEnd system provides powerful autorouting technologies based on patented neural network technology The BAE HighEnd Autorouter supports skilled analogue signal routing automatic
170. and or BGA pins to inside layers with high priority The Bartels Autorouter supports microvias via in pad technology and blind and buried vias with automatic via type selection thus increasing the routability of multilayer layouts and also supporting new PCB manufacturing technologies such as processes for producing plasma etched vias Area and block routing methods can be supported by defining keepout routing areas and or prohibited layers and the Autorouter is capable of considering Via keepout areas The Autorouter provides the same initial placement and placement optimization functions as already known from the Layout Editor allowing for automatic pre placement and placement optimization before starting the autorouting process The Autorouter provides enhanced routing features such as placement optimization pin gate swap during rip up retry routing gridless routing single net routing component routing area routing mixed grid routing etc The place and route function activates both the Full Autoplace including complete initial placement and placement optimization and the ull Autorouter including complete Initial Router rip up retry routing and optimizer thus performing complete placement and routing on the push of a button The single net routing function of the Autorouter is used for automatically routing selectable nets and or connections The single net router can be applied to pre rout power supply or critical nets with specific p
171. anges pin gate swaps or alternate part package type assignments Part names can be changed using the Netlist Part Name function from the menus for interactive part placement Interactive pin gate swaps are applied with the Pin Gatel Swap function from the manual part placement menu Automatic pin gate swap is performed with the Full Autoplacer Single Pass optimize and Multi Pass Optimizer autoplacement functions and can also be performed when using the option with the rip up router of the Autorouter module Alternate package types can be assigned using the Alternate Part submenu function during manual part placement Note that any of the net list modifications mentioned above will get lost when re editing the schematic without running the Backamnotation functions for loading schematic plans deleted after successfully running the Backannotationl Backannotation Backannotatior is fully integrated to the Schematic Editor and can be explicitely started using the Backannotation command from the Utilities menu A feature for automatically processing pending Backannotation requests is also integrated to the Schematic Editor requests are generated when saving layouts with net list modifications such as pin gate swaps or changed part names Loading an SCM sheet with a pending Backannotation request automatically activates
172. annotation function from the Schematic Editor Running the results in a modified logical net list with annotated part and or pin names on the corresponding SCM sheet SCM Library scmlib ddb Log Library parts def LOGLIB Schematics Logical Netlist Schematics Layout Library Logical Netlist laylib ddb Physical Netlist Schematics Logical Netlist Layout Physical Netlist modified Schematics Logical Netlist modified Layout Physical Netlist modified Figure 3 1 Design Flow Packager Backannotation Packager Backannotation Page 3 5 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 2 Packager Forward annotation with the Packager is always reguired after introducing net list changes with the Schematic Editor such as loading symbols to the schematic changing the connectivity on the circuit setting attribute values etc 3 2 1 Starting the Packager It is recommended to start the Bartels AutoEngineer from in the directory where the design files should be generated since this considerably simplifies job file access If you intend to process the examples provided with this manual it is recommended to move to the BAE examples directory installed with the BAE software The Packager can be called from the Bartels AutoEngineer main shell Start the BAE shell by typing the following command to the operating system prompt gt bee E The AutoEngineer comes up with the Bartels l
173. anual 4 1 3 Layout Editor Main Menu The Layout Editor standard sidemenu user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering the Layout Editor the Pied menu is active and the menu cursor points to the Load Elemen function The Windows and Motif versions of the Layout Editor can optionally be operated with a pull down menu user interface providing a horizontally arranged main menu bar on top The WINMENUMODE command of the BSETUP utility program is used to switch between SIDEMENU and PULLDOWN Windows Motif menu configurations see chapter 7 2 for more details The following main menu is always available whilst processing layout elements with the Layout Editor Undo Redo Display Files Parts Traces Areas Text Drill Groups Parameter Utilities Undo Redo The functions provided with the menu allow you to use the Layout Editor without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone using and then reprocessed with the Bedd This is true even for complex processing such as group functions or User Language program execution Undo Redo ensures data security and provides a powerful feature for estimating design alternatives Display The Miew or Display menu can either be activated by selecting the corresponding main menu item or by pressing the middle mouse button
174. artels AutoEngineer 1 2 1 BAE Startup and BAE User Interface BAE Startup After successful installation with correct path setting the Bartels AutoEngineer can be started from any directory but it is recommended to start BAE from the directory where the projects and or the design files should be generated this considerably simplifies job file access You can start the Bartels AutoEngineer from your projects directory by typing gt bae to the operating system prompt for testing the software you can use the BAEJOBS directory created during the software installation Within Windows the Bartels AutoEngineer can be started by selecting the bae exe file using the Run function from the Program Manager Files menu Windows and X11 Motif based operating systems also allow for application startup by clicking the icon of the corresponding program file Startup icons also allow for the definition of the directory to be entered on default when starting the corresponding application i e BAE can be configured to be started from the BAE jobs directory or from any user specific BAE project directory A reference of the BAE startup icon can be included with the operating system launchpad and or Star menu to provide an even more convenient method of starting up the Bartels AutoEngineer The default BAE setup links the dab file name extension to the BAE application in such a way that the Layout Editor automatically starts and loads the default pr
175. artels AutoEngineer User Manual Selecting the Via The Bartels AutoEngineer layout system utilizes special padstack symbols vias for connecting different layers of the PCB At least one via assignment is required before any routing function i e either a trace function or the Autorouter can be activated Use the following commands to insert the estk padstack symbol to the currently active via list Parts Select Via New Delete Via Name estk New Delete Via Name The estk padstack symbol is used as pin symbol on the already placed part v1000 package type d04a25 l e estk is available in the current job file A series of via padstack definitions are provided with the layout libraries shipped with the BAE software Usually the padstack symbol named via can be used as standard via The via assignments introduced with Select Via are stored with the layout element The Add Trace function issues the following error message if no via is selected Default via not defined The system is capable of processing several different via definitions at a time in order to support blind and buried vias The via assignment list can be changed at any time Previously placed vias will not be affected by via list modifications i e the currently defined via list will apply for the interactive routing of new traces When changing layers during manual routing the Layout Editor will automatically place vias with the least possible layer usag
176. as val plname pow etc Use the following commands to assign values to the Sval1 attribute defined on c100 r100 and v1000 Symbols Assign Value Move to c100 140 190 m val Attribute Value 10uF Return Assign Value Cl Move to r100 60 130 val Attribute Value 100k Return Assign Value Move to v1000 220 180 val Attribute Value 1N4001 Return Apply commands such as shown above to assign values to the va1 attribute defined with the parts r101 r102 r103 set value 100k respectively x104 value 10k r105 value 1M and c101 value 100pF Note that part and symbol name e g Log Name c100 Macro c is displayed in the status line during attribute name queries thus indicating the symbol currently selected for attribute value assignment The attributes submenu provides a list of the attributes defined on the selected symbol respectively l e this submenu can vary for different symbols The Return option is only provided for symbols containing more than one attribute definition Return is used to end the attribute value assignment function Circuit Design CAE Page 2 37 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual With the rels and relc symbols only one attribute named Srpname is defined This attribute is used to designate the requested part name i e the rpname value will cause the Packager to allocate a physical part with a user defined part name for assigning the
177. ata On input optimized Gerber data is automatically recognized by CAM View The Coord Spec function can be used to select the coordinate input mode for Gerber and or Excellon data load operations With the Abs Coordinates option input coordinates are assumed to be absolute whilst with option Inc Coordinates input coordinates are assumed to be relative and or incremental PCB Design CAD Page 4 145 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Aperture Tables For correctly loading and displaying Gerber data the same aperture table is required as was used when generating the Gerber plot Both the CAM Processor and the CAM View module provide functions for the definition and administration of Gerber aperture tables Aperture tables are stored to the cam dat system file in the BAE programs directory The aperture table named standard is loaded automatically when starting CAM View The Load Aperture Table function from the File menu can be used to load any other aperture table available in cam dat The function from the menu can be used to change aperture definitions in the currently loaded aperture table The Load Aperture Table and Edit Aperture Table functions can also be used after loading Gerber data which would cause a Gerber data display update according to changed aperture definitions The Save Aperture Table function from the Pied menu can be used to save the currently loaded aperture table
178. ated font data to libraryfile The Bartels AutoEngineer standard font library file is named ged fnt This file is stored to the BAE programs directory and contains the font s used by the AutoEngineer Input File Format The font description file must start with the FONT command for defining the name of the font and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and The font description file is structured according to FONT lt fontname gt CHAR lt ord gt POLY Rebeet EO OM END where lt fontname gt is the name of the font to be created and where lt ord gt is the ordinal ASCII number of the character eg character A would be number 65 The valid value range for lt ord gt is 0 255 If the font description file contains multiple character definitions for the same lt ord gt value then FONTCONV stores only the last of these definitions Each character CHAR is defined by a list of polygon lines POLY Each polygon definition consists of a list of polygon corner point coordinates The coordinates must be specified in positive integer units in a 32x48 point grid area The 0 0 coordinate refers to the left bottom corner of the grid area The valid value range for X coordinates is 0 31 and the valid value range for Y coordinates is 0 47 Each character definition can have a maximum of up to 32 corner points Utilities Page 7 27 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Font de
179. ation of include files thus simplifying the analysis of warning messages when working with standard include files containing functions and variables which are not used by every program Utilities Page 7 54 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Listing Option I 0 1 2 3 4 5 The 1 option is used to control the listing file output Listing modes O to 5 can be specified Mode O won t produce any listing output and mode 5 produces the most detailed listing On default listing mode 0 is selected i e no listing is generated if this option is omitted Omitting explicit listing mode specification with this option as with 1 defaults to listing mode 5 The listing output file name is derived from the corresponding source code file name where the original file name extension is replaced with extension 1st The listing file is for user information purposes only i e it is not required by system Listing Directory Lid listingdirectoryname The 1d option allows for the specification of an alternative output directory for the listing files created with the 1 option This option is useful when applying make utilities for automatically compiling modified User Language programs as it allows to keep the source directories clean With the BAE software a makefile is provided in the baeulc directory This makefile defines the dependencies between User Language programs and include files and works with listing files in a subdirectory 1st Delete Pr
180. ation when selecting multiple files with wildcards Utilities Page 7 31 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Decompress all dab files from floppy drive A and store the decompressed files to directory baelib on hard disk drive C gt install a ddb c baelib Decompress the file ged fnt from floppy drive B and store the decompressed file to directory bae on hard disk drive D gt install b ged fnt d bae Compress the file design ddb and store the compressed file to design cmp gt install c design ddb design cmp Diagnosis The error messages issued by INSTALL are intended to be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 32 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 740 LISTDDB Name listddb List Design Database Utility Synopsis listddb ddbfile listfile Description The LISTDDB utility program lists the contents of a DDB Design DataBase file to an ASCII file LISTDDB accepts the DDB file name ddbfile as first argument This file must be available with extension dab unless a file name extension is explicitly included with the file name specification LISTDDB accepts the listing file name list file as second argument This is the name of the ASCII destination file for the listing Examples To list the contents of DDB file laylib ddb to ASCII file laylib 1st gt listddb laylib laylib lst See also COPYDDB Diagnosis The error messages issued by LISTDDB are intended to be self explanator
181. ative Y Coordinate mm o Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm o Relative Y Coordinate mm 1 4 Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm 1 4 Relative Y Coordinate mm 0 Done File Save Element With the commands above a pad named al 4 has been defined which will be used on a padstack for parts with plated through pins This pin definition will require a corresponding pad symbol for the solder resist mask which should be same as q1 4 except for a slightly expanded copper area Use the following commands to copy the still loaded pad named q1 4 to a pad symbol named q1 Aar square 1 4mm solder resist then load pad g1 4sr and enlarge the copper area of ql 4sr by 0 1mm File Save Element As File Name Element Name q1 4sr Load Element Pad File Name Element Name oi Aer Areas Resize Area Move to Area Corner Edge Expansion Distance mm 0 1 File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 24 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Defining Finger Pads Use the following commands to define a pad named so with a finger shaped copper area width 0 7mm length 1 7mm in the demo dab DDB file File New Pad File Name demo Element Name so Element Width mm 4 Element Height mm 2 Areas Add Passive Copper Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 35 Arc Left Jump Relative Relative X Coordinate mm
182. attached to other menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program configures cascading submenus for the pulldown menu interfaces of the Windows Motif CAM View modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button supports cascading menus to simplify repeated submenu function calls Windows Motif Parameter Setup Dialogs The following Windows Motif parameter setup dialogs are implemented for the CAM View module e Settings Setting General CAM View Parameters e Mey Setting Display Parameters The UIFSETUP User Language program replaces the parameter setup functions of the Windows and Motif pulldown menus with the above menu functions for activating the corresponding parameter setup dialogs Windows Motif Pulldown Menu Konfiguration When using pulldown menus under Windows and Motif the UIFSETUP User Language program configures the following modified CAM View main menu with a series of additional functions and features File Edit View Settings Utilities Help PCB Design CAD Page 4 143 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 4 In built CAM View System Features User Language The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated to the CAM View module Le User Language programs can be called from CAM View It is possible to implement any user specific CAM View
183. ault routing widths minimum distance settings and routing priorities with highest priority Complete Initial Routing The Complete Initial Router automatically activates four Initial Router passes to rout all open connections which can be routed without rip up and retry With each Initial Router pass the channel width and the maximum via count is increased The first Initial Router pass runs with maximum via count zero The last Initial Router pass runs with channel width zero and a maximum via count according to the parameter set with the Maximum Via Count function from the Options menu see above Rip Up Retry Router The Rip Up Retry Router attempts to route all open connections until the board is completely routed Connections which can be routed without rip up are routed first Then the Rip Up Retry Router selects and eliminates traces rip up and re routes them to create space for the unroutes For this purpose the router gathers information on dense board areas and increases the cost of routing in such areas The Rip Up Retry Router is supported by a sophisticated array of heuristic strategy parameters The cost factors can be dynamically adapted to the current routing problem thus controlling the price of strategies such as via placement routing against preferred directions using pin channels etc It is strongly recommended to refrain from modifying these strategies unless the routing success
184. ay items Input Grid The floating point database used throughout Bartels AutoEngineer allows to specify arbitrary placement coordinates Input grids and angles can be released and or locked at any time from throigh the View menu which can be activated with the middle mouse button Nevertheless the choice of a suitable input grid has fundamental meaning for design processes such as Autorouting or manufacturing data generation Placing parts in 1 10 or 1 20 grids with just exceptional deviation e g for plugs will considerably facilitate both manual routing as well as Autorouting Trace corners at 45 degree angle steps are recommended for better manufacturing results unless deviation is indispensable The cursor arrow keys can be used together with the snizt key to move the mouse graphic cursor to the next input grid point in direction of the arrow key shift together with Enter selects the current input grid coordinate as if a corner was selected with the left mouse key and a subsequent Enter key input terminates the definition of a point list as if Dong was selected through the right mouse key This allows for on grid traces or polygons to be created through the keyboard only Introduction Page 1 15 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Coordinates BAE uses a conventional coordinate system which always references the current position of the origin It can be useful to repo
185. ayer is most useful for the definition of library symbols such as drilled pins with identical pad shapes on all signal layers The Middle Layers signal layer matches all signal inside layers i e the Middle Layers signal layer includes all layers between signal layer 1 solder side and the currently defined top signal layer component side Objects defined on Middle Layers are considered to be placed on all signal inside layers and are checked and plotted accordingly The Middle Layers signal layer considerably simplifies pin definitions for multilayer layouts where inside layer pad shapes differ from component and solder side pad shapes PCB Design CAD Page 4 14 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Up to twelve power layers can be defined with each layout all of which being negatively displayed and plotted by the system The function from the menu is used to assign power layer signal names such as gnd Ov Or vec to define the power layers of the currently loaded layout The Layout Editor allows for the DRC controlled definition of split power planes by hierarchically placing active copper on power layers The CAM Processor automatically generates isolations and heat traps when plotting power layers The documentary layers are used to store and or include documentary information graphic text and special keepout definitions with the layout and or the layout library symbo
186. b DDB file of the working directory i e requested symbols on subsequent load operations are copied from demolib ddb Circuit Design CAE Page 2 33 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Placing Symbols Use the following commands to load the transistor symbol tr be517 with part name V1 and place it at coordinate 240 130 Symbols Add Symbol Library Element Name tr_bc517 Move to 240 130 The part name query is used for specifying the symbol reference e g IC10 R8 U004 If the user types in an empty string by pressing the return key EJ then the system will automatically generate a part name according to the part name pattern defined with the corresponding symbol see also chapter 2 2 2 Creating SCM Symbols An empty string input to the part name query can also be activated by pressing a mouse button The system will issue an error message when the part name space defined with the part name pattern is exhausted i e if no new part name corresponding to the name pattern can be generated automatically any more The part names used throughout a schematic design must be unique to avoid conflicts in subsequent Packager and processes Part name uniqueness is implicitly ensured when using the automatic part naming facilities With explicit part naming the system performs special part name uniqueness checks to avoid name conflicts If the specified part name is already used on the currently loaded SCM sheet then th
187. ber Aperture Table standard Aperture Size D Code Aperture Type min mm Drawing Mode 9 84 0 250 ALL D15 round 19 69 0 500 ALL D18 round 31 50 0 800 ALL e frowns Lazio SS ka sde round 51 18 1 300 ALL PCB Design CAD Page 4 133 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual D Code Aperture Type Emin mmj Drawing Mode square 47 24 1 200 ALL square 78 74 2 000 ALL thermal 70 87 1 800 ALL The Edit Aperture Table function is used to edit entries in the currently loaded aperture table After activating the Edit Aperture Table function the system provides a listing of the currently loaded aperture table where f and H keys can be used to scroll forward and or backward in this list and the return key Elcan be used to return to the CAM Processor main menu For changing a certain aperture table entry the appropriate aperture table index must be entered Empty string inputs e pressing the return key E on subsequent aperture specification prompts causes the system to accept predefined values The first prompt is used to specify the aperture type and or shape where r defines a round aperture q defines a square shaped aperture a defines a rectangular aperture t defines a thermal aperture and s defines a special aperture Note that special apertures are not utilized by the CAM Processor special aperture types are reserved for future functions A dash string input to the aperture
188. bols are defined and stored to SCM symbol libraries A schematic symbol is usually defined by placing elements from the subordinate marker level thus creating the logical pins of the corresponding part Graphic and text can be created on symbol level for including symbol outlines part name references attribute definitions commentary text etc Special symbols for signal naming purposes are defined on SCM label level These symbols can be utilized on SCM sheet level for assigning signal names or signal levels to connections and or busses for tapping busses for connecting different SCM sheets etc Pin symbols are created by defining a contact area on SCM marker level Marker symbols can be placed on SCM symbol and or label level to determine the positions of the corresponding part pins The contact area is required for connecting the corresponding pin on SCM sheet level A reference designator text can be defined on marker level for showing pin names on symbol level Marker symbols with a normal graphic area instead of a contact area can be utilized on SCM sheet level for creating and displaying T connections Plan Level PARTS SYMBOLS LABELS POINT SYMBOLS MARKERS Busses Connections Graphic Text Label Level Symbol Level PIN MARKER PINS MARKERS Attributes Attributes Graphic Graphic Text Text Marker Level Attributes ContactArea Graphic Text Figu
189. c Editor Besides that BAE provides the subsequently mentioned utilities for creating and or converting various foreign ASCII net list formats See also chapter 7 for a detailed description of these utility programs 3 4 1 Importing Logical Net Lists Importing logical i e unpacked net lists to the Bartels AutoEngineer requires a subsequent Packager pass to prepare for the layout design A DDB library file for the Packager process including all of the requested layout symbols and logical library entries is required The NETCONV Logical Netlist Conversion Utility program is used to transfer logical net list data from BAE ASCII format to internal Bartels AutoEngineer format ready for processing with the BAE Packager 3 4 2 Importing Physical Net Lists No packaging is required when importing physical i e packed net lists to the Bartels AutoEngineer Nevertheless a DDB library file including all of the requested layout symbols must be available for the subsequent layout design process The CONCONV Connection Conversion Utility program is used to transfer physical net lists to the Bartels AutoEngineer Supported ASCII net list formats are BAE CALAY MARCONI and RACAL Net lists from other systems can often be written in one of these formats providing a convenient link between other schematic systems and the powerful BAE layout system The REDASC REDAC ASCII Input Interface program is used to transfer layout data from Redac MAXI system
190. ce It has an impressive set of features and has the flexibility to route a wide range of PCB technologies including analog multilayer and SMT designs The Bartels Autorouter has been incorporated in leading PCB layout systems throughout the world setting new industrial standards of success reliability and flexibility and dramatically reducing the requirement for manual routing in all boards Its incorporation into other systems has varied considerably With Bartels AutoEngineer all of the advanced features and capabilities of the Bartels Autorouter are available With the Bartels Autorouter an experienced BAE user should be able to complete the design of a eurocard PCB including schematic drawing and manufacturing data output in not more than one or two days Bartels Autorouter is based on special backtracking rip up reroute algorithms These types of routing algorithms have been proven to be the only ones capable of achieving 100 route completion on the majority of today s challenging PCB designs Extensive artificial intelligence features have been built into the router to produce high quality design results in a reasonable time The Bartels Autorouter includes special features for production optimization giving excellent yield in board manufacture The complete routing process is supervised by a backtracking algorithm which not only prevents from a deterioration of the result or a dead lock during rip up or optimization but also is able to expl
191. ce elements even when working in small zoom overview display modes The trace pick snapping distance is automatically adjusted to the trace width l e trace elements of wide traces or in high zoom display modes can easily be picked without having to hit the trace center line Highlight Net The Highlight Ne function from the Layout Editor Traces menu is used to mark all connections of the selected net with a special Highlight color Any power layer heat trap circles and isolations of the selected net is included with the highlight display and isolated pins and active copper areas can also be selected for highlight Starting a new trace on a passive copper area triggers a highlight for the nets connected to that copper area The Highlight Ne function works as a toggle To reset the highlight of a certain net pin or active copper area simply re select that object with the Highlight Net function Advanced color support and highlight reset facilities are provided through the Highlight Ne default mode with highlight color selection and Reset All for clearing all nethighlight options of the Highlight Net function In BAE HighEnd the function causes a highlight and or de highlight of the selected nets in all currently loaded plans of the current project file on layout board and schematic sheet level global net highlight cross probing PCB Design CAD Page 4 59 B
192. ced with the via grid changes will never cause a deterioration of the current routing result at subsequent router passes i e the Autorouter will try to but not necessarily replace previously placed vias Sub Grid Routing The Routing Sub Grid function is used to activate half grid routing option Half Grid 1 2 On default half grid routing is deactivated option Standard 1 1 Half grid routing means that the Autorouter can alternatively use a routing grid shifted by half of the selected routing grid e g half grid routing with 1 40 inch routing grid can also utilize the 1 80 inch grid routing grid The current standard trace width and minimum distance settings are not affected by the sub grid routing option Half grid routing yields better use of regions nearby off grid placed objects such as pin channels at off grid placed parts thus considerably increasing routability of dense layouts PCB Design CAD Page 4 80 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Gridless Routing Option A rule driven gridless router is integrated to the Autorouter Gridless routing is deactivated on default option Gridbased Routing of the function from the menu The rule driven gridless router can be activated through the Gridless Routing option from the Gridless Routing function The gridless router performs selective gridless routing i e gridless routing is only applied locally where this yie
193. ch required merge source source file is master EH merge destination destination file is master merge replace source file is master Class Switch required a all classes aso all SCM classes same as all s switches all layout classes same as all 1 switches all chip IC design classes same as all c switches SCM plans with part list and logical net list SCM symbols with logical library 11 layout plans with physical net list and paths cl chip IC design layouts with physical net list and paths Utilities Page 7 25 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples To copy all layout symbols with element names matching so1 e g so14 so16 from newlib ddb to laylib ddb with laylib ddb supposed to be the master file gt copyddb newlib laylib md lp sol To copy all schematic design data from design ddb to redesign ddb with design ddb supposed to be the master file gt copyddb design redesign ms as To update the padstack definitions matching finger in design ddb according to the definitions in laylib ddb gt copyddb laylib design ms ls finger To copy all User Language libraries from ulcprog vdb to ullibs sav with ulcprog vdb supposed to be the master file gt copyddb ulcprog vdb ullibs sav ms ulp Replace layout parts in design ddb with corresponding parts from Library ddb i e update job specific layout library in design dab gt copyddb l
194. ch circuit traces are displayed with their true widths All traces having a screen width greater than the clipping width are displayed with their true widths All traces having a screen width less than the clipping width are displayed as center lines The default clipping width value is 1 5mm The Potential Display function is used to display connections to active copper areas using either cross shaped markers on connected pins option Eross or airlines connecting pins and copper area gravity points option Box On default the option is used PCB Design CAD Page 4 76 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual User Language The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated to the Autorouter i e User Language programs can be called from the Autorouter and it is possible to implement any user specific Autorouter function required such as status display parameter setup reports and test functions CAD CAM input output functions automatic or semi automatic placement and or routing functions customer specific batch procedures etc The Autorouter provides both explicit and implicit User Language program call facilities User Language programs can be started with explicit program name specification using the Run User Scrip function from the File menu empty string or question mark input to the program name query activates a User Language program selection menu User Language programs can also be calle
195. considered by the connectivity Any drill hole intersecting or touching a split power plane line is isolated from the corresponding power layer Text Line Width The Set Text Plot Width option from the Other Functions submenu of the Tex Layout Editor menu can be used to assign individual plot widths to selectable texts Text specific plot widths are considered by the display and plot functions Default text plot width zero displays text with one pixel width and uses the standard line width when plotting texts Height DRC The Height DRC function from the Other Functions submenu of the Layout Editor Parts menu can be used for part height design rule assignments The Height Offset option is used to define part specific DRC height offsets for selectable parts The DRC height offset of a part is added to its keepout areas height DRC specifications when performing part design rule checks The vertical regions between the board surface and part specific height DRC offsets is free for part placement thus allowing to place parts underneath each other The Check Exclude option can be used for selecting an alternate part to be excluded from the part height design rule check This feature is useful for placing alternate parts at the same position for variable and or exclusive insertion The function for assigning polygon heights option Height Specification and polygon height
196. created with extension ddb but this extension must not be included with the command line VALCONV reads the VALID part list file pstxprt and the VALID net list file pstxnet These files are generated by the VALID system and must reside in the current directory when calling VALCONV After successful processing a logical unpacked net list will exist in the BAE DDB file named lt projectname gt ddb This internal logical net list can be converted to a physical net list with the Packager in the same way as information from the BAE schematic A layout element can then be created in that design file parts placed and traces routed and it will also be possible to perform pin and gate swaps Files pstxprt VALID pari list pstxnet VALID net list See also NETCONV Packager LOGLIB Diagnosis The error messages issued by VALCONV are intended to be self explanatory Warnings Input file identifiers for part names pin names or net names containing special characters must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes Please contact our technical support for guidance if you want to transfer a net list format different from the description herein Utilities Page 7 66
197. cribes the Bartels AutoEngineer configurations and system requirements and provides detailed Bartels AutoEngineer installation instructions for all supported hardware and software platforms The Bartels AutoEngineer Symbol and Part Libraries documentation contains detailed information about the symbol and part libraries provided with the Bartels AutoEngineer CAE CAD CAM design system The Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide describes how to use the Bartels User Language in Bartels AutoEngineer i e how it is integrated to the Bartels AutoEngineer EDA system and how it can be applied The following main topics are covered by this manual basic concepts and description of the Bartels User Language D the Bartels User Language programming system User Language Compiler and User Language Interpreter D User Language example source code listings short information on the User Language programs supplied with the Bartels AutoEngineer D special data types defined for accessing Bartels AutoEngineer design data User Language system function reference Problems Questions Suggestions We appreciate comments from the people who use our system In particular we are thankful for suggestions on how to improve the Bartels AutoEngineer and or the Bartels User Language by introducing new or improving existing functions Please do not hesitate to contact Bartels Support if you have questions or problems related to the use of the Bartels AutoEngineer
198. cript file must start with the definition of the output file name extension which is defined with the command EXTENSION lt ext gt where lt ext gt is the file name extension a maximum length of up to three characters is allowed The USERLIST script must end with the ENDSPEC keyword Commentary text can be placed between and FOR Command The FOR command is used for selecting elements of a certain class The formal syntax of the FOR command is FOR ALL lt class gt lt commands gt where lt class gt specifies the class of the objects to be scanned Valid classes can be selected with the keywords NETS PARTS PINS ATTRIBUTES or lt attname gt NETS iterates the net list object class PARTS iterates the part list object class PINS iterates pin lists and ATTRIBUTES iterates attribute lists lt attname gt is used for scanning the attribute value list of the attributes named lt attname gt The command list lt commands gt is processed once for each element of the specified object class FOR commands can be nested to give more control The nested FOR loop in FOR ALL NETS FOR ALL PINS would for example find the first net and then for all pins of that net perform lt commands gt It would then repeat the operation on the second net and so on until it has completed processing of all nets Utilities Page 7 60 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Output Commands The output command
199. ction from the Layout Editor Utilities menu is used to run a complete design rule check on the currently loaded layout It is strongly recommended to use Batch DRC before generating CAM data and or passing CAM data to the PCB manufacturer to avoid design rule violations such as short circuits unrouted nets or clearance violations Use the following commands to perform a batch design rule check on the currently loaded layout board of the demo ddb DDB file Utilities Batch DRC Please confirm Y N y After performing the design rule check the Batch DRC function implicitly activates the function from the menu to display the checking results and the design state The function can also be called explicitly using the following commands Utilities Report The following listing is displayed by the Report function or after Batch DRC zero error lines might be omitted File Types Element Number Number of Open Connecti Number of Short Circui Copper Distance Violat Documentary Distance Violations Number f Power Layer Errors Number of Missing Par Number of Wrong Type Parts Number of Missing Netlist Pins Height Distance Viola Power Layers in Use Signal Layers in Use The Number of Nets report entry displays number of nets defined in the net list of the currently loaded layout The Number of Open Connections entry denotes the number of not yet routed two point
200. current project On SCM sheet level label level pageref text definitions are substituted with the list of all SCM sheets on which the corresponding net is used On SCM sheet level label level Spagecref text definitions are substituted with the list of comments of all SCM sheets on which the corresponding net is used The Packager automatically assigns the Sorgname original internal SCM symbol part name s and or SCM sub net name s Spagename schematic sheet name s of layout part and Sblkrname schematic block symbol reference name s attributes for schematic sub block tracking information to layout parts Srlname Requested Logical Library Name symbol attribute value assignments cause the Packager to transfer symbols using non default logical library definitions This allows for the selection of part definitions with e g manufacturer specific library attribute settings or non default package assignments The non default LOGLIB entry assigned through r1name must refer to the same part class like the default LOGLIB definition for LOGLIB part class definitions see also chapter 7 11 mainpart subpart symbol sets must be assigned to corresponding parts Le heterogeneous symbol definitions such as amain asub and bmain bsub can be assigned to amain asub or bmain bsub but not to amain bsub or bmain asub Circuit Design CAE Page 2 22 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Srlext Requested Logical Library Name Extension symbol at
201. d by simply pressing special keys of the keyboard This method of implicit User Language program call is supported at any time unless another interactive keyboard input request is currently pending The name of the User Language program to be called is automatically derived from the pressed key i e pressing a standard and or function key triggers the activation of a User Language program with a corresponding name such as ar 1 for digit key fi ar r for standard key Kl ar for standard key f ar f1 for function key Fi ar f2 for function key F2 etc The Autorouter environment also features event driven User Language program calls where User Language programs with predefined names are automatically started at certain events and or operations such as AR ST at Autorouter module startup AR LOAD after loading a design element AR SAVE before saving a design element AR TOOL when selecting a toolbar item and AR ZOOM when changing the zoom factor The module startup User Language program call method is most useful for automatic system parameter setup as well as for key programming and menu assignments The element save and load program call methods can be used to save and restore element specific parameters such as the zoom area color setup etc The toolbar selection event must be used to start User Language programs which are linked to toolbar elements The zoom event can be used to apply an update request to a desig
202. d for releasing a new BAE authorization Defining and Modifying BAE Setup Data The BSETUP command format bsetup setupfil is used for defining user specified BAE configuration parameters and defaults such as BAE menu color setup layer menus documentary layer definitions standard library access paths etc BSETUP accepts the setup file name setupfile as argument This file must have an extension of def but this extension must not be included with the command line BSETUP translates the setup file and stores the defined setup parameters to a file named bsetup dat in the current directory When starting the Bartels AutoEngineer or activating one of BAE s program modules the corresponding setup parameters are loaded from the bset up dat file in the BAE programs directory The Windows Linux and Unix versions of the BAE software also provide the BAESETUP module for modifying the BAE system parameters BAESETUP can be called using the Setup function from the BAE main menu BAESETUP uses a graphical interface with dialog boxes making it much easier to be operated than the BSETUP utility which usually requires a DEF file containing the complete BAE parameter data set to be created and or modified BAESETUP also provides a function for exporting the setup data to a BSETUP compatible DEF file Utilities Page 7 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The setup file format must start wi
203. d or milling data can be displayed using the layer color assignment with a non black color e g white selected for the drill holes as in View Color Assignment Layer Assignment Change Colors Drill Holes Move to Desired Color white Exit PCB Design CAD Page 4 149 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Moving Drilling Milling Data The Move Data Sei function from the File menu can be used for moving previously loaded drilling and or milling data sets The data to be moved can be selected from a popup menu where available data sets are listed according to the load sequence Each data set entry of the popup menu displays the layer s the offset to origin the mirror mode and the input data file name After selecting the desired data set the user must specify the movement vector by selecting the start and end point of the movement During these selections the input grid corresponds with the current display grid settings Pressing the right mouse button during data set movement activates a context menu with functions for performing absolute and or relative jumps Writing Drilling Milling Data The function from the File menu is used to write currently loaded drilling and or milling data to a named file Use the following commands to write the currently loaded drilling data in Excellon format with drill class to output file demo exc File Save Drill Data Drill Data File Name demo exc New drill cla
204. d outline must not be confused with the element boundaries The element boundaries are used to define the size of the layout data element The board outline is a continuous line defining the perimeter of the PCB thus describing the area where parts and traces can be placed The board outline is required by the Autorouter i e the Autorouter call will fail if no board outline is defined or if parts and or pins are placed outside the board outline PCB Design CAD Page 4 45 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Plot Markers Use the following commands to define two plot markers as shown in figure 4 2 Areas Add Document Line Plot Markers m Move to 0 1 0 1 Move to 0 1 0 2 Move to 0 2 0 1 Move to 0 2 0 2 Move to 0 1 0 1 m Done Copy Area Move to 0 1 0 1 I Move to 2 7 2 6 Plot markers or film registration marks are plot control symbols which are intended for adjusting the plots and or films later The plot markers documentary layer can be defined with the BSETUP utility program thus providing a useful feature of including design information on all plot layers with only one definition see chapter 7 2 for more details Figure 4 2 Layout with Board Outline and Plot Markers PCB Design CAD Page 4 46 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Top Layer The Bet Top Layer function from the Settings menu is used to set the Top Layer the component side signal layer of the layout T
205. d to select all currently visible layers for output Use the following commands to generate insertion data output for the solder side of the currently loaded layout select documentary layer Insertion Plan Side 1 for output and direct the output data to a file named demo id1 Drilling Insertion m Insertion Output Document Layer Insertion Plan Side 1 Insertion Data File Name demo id1 The CAM Processor issues the Insertion data write done message after successfully generating the insertion data output and the insertion data file demo id1 should have the following contents Name X mm Y mm Angle Degrees C100 4635 3651 0 EH 3619 3651 0 R104 984 5016 270 PCB Design CAD Page 4 140 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 CAM View The CAM View module provides features for displaying Gerber data Gerber View Sieb amp Meier and or Excellon drilling data and Excellon milling data in order to check CAM data validity and to estimate the efficiency of tool usage CAM View features multiple input selective data set movement and sorted output with variable offsets optional mirroring and adjustable aperture tables thus supporting panelization CAM View also provides a powerful function for translating Gerber data to BAE layout design data i e with CAM View the user is able to import Gerber data produced by foreign PCB layout
206. d to control the pen plotter speed i e the speed at which the pen can be moved by the HP GL plotter The system accepts either s input for maximum speed or non negative integer plotter speed values in cm s units The default plotter speed corresponds with s maximum speed The maximum speed value specification is 99cm s The HP GL coordinates are written in plotter units where 40 2 plotter units are 1 millimeter Some HP GL compatible plotters are based on 40 plotter units per millimeter The Plot Scale function can be used to specify a scale factor for producing true to scale output with non default plotter units The default plot scale value is 1 0 for true to scale output Plot scale specifications can range from 0 1 to 100 0 The Fill Mode HP GL function provides the options Fil Mode Off and Fill Mode On Fill Mode Off causes the system to refrain from filling the plot structures i e only outlines are drawn for filled areas Switching off the fill mode is most useful for fast control plots Fill Mode On is used to select the default fill mode The HP GL Output function is used to produce HP GL pen plots The user is prompted for the plot layer and the pen number 1 99 and for the name of the output file if no default output device was specified with Plot Device Note the Multiple Layers option provided with the layer selection menu of the HP GL Output function Th
207. d when switching to the Layout system Packager Backannotation Page 3 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 2 3 Running the Packager Before starting the Packager process through the Star function the user must specify the parameters to be used for the Packager call using the functions from the Settings menu The following prompts are activated after calling the All Parameter function from the Settings menu Settings All Parameters Design File Name Design Library Name Layout Element Name Each of these parameters can also be set explicitely through the corresponding functions from the Settings menu The design file name is the name of the project file to be selected for packaging The design file must be available with extension ddb but this extension must not be included with the file name specification If the user types an empty string by pressing the return key EN to the design file name prompt then the system will automatically use the file name of the previously processed element i e the global project name The design library name is the name of the layout library file to be used for the PCB design This file must also contain the logical library definitions required for packaging The design library file must be available with extension ddb but this extension must not be included with the file name s
208. d without fear of causing damage Previously executed commands can be reversed or undone using Undo and then reprocessed with Redd This ensures data security and provides a powerful feature for validating different design options On default the system supports twenty Undo steps The Setup dialog from the BAE main menu provides options for increasing the number of supported Undo steps for the Schematic Editor and or the Layout Editor to up to one hundred Introduction Page 1 17 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 2 4 Graphic Input Input to the BAE graphic workarea is performed with the graphic cursor and the mouse The most important graphical interactions are pick and place Pick means selecting an item which is already placed in the graphic workarea Place means placing a new item to the graphic workarea A pick function is often followed immediately by a place function e g when moving a part The left mouse button is used both for selecting an element pick for further manipulations and for selecting the current graphic cursor position for place operations such as placing a selected part or defining the next corner point of the trace or polygon to be currently created The right mouse button is used either for canceling pick operations or for activating a submenu with special options This options submenu provides choices appropriate for the curren
209. dashed lines with short line segments and long gaps poly dash3 creates alternating short and long lines separated by short gaps The function from the GEDPOLY User Language program can be used for assigning dash modes to documentary lines or for resetting any previously assigned dash modes through the option GEDGROUP can be called through or through the Other Functions function from the Areas menu if UIFSETUP is activated Warning Documentary dash line modes can only be set if the polygon rul rule definition file and thus the poly dashi poly dash2 and poly dash3 rules have been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory l e the rules are not saved with the design When transferring the design onto a different computer the polygon dash rules must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise documentary dash line mode assignments won t work Polygon Line Width The Eet Polygon Line Width function from the Other Functions submenu of the Areas Layout Editor menu can be used to assign individual line widths to selectable documentary lines and split power plane areas Polygon specific line widths are considered by the display and plot functions The default line width of zero displays lines with one pixel width and uses the standard line width when plotting polygon lines Split power plane line width settings are
210. data is automatically recognized and or processed With Excellon output function the output data type i e either drilling data or milling data must be specified since each drill class can contain both milling and drilling data The drilling and or milling data sets are loaded and saved with drill class specification respectively It is possible to load drilling and or milling data sets with different drill classes and to generate drilling and or milling data output with selectable drill classes With milling data the drill class can be used to differ between plated and non plated Drill holes and milling puncture points not assigned to the standard drill class are indicated with the corresponding drill class letter A B Z The Load Drill Data function automatically activates the color table entry for the drilling data display This color table entry is set to white if it is still undefined i e black and or invisible This ensures that drilling data load operations can be visually monitored Use the following commands to load the Sieb amp Meier drill data file demo dr1 to drill class using the corresponding drill tool table demo tol see also chapter 4 7 12 where these files have been generated File Load Tool Table Tool Table File Name demo to Load Drill Data Drill Data File Name demo drl New drill class A Z Sieb amp Meier View Display Currently loaded drilling an
211. data security and provides a powerful feature for estimating design alternatives The View or Display menu can either be activated by selecting the corresponding main menu item or by pressing the middle mouse button Activation through the middle mouse button is even possible whilst performing a graphical manipulation such as selecting a net or component for routing The View or Display menu provides useful functions for changing display options such as zoom window zoom scale input and or display grids grid and or angle lock color settings etc The Preplacement menu of the Autorouter is equal to the Autoplacemen menu of the Layout Editor see chapters 4 4 3 and 4 4 4 The Autorouter provides the same initial placement and placement optimization functions as already known from the Layout Editor allowing for initial placement and placement optimization to be applied in the Autorouter without having to go back to the Layout Editor The Autoroute menu provides the functions for activating autorouting procedures such as Full Autorouter Optimizer Load Layout Batch Setup and Batch Star The Batch Start function is used to run a series of router passes previously defined with the Batch Setup function The Interaction menu provides the functions for activating special routing operations such as single net routing net gr
212. db Select Library Library Name EJ Circuit Design CAE Page 2 32 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Bartels AutoEngineer supports a most flexible database concept This concept allows any DDB file to be used as symbol library When loading a symbol the system will first check the job specific library i e the currently edited DDB file for the requested library element If the element is not contained in the project file then the search is expanded onto the currently selected library When loading a symbol from an external library file the Schematic Editor will automatically create a complete copy of the requested library symbol in the current project file and subsequent requests for the same symbol will from then on refer to the job specific library Figure 2 3 illustrates the Schematic Editor library access concept Project File SCM Library Subseguent First Access Symbollabel Ki ze Symbol Label BS Figure 2 3 SCM Library Access Subseguent Changing the library path setting is meaningful only if a series of different symbols are to be loaded from a library file which is not accessible through the predefined library path Use the following commands to set the library path to the demolib ddb DDB file of the current directory Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib stdsym ddb demolib With the commands above the library path is set to the demolib dd
213. ded in the reflow SMD SMT soldering techniques On default the Mirror Displa lunmirrored attribute are only visible when not mirrored whilst polygons with the Visible mirrored Settings dialog from the Settings menu to support reflow parameter is activated and polygons with the visible attribute are only visible when mirrored However with the Mirror Display parameter deactivated all polygons declared as Visible unm and all polygons declared as Wisible mirrored are never visible independently of any part mirroring allows for SMD libraries designed for conventional SMD soldering to be re used for reflow reflow SMD soldering irrored are always visible Mirror Display deactivation PCB Design CAD Page 4 106 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 8 Automatic Copper Fill The BAE layout system provides powerful automatic copper fill functions with user definable minimum structure size and isolation distance The copper fill algorithm support isolated copper area elimination and automatic heat trap generation with adjustable connection widths and heat trap specific isolation distances The copper fill functions are available through the Copper Fill submenu of the Layout Editor Areas menu Copper Fill Parameters Depending on the current BAE menu setup copper fill parameters can either be set from th
214. default documentary layer definitions provided with initial BAE software installations The Board Outline layer is used for defining and or displaying the board outline of the currently loaded layout The Airlines layer is used for displaying unroutes on the currently loaded layout The Drill Holes layer is used for displaying drill holes on the currently loaded layout part or padstack Workared Origin Errors and Highligh are layers for displaying special layout user interface elements The Drill layers are used for assigning colors to drill classes The Fixed and Glued layers are used for the selection of patterns for the display of fixed and or glued layout elements Pick Preference Layer and Element Selection The pick preference layer is used to resolve ambiguities when selecting objects which are placed at the same position but on different layers e g traces areas SMD parts etc The pick functions use the pick preference layer to designate the element to be selected if more than one object of interest is placed at the pick position The pick preference layer can be selected with the function from the menu On default the pick preference layer is set to signal layer 1 solder side The dialog from the menu provides the parameter for selecting the element pick method for multiple elements at the same pick position The Pr
215. deleted Le the Autorouter will automatically connect these pins to the power layer using vias Power layer definitions can be displayed in the BAE layout system Use the following commands to set the color for power layer 1 to dark blue Change Colors m Power 1 Move to Desired Color dark blue Exit On the display of drilled pin definitions there is a distinction whether the pin is connected to a power layer or not Power layer connections are displayed as circle outlines isolations i e drills which are not to be connected to any power layer are displayed as filled circles The layer selection menus of the Add Active Copper function from the Areas menu allow for the selection of power layers Power planes or isolated areas net name can be placed on power layers to perform split power plane editing i e to define more than one signal on a single power layer Power planes are displayed with their outlines which will later be interpreted as isolation line by the CAM Processor see also chapter 4 7 6 of this manual There is a restriction that no power plane can overlap any other power plane partially since this would cause an ambiguity in the power plane tree detection algorithms Partial power plane overlaps will cause the design rule check to issue power layer errors the number of power plane errors detected by the DRC is shown with the Power Layer Errors entry of the Reporl Utilities function Power planes completely enclosed by
216. ding the list of pad symbols from the specified library file An empty string input to the library element name query causes the system to use the pad symbol previously selected with the Add Part function if there was already one specified Use the following commands to load the pad symbol via place it at the padstack origin and assign it to the All Layers signal layer Parts Add Part Library Element Name via Select Input Layer All Layers Done Defining the Drill Hole Use the following commands to define a drill hole with a diameter of 0 5mm Text Drill Place Drill Hole Drill size 0 00mm 0 5 Done The Drilling Class option from the Place Drill Hole function allows for the assignment of a non default drilling class to support and or process blind and buried via definitions see also chapter 4 6 11 The Mirr Drill Class option allows for the assignment of a mirror mode drill class definition The mirror mode drill class is activated when the part on which the drill hole is defined is mirrored thus supporting mirroring of parts with blind and buried pins On padstack level the mirror mode drill class indicator is displayed below the standard drill class On layout level only the currently active drill class is displayed PCB Design CAD Page 4 28 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Defining a Drill Symbol Use the following commands
217. e Settings dialog of the Copper Fill submenu or through dedicated menu functions in that same menu The Bet Fill Clearance function is used to set the copper fill isolation distance parameter for the copper fill algorithm default 0 3mm The copper fill clearance distance is applied on default unless some net specific minimum distance settings are defined through MINDIST net attributes see chapter 7 11 Net specific minimum distance attribute settings are considered individually The Min Fill Size function is used to define the minimum structure size for area generation default 0 1mm This value should correspond with the smallest Gerber aperture size to ensure valid Gerber photoplot data generation without overdraw errors The Round Corners option of the Traces Cut Mode function causes the copper fill algorithm to generate arc shaped concave area borders during trace segment isolation on default octagonal circle interpolation is applied option Octagonal Corners The Keep Islands option of the Insol Area Mode function switches off isolated copper area recognition i e the copper washes over the pad that it is to connect to on default isolated copper areas are automatically eliminated during active copper generation option Delete Islands The Select Islands option keeps isolated areas and automatically selects them to the current group as they are crea
218. e etc These parameters can be changed using the functions provided with the Plot Parameters menu It is strongly recommended to set appropriate plot parameters before generating CAM output Each input prompt at the specification of plot parameters includes a parentheses enclosed display of the current parameter value setting On invalid parameter input values the CAM Processor issues an error message such as Invalid numeric value and the current parameter value is left unchanged Plot Parameter Save Load CAM plot parameter settings are automatically stored with the currently processed design file when switching to another BAE module see above chapter 4 7 4 The CAM Processor File menu also provides the Save Parameters and Load Parameters functions Save Parameters can be used to save the current CAM plot parameter settings to a different DDB file Load Parameters can be used to load CAM parameter settings from a selectable DDB file Plot CAM Origin The Plot CAM Origin function is used to set the origin of the output coordinate system When loading a layout element the CAM origin is automatically set to the lower left corner of that element When selecting the plot rotate or the plot mirror option see below then the CAM origin is automatically moved from the lower left to the upper left corner of the currently loaded element or vice versa The Plot CAM Origin function can be used to
219. e if padstacks are defined and selected to the via list accordingly The current via assignment list will also be used by the Autorouter and with the use of blind and buried vias the Autorouter will minimize layer occupancy as well this is true for all traces except for fixed traces which will not be processed by the Autorouter Standard Trace Widths The trace function submenus provide options for toggling between thin and wide default track widths during manual routing necking The standard values for these default track widths can be changed with the function from the menu where the options Set Thin Default default value 0 3mm and Set Wide Defaulj default value 1 0mm are provided The routing of a new trace always starts with the thin default track width Manual Routing Use the following commands to route from pin A1 of part K1 to pin C1 of the same part both pins are connected to net Vdd Traces Add Trace Move to K1 A1 0 8 0 8 m Move to Corner Point 0 8 0 95 000 Move to Corner Point 1 6 0 95 Ei Move to K1 C1 1 6 0 8 EI Done Each trace corner point is set by pressing the left mouse button The routing of a trace path is completed with the Done option from the submenu available with the right mouse button This submenu is also available during trace editing with functions such as insert Corner Or Move Segment where the routing layer or the track w
220. e A ER Rae ER Rae ER Ka eek ee 4 76 4 5 5 Autorouter OptiONS i iese ie Eer EN AGA BIG BOER ERK we Beek Ged KALA AEN GE see Ke ER eke 4 78 4 5 6 Autorouter Control Eens ske sege Ra gek Dog en ENEE 4 82 GB E TE UN 4 84 4 5 8 Autorouter FUNCTIONS EER RR EE RR RR EER RR EER ARK EER RR RE RARR RR EER ARK EE RR RE Rae ARK EEan Aaaa RR ERGER RR Eana 4 87 4 5 9 Using the AutorouteF sees ee RE EER nanana 4 90 Special Layout Features i s sae edd sed de See a Ne Seege e 4 94 4 6 1 Batch Design Rule Check Report esse esse ese ER RE ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER ERA ER KG e ER ERA RR Rae ER ERA ER Re eek ERA ea 4 94 4 6 2 Color Setup Color Tables Pick Preference Layer esse ese ee RE RR RE AE RE RR EE ER EE RR EE ER Ee ER EE EE Ge ee 4 96 4 6 3 Layout Net List ChangeS e iss ese ee RE RR RE AR EE AK EE AK RE RR EE AR EE AR EE A RR RR EE AR Ee RR EER REG RR Ee ER EG e RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 97 4 64 SCMChanges Redesign ALANGAN 4 100 4 6 5 Defining and Editing Power LayerS uses esse ee EER RR EER RR RE RR ERGER RR Ee RR RR RE RR RE GER RR Ee RR RR Rae RR RR Ee 4 103 4 6 6 8 Autorouter Via Keepout Areas nananana 4 104 4 6 7 Area Mirror Mode eiseres ee aaa 4 105 4 6 8 Automatic Copper Fil AA AA AA AA ad 4 107 4 6 9 Library Update esse sesse Re EE ERGE KERE EE Re EE EG AE ERGE AE RA EE EGO AA AA 4 112 4 6 10 Back Net List BANK PAA a a 4 114 4 6 11 Blind and Buried Via Lana AA EER
221. e BAE User Manual from the baedoc directory relative to the BAE programs directory if the argument is omitted Warnings BAEHELP can only be used under Windows Utilities Page 7 5 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 2 BAESETUP BSETUP Name baesetup Bartels AutoEngineer Setup Module bsetup Bartels AutoEngineer Setup Utility Synposis bsetup ncode lt code gt bsetup setupfil Description Releasing BAE Software Authorizations The BSETUP command format bsetup ncode lt code gt is used for releasing BAE software updates and or authorizations on previously delivered hardlock keys The encode option requires one argument specifying the authorization code for the BAE software configuration to be released BAE authorization codes are provided by Bartels System GmbH on demand When using the encode option BSETUP must be called from the BAE programs directory on the machine where the hardlock key to be released is currently mounted One BAE call is required immediately after running BSETUP with the encode option and a valid authorization code to release the new software authorization i e to transfer the new authorization code from the BAE setup file bsetup dat where it has been stored to with BSETUP to the hardlock key note message New Options lt sw config gt Correct BAE authorization check is then ensured on subsequent BAE calls i e BAE must be exited immediately after being calle
222. e a page eject and to prevent from subsequent plots being plotted onto the same sheet Circuit Design CAE Page 2 56 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 5 3 HP Laser Output The HP Laser Output function is used to produce HP Laser plots in PCL Printer Command Language format HP Laser plots are automatically scaled to A4 paper size i e neither plot scaling factor nor pen width settings have effect Use the following commands to generate an HP Laser plot of the currently loaded SCM sheet and direct the output to 1pt1 e g for interfacing an appropriate DOS connected laser writer device Plot Output HP Laser Output Plot File Name en The system will issue the following message after successfully generating the PCL plot HP Laser output done scale 1 The scale information in the status messages indicates any non default scaling factor being used for automatic plot to sheet size scaling Binary copy mode is required for transferring PCL plot data to the desired output device Le the b option must be used when sending PCL files from hard disk to laser printer with the DOS COPY command as in gt copy pclplot Ipti b with pelplot being the PCL plot file name and 1pt1 designating the output device Circuit Design CAE Page 2 57 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 5 4 Postscript Output The Postscript Output function is used to produce output in Postscript format Use the following commands
223. e by using the trace functions on the currently loaded layout in order to create and or modify more traces move cut and delete trace segments insert move and delete trace corner points change track widths create arc shaped traces etc Note the Move without Neighbour and options provided with the submenu of the Move Segmen function The Move without Neighbou default mode just moves the corner points of the processed trace segment whilst the mode also rearranges adjacent trace segments in order to keep the angles between the processed trace and the adjacent segments constant Adjust neighbours considers intersection points between new and neighbouring segments and rearranges neighbouring segments accordingly This feature is especially useful for moving diagonal segments at trace corners The Move w out neighb option is applied if neighbouring segments cannot be rearranged Use the Undel and Redo functions to estimate design modifications and return to the original design stage PCB Design CAD Page 4 61 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Fixing Traces It is recommended to fix pre routed traces which must not be modified and or rerouted by the Autorouter Use the following commands to fix all prerouted traces of net Vdd Traces Fix Trace Net Net Move to Signal Net Vdd e g 2 0 0 65 The Unfix Trace Ne function is used to release fixed traces or nets During fix
224. e for easier reading and more speedy learning PCB Design CAD Page 4 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual PCB Design CAD Page 4 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 E 4 PGB Design CAD a aaa Ca GEN E 4 5 4 1 1 Components and Features sccssscsseeeeseeesseeesseeesseeeeseesseeeeseeeaseesasaeesseesaseesaseesaseeeaseeeaseesaseeeaseeenses 4 5 4 1 2 Starting the Layout System use eene ee Rae RR ER RE RR RA ER RE ER ERA ER EE AR RA ER EE RR ERA RR Ee AR Re ER Ee RR ER RR Ee AR Ee RR EG RR Ee EE 4 9 4 1 3 Layout Editor Main Menu 2 aasaran 4 10 4 1 4 Customized Layout Editor User Interface ees esse ee Ee ee Ee RR EER Re RR Ee AR Re RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee ER Ee RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 12 4 1 5 in built Layout System Features uses esse ek Re RE EE RE RR EE AR EE RR EE e RR RR Ee AR Ee RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee ER EG ANAKAN 4 13 Layout Library Symbol Design ees EER RE EE RR E EG GEE ER R RRE ER ER REG KAKA 4 21 4 2 1 Creating Layout Pads eege eege Am EES 4 22 4 2 2 Creating Layout Padstacks u s ARABE KANA 4 27 4 23 Creating Layout Parte si esse AGA KG AA AA AR 4 35 Designing PCB LavoutS aa 4 42 4 3 1 Creating and Editing PCB Layouts mma esse ese ER Re ER RR ER ERA RR RO ER ERA RR Re ER Ee e RR Re A ER R ee RR Re e ER ee REG ER ee EE 4 43 4 3 2 Parts Placement 4 3 3 Text and Graphic 434 Traces eUa ao P E EE E AutoplaceMent sis ese ek
225. e logical library definition of the symbol symbolname contains multiple newattr commands with different value assignments to the attributname attribute This problem can be fixed by removing the redundant ambiguous newattr commands from the logical library definition of the symbol 123 Symbol symbolname Pin symbolpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 079 Symbol symbolname definition assignment not allowed NOT YET DOCUMENTED 078 Symbol symbolname definitions inconsistent mainpart subpart symbolmacroname s5 alternativedefinitionname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 111 Symbol symbolname double defined NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 25 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 036 Symbol symbolname not defined NOT YET DOCUMENTED 088 Symbol symbolname ignoring Srlext definitionextension name too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 130 Symbol macro symbolmacroname changed after sheet sheetname was saved Any pin change will be ignored NOT YET DOCUMENTED 112 Symbol pin symbolpinname not found for attribute attributename assignment NOT YET DOCUMENTED 081 Synthetic name for part symbolname too long NOT YET DOCUMENTED 008 Test Point Mode modespecification NOT YET DOCUMENTED 006 Test Point Name Prefix partnameprefix NOT YET DOCUMENTED 007 Test
226. e part e g 74LS08 OP_LM211 i80386sx etc Net List The net list section is expected after the parts list and must start with the keyword CONNECT Each net is defined by a command in the form lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt and or lt net gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt lt part gt lt pin gt where lt part gt is the part name as defined in the part list lt pin gt is the pin name of that part and lt net gt is the net name Utilities Page 7 47 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples ASCII net list design net NETLIST Part list B7 PARTS icl 741s00 ic2 741s00 CL es Net list CONNECT cla e2 Ys ic2 a icl y Vee ed mass ol 2 END To convert the logical ASCII net list design net to an internal logical net list named netlist in BAE DDB file design ddb gt netconv design The command above causes NETCONV to read the ASCII net list design net and store the net list named netlist to the job file design ddb After successful processing the Packager can be used to convert this net list to a physical net list ready to be processed by the BAE Layout Editor See also CONCONV LOGLIB Packager Diagnosis The error messages issued by NETCONV are intended to be self explanatory Warnings NETCONV converts logical net lists to the Bartels AutoEngineer In cases where pin gate swa
227. e re running the Packager see the description of the LOGLIB utility program for details on how to define logical library entries Backannotation Requests Saving a layout with pin gate swaps and or net list part name changes creates a design specific Backannotation request The Packager checks for Backannotation requests and activates a verification to prevent the Packager from forward annotation without confirmation Confirmation to run the Packager will discard any layout net list changes not yet backannotated Attribute Transfer The Packager automatically transfers SCM symbol pin names to the 11name pin attribute This allows for the display of logical pin names in the layout by defining 11name texts on padstack level Snettype pin attributes are automatically transferred to connected nets The Snettype value mixed is assigned to nets with different nettype attribute values The BAE HighEnd Packager automatically transfers drcblk pin attributes to connected nets The drcblk attribute value addresses a BAE HighEnd design rule check parameter block to be assigned to the corresponding net Packager Backannotation Page 3 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual ERC Electrical Rule Check The Packager evaluates pintype pin attribute settings to perform electrical rule checks ERC It is recommended to assign fixed ERC pin types through the logical symbol part definitions The following pin type attribute
228. e symbols The Sheet Mask option can be used to fade out all schematic plan level texts of a specific text class Each text can be assigned to different text classes A text is faded out if one its assigned text classes is faded out Texts without text class assignment are always visible A total of up to 31 different text classes are supported Text class names can be optionally specified in the bae ini file The system assignes default text class names such as Class 1 Class 2 etc if no text class names are defined in bae ini Text classes can be used to increase the legibility of schematic plans by fading out less significant symbol attributes Neural Rule System Page 6 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Text Visibility on Rotated Symbols Thescm rot vis 0 scm rot vis 90 scm rot vis 180andscm rot vis 270 from the sem rul rule definition file see User Language directory baeulc can be used to control text visibility on SCM symbol level depending on SCM symbol rotation on SCM sheet level Texts with sem rot vis 0 rule assignments are only displayed on symbols with zero degree placement rotation angle on SCM sheet level etc These rules can be used to place and or display symbol name and attribute value texts depending on symbol rotation modes The Disolve Rotations and Combine Rotations options from the SCMRULE User Language program can be used f
229. e system to use the file name of the currently loaded element which in our example is demo ddb The system now produces the following listing of the pads contained in demo ddb Type Pad File demo ddb q1 4 ql 4st so sosr via End Hit the spacebar to continue PCB Design CAD Page 4 26 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 2 2 Creating Layout Padstacks On layout padstack level the layout pin symbols and vias are defined by placing symbols from the subordinate pad level Each pad can be assigned to a signal and or documentary layer thus designating contact areas for the routing or defining pad shapes for solder resist SMD masks etc A drill hole and drill plan info can be created optionally for the definition of vias or drilled pins Keepout areas can be utilized for controlling the pin contact mode Documentary lines or areas can serve as pin designators on the silk screen or insertion plan and reference texts can be used for displaying pin names on part and or layout level In this section the pad symbols defined in the previous section are used to generate some padstack symbols To provide visual input control it is recommended to use the following commands to change the color setup in order to display the Drill Holes as well as the Drill Plan Both Sides and the Solder Mask all sides documentary layers during padstack definition Change Colors Drill Holes TT gt Doc Layer pon
230. e to the BAE examples directory e g c baejobs and start the Bartels AutoEngineer gt NG gt cd c baejobs gt bae EJ The BAE main menu is activated and you can start the Schematic Editor with the following command Schematic The Schematic Editor is actiavted and you can create SCM library elements Before generating your own symbols you should familiarize yourself with the conventions used for circuit symbol design Company specific conventions are frequently to be considered with regard to symbol size pin naming and grouping input output clock reset etc text size pin placement grids symbol origin etc Most important for the placement of a symbol on superior design levels are the symbol origin and the pin placement grid It is advisable to choose a pin placement grid eg 2mm which allows for easy pin connections in the grid used on SCM sheet level e g 1mm the symbol origin should be set accordingly Figure 2 1 shows the SCM library symbols to be created in the following sections Symbols CD4081 Figure 2 1 SCM Library Symbols Circuit Design CAE Page 2 12 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 2 1 Creating SCM Markers Creating a new Marker Symbol Use the following commands to create a new marker element named p with a size of 10 by 10 mm in the demo ddb DDB File file New Marker Em File Name demo Element Name p Element Width mm
231. e user must confirm to use this part name If the part name is used on the currently loaded sheet then the corresponding part is deleted and or replaced with the new part with a different SCM symbol on request and without any attribute value settings However if the specified part name is used on a different sheet then the corresponding part will not be deleted automatically i e it is up to the user to delete this part later to avoid name conflicts on subsequent Packager processes The library element name query is used for selecting the library symbol eg 74as00 c led pal 20r4 180286 etc A mouse click or a question mark input string to the library element name query activates a popup menu with a list of all library files available with the predefined default library path The Lib button or 5 input to the library file name prompt selects the standard SCM library defined through the Select Library function from the Parameters menu The Projeej button from this menu provides optional access to the job specific library in the currently processed DDB file After selecting the library file another popup menu with a list of all symbols available in the selected library file is activated Use the following commands to place one capacitor symbol c and one resistor symbol r both with automatically generated part name Symbols Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name c Move to 140 19
232. e1 and hole2 using the hole3mm package type which was created in chapter 4 2 3 in DDB file demo ddb Parts Add Part Part Name hole1 Library Element Name hole3mm Move to 0 4 0 3 Add Part Part Name hole2 Library Element Name Move to 0 4 2 5 PCB Design CAD Page 4 50 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The constructive parts hole1 and hole2 are not defined in the net list i e the system does not know the corresponding package types The add Part function activates a library element name query with a popup menu providing access to all library files available through the predefined default library path The Projeci button of this menu can be used for accessing the job specific library of the currently processed DDB file After selecting the library file another popup menu with anst of all symbols available in the selected library file is activated An empty string input e just pressing the return key to the library element name query causes the system to use the part symbol loaded with the preceding Add Par call Use the following commands to load and place the plug named x1000 Parts Add Part Part Name x1000 Rotate Left Em Move to 2 4 1 0 EI Pressing the right mouse button during part placement activates a submenu which provides functions for specifying absolute placement coordinates part rotation even at arbitrary rotation angles and part
233. ed When encountering an include preprocessor statement the Compiler first checks the current directory for include file access and then searches the include paths in the sequence as specified with the Include option until the requested include file is found Define Option D efine macroid The Define and or D option is used for defining macros at the User Language Compiler call At least one macro identifier is required This option corresponds with the define preprocessor statement i e macros defined with the Define option can be checked with the ifdef or ifndef preprocessor statements thus giving more control on conditional compilation to the Compiler Optimizer Option O 0 1 The o option is used to activate or deactivate the optimizer of the User Language Compiler On default the optimizer is deactivated i e omitting this option leaves the optimizer deactivated Option 0 or 01 activates the optimizer Option 00 explicitly deactivates the optimizer The optimizer frees the machine code from redundancies and modifies it to make it more efficient Optimizing machine code significantly reduces disk space and main memory requirements and the resulting machine code can be loaded and executed much faster It is strongly recommended to activate the optimizer Error Severity Option e 0 1 The e option is used for setting the error severity level On default the error severity level is set to 1 i e omitting this opt
234. ed and plotted in fill mode The scm bus fill rule is defined in the scm rul rule definition file from the User Language directory baeulc The SCMRULE User Language program can be used for assigning rules to SCM elements The SCMCON User Language program can be used for setting the desired bus display mode through the Outline Display and or Filled Display option SCMCON can be called through or through the function from the menu if UIFSETUP is activated Warning The bus display mode can only be set if the scm rul rule definition file and thus the scm bus fill rule has been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory l e the rules are not saved with the design When transferring the design onto a different computer the scm bus fil11 rule must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise bus display mode assignments won t work Text Visibility Control Text Classes The Text Class function with the Text Assignment Symbol Mask and Sheet Mask options from the Other Functions submenu of the Text menu can be used to assign text classes for display and or plot visibility control The Text Assignmen option activates a dialog box for assigning text classes to mouse selectable texts The Symbol Mask option can be used on schematic plan level to fade out texts of a specific text class from mouse selectabl
235. ed to designate how objects should be treated which are placed on signal layers All Layers and Middle Layers or on both sides of documentary layers With documentary layers the All Layers Mode refers to side 1 and side 2 and corresponds with the options of the documentary layer menus With signal layers the All Layers Mode refers to the All Layers and Middle Layers signal layer selections With option Plot Separatel all layer objects are only plotted when selecting the corresponding plot layer All Layers or with documentary layers With option Plot Together all layer objects are plotted together with the selected plot layer e when plotting signal layer 1 with Plot Together the objects on signal layer All Layers are also plotted when plotting Side 2 of documentary layer Insertion Plan the objects on Insertion Plan Both Sides are also plotted etc On default the Plot Together option is used The All Layer Mode plot parameter of the BAE HighEnd CAM Processor also provides the Plot Connected Pins amp connected Vias and Vias amp connected Pins options These modes restrict the output of inside layer pin and or via pads to only those pads which have connections to other elements on the selected inside layer Plot connected plots only connected inside layer pin and via pads Pins
236. ed to designate the Optimizer strategy The Normal default option causes the Optimizer to ignore layer specific preferred routing directions in order to obtain the greatest reduction of vias The Preferred option causes the Optimizer to consider layer specific preferred routing directions which could increase the number of vias The Diagonal option causes the Optimizer to prefer diagonal 45 degree routing where appropriate Via Cost The setting is used by the Router and the Optimizer A high via cost factor results in fewer vias but more complex circuit traces A low via cost factor permits more vias within the restraint of the maximum via count see above The via cost value can range from 2 to 20 the default value is 10 PCB Design CAD Page 4 84 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Pin Channel Cost The Pin Channel Cost setting is used by the Router only A high pin channel cost factor results in infrequent use of pin channels A low pin channel cost factor permits the frequent use of pin channels Pin channels are the regions between adjacent part pins The pin channel cost value can range from 2 to 20 the default value is 10 Counter Direction Cost The Counter Dir Cosi setting is used by the Router and the Optimizer A high counter direction cost factor results in strict adherence to the layer specific preferred routing directions A low cost factor permits frequent variations
237. edit for finding unroutes etc can be defined and reloaded on request The default color table to be loaded after startup is the one named standard PCB Design CAD Page 4 27 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a Padstack Symbol Use the following commands to create a padstack symbol named via with an element size of 171mm in DDB file demo ddb File New Padstack File Name demo Element Name via Element Width mm 1 Element Height mm 4 The display now shows a square frame with a cross in the middle The frame describes the element boundaries of the padstack and the cross marks the position of the element origin Loading Pads The function from the menu is used for placing pads onto the current padstack symbol The system prompts for the library element name i e the name of the pad symbol to be loaded Popup menus are provided with the library element name query for selecting the library file and the pad symbol name The library file name list is derived from the layout library path defined with the BAE setup i e all DDB files available in the directory of the layout library path are listed Pad symbols can optionally be selected by typing both the library file name i e one of the names displayed with the library file name popup a slash and the pad symbol name to the library element name prompt typing for the element name will activate a popup menu provi
238. eference Layer default option picks an element from the currently selected preference layer The option provides an element selection facility if more than one element is found at the pick position A loop for highlighting the selectable elements with status line short description is activated The highlighted element can be selected through return key or left mouse button click This element selection can be aborted through escape key or right mouse button input Any other key switches to the next element at the pick position PCB Design CAD Page 4 15 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Net List A net list is usually required for the layout design In BAE the net list is commonly created with the Schematic Editor and will then be transferred to the layout using the Packager Alternatively ASCII net lists can be imported to the BAE layout system using utility programs such as CONCONV or REDASC See chapter 3 4 of this manual for more details on net list processing The function for loading a layout will not only load the pertinent data from the lower hierarchy levels parts padstacks and pads but also the corresponding net list The net list data is correlated with all geometrical data on the layout Connectivity Generation Please note that the element names for both the layout and the net list must be identical for this to work After successfully generating the connectivity the system is capable of instantly controlling and or co
239. eference names on SCM sheet level etc Use the following commands to place the S text with a size of 2mm at coordinate 0 5 0 5 Text Add Text Em Text Text Size Cl Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 5 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 5 Text Size 4 00mm 2 Modifying the Element Boundaries The marker symbol s element boundaries should be reduced in order to enclose the marker definition as densely as possible This is accomplished with the following commands Settings Upper Right Border Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Lower Left Border Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 14 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Saving the Marker Symbol Use the following commands to save the marker symbol File Save Element Now the new marker symbol named p is completely defined and stored to the DDB file demo ddb Use the following commands to list the marker s defined in demo ddb File File Contents Marker File Name An empty string to the file name prompt causes the system to use the file name of the currently loaded element e demo ddb in our example The system should produce the following listing of the markers contained in demo dab Type Marker File demo ddb Sp End Hit the spacebar to continue Circuit Design CAE Pa
240. ement Laser Drill Data Insertion Data others DESIGN Backannotation CAM Processor with Automatic Copper Fill LIBRARY 1 1 1 1 1 H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 D 1 1 H 1 H 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 1 1 Bartels AutoEngineer System Flow Diagram 1 1 3 BAE Database Structure CAD systems must process and or manage huge amounts of design data Therefore the internal database structure of a CAx system is an important criteria for estimating the power of the system The Bartels AutoEngineer is based on especially designed homogeneous object oriented hierarchical database structures featuring optimized B tree search algorithms for fast database object access Variable keyword lengths and generic data structures guarantee that neither redundancies nor system limits are imposed by the software The system is only limited by the available amount of main memory l e the software imposes no restrictions with regard to the number of symbols and or sheets of a schematic circuit number of parts placed on a layout board number of pins defined on a part number of traces routed on a layout etc All BAE CAD data is organized and managed in a fully integrated database with a common binary data format for all supported hardware platforms Each CAD object is dynamically constructed of its individual components Library elements from lower database h
241. enclose the pad definition as densely as possible This is accomplished with the following commands Settings Upper Right Border EI Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm o Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Lower Left Border Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Saving the Element You can also place documentary information such as text documentary lines or documentary areas on pad level However it is recommended to refrain from placing documentary items on pad level since this would result in a very specific pad definition which could be used in quite few superior layout symbols Use the following commands to save the pad symbol File Save Element Now the new pad symbol named via is completely defined and stored to the DDB file demo ddb This pad will later be loaded to a padstack thus defining a via for manual and automatic routing PCB Design CAD Page 4 23 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Defining Square Pads Use the following commands to define a pad named q1 4 with a square shaped copper area edge length 1 4mm in DDB file demo ddb File New Pad File Name demo Element Name oi A Element Width mm 2 Element Height mm 2 Areas Add Passive Copper Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 7 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 7 Jump Relative Ce Relative X Coordinate mm 1 4 Rel
242. ently loaded then the file name can be specified either by selecting the Project button from the popup menu or by specifying an empty string i e pressing the return key Elto the file name query File New Label File Name demo Element Name vss Sheet S tandard M anual m Element Width mm 6 Element Height mm 10 Placing the Pin Symbol Use the following commands to place the marker symbol p at coordinate 3 7 Symbols Add Symbol Library Element Name p Move to 3 7 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 26 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Graphic Use the following commands to draw a graphic line starting at the marker and ending at coordinate 3 4 and a rectangle shaped graphic area Graphic Add Graphic Line EI Move to Marker 3 7 ED Move to 3 4 Done Add Graphic Area Move to 1 3 Move to 1 4 Move to 5 4 Move to 5 3 Done Text Use the following command to place the label name text string Vss text size 2mm at coordinate 1 1 Text Add Text Text Vss Text Size Text Size 1 00mm 2 Move to 1 1 Defining the Origin Use the following commands to set the label origin to the current marker position i e at coordinate 3 7 Settings Set Origin Move to Marker 3 7 Saving the Label Symbol The definition of the label symbol vss is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands
243. equested Backannotated Part Name Sgp Gate Pin blkname Hierarchical Block Name Spageref SCM Label Sheet Reference Name List Spagecref SCM Label Sheet Reference Comment List Sorgname Original internal SCM symbol part name s of layout part Spagename Schematic sheet name s of layout part blkrname Schematic block symbol reference name s of layout part Srlname Requested Logical Library Name Srlext Requested Logical Library Name Extension Sval Value Spow Power Stype Component Type Scomment Comment English Scommentge Comment German Smanufacturer Component Manufacturer Spartside Part Side top unmirrored bottom mirrored pltbaeversion Bartels AutoEngineer Software Version Number read only Spltbaebuild Bartels AutoEngineer Software Build Number read only Spltfname Project File Path Name Pltfname Project File Path Name uppercase pltfsname Project File Name without Directory Path SPltfsname Project File Name uppercase without Directory Path Spltpagecnt Project SCM Sheet Count Spltename Element Name Pltename Element Name uppercase Spltdatede Current Date German Format Spltdateus Current Date US Format pltdate2de Current Date German Format two digit year display pltdate2us Current Date US Format two digit year display plttime Current Time O 3 S o D o amp 3 N S m Page 2 20 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Spltsdatede SCM Layout Save Date German Format Spltsda
244. er Language program database file Library Database File Name Option ull libfilename On default the User Language Compiler stores User Language libraries to a file named ulcprog vdb in the Bartels AutoEngineer programs directory The u11 option can be used to select a different User Language library database file Log File Option log logfilename The User Language Compiler prints all messages to standard output and to a log file Log file output is generated to save long message lists which could be generated at the compilation of different sources On default the log file name is set to ulc log in the current directory The 1og option can be used to specify a non default log file name Utilities Page 7 55 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Compilation of the User Language program contained in uicprog ule with optimization and warning message output the produced machine program is stored with the name ulcprog to the ulcprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory gt ulc ulprog Ow Compilation of the User Language program contained in uleprog ulc With listing file output to uleprog 1st the produced machine program is stored with the name newprog to the ulcprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory gt ule ulprog 1 cp newprog Deleting the User Language programs named ulcprog and newprog and all User Language libraries with names starting with test and ending on lib from the ulcprog vdb file of the
245. er User Language programs or User Language libraries On default program generation request is assumed i e omitting both the cp and the c1 option defaults to User Language program creation Option cp explicitly selects program generation whilst option c1 selects library generation both options must not be used together On default the destination element name is derived from the corresponding source file name both the directory path and the source file name extension are stripped from the source file name to generate destination element name The cp and c1 options allow for the specification of non default destination program and or library names Only one source file specification see option Source is allowed when explicitly specifying destination element name s with options cp and c1 The machine code generated by the Compiler is stored with the specified destination element name to ulcprog vdb file of the BAE programs directory Wildcards are not supported with destination element name specifications Multiple destination element name specifications are supported in order to store the machine code of a single source under different names e g to generate programs scm_st ged_st etc from a single source file named bae_st ulh Include Path Option I nclude includepath The Include and or 1I option is used for specifying multiple alternate include paths for include file name search At least one include path argument is requir
246. er User Manual Bartels AutoEngineer Economy Bartels AutoEngineer Economy formerly known as Bartels AutoEngineer Educate Entry is available for PCs with Windows Linux or DOS operating systems BAE Economy is a low price BAE configuration for educational purposes and or small business users BAE Economy has full BAE Professional functionality however with the following limitations e PCB layout size limited to 350mm 200mm e max 4 signal layers simultaneously routable by Autorouter however like in BAE Professional 100 signal layers for manual routing and support for 12 power layers in both manual routing and Autorouter e layouts from BAE Professional and BAE HighEnd only loadable it BAE Economy restrictions are not violated Bartels AutoEngineer HighEnd Bartels AutoEngineer HighEnd is available on workstations as well as on Windows and Linux PC platforms BAE HighEnd utilizes special operating system characteristics multi tasking multi windowing virtual memory management etc to implement advanced features and functions such as HighSpeed kernel in built messaging system to support advanced communication between different BAE modules in built multi tasking to support multiple project views global net highlight cross probing place layout parts according to schematic plan selective layout short circuit display extremely fast Mincon airline calculation DRC with multi processor system support layer stack setup according
247. er User Manual Options Command line options of the User Language Compiler consist of the dash or slash start character followed by the option specification Single character option specifications optionally followed by a mode or toggle number are often known as switches or flags Such special options can be grouped as in 120w3 or 01w312 which both select listing mode 2 activate the optimizer and set the warning severity level to 3 Wildcard Option wcon wcoff The wildcard option is used to activate or deactivate wildcard processing at the specification of file and or element names On default wildcard processing is activated i e omitting the wildcard option leaves wildcard processing activated Option wcon can be used for explicitly activating wildcard processing With wildcard recognition activated the character can be used for matching any arbitrary character and the character can be used for matching an arbitrary number of arbitrary characters Option wcoff can be used to turn off wildcard processing Wildcard recognition must be deactivated for explicitly processing names containing wildcard characters such as SCM_ or GED Source File Option S ource srcfile This option is used for specifying the file name s containing the source code to be compiled File name specifications can contain a directory path i e the source file names need not reside in the current directory Wildcards are supported with
248. er than or equal Counter The commands CLEARCOUNTER and COUNTUP are used for controlling an internal counter CLEARCOUNTER sets the counter value to zero COUNTUP increments the counter value The current counter value can be accessed via the COUNTVALUE attribute see also below Utilities Page 7 62 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Attributes The following attributes can be accessed Net Data Pin Data General Data NETPINCOUNT PRIORITY NETNUMBER PINCOUNT FREEPINS PARTATTRIBCOUNT Sattributname PINWIDTH PROJECTNAME ATTRIBCOUNT ATTRIBNAME ATTRIBVALUE COUNTVALUE Net Name Number of Pins connected to Net Net Priority for the Router Net Minimum Clearance for the Router Net Number Part Name Number of Pins defined on Part Number of unconnected Pins in the Part Number of Attributes in the Part Value of selected Attribute in the Part Pin Name Pin Routing Width Project and or Design Name Number of Attributes matching current Name Value Combination Name of selected Attribute Value of selected Attribute Current Counter Value Utilities Page 7 63 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Net list generator conconv usf Connection List Generator EXTENSION con PRINT LAYOUT PROJECTNAME CR PRINT PARTS CR FOR ALL PARTS PRINT PARTNAME Spilimame CR
249. er will issue the following messages on the screen BARTELS PACKAGER Design File Name demo EE E E EE demolib ayout Element Name board Active Schematic Sheet sheetl Active Schematic Sheet sheet2 No error occurred TheNo error occurred message means that the packaging has been successfully completed and a packed physical net list named board was generated in the demo ddb project file The Packager creates not only a physical net list but also a logical net list with element name extension log In the example above a logical net list named board log has been generated The logical net list is not required by the system but can be utilized for interfacing to certain foreign systems such as simulators see also the USERLIST application example in chapter 3 4 3 The Packager produces a free list named demo fre for user information purposes only You should examine the unconnected pins report and the net pin counts provided with this ASCII file e g for checking on single pin signals The Packager annotates physical net list data such as part and pin names to the schematics Check this by examining the SCM sheet elements after successfully running the Packager Particularly you should have a close look at the four cd4081 gates on sheet1 of the example job file demo ddb All these gates have the same part name now since they are all assigned to the same
250. erated A flash code containing only one set of coordinates is used for areas that match apertures such as circles and squares For areas that don t match apertures efficient drawing techniques generating few coordinates are used where possible e g with rectangles but with some shapes and sizes much more coordinates are needed With careful design of pads and appropriate aperture tables and plot parameter settings much smaller Gerber data files can be generated making them quicker to copy cheaper to send by modem less expensive to plot and require less media space thus considerably reducing the costs incurred by the CAM and manufacturing process PCB Design CAD Page 4 19 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual User Language The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated to the Layout Editor i e User Language programs can be called from the Layout Editor and it is possible to implement any user specific Layout Editor function required such as status display parameter setup reports and test functions CAD CAM input output functions symbol library management utilities automatic or semi automatic placement and or routing functions customer specific batch procedures etc The Layout Editor provides both explicit and implicit User Language program call facilities User Language programs can be started with explicit program name specification using the Run User Scrip function from the File menu empty string or question mark i
251. erwise the CAM Processor issues an error message such as Cannot realize the default line width when trying to generate Gerber photoplots The standard line width is set to 0 3mm on default Gerber Fill Mode The function is used to select the technique for filling irregularly shaped areas i e those areas not matching any aperture for flash or line stroke Option Line Fil is used to select the single aperture line fill technique which uses the smallest line aperture for filling irregularly shaped areas with line strokes Option Multi Aperture Fill selects the multi aperture fill technique which is the default The algorithm used by the multi aperture fill technique fills areas from the area outline using the smallest aperture and proceeds using larger apertures when moving to the inner of the area This results in distinct reduction of Gerber data output when using appropriate Gerber aperture tables for layouts with many irregularly shaped areas With the 36 G37 Fill mode option activated non flashable structures are stored with their outline contour and will be filled by the photo plotter This feature significantly reduces the amount of Gerber plot data and also eliminates plot overdraw errors However it is strongly recommended to check with the PCB manufacturer whether the photo plotter is capable of processing G36 G37 Gerber data PCB Design CAD Page 4 135 Bartels AutoEnginee
252. ests are generated when saving layouts with net list modifications such as pin gate swaps or changed part names Loading an SCM sheet with a pending Backannotation request automatically activates a verification menu which allows to backannotate the currently processed design The Backannotation request is deleted after successfully running the Backannotationl 3 3 2 Running the Backannotation Design and or project file name and layout element name prompts are activated after calling Backannotation pressing the Esc key aborts the Backannotation Utilities Backannotation Design File Name Layout Element Name The design file name is the name of the project file to be selected for Backannotation The design file must be available with extension dab but this extension must not be included with the file name specification If the user types an empty string by pressing the return key EN to the design file name prompt then the system will automatically use the file name of the currently loaded or the previously processed element i e the global project name The layout element name is the name of the layout and or the net list to be backannotated If the user types in an empty string by pressing the return key J to the layout element name prompt then the system uses the default layout element name defined with BAE setup see also command LAYDEFELEMENT of
253. ew SCM Window from the Utilities menus of the Schematic Editor or the Layout Editor or switch between different program modules of the current BAE session With BAE HighEnd several views of a project e g overview and zoomed details can be displayed at the same time The use of multitasking and pipes also enables simultaneous processing of schematics and layout l e BAE HighEnd supports advanced cross module features such as simultaneous and or global net highlight for schematic plans and layout of the same design project specific multi windowing multitasking cross probing Introduction Page 1 14 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 2 3 Basic System Functions Display Functions The middle mouse button is used to call the View menu whilst performing a graphical manipulation like component placement or routing This allows for the change of display options such as zoom scale grids colors etc without canceling the current operation After the display choice has been made you will automatically return to the graphical manipulation that was in progress before the middle mouse button was pressed l e the global placement of a part can be performed with the complete layout displayed whilst the final placement of that still picked part can be accomplished in a more detailed zoom window Colors The colors for displaying the design objects can be changed with the Change Colors fu
254. extension must not be included with the command line The font library file is the file from which the user wants to extract font data The Bartels AutoEngineer standard font library file is named ged fnt This file is stored to the BAE programs directory and contains the font s used by the AutoEngineer To find out which fonts are stored in a font library file apply the FONTEXTR call with a lt fontname gt that does not exist in the font file and FONTEXTR lists the fonts in the file Output File Format The font description file starts with the FONT command defining the name of the font and ends with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and The font description file is structured according to FONT lt fontname gt CHAR lt ord gt ASCII character POLY 07 0 107 HO CTO O END where lt fontname gt is the name of the font and lt ord gt is the ordinal ASCII number of the character e g character A would be number 65 The valid value range for lt ord gt is 0 255 Each character CHAR is defined by a list of polygon lines POLY Each polygon definition consists of a list of polygon corner point coordinates The coordinates are specified in positive integer units in a 32x48 point grid area The 0 0 coordinate refers to the left bottom corner of the grid area Hence the valid value range for X coordinates is 0 31 and the valid value range for Y coordinates is 0 47 Each character
255. ey programming and User Language program help info management Context sensitive Function Menus Pressing the left mouse button in the graphic workarea activates a context sensitive menu with specific functions for the object at the current mouse position if no other menu function is currently active The Load Element and or Create New Element file management functions are provided if no element is currently loaded This feature is implemented through an automated call to the GED MS User Language program Cascading Windows Motif Pulldown Menus The Windows and Motif pulldown menu user interfaces of the Layout Editor provide facilities for cascading submenu definitions Le submenus can be attached to other menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program configures cascading submenus for the pulldown menu interfaces of the Windows Motif Layout Editor modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button supports cascading menus to simplify repeated submenu function calls Windows Motif Parameter Setup Dialogs The following Windows Motif parameter setup dialogs are implemented for the Layout Editor Settings Settings General Layout Editor Parameters View Settings Display Parameters Parts Auto Placement Settings Automatic Placement Parameters Areas Copper Fill
256. f of its dimension in the key specific direction The Page Up and Page Down keys scroll the display up or down by its full height In combination with the Shirt key Page Up and Page Down scroll to the left and right respectively Scrolling is limited by the boundaries of the currently loaded element The Bome and End keys can be used to jump immediately to the upper or lower element boundary In combination with the snitt key Home and fend scroll to the left and right element boundary respectively Under Window and Motif the mouse wheel can be used to move the current view port upwards or downwards by half its size In combination with the key the mouse wheel moves the view port to the left or right respectively With the left mouse key pressed the mouse wheel can be used to zoom in or out BAE Windows and Motif sessions can be finished using the standard Close function from the application window system menu or by clicking the Windows close button of the application window To prevent from accidentally discarding design changes these exit procedures might require user confirmation with an option for saving the currently processed element When ending a BAE Windows or Motif session the dimensions and positions of the BAE application and dialog windows are automatically saved to a configuration file with the name baewin dat or baexwin dat in the BAE pr
257. faced greater signs in lineprint font are used for denoting prompts on operating system level Horizontal ellipsis points indicate either optional repetition of the preceding element in format or command descriptions or absence of irrelevant parts of a figure or example Vertical ellipsis points indicate absence of irrelevant parts of a figure an example or a format or command description Any Mouse Button MB Left Mouse Button LMB Middle Mouse Button MMB Right Mouse Button RMB Keyboard input Return Enter key CR w 0 Keyboard input standard key s pan Ki ri N Keyboard input function key s filename File or directory path name keyword Topic definitions or syntactic terminals i e commands or keywords to be inserted directly message BAE system status or error message display Menu Bartels AutoEngineer menu Menu Function Bartels AutoEngineer menu function Menu Option Bartels AutoEngineer menu option Button Bartels AutoEngineer popup menu button Hypertext link to Bartels User Language include file ULPROG Hypertext link to Bartels User Language program description Hypertext link to Bartels User Language program source file Hypertext link to Bartels User Language system function description UL_INDEX Hypertext link to Bartels User Language index type description vil Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual
258. fects of the minimum isolation distance and the isolation tolerance power plot parameter settings Drill Diameter eae ce PIS Min Distance P IS Tolerance Minimum Distance Tolerance Distance isolation to Drill Hole isolation to Drill Hole Figure 4 11 CAM Power Layer Isolation PCB Design CAD Page 4 126 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Heat Traps Pin connections into power layers or to power planes placed on power layers are automatically generated with heat trap construction A heat trap is constructed with four 45 degree isolation circle segments placed round the drill hole of the pin thus preventing from too much heat flow The heat trap circle diameters are calculated from the drill hole diameters and the plot parameters to be set with the P HT Min Distance and P HT Tolerance functions from the menu The Min Distance function is used to specify the minimum distance between the edge of the drill hole and the outside of the heat trap circle The default value for the heat trap minimum distance is 0 4mm The function is used to specify the outward tolerance of the heat trap The default value for the heat trap tolerance is 0 5mm The heat trap circle diameters are calculated analogously to the isolation circles see above With Gerber photoplot the CAM Processor checks if there is a thermal aperture available with a diameter matching the calculated tolerance range which can be used to flash the
259. fic schematic symbols or their logical library definitions The Symbols Show Symbol Logic and or Symbols Edit Symbol Logic functions can be used to view and or edit the logical library definition if the problem is caused by the logical library definition These functions also take r1name and or Srlext attribute settings for alternative logical library definition name assignments into account The Packager copies the required logical library definitions from the selected layout library file to the project file Local project specific logical library definitions have priority over external logical library definitions from the layout library in subsequent Packager runs lt is important to consider this behaviour when correcting logical library definitions The Definition Update setting from Settings Update Mode forces the Packager to restore and or copy corrected logical library definitions from the layout library Any symbol pin changes such as the adding deleting or renaming of pins require all of the affected SCM sheets to be reloaded and saved to update the logical netlists Please note that although new and or changed symbol pin names are displayed when re loading a sheet the SCM sheet has to be saved to update the logical netlist accordingly 012 Abort Database not changed The Packager encountered one or more errors which prevented it from creating a valid layout net list
260. fications The PRINTFOR command is used to scan through a particular object class and print a list of elements with a defined separator The formal syntax of the PRINTFOR command is PRINTFOR ALL lt class gt SEPERATOR lt sep gt ELEMENTS lt elements gt where lt class gt is the object class to be scanned as defined in the FOR command lt sep gt is the separator to be used e g CR etc and lt elements gt are the elements to be listed The syntax of the parameter lists in lt sep gt and lt elements gt is the same as for the PRINT parameter list If PRINTFOR is nested in a FOR loop then the output is automatically restricted to the current element of the FOR loop Utilities Page 7 61 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual IF Command The IF command allows commands to operate conditionally The formal syntax of the IF command is IF lt expr gt commands and or IF lt expr gt lt commands gt ELSE lt commands gt The formal syntax of the IF expression lt expr gt is given either by ee BEES or by the comparison expression lt attr gt operator lt attr constant gt The lt attxr gt expression is used to check whether the attribute specified by lt attr gt is available Available operators for comparison expression are equal lt gt not equal lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal gt great
261. fined and subsequently some layout part symbols are defined All these symbols will be stored to a DDB file named demo ddb Use the following commands to move to the BAE examples directory e g c Vbaejobs and start the Bartels AutoEngineer gt Gi gt cd c baejobs gt bae The BAE main menu is activated and you can start the Layout Editor with the following command Layout The Layout Editor is activated and you can create layout library elements You should become familiar with the conventions used for layout symbol design before generating your own symbols Technology dependent and manufacturing specific conventions are usually to be considered with regard to pad shape definitions part insertion pick points identification of part pin 1 pin placement grids part placement origin minimum text sizes drill symbols part spacing parameters for SMDs etc The layer assignment is most important for the creation and modification of layout symbols and for the design of layouts in order to provide correct and complete CAM data output later see chapter 4 1 5 for more details Figure 4 1 shows the layout library symbols to be created in the following sections Figure 4 1 Layout Library Symbols PCB Design CAD Page 4 21 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 2 1 Creating Layout Pads On layout pad level the pad shapes i e the pin contact areas are defined by creating passive copper areas Different pad symbo
262. finition of rules and or rule sets which can be assigned to individual Bartels AutoEngineer objects lt is possible to define attributes for controlling design processes such as preferences for the placement of certain part types e g restrictions for part rotation and or part mirroring layer specific clearances to be considered by the Autorouter track layout and routing rules for net and or net groups maximum and or minimum trace length maximum parallel routing of traces etc The Rule System can also be used to apply more complex design processes for the solution of specific design problems such as special design rule checks for analogues circuitry high frequency technique etc or for setting up Autorouter passes with strategies and options adapted to certain routing problems Rules can be specified using a programming language similar to Prolog The Bartels Rule Specification Language provides powerful operators for finding not only all possible but rather optimum solutions to a given rule system query or output request A Rule System Compiler is provided for the translation of Bartels Rule System source code Compiled rules are either applied automatically by certain BAE system functions or can be activated using customer defined User Language programs Rules which only set a single predicate value can be dynamically generated and assigned without without having to define and compile such rules through a ruil file This simplifies rule sys
263. for generating HP GL HP Laser or Postscript output are provided with the Plot Output menu of the Schematic Editor SCM plots can only be generated with an element loaded l e you should first start the Schematic Editor and load the SCM sheet sheet1 from the demo ddb file using the following commands File Load Sheet lam 2 5 1 General Plot Parameters Plot Device The Plot Device function is used for specifying the plot data output device The output can either be written to a file or directly to the plotter and or printer When plotting to a file the desired output file name must be specified When writing directly to the plotter the name of the output port where the plotter is connected to e g com2 1pt1 under DOS must be specified Take care that enough disk space is available when writing to a file and that the corresponding interface is correctly initialized when directing output to a hardware device The plot functions will abort with error messages such as Error writing ASCII file if neither of these requirements are met The system will prompt for the output device name after activating the desired output function if no default plot device is specified with the function Popup menus for fast plot file selection are integrated to the Plot Device HP GL Output Postscript Output and HP Laser Output functions of Plot Outpul menu Files ending on ass con ddb def exe fre ulc and
264. for routing when selected to the via list see also chapter 4 3 4 for details on how to select vias The Change Layer Layout Editor command used during interactive routing automatically selects the via with the least possible layer occupancy The same principle is applied by the Autorouter At least one via for all signal layers required for autorouting Additionally the Autorouter can e g simultaneously use vias for the layer sets 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 etc However to avoid backtracking ambiguities the Autorouter is restricted in that it can not use vias with multiple mutually intersecting layers l e the Autorouter refuses to use a via for layer set 1 2 3 and another via for layer set 2 3 4 at the same time error message Invalid via padstack cannot use it Using the CAM Processor for generating drill data output for the drill holes defined on partial vias requires corresponding drill class es to be specified The production of PCBs with blind and buried vias is usually more expensive than the production of standard multilayer boards However using blind and buried vias increases the routability of multilayer layouts and also supports advanced PCB manufacturing technologies such as plasma etched via production processes PCB Design CAD Page 4 115 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 12 Exiting the Layout System Don t forget to save the currently edited layout element before exiting the Layout Editor File Save
265. from 0 to 5 the default value is 2 Rip Up Distance Cost The Distance 1 Cost and Distance 2 Cost settings are used by the Router during rip up The rip up distance 1 cost factor controls the use of channels left by ripped up traces in the near distance 0 to 1 grid point A high distance 1 cost factor results in less use of these channels thus forcing more local changes during rip up and retry routing The rip up distance 1 cost value can range from 0 to 10 the default value is 5 The rip up distance 2 cost factor controls the use of channels left by ripped up traces in the far distance 2 grid points A high distance 2 cost factor results in less use of these channels thus forcing more global changes during rip up and retry routing The rip up distance 2 cost value can range from 0 to 10 the default value is 2 Trace Crossing Cost The Trace Cross Cost is used to set the trace transition cost factor which is considered by the Router and the Optimizer to control cleanup pattern recognition during multi net optimization A high trace crossing cost factor allows for a more complex routing with more traces crossing each other thus also producing more vias A low trace crossing cost factor leads to increased and more time consuming analysis during cross net optimization thus eliminating more vias The trace crossing cost value can range from 2 to 100 the default value is 10 PCB Design C
266. from the preferred direction The counter direction cost value can range from 0 to 5 the default value is 1 Direction Change Cost The Dir Change Cost setting is used by the Optimizer only A high direction change cost factor results in less circuit corners A low direction change cost factor permits frequent changes in routing directions The direction change cost value can range from 0 to 5 the default value is 2 Packing Cost The Packing Cost setting is used by the Router only A high packing cost factor results in high bundling of circuit traces A low packing cost factor will result in wider distribution of circuit traces The packing cost value can range from 0 to 5 the default value is 1 Dynamic Density Cost The setting is used by the Router only The dynamic density cost factor controls the global distribution of circuit traces over the entire layout A high dynamic density cost factor results in a more even distribution of the circuit traces A low cost factor gives more influence to routing costs The dynamic density cost value can range from 0 to 50 the default value is 10 Bus Bending Cost The Bus Bending Cosi setting is used by the Router only The bus bending cost factor controls the bending of traces after passing a pin channel A high bus bending cost factor results in high priority of bending A low bus bending cost factor results in less bending The bus bending cost value can range
267. function required such as status display parameter setup reports and test functions customer specific batch procedures etc CAM View provides both explicit and implicit User Language program call facilities User Language programs can be started with explicit program name specification using the Run User Script function from the Fild menu empty string or question mark input to the program name query activates a User Language program selection menu User Language programs can also be called by simply pressing special keys of the keyboard This method of implicit User Language call is supported at any time unless another interactive keyboard input request is currently pending The name of the User Language program to be called is automatically derived from the pressed key i e pressing a standard and or function key triggers the activation of a User Language program with a corresponding name such as cv 1 for digit key H cv r for standard key KR cv for standard key cv f1 for function key F1 cv 12 for function key F2 etc The CAM View User Language Interpreter environment also features event driven User Language program calls where User Language programs with predefined names are automatically started at certain events and or operations such as CV ST at CAM View module startup CV TOOL when selecting a toolbar item and CV ZOOM when changing the zoom factor The module startup Use
268. g at the part origin with a text size of 0 05 inch on the Insertion Plan Side R documentary layer Text Drill Add Text Document Layer Insertion Plan Text Text Size Text Size 2 54mm 0 05 Move to 0 0 0 0 The definition of the so part symbol is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following Commande File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 40 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a Constructive Part Symbol Use the following commands to create a new part symbol named hole3mm drill hole with 3mm diameter with an element size of 4 4mm in DDB file demo dab File New Part FileName demo Element Name holesmm E Element Width mm 4 Element Height mm 4 Use the following commands to set the part origin and to change the upper right element boundary Settings Set Origin Move to 0 075 0 075 E Upper Right Border Move to 0 075 0 075 Use the following commands to place the drill hole padstack symbol dri113 0 which was created in chapter 4 2 2 dummy pin name x can be used since the hole3mm part symbol is a constructive definition without any logical counterpart Parts Add Part Part Name x Library Element Name drill3 0 Move to 0 0 Use the following commands to create a circle shaped documentary line on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer for indicating
269. g module ports of the SCM block architecture Command The architecture command can be used to define virtual logical parts consisting of different arbitrarily connected SCM symbols and or layout parts The formal syntax of the architecture command is architecture lt partlist gt lt partlist gt contains the list of used symbols with comma separated pin lists in parenthesis where each pin specification has the following format lt pinname connection gt lt connection gt can be the name of a pin of the lt architecture gt symbol A connection to a global net can be established with lt net netname gt snet amp intnetname gt Or ss intnetname gt specifications can be used to refer to a local net of the lt architecture gt symbol Utilities Page 7 42 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Loglib file example def containing two part definitions loglib Examp part 741 newa newa newa newa pin net net xlat tO Og or swap part tx le Loglib File s00 di HA Sold ttr Spartnumber A NAND X11B82 Ete Spintype EE Ee Ete Spintype out to 3 6072711 Ete Spantype sup to 7 14 a b y UGE a Ee Sgroundnetname 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 default sot23 pare tr beady class npn transistor default t092 pin xlat LO end e b c e b c 1 2 3
270. g pin Popup menus are provided with the library element name query for selecting the library file and the padstack symbol name The library file name list is derived from the layout library path defined with the BAE setup i e all DDB files available in the directory of the layout library path are listed Padstack symbols can optionally be selected by typing both the library file name i e one of the names displayed with the library file name popup a slash and the padstack symbol name to the library element name prompt typing for the element name activates a popup menu providing the list of padstack symbols from the specified library file An empty string input to the library element name query causes the system to use the padstack symbol previously selected with the Add Part function if there was already one specified Use the following commands to place two q1 4 padstack symbols to define pins 1 and 2 of the part Parts Em Add Part EI Part Name 1 Library Element Name a1 4 Move to 0 1 0 1 Add Part ee ae OH Library Element Name Move to 0 5 0 1 The padstack oi 4 is one of the symbols created in chapter 2 2 2 An empty string input i e pressing the return key Ch to the library element name prompt causes the system to use the name of the previously loaded padstack symbol With all required pins placed on the part the part package definition is basically completed What still might be mi
271. ge 2 15 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 2 2 Creating SCM Symbols In this section we will create a new SCM library symbol named cD4081 This symbol can be created in a new or in an already existing library and or job file In our example we will store the new symbol to the currently processed DDB file named demo ddb With the cD4081 it is advisable not to create an SCM symbol for the complete part but to define the CD4081 as single gate which then occurs four times in the corresponding package The operations in the following section will produce the symbol definition shown in figure 2 2 Graphic Symbol Outline Text Function Qualifier Element Boundaries Logical Pin Name Text Reference Marker Pin Symbol Graphic Pin Connection Text Attribute Figure 2 2 SCM Symbol CD4081 Text Symbol Name Creating a new SCM Symbol Use the following commands to create a new symbol named CD4081 in the DDB file demo ddb an empty string input is sufficient for the specification of the DDB file name if an element of file demo ddb is still loaded File m New Symbol Sheet C omplex L ogic G ate D iscrete M an g The symbol size determines the element s size and boundary The system does not allow for the placement of objects outside the element boundaries however the boundary can modified lateron You can either enter the element width and element height manually
272. gly recommended to change strategy parameters in special cases only and to refrain from using extreme values There are strong mutual dependencies between different Autorouter strategy parameters A high via cost value for eliminating vias will necessarily result in more ignorance of routing direction preferences thus compensating the cost factor for keeping preferred routing directions Note also that strategy parameters only define subordinate options for the Autorouting process due to the fact that it is much more important to achieve a 100 routing result instead of e g keeping preferred routing directions Le some cost factors may be completely ignored during initial routing and rip up and will only be considered by the Optimizer Tabelle 4 2 provides an overview to all of the routing parameters which can be set from the Strategy menu Table 4 2 Autorouter Strategy Parameters Effect on Effect on Strategy Parameter Value Range Default Value Router Optimizer Optimize Direction Normal ll Preferred Diagonal we eel EES Pin Channel Cost 0 10 oo ll od Calo fr en WENE WEN WET ur al Packing Cost pnomeyom os wl T T Bus Benang Cost os ai _ CU BT Es pearson eel EE Trace Cross Cost 2 100 cy UU oa es GE GEE WEE EE IE EE Ee Anti Prefered Anti Prefered Grid Cost Cost 010 10 o a EE Net Type Area Cost ao dd BAE HighEnd Optimize Direction The Optimizer Direction function is us
273. gments line display Filled Display wide trace segments filled display Outline Display wide trace segments outline display Fill amp Distance wide trace segments with minimum distance lines display or Fill amp DRC wide trace segments with minimum distance lines display and DRC With Fill amp DRE traces are displayed as with Fill amp Distance however a design rule check is activated during interactive routing changing the distance line display color from trace color to white upon design rule violations Elements of the currently processed net are excluded from the design rule check The distance line indicates the DRC spacing between traces Le it is possible for a distance line to cut a pad without a DRC error being displayed if the current trace to copper clearance setting is less than the trace to trace clearance setting GEDTRACE can be called through Run User Script or through Other Functions from the Traces menu if UIFSETUP is activated Warning Trace edit display modes can only be set if the layout rul rule definition file and thus the lay edit wide filled lay edit wide outline rules have been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory Le the rules are not saved with the design When tran
274. gn files should be generated since this considerably simplifies job file access If you intend to process the examples provided with this manual it is recommended to move to the BAE examples directory installed with the BAE software The Layout Editor can be called from the Bartels AutoEngineer main shell Start the BAE shell by typing the following command to the operating system prompt gt bae The AutoEngineer comes up with the Bartels logo and the following menu the Setup function is only available under Windows Motif the IC Design and Next Task menu items are available only with special software configurations such as BAE HighEnd or BAE IC Design Schematic Layout IC Design Packager CAM View Setup Next Task Exit BAE Move the menu cursor to the Layoui menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button Layout The Layout Editor program module is loaded and the Layout Editor menu is activated Check your BAE software installation if this fails to happen see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for details on how to perform a correct installation It is also possible to call the Layout Editor directly from the Packager In this case layout element creation for the net list created by the Packager is automatically suggested for designs not yet containing a corresponding layout PCB Design CAD Page 4 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User M
275. gnal Layer All Layers layer ai Ja Signal Layer Middle Layers Signal Layer Top Layer jee dei Ir Documentary Layer lt n gt Side 1 Documentary Layer lt n gt Side 2 Documentary Layer lt n gt Both Sides When selecting a certain pick preference layer e g signal layer 2 using the Bet Edit Layer function the color table with the corresponding name eg layer s2 is automatically loaded if available in ged dat This feature is most useful for e g manual routing PCB Design CAD Page 4 96 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 3 Layout Net List Changes The Layout Editor provides functions for performing pin gate swaps to simplify the routing problem Alternate package types can be assigned to layout parts and net list part names can be changed for better legibility of the insertion plan for manual insertion These modifications are net list changes which must be backward annotated to the schematics using the Backannotation function from the Schematic Editor see also chapter 3 3 In this section we will apply some pin gate swaps and change a couple of part names First of all use the following commands to set the coordinate display mode to inch and apply group functions to delete all traces from the currently loaded layout Settings Coordinate Display Display Inch Em Groups Group Polygon Traces Select Cl Move to 0 1 0 1 Move to 2 8 0 1 Move to 2 8 2 7 Move
276. h Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Published by Bartels System GmbH Munich Last printing November 2013 The information contained in the Bartels AutoEngineer publications as well as the products and or programs described therein are subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Bartels System Although Bartels System has gone to great effort to verify the integrity of the information provided with the Bartels AutoEngineer publications these publications could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Bartels System shall not be liable for errors contained therein or for incidental consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Bartels System appreciates readers and or users comments in order to improve these publications and or the products described therein Changes are periodically made to the information therein These changes will be incorporated in new editions of the Bartels AutoEngineer publications All rights reserved No part of the Bartels AutoEngineer publications may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system translated transcribed or transmitted in any form or by any means manual electric electronic electromagnetic mechanical chemical optical or otherwise without prior express written permission from Bartels System Bartels AutoEngineer Bartels Route
277. he PCL plot The scale information in the status message indicates any non default scaling factor being used for automatic plot to sheet size scaling Binary copy mode is required for transferring PCL plot data to the desired output device Le the b option must be used when sending PCL files from hard disk to laser printer with the DOS COPY command as in gt copy pelplot lptl b with pelplot being the name of the previously written PCL plot file and 1pt 1 designating the output device PCB Design CAD Page 4 129 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 9 Postscript Output The Postscript Output function from the Control Plo menu is used to produce output in Postscript format Use the following commands to generate a Postscript output file named demo_11 ps for signal layer 1 of the currently loaded layout with the standard line width set to 0 25mm and the scaling factor set to 0 75 Control Plot Plotter Pen Width Plotter Pen Width 0 20mm 0 25 Plot Scale Plot Scale Factor 0 50 0 75 Postscript Output Layer 1 Plot File Name demo I1 ps Note the Multiple Layers option provided with the layer selection menu of the Postscript Output function This option can be used for writing the plot data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting the plot data output layers using the left or right mouse button T
278. he Utilities menu should be used after Batch DRE to check all error counts The spacing parameters for the distance checks can either be set from the Settings menu functions Distance TR TR Distance and Distance CO CO or can be defined as net specific parameters in the net list using the MINDIST net attribute Note however that these parameter settings need not be the same as for the autorouting since the Autorouter can automatically set minimum distance parameters according to the routing grid selection Net specific spacing parameters are individually considered by the Autorouter PCB Design CAD Page 4 16 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Groups The Layout Editor group functions provide powerful features for design data manipulation An arbitrary set of items of the currently loaded layout or part can be selected to a group which then can then be saved moved rotated mirrored scaled copied deleted fixed or unfixed The group functions are featuring set principles Elements can be added selected to or removed deselected from the currently defined group Highlight display is used to indicate group selected items The Group Polygon function is used to select and or deselect parts traces areas texts visible and or invisible elements or elements of any type by defining an area around the items to be selected The Group Elements function is used to select and or
279. he button is used to select all currently visible layers for output The CAM Processor issues a Postscript output done message after successfully generating the Postscript output PCB Design CAD Page 4 130 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 10 Windows Generic Output A generic print plot output function is implemented with the Windows versions of the BAE PC software l e any print plot output feature supported by the current Windows operating system configuration is also supported with the CAM Processor of the BAE Windows software Use the following commands to activate the Windows print plot menu Control Plot Em Generic Output Note the option provided with the layer selection menu of the function This option can be used for writing the plot data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting the plot data output layers using the right mouse button Layer selections with the left mouse button also allow for layer specific color selections for color plots by assigning pen numbers which correspond with indices to the current color table The button is used to select all currently visible layers for output with the color table indices automatically set to modulo 8 layer color numbers The Windows printer dialog specifications for the number of copies page sorting mode and page range a
280. he definition of net name attributes as in net S lt nethmame gt lt piniast gt With this feature it is possible to assign a part specific power supply by assigning a variable net name attribute value such as vec or 5v for the net name attribute e g Spowernet to the desired SCM symbol part of the SCM sheet In some cases more than one pin is connected to a particular signal but only one connection is desired in the symbol The syntax of the net command for defining internal pin connections is net internal lt pinlist gt where lt pinlist gt is a list of physical pin names separated by commas that are to be linked together but only one of these pins needs to appear in the SCM symbol Utilities Page 7 36 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual bus Command The bus command allows busses to be defined directly on a symbol making multiple connections a single operation The formal syntax of the bus command is bus sbuspinlist where lt buspinlist gt defines a list of bus connection pins lt buspin gt separated by commas in the SCM symbol Subsequently pin and or xlat commands see below can be applied to define bus signals using special pin name specifications as in lt buspin gt lt bussignal gt where lt buspin gt is the name of a pin in the lt buspinlist gt and sbussignal is one of the signal connections on that bus pin pin Command The pin command is used to define SCM symbo
281. he label name text string Vdd at coordinate 1 1 text size 2mm is still activated Text Add Text Text Vdd Move to 2 0 Use the following commands to set the origin to the current marker position i e at coordinate 0 5 Settings Set Origin Move to Marker 0 5 The definition of the vdd label symbol is now completed Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File m Save Element Circuit Design CAE Page 2 29 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 3 Designing SCM Circuits This section describes how to create SCM plans using the BAE Schematic Editor Two example SCM sheets named sheet1 and sheet2 will be edited in the demo ddb DDB file sheet 1 will contain the circuit logic On sheet2 the plug pin assignment and some net attributes for the Autorouter will be defined The following paragraphs will introduce the basic functions for creating SCM plans placing symbols assigning attribute values creating connections placing labels defining busses placing texts and drawing graphic This section also shows how to use special features such as virtual symbol definitions group functions defining plug pin assignments setting net attribute values using templates etc Use the following commands to move to the BAE examples directory e where the example job file demo ddb resides e g c Nbae jobs and start the Bartels AutoEngineer Gs cd c baejobs bae Use the follow
282. he project file to your Bartels support department for debugging if the error occurs with a specific project and is not sporadic e if the error can be reproduced 104 File filename is not compatible with program version NOT YET DOCUMENTED 136 File filename is read only NOT YET DOCUMENTED 108 File filename not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 16 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 134 File filename read access denied NOT YET DOCUMENTED 103 File is not compatible with program version NOT YET DOCUMENTED 135 File is read only NOT YET DOCUMENTED 096 File not a database filename NOT YET DOCUMENTED 095 File not a database NOT YET DOCUMENTED 107 File not found NOT YET DOCUMENTED 133 File read access denied NOT YET DOCUMENTED 101 Function not available for this format NOT YET DOCUMENTED 109 General database error NOT YET DOCUMENTED 132 Ignored pins assigned to net n c NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 17 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 031 Illegal negative DRC block number for net netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 029 Illegal negative net number for net netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 041 Illegal net number for pin symbolpinname NOT YET
283. he standard placement rotation angle to 270 degrees and place the switches named s1001 through s1009 Parts Em Set Default Angle 270 Degrees Left Place Next Part Move to 0 2 2 1 Place Next Part Move to 0 2 1 9 Place Next Part Place Next Part E E E Move to 0 2 1 7 E Move to 0 2 1 5 E Place Next Part Move to 0 2 1 3 Place Next Part Move to 0 2 1 1 Place Next Part Move to 0 2 0 9 Place Next Part E Move to 0 2 0 7 E Place Next Part Move to 0 2 0 5 PCB Design CAD Page 4 52 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to complete the placement i e place part v1 with absolute placement coordinates and 45 degree rotation angle and part v1000 Parts Place Next Part Set Angle m Angle Deg R ad 45 Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 825 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 1 225 E Place Next Part Move to 1 2 1 6 Place Next Part The Place Next Pari function issues the All parts have been placed already message once all net list parts are placed l e the Place Next Par function can also be used to check on placement completion After correctly executing all work steps of this chapter the PCB layout example should look like the one shown in figure 4 4 H BABE ee E Figure 4 4 Layout with Part Placement Moving and Deleting Parts
284. he working directory i e requested part symbols on subsequent load operations will be copied from demolib ddb PCB Design CAD Page 4 49 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Placing Parts The Add Par Place Next Parl and Place Parts functions from the Parts menu are used for placing parts These functions work on the selected part set Initially after loading a layout all parts are selected i e the system behaves as usual The functions from the Part Sei submenu can be used to restrict and or redefine the set of parts selected for placement The Place Next Pari function issues a All parts have been placed already message if all parts are already placed or a All selected parts have been placed message if all selected parts are already placed but there are still unselected parts which have not yet been placed The part set selection popup window displays placed selected parts as name placed unselected parts as name unplaced selected parts as name and unplaced unselected parts as lt name gt See chapter 4 4 1 for more information on part set definitions The Add Par function is used to load and place parts on the current layout On layout hierarchy level the Add Part function activates a net list part name popup menu with the part name prompt This popup menu displays placed net list parts in brackets 1 Unplaced net list parts are preceded by a colon When selecting o
285. highlighting only those elements causing the shortcut whilst BAE Professional highlights the whole connection tree affected by the short circuit Hit the spacebar to return to the Layout Editor menu PCB Design CAD Page 4 95 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 2 Color Setup Color Tables Pick Preference Layer The Change Colors function from the View menu activates a popup menu for modifying the current color settings This color setup menu simultaneously can be utilized for displaying the current color assignments Changing some item specific color is accomplished by selecting the desired display item using the left mouse button and then selecting the desired color button from the function In the layout system provides a feature for fast display item fade out fade in Activating and or deactivating some item specific display is accomplished by selecting the desired display item entry with the right mouse button which works as a toggle between fade out and fade in The system won t loose information on currently defined colors of faded out display items strike through color buttons are used for notifying currently faded out display items At overlaps of different elements the resulting mixed color is displayed The highlight color is also mixed with the color of the element to be marked thus resulting in a brighter display of that element The Save Colors function from the View menu is used to save the current color settings
286. his layer assignment is most useful when defining SMT library symbols for multilayer layouts where the number of layers is not yet determined The Set Top Layer function can be used to assign a Top Layer for the currently loaded layout Settings Set Top Layer Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Select Layer Abort The default Top Layer setting for new layouts is signal layer 2 The Top Layer will also be the mirror position for mirroring parts i e objects placed beyond the Top Layer will not be affected by mirror functions The default routing layer count for the Autorouter is automatically set to the Top Layer but can afterwards be modified in the Autorouter The Bartels AutoEngineer layout system supports two methods for setting the layout Top Layer The first is to assign the desired Top Layer to each layout This method requires all Top Layer library elements such as SMD pads to be assigned to the component side layer and all signal inside layer assignments to be correct The All Layers and Middle Layers Signal layers are provided to simplify such library definitions The second method of defining the Top Layer is to use the default signal layer 2 setting for each layout and to interpret the layers beyond layer 2 as signal inside layers This might slightly reduce the expense for creating layout elements but the user must then explicitly set the Autorouter routing layer count when routing layouts with more than two
287. holding down both the left and the right mouse button It is possible to activate the online display menu even if only a two button mouse is installed and or configured Any currently active menu function can be immediately aborted and or canceled by pressing the escape key ASCII code 27 abort hotkey A series of functions are implemented with popup menus where the object to be processed can be selected by mouse pick These popup menus simplify the use of basic data and file management functions such as Load Element Delete Element File Contents Load Colors etc With each popup menu the input line is enabled for manual element name input via keyboard and special popup menu buttons such as Abort for canceling the current function Next for scrolling down the popup menu selections list or Back for scrolling up the popup menu selection list are usually provided The dialogs and or popup menus for net list part and net name selections support prefix input for scrolling the list display to the specified name prefix A name prefix specification such as r4 scrolls to the first name starting with r4 or if no such name exists to the next name thereafter Part and net list scrolling positions specified through name prefices are saved for subsequent name queries The menu color settings of the BAE standard user interface can be changed with the BSETUP utility program Please
288. horization i e hardlock key and appropriate license file installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for more details Introduction Page 1 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual BAE Side Menu User Interface The Bartels AutoEngineer can optionally be operated with a side menu user interface The graphic display of the side menu user interface is divided into different areas as shown in the figure below It consists of the graphic workarea an input and or status line below the graphic workarea and an info field and function menus on the right side G BAE SCM _ O x Figure 1 3 BAE Side Menu User Interface Under Windows and Motif the BAE user interface can be selected and or configured through the dialog from the BAE main menu Alternatively the BSETUP can be used to select the BAE user interface see chapter 7 2 for more details If the BAE DOS version fails to load the graphic display then check for correct BAE graphic device driver installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for more details Introduction Page 1 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 2 2 Function Selection BAE Windows Motif User Interface The pull down user interfaces of the BAE Windows Motif versions provide a permanently displayed main menu bar at the top Main menu selections usually activate a more particular pull down function menu A particular menu function is selected by moving the mouse to the
289. i e REDASC converts layout symbols part lists net lists placement information etc from Redac CDI ASCII format to internal BAE DDB format 3 4 3 Exporting Net List Data Either the Bartels User Language programming facilities see the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for details on how to apply Bartels User Language or the USERLIST User Programmable List Generator utility program can be utilized to provide tools for exporting net list data in arbitrary formats Use your editor to create a USERLIST script named netlist usf with the following contents EXTENSION nl PRINT NETLIST PROJ Entr CR FOR ALL PARTS PRINT PARTNAME 5 Splname 8 CLEARCOUNTER FOR ALL PINS f IF NETPINCOUNT 5 1 f PRINT PINNAME NETNAME COUNTUP IF COUNTVALUE gt 4 PRINT CR TAB CLEARCOUNTE PRINT I AUTER ENDSPEC Packager Backannotation Page 3 30 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following USERLIST call to run the net list usf USERLIST script to export the physical net list board from job file demo ddb to ASCII net list file demo n1 gt userlist netlist demo board The above USERLIST call produces the demo n1 net list file with the following contents NETLIST board e100 chip 110 c101 chipl206 rero did 3 6 4 4 5 5
290. ia i e either floppy disk 1 of the BAE install kit or the BAE CD ROM must be mounted and the working directory must be set to the corresponding drive The INSTALL program comes up with a self explanatory dialogue where the user amongst other parameters has to specify the install mode The install mode is used to select the file set to be installed Standard install modes copies all software files Update install modes does not replace certain system files ending on dat def and fnt Le update install mode should be selected to prevent the INSTALL program from overwriting existing user defined setup data color tables font definitions aperture tables etc The INSTALL program also prompts for the destination directories The directory default names can be accepted by pressing the return key E Each destination directory path name can be edited or can even be deleted to suppress installation of the corresponding componeni s of the software Any of the destination directories not yet existing is automatically created with user verification Compress Decompress Files The formal INSTALL syntax for compressing and or decompressing selectable files is install c srcfile pattern dstfile directory where option c activates compression and decompressing is applied by omitting that option Wildcards pattern can optionally specified with the srcfile source file argument The string is required at the end of the destination directory specific
291. ial purposes Such net attributes can be used for controlling the layout process maximum minimum allowed trace length parallel routing restrictions layer assignments etc or they can be evaluated for subsequent simulator processes run time analysis checking ECL EMC rules etc Tools for accessing and evaluating user specific net attributes can be provided with Bartels User Language programs Utilities Page 7 41 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The netattr command can be used to trigger automatic ID attribute value generation by the Packager through the assignment of id symid extension and partid extension values id creates consecutive ID values id1 id2 etc The symid extension and partid extension values append the specified extension with underscore to the schematic symbol name and or layout part name partid diffpairl results in Ziel diffpairl ic2 diffpairl etc Automatic ID generation is useful if a netattr command refers to multiple nets as this allows to create a reference between nets as required for differential pair indication call Command The ca11 command is used for hierarchical SCM design in order to assign SCM blocks to SCM symbols for later reference on SCM sheet level The formal syntax of the call command is call lt blockname gt where lt blockname gt is the name of the SCM block and the corresponding part must be defined virtual The block symbol pins are assigned to the name correspondin
292. ibrary design mr lp Files bae 1log logfile written to current directory See also LISTDDB The functionality for copying DDB file elements is also implemented through the ddbcopyelem User Language system function Diagnosis The error messages issued by COPYDDB are intended to be self explanatory Warnings COPYDDB is a powerful tool for manipulating DDB file contents Be aware of WHAT you are doing with COPYDDB Conflicts can occur when merging SCM and or layout plans from different design files since the part lists net lists part attributes etc are merged too i e you might run into serious Packager and or Backannotation problems when using COPYDDB inappropriately We strongly recommend to check the destination file consistency after applying COPYDDB Utilities Page 7 26 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 1 FONTCONV Name fontconv Font Conversion Utility Synopsis fontconv fontfile libraryfile Description The FONTCONV utility program compiles standard ASCII format vector font data into a Bartels AutoEngineer font file FONTCONV accepts the font description file font file as first argument This file must have an extension of fon but this extension must not be included with the command line FONTCONV accepts the layout library file name libraryfile as second argument This file must have an extension of nt but this extension must not be included with the command line FONTCONV stores the transl
293. ibraryfile gt ddb CONCONV generates the design file lt projectname gt ddb and a free list named sprojectname fre The free list contains an unconnected pins report After successful processing an internal physical net list will exist in the design file named lt projectname gt ddb A layout element can then be created in that design file parts placed and traces routed Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The net list file format must start with the LAYOUT command and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and The formal syntax of the LAYOUT command is LAYOUT lt elementname gt where lt elementname gt is the name of the net list and or layout element to be created in the destination file Part List The part list section is expected after the LAYOUT command and must start with the keyword PARTS Each part is defined by a command in the form lt part gt lt plname gt where lt part gt is the part name e g C1 R1 IC15 etc and lt plname gt is the physical library name of the package e g DIL14 S020 etc Utilities Page 7 19 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Net List The net list section is expected after the parts list Different net list formats are supported A keyword preceding the net list information is used to designate the net list format type CONNECT for Bartels AutoEngineer format CALAY for CALAY format RACAL for RACAL format
294. ich the pen can be moved by the HP GL plotter The system accepts either s input for maximum speed or non negative integer plotter speed values in cm s units The default plotter speed corresponds with s maximum speed The maximum speed value specification is 99cm s The Fill Mode HP GL function provides the options Fill Mode Off and Et Mode Onl Fill Mode Off causes the system to refrain from filling the plot structures i e only outlines are drawn for filled areas Switching off the fill mode is most useful for fast control plots Fill Mode On is used to select the default fill mode The HP GL Output function is used to produce pen plots in HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language The user is prompted for the pen number 1 99 and for the name of the output file if no default output device was specified with Plot Device Use the following commands to switch off the fill mode set the plotter pen width to 0 1mm and then plot the currently loaded SCM sheet to an HP GL plot file named demo s1 plt using pen number 4 Plot Output Plotter Pen Width Plotter Pen Width 0 30mm 0 1 Fill Mode HP GL Fill Mode Off HP GL Output LC Plotter Pen Number 1 99 4 Plot File Name demo s1 pit EJ The system will issue the following message after successfully generating the HP GL plot HP GL plot done A PG HPGL command is added to the end of HPGL output files to forc
295. ide Length 0 127mm 0 3 Drawing Mode A II F lash L ine Gerber D Code Number 10 999 10 Gerber Aperture Table Index 1 900 An empty string input i e pressing the return key J to the aperture table index prompt causes the system to return to the CAM Processor main menu The Dump Aperture Table function is used to generate an ASCII listing of the currently loaded aperture table The function is used to save the currently loaded aperture table with a selectable name in the cam dat system file Gerber Format Optimized Gerber Output The function is used to specify the Gerber output format The option produces 1 1000 inch integer coordinates The Gerber 2 4 Formal option produces 1 10000 inch integer coordinates Gerber 2 3 Dormat is selected on default The Gerber optimized 2 3 and Gerber optimized 2 4 options are provided for optionally generating optimized Gerber output with redundant D01 light off plotter control commands eliminated thus significantly reducing the amount of Gerber output plot data However it is strongly recommended to check whether the PCB manufacturer supports optimized Gerber format Standard Line Width The Default Line Width function is used to define the standard line width for Gerber output The standard line width is used for drawing graphic lines and texts A round aperture for line drawing is required for the standard line width oth
296. idth can be changed arc shaped trace segments can be created relative and absolute coordinate input can be specified etc PCB Design CAD Page 4 60 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to connect the pins c2 and C1 of part K1 with a trace segment on signal layer 2 Traces Add Trace Move to K1 C2 1 6 0 5 Layer 2 Move to K1 C1 1 6 0 8 EI Done Use the following commands to create a trace segment on signal layer 1 starting at pin 9 of the plug named X1000 and ending with a via to connect to the previously generated trace Traces Add Trace Move to X1000 9 2 45 0 85 Move to Corner Point 2 45 0 65 Move to Vertical Trace Segment 1 6 0 65 Layer 2 Done Use the following commands to deselect estk from the via list select the padstack symbol via which has been created in chapter 4 2 2 in the demo ddb DDB file to the via list and then route a trace on signal layer 2 starting at pin K of the diode named V1000 and ending with a via connecting to the horizontal trace between the pins A1 and C1 of part K1 Parts Select Via New Delete Via Name estk Please confirm Y N y New Delete Via Name via New Delete Via Name Set Edit Layer Layer 2 Traces Add Trace Move to V1000 K 1 2 1 6 Move to Corner Point 1 1 1 6 Move to Horizontal Trace Segment 1 1 0 95 Layer 1 Done You should now gain more practic
297. ied to load the same layout at different positions and subsequently the whole data can be written to Gerber and or drill data output files to support panelization CAM View can hold Gerber data from different layers and drill data in main memory at the same time l e only one input offset specification is required for each panel element The Clear Memory function from the File menu can be used to delete previously loaded CAM data from memory before loading new CAM data for panelization The Gerber Formal function from the Seitings menu is used to specify the Gerber format for loading and or writing Gerber data The default option Gerber 2 3 Formal selects 1 1000 inch integer units Option selects 1 10000 inch integer units With option Other Formal the user is prompted for the length of one plotter unit thus supporting arbitrary Gerber format specifications The Circle Mode function from the Setings menu is used to select the mode of processing arc segments when loading Gerber data With the default option arbitrary arc definitions can be loaded without modification This is valid for the Gerber data generated by the BAE CAM Processor and most of the known foreign systems Some foreign systems can only generate arcs of up to 90 degrees where the length of the arc center point vector is also specified In this case the Max 90 Degree Arcs option of the Circle Mode fu
298. ied when subsequently creating the layout for this net list 042 Layout Part Macro layoutpartmacroname not in library NOT YET DOCUMENTED 004 Library File Name libraryname This message displays the file name of the default layout and logical library used by the Packager The Packager fetches and copies required layout part macros and logical library definitions from the default library to the project file if these definitions are not yet in the project file Since the Packager copies required layout part symbols to the project file these part macros are available for subsequent part placement operations in the Layout Editor The Packager saves the library file name parameter in the project file thus eliminating the need for specifying the same parameter again in subsequent Packager runs 043 Logical Definition for definitionname not in library NOT YET DOCUMENTED 052 Mainpart definitionname subparts net internal deactivated NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 19 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 045 Mainpart undeclared for definition definitionname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 022 Missing Schematic Netlist NOT YET DOCUMENTED 032 Multiple DRC block numbers for net netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 070 Multiple colliding pin functions for pin layoutpartpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 030 Multiple net numbers
299. ierarchy levels e g parts on a PCB are copied with all sub elements from the currently selected library to the currently processed design file when they are first requested e g for placement on the upper hierarchy level This results in a job specific library in the design file Subsequent requests for the same element will then refer to the element already copied to the current design file i e the job specific library elements are accessed with highest priority This concept prevents any library and or design file modification from unintentionally affecting another design and or library file AutoEngineer objects can be composed of sub elements from different libraries A BAE library file can be build up by accessing one or more other libraries Even a particular design file can be used as library for another design file Library definitions such as pin or part symbols can be modified at any stage Any such modification is automatically reflected up the library hierarchy All data relating to one particular design is kept in a single file thus avoiding the confusion of multiple file structures This so called design database DDB file contains different element types relating to schematic layout net lists part lists etc all of which go together to make a complete design This concept supports highly efficient data management features for the creation modification backup update and redesign of design files and library files alike Intr
300. ies Display The View or Display menu can either be activated by selecting the corresponding main menu item or by pressing the middle mouse button The View or Display menu provides useful functions for changing display options such as zoom window zoom scale input grid color settings etc Control Plot The Control Plot menu provides the functions for generating HP GL pen plots PCL HP laser prints and Postscript output Gerber Photoplot The Gerber Photoplot menu provides the functions for generating Gerber photo plots also including facilities for defining and managing Gerber aperture tables Drilling Insertion The Drilling Insertion menu provides the functions for generating drill data output format Sieb amp Meier and or Excellon and insertion data output generic format Plot Parameters The Plot Parameters menu is used to set general plot parameters plot tolerance CAM origin CAM rotation CAM mirror mode and to define special parameters for generating negative power layer plots The Plot Parameters menu also provides features for controlling the processing of special layers such as the All Signal Middle Layers Board Outline and Plot Markers layers Utilities The utilities menu provides functions for exiting BAE returning to the BAE main shell calling the Layout Editor and starting User Langu
301. ifferent non default layout package assignment by setting a value for the p1name attribute at the corresponding SCM symbol part lt llname gt default lt plname gt The part also supports alternate package type definitions which can be assigned during part placement in the Layout system The part command syntax for defining alternate package types is part lt llname gt default lt plname gt lt plname gt lt plname gt where lt liname gt specifies the name of the SCM symbol and the lt plname gt entries specify the list of valid part package types The first lt plname gt entry is used as default package type The subsequent lt plname gt entries define the list of alternate package types for the corresponding part Alternate part package types can be assigned using the Alternate Part function during part placement in the Layout Editor The sequence of the alternate package type menu entries provided by the Alternate Par function corresponds with the sequence of lt plname gt entries specified with the part command Note however that any package type assignment defined with p1name attribute settings override Alternate Par assignments The class keyword can be used to assign the part to a part class part lt llname gt class lt partclassname gt default lt plname gt Part class assignments are used by the Packager to check whether alternate part definition assignments thro
302. ific comment text Sdrcblk Design Rule Check Block Pin Net Attribute Snet Pin Net Name Snetname Net Name Net Attribute Snettype Net Type Pin Net Attribute Spowpin Power Pin Definition Pin Attribute Sviastk Via Padstack Type Net Attribute Snotest Exclusion from Automatic Test Point Generation Net Attribut Sroutdis Exclusion from Autorouting Process Net Attribute Slayers Autorouting Layers Net Attribute Ur Layout Part Name Padstack Attribute The pltbaeversion and pltbaebuild display the Bartels AutoEngineer software version and build numbers This allows for the inclusion of software version information on schematic plans as required for ISO certification The llname plname Sgp ulname and blkname attributes are automatically processed by the system The reference designator attribute is replaced with the name of the referenced symbol on the superior hierarchy level On SCM sheet level after Packager processing Circuit Design CAE Page 2 21 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Symbol level 11name text definitions are substituted with symbol macro names on SCM plan level The Packager automatically assigns the 11name attribute value i e the 11name attribute is not available for interactive and or explicit attribute value assigments Symbol name display through 11name text definitions on SCM symbol label eliminate the need for redefining symbol name texts when creating new SCM symbols fro
303. iles to force a page eject and to prevent from subsequent plots being plotted onto the same sheet The Multiple Layers option must be used for plotting multiple layers onto the same sheet PCB Design CAD Page 4 128 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 8 HP Laser Output The HP Laser Output function is used to produce HP Laser plots in PCL Printer Command Language format HP Laser plots are automatically scaled to A4 paper size i e neither plot scaling factor nor pen width settings have effect Use the following commands to generate an HP Laser plot for documentary layer Insertion Plan Side 1 of the currently loaded layout and direct the output to 1pt1 e g for interfacing an appropriate DOS connected laser writer device Control Plot HP Laser Output Document Layer Insertion Plan Side 1 Plot File Name en Note the Multiple Layers menu item provided with the layer selection menu of the HP Laser Output function This option can be used for writing the plot data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting the plot data output layers using the left or right mouse button The Col button is used to select all currently visible layers for output The CAM Processor issues a HP Laser output done scale 1 message after successfully generating t
304. imited rather by available memory and or pointer address space than by the complexity of the design All coordinate and angle values are stored in internal 32 bit IEEE floating point format Online operations requiring higher precision are performed with double 64 bit precision Each element can be placed with arbitrary coordinates at any rotation angle Skillful linkage to the hierarchical database system avoids performance disadvantage even on slow floating point processors References to named elements such as pins or parts are always stored as strings Identical strings are linked together to one file entry l e naming of e g plug or PGA pins such as c32 is easily possible without creating redundancies 1 1 5 Exchanging Data with other Systems Bartels AutoEngineer provides tools for importing different ASCII net list formats placement data and routing data via Gerber format Functions for generating insertion data drill data Gerber photoplots Postscript output HP GL pen plots and HP Laser PCL output are integrated to the CAM Processor of the Bartels AutoEngineer A special programming language Bartels User Language can be applied for implementing user specific programs for importing and or exporting almost any data such as part lists net lists geometry data drill data insertion data milling data etc in freely definable formats Introduction Page 1 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 2 Operating the B
305. in 90 degree steps where part rotation can optionally be restricted to provide fault robust insertion data A part expansion parameter can be set to support automatic part spacing The initial piacement process is controlled by adjustable heuristic weight factors for evaluating part segment fitting and for considering different net list structures Intermediate rip up retry passes are activated during initial placement to optimize board area exploitation The system also provides placement optimization functions for automatic part and pin gate swap The part swap facility mutually exchanges identical components at their insertion position to minimize unroutes lengths The pin gate swap facility analogously performs an iterative exchange of gates and or pins and pin groups where gates or groups can also be swapped between different parts Fixed parts are excluded from placement optimization The admissibility of pin gate swaps is fairly controlled with appropriate library definitions Either single pass or multi pass optimization can be applied with the swap method only part swap only pin gate swap or both part and pin gate swap to be selected as required Applying placement optimization will usually cause a significant simplification of the routing problem thus resulting in a considerable time saving at the subsequent Autorouting process Bartels Autorouter The Bartels Autorouter is the culmination of years of research and practical routing experien
306. including Layout Editor Autoplacement automatic copper fill Bartels AutoEngineer Bartels Autorouter CAM Processor and CAM View with Gerber viewer integrated object oriented database system DDB Design DataBase in built Neural Rule System Bartels User Language Compiler User Language programs with source code utility programs for database management foreign net list and design data import etc extensive part libraries for SCM and PCB layout design data examples Documentation Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide BAE Schematics the Schematic Editor of BAE Professional is freely available and can be operated in stand alone mode Demo software configurations of BAE Professional BAE Demo fully featured except for data output are available free of charge for test and evaluation purposes Bartels AutoEngineer Light Bartels AutoEngineer Light is available for PCs with Windows Linux or DOS operating systems BAE Light is a shareware price level BAE configuration for educational purposes and or semi professional users BAE Light provides full BAE Professional functionality however with the following restrictions PCB layout size limited to 180mm 120mm max 2 signal layers for manual routing and Autorouter no power layer support layouts from BAE Professional BAE Economy and BAE HighEnd only loadable if BAE Light restrictions are not violated Introduction Page 1 5 Bartels AutoEngine
307. ing command to start the Schematic Editor Schematic The Schematic Editor is activated and you can start to edit SCM plans Circuit Design CAE Page 2 30 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 3 1 Creating and Editing SCM Plans Creating a new SCM Sheet Use the following commands to create a new schematic sheet named sheet1 with paper size A4 in the DDB file demo ddb File el New Sheet File Name demo Element Name sheet1 A4 Landscape A frame designating the element boundaries of the SCM sheet will appear on the screen If the system issues an error message such as Element does already exist then an SCM sheet with the specified element name has already been generated In this case the requested element cannot be created but must be loaded see below The element name query is indispensable due to the fact that a schematic circuit drawing can consist of multiple sheets You can specify arbitrary sheet names such as sheet1 sheet2 plan 1 1 2 io memory plug pinning etc An options menu for selecting the sheet size is activated after specifying the file and element names This allows for the selection of predefined AO A1 A2 A3 A4 Letter 8 5711 Inches and Tabloid 11 17 Inches formats in either portrait or landscape orientation The Other Formal option can be used to specify any other sheet size through subsequently activated element width and height prompts Use the following commands to st
308. ion from the Windows printer dialog allows for the selection of the print area for generic outputs The generic output is automatically scaled to the print page format selected through the Windows printer setup if the size of the element to be plotted exceeds the paper size The page aspect ratio is maintained when automatic plot scaling is applied The status message of the function provides information to indicate any non default scaling factor being used for automatic plot to sheet size scaling 2 5 6 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard The Output to Clipboard function from the Plot Output menu can be used under Windows for plotting a bitmap of the currently loaded element into the clipboard ready to be imported Pastel to other Windows applications capable of processing bitmaps The whole element is plotted on default The Clipping On option can be used to restrict the output to a mouse selectable rectangle The plot dialog box also allows for bitmap size specifications and plot rotation mode selection Circuit Design CAE Page 2 59 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 6 Hierarchical Circuit Design The Schematic Editor provides functions for creating hierarchical schematic designs Through these functions it is possible to define schematic sheets to be sub blocks and to reference sub blocks from higher level schematic plans This high sophisticated SCM design feature is recommended especially
309. ion selects error severity level 1 Option e0 sets error severity level 0 Option e or e1 explicitly sets error severity level 1 Error severity level 1 compiles all specified sources error severity level 0 causes the Compiler to stop the compilation process on any errors occurred during a single source compilation Warning Severity Option w 0 1 2 3 4 The w option is used for setting the warning severity level in the range O to 4 On default the warning severity level is set to O i e omitting this option selects warning severity level 0 Omitting explicit level specification with this option as with w defaults to warning severity level 3 Each type of warning defined with the Compiler is assigned to a certain warning severity level The Compiler only prints warnings with a warning severity level less than or equal the level selected with the w option since higher warning severity levels denote less importance With this option it is possible to suppress less important warning messages Top Level Warnings Only Option t 0 1 The t option controls whether warning messages related to the compilation of include files are omitted or not On default i e if this option is not specified or if its value is set to 0 warning messages related to the compilation of both top level source code files and include files are issued Setting this option value to 1 prevents the User Language Compiler from issuing warning messages related to the compil
310. ions between different sheets of the schematics Use the following commands to load a label named BUS and connect that label to the previously defined bus take care that the contact area of the label extinguishes to ensure a correct connection Symbols Add Label Net Name bus Move to Bus 250 50 Figure 2 7 illustrates the Bartels AutoEngineer features for bus definitions The two bus signals s1 in figure 2 7a are not connected since they are tapped to different busses In figure 2 7b the bus signals s1 are tapped to the same bus i e they are connected Figure 2 7c illustrates how to define sub busses DATA and ADDR the bus signals s1 are not connected since they are tapped to different sub busses Figures 2 7d and 2 7e show how to use labels for the assignment of bus signal names The signals s1 in figure 2 7d are tapped to busses with the same label BUS and thus are connected whilst in figure 2 7e the signals s1 are tapped to busses with different labels BUS1 and BUS2 and thus are not connected Figure 2 7 SCM Bus Connections Circuit Design CAE Page 2 47 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 3 4 Text and Graphic Text and graphic can be defined on SCM sheet level Use the following commands to draw a graphic frame with a legend box around your circuit drawing Graphic Add Graphic Line Move to 10 10 Move to 290 10 Move to 290 200 Move to 10 200 Move to 10 10 ba Done m Add Graphic Line
311. ip1206 Retun JE With the commands above the package type assignment for the resistor part R104 has been changed Use the following commands to assign value so14 to the plname attribute of each gate of part 1C1 thus defining a non default package type for zC1 the default package type was di114 Symbols Assign Value Move to ic1 5 60 110 E Spiname Attribute Value s014 E Assign Value Cl Move to ic1 1 100 110 plname Attribute Value so14 Assign Value Move to ic1 8 140 110 plname Attribute Value s014 Assign Value Move to ic1 13 180 110 plname Attribute Value so14 Use the following commands to save the currently loaded SCM sheet and load sheet2 File Save Load Sheet File Name Element Name sheet2 PCB Design CAD Page 4 100 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The currently loaded SCM sheet contains some Autorouter control parameter settings net attribute assignments which should be modified Use the following commands to change the ROUTWIDTH net attribute of NET from 0 5mm to 0 3mm change the ROUTWIDTH attribute of net Vss from 0 6mm to 0 45mm and change the MINDIST attribute for net Vdd from 0 4mm to 0 3mm Symbols Assign Value Move to NET Routwidth Symbol val Attribute Value 0 3 Assign Value Move to Vss Routwidth Symbol Sval Attribute Value 0 45 Assign Value Move to Vdd Mindist Symbol Sval Attribute Value 0 3 Use
312. ipped with powerful Autoplacement functions Parts can be selected and or deselected for automativ placement according to set principles either by specifying part names c1 r2 ic15 etc or by specifying library symbol names di114 so20 plcc44 etc where wildcards are also permitted The user can also select parts from certain blocks of a hierarchical circuit design The functions for designating the parts to be placed are a useful feature for controlling the placement process in a way that e g first the plug s can be placed then the DIL packages then the capacitors etc The matrix placement facilities are used for the automatic placement of selectable part sets to definable placement grids Matrix placement is intended especially for the initial placement of homogeneous part types such as memory devices block capacitors test points etc Of course the matrix placement function also considers the default rotation angle and mirror mode settings Initial placement functions are provided for performing a complete placement by automatically placing not yet placed parts inside the board outline The parts are placed onto the currently selected placement grid where pre placed parts such as plugs and LEDs are considered as well as the connectivity derived from the net list The initial placement algorithm features automatic SMD and block capacitor recognition The solder side can optionally be used for placing SMDs Parts are automatically rotated
313. is most important feature Highlight Net Move to Connection The Highlight Net function from the Niew menu is used to mark all connections of the selected net with a special Highlight color The Highlight Net function works as a toggle to reset the highlight of a certain net simply re select that net with the Highlight Nei function In BAE HighEnd the Highlight Nei function causes a highlight and or de highlight of the selected nets in all currently loaded plans of the current project file on schematic sheet and layout board level global net highlight cross probing Signal Router The Schematic Editor provides an built in signal router for performing automatic connection re routing when moving symbols and or labels or groups on SCM sheet level Signal routing can be activated and or deactivated through the dialog from the Settings menu or with the Signal Router On and or Signal Router Off options from the Move Symbol Label function submenu to be activated by pressing the right mouse button whilst moving a symbol or label The selected signal routing mode is saved with the currently loaded SCM sheet see also chapter 2 1 5 Warning Please note that the signal router should be considered as is i e it is straight forward designed with the intention to simplify work rather than to provide an academically optimum SCM autorouter solu
314. is not what would be expected When changing cost factors slight adjustments to a few can make significant improvements or make things much worse The Rip Up Retry Router is guarded by a unique backtracking algorithm which not only prevents from a deterioration of the result or a dead lock during rip up or optimization but also is able to exploit a new and or better routing solution The Rip Up Retry Router automatically activates intermediate Optimizer passes if a single rip up pass fails to achieve 100 routing success Optimizer The Optimizer function is used to start a single Optimizer pass The Optimizer usually is applied after 100 routing to optimize the layout for manufacturing The Optimizer eliminates redundant vias smoothes traces and attempts to rout open connections Channel width zero is used during optimization and the maximum via count is set to the same value as defined with the Maximum Via Count function from the Options menu see above PCB Design CAD Page 4 87 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual SMD Via Pre Placement SMD Via Pre Place is a special initial routing algorithm for connecting SMD pins to signal inside layers The SMD via pre placer generates short trace connections to vias for those SMD pins to be wired With SMD fanout routing passes a channel width setting is required and routing directions result from the shapes and positions of the corresp
315. is omitted REDASC converts the CDI file lt projectname gt cdi to a BAE DDB design file with the name lt projectname gt ddb The generated layout element is named lt projectname gt and contains the placed parts and the net list connectivity REDASC also generates a free list named lt projectname gt fre which contains an unconnected pins report See also CONCONV Diagnosis The error messages issued by REDASC are intended to be self explanatory Warnings REDASC does not convert traces from the CDI format Use the CAM View facility to read in routing data via Gerber format to reconstruct the PCB Utilities Page 7 49 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 14 RULECOMP Name rulecomp Bartels Rule System Compiler Synopsis rulecomp srcfile 1 Description The RULECOMP compiler is used for translating Bartels Rule Specification source code RULECOMP accepts the rule specification source file name srcfile as first argument This file must have an extension of rul but this extension must not be included with the command line RULECOMP translates the rule specification source file and stores the defined rules and or rule sets to a file named brules vdb in the BAE programs directory These rules can be applied by certain in built BAE system functions and or customer defined User Language programs Options Command line options of the Rule System Compiler consist of the dash start character followed by the option
316. is option can be used for writing the plot data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting the plot data output layers using the right mouse button Layer selections with the left mouse button also allow for layer specific pen number selections on default pen 1 is used for each layer The button is used to select all currently visible layers for output with the pen numbers automatically set to modulo eight of the corresponding layer colors Use the following commands to set the plotter pen width to 0 2mm set the plotter speed to 10cm s switch off the fill mode and plot the documentary layer insertion Plan Side 2 of the currently loaded layout to an HP GL plot file named demo bs2 plt using pen number 1 Control Plot Plotter Pen Width EI Plotter Pen Width 0 30mm 0 2 Plotter Speed T Plotter Speed cm s S 10 Fill Mode HP GL moo Fill Mode Off Plot Scale EI EECHER HP GL Output LI Document Layer Insertion Plan Side 2 Plotter Pen Number 1 99 1 Plot File Name demo bs2 pit After successfully generating the HP GL plot file the CAM Processor issues a HP GL plot done lt n gt errors message where lt n gt is the number of overdraw errors Overdraw errors are highlighted on the layout A PG HPGL command is added to the end of HPGL output f
317. ither signal layers or documentary layers In most cases it is advisable to load the flashed structures onto documentary layers since flashed structures usually represent pads which when placed on signal layers would create redundant copper at the layout pin positions once the corresponding parts are loaded Pad info retrieved from the flashed structures should rather serve as an aid for placing the parts on the layout It is a good idea to select a special documentary layer such as Part Groups for loading flashed structures Certain documentary Gerber plots such as the can also be loaded to the corresponding BAE documentary layer to support subsequent part placement procedures Creating a Layout After loading all Gerber data to CAM View the Create Layout function from the Pied menu can be used to generate a layout from that Gerber data With the Create Layout function first a via D Code must be specified Use the Report function and or appropriate D Code color assignments to find out which D Code is used for vias Flashed structures generated with the specified via D Code are translated to via definitions Automatic via translation is only carried out for the first Gerber data input file to avoid multiple via placement at the same coordinates The Create Layout function automatically generates a via padstack using an all layer pad with the size of the selected via aperture and a drill hole with half that aperture size
318. kareas are required for copper fill functions to operate Use the following Layout Editor commands to define a rectangle shaped copper fill workarea on layer 1 for the signal named net Areas m Copper Fill Add Cop Fill Area Layer 1 Move to 0 6 0 4 Move to 1 7 0 4 Move to 1 7 1 7 Move to 0 6 1 7 Done A dash string input to the net name prompt of the add Cop Fill Area function creates a copper fill workarea which is not assigned to any net This feature can be used for generating pure shielding areas Net Name net il Passive copper areas with signal net connections e g teardrops created as passive copper are treated like active copper areas of that net and won t be isolated from copper fill areas of that net Automatic Copper Fill The Fil all areas Fill single areal Clear all areas and Clear single area functions are used to activate automatic copper fill procedures Fill all areas performs automatic copper fill on all copper fill workareas Clear all areas deletes copper areas from all copper fill workareas With Fill single area and Clear single areal the user is expected to select the desired copper fill workarea Use the following commands to set the isolation distance to 0 35mm specify a minimum structure size of 0 15 mm deactivate the automatic isolated copper area elimination and fill the predefined workarea Areas Coppe
319. king SCM sheets which can be singled out to have caused Packager errors are automatically loaded when switching from the menu driven Packager versions to the Schematic Editor In that case the Schematic Editor also triggers a to the first SCM symbol which caused a Packager error Packager Backannotation Page 3 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Correcting and or Completing the Logical Library A LOGLIB file must be edited to provide the missing information about the assignment of SCM symbol cd4081 to its corresponding layout package The LOGLIB utility program must then be applied to transfer the contents of that LOGLIB file to the demolib ddb library file to be used for packaging Use your editor to prepare an ASCII file named cd4081 def containing the LOGLIB definition as shown in figure 3 2 Data Sheet Loglib Definition loglib part cd4081 default dill4 1 pin a b y xlat cp4sog4 C04081 cosos4 CD4081 B Figure 3 2 Part CD4081 Data Sheet with Loglib Definition The following just explains the contents of the LOGLIB definition in figure 3 2 See chapter 7 11 for a detailed description of the LOGLIB input file syntax The LOGLIB file always starts with the Loglib keyword and ends with the end keyword The part command is used to assign a layout package to the SCM symbol The default keyword in the example indicates that this assignment is not imperative i e it can be changed with an appro
320. l In this section a resistor part with drilled pins a 14 pin SMD part and a constructive part symbol representing a drill hole are created The padstack symbols from the preceding section are used for pin definitions For the following operations it is recommended to set the input grid to 1 20 inch use the Grids Rotation and Set Input Grid functions from the Miew menu and to set the coordinate display mode to inch use function Coordinate Display from the Settings menu Creating a Part Symbol Use the following commands to create a new part symbol named x04a25 with an element size of 0 6 0 2 inch in DDB file demo ddb File New Part Element Name r04a25 Element Width mm 0 6 Element Height mm 0 2 The display now shows a rectangle shaped frame with a cross at the lower left corner The frame describes the element boundaries of the part and the cross marks the position of the element origin PCB Design CAD Page 4 35 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Placing the Pins The Add Part function from the Parts menu is used for placing pins on the current layout part symbol The system prompts for the pin name and the library element name i e the name of the padstack symbol to be loaded Note that part pin names must be unique i e when specifying a pin name already used on the current part then the user must confirm to replace the existin
321. l pin names This command is not normally required since the pin list can be defined with the xlat command as well It is mainly used to provide additional information in cases where 1 1 pin mapping applies i e where the pin names otherwise can not be shown in the loglib file The formal syntax of the pin command pin lt piniiste e where lt pinlist gt contains a list of pin names defined on the SCM symbol The lt startpin gt lt endpin gt lt step gt pin name range pattern can be used for specifying pin lists This allows for definitions such as pin a1 a4 for pin al a2 a3 a4 Of pin c2 c10 2 for pin c2 c4 c6 c8 c10 Itis also possible to include multiple pin name ranges such as pin a1 a32 b1 b2 c1 c32 within a single command Pin name range patterns are only pin list aliases the system still saves and displays function Show Symbol Logic the complete pin name lists The pin none suppresses automatic 1 1 assignments of symbol to layout pins for missing pin commands to allows for e g the definition of mainpart symbols without pins for general use Utilities Page 7 37 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual xlat Command The xlat command is used to define the relationship between the logical pin names and the physical pin names It can be used to translate one set of logical pin names to one or more sets of physical pin names i e the xlat command is used to define the logical gates of a phy
322. laylib ddb Select Library Library Name EJ PCB Design CAD Page 4 48 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Bartels AutoEngineer supports a highly flexible hierarchical database concept This allows for any DDB file to be used as symbol library When loading a part symbol the system first checks the job specific library i e the currently edited DDB file for the requested library element If the requested element is not available in the the project file then the search is expanded to the currently selected library The Layout Editor automatically creates a complete copy of the requested library symbol in the current project file when loading a part symbol from an external library Subsequent requests for the same symbol will then refer to the job specific library Figure 4 3 illustrates the Layout Editor library access concept Project File Layout Library Subsequent First Access Subsequent Access Subsequent Figure 4 3 Layout Library Access Changing the library path setting is meaningful only if a series of different part symbols are to be loaded from a library file which is not accessible through the predefined library path Use the following commands to set the library path to the demolib ddb DDB file of the current directory Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib stdsym ddb demolib With the commands above the library path is set to the demolib ddb DDB file of t
323. layout save time p1t sdatede layout save date German Notation and Spltsdateus layout save date US notation system attributes are substituted with the time and or the date the currently loaded layout was last saved Automatic time and date substitutions are applied throughout all database hierarchy levels marker symbol label sheet and or pad padstack part layout unless other attribute values are explicitly set for these attributes The pltpname layout element name pltpdatede date German Notation Spltpdateus date US notation and Spltptime time system attributes are substituted with the layout element name and or the date and or the time of the last Packager run when displayed and or plotted on SCM sheet or layout level The pltdate2de pltdate2us Spltsdate2de pltsdate2us pltpdate2de and pltpdate2us attributes are two digit year display versions of the pltdatede pltdateus pltsdatede pltsdateus pltpdatede and Spltpdateus attributes The pltcname pltcdatede pltcdate2de pltcdateus pltcdate2us and pltctime attributes are substituted with the layout element name and the date and time of the last name update These attributes are not only updated by the Packager but also by the Backamnotatior The Spltfbname File Base Name and Spltfbsname File Base Short Name system attributes can be used for displaying the current element s project file name p1t fbname displays the project file name wi
324. lds better results in terms of routability and manufacturing optimization With gridless routing activated there are much more options for using off grid pin channels which might significantly increase the routability of complex layouts Gridless routing generates straighter connections to off grid placed pins thus preventing from blocking adjacent pin channels and also performing more optimization for manufacturing The Gridless Routing mode allows for traces to leave the routing grid under virtually any condition and for minimum distance routing between off grid pins thus achieving significantly better routing results especially for dense SMT boards The Gridless Pins Vias mode straightens connections to gridless placed pins and vias only locally and resumes and or applies gridbased routing for normal traces This mode is not capable of routing between offgrid placed pins where this otherwise would be possible in Gridless Routing mode Warning Note that gridless routing requires more main memory and computing power due to additional data structures gridless priority tree to be maintained during the routing process Traces On Grid Off Grid The Traces On Grid function is used to set the trace corner cutting mode On default trace corner cutting falls on half grid points option Traces On Grid Off The Traces On Grid On option forces trace corner angles onto the routing grid o
325. le must be generated and or transferred With the Extended option there is also no need for defining and or activating an aperture table before starting the Gerber plot output Warning It is strongly recommended to check whether the PCB manufacturer supports Extended Gerber format before applying this feature It is also recommended to refrain from using the option with multi aperture fill mode activated since automatically generated aperture tables usually are not appropriate for multi aperture filling PCB Design CAD Page 4 136 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Gerber Photoplot Output The Gerber Outpul function is used to start Gerber photoplot output for a selectable plot layer Note the Multiple Layers option provided with the layer selection menu of the function This option can be used for writing the photoplot data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting the plot data output layers using the left or right mouse button The button is used to select all currently visible layers for output Use the following commands to generate a Gerber photoplot output file named demo_12 ger for signal layer 2 of the currently loaded layout using the currently loaded Gerber aperture table with standard line width 0 254mm Gerber format 2 4 and line fill mode Gerber Ph
326. les of the Bartels AutoEngineer are working with the same database and file format This file format is called Design DataBase DDB format The dab file name extension is used for indicating the DDB file type All of the design data relating to one particular design is kept in a single DDB file thus avoiding the confusion of multiple file structures This DDB file contains different element types relating to schematics PCB layout net list data library symbols parameter settings etc all of which go together to make a complete design This concept introduces most efficient data management features for creation modification backup update and redesign of both design and library files The BAE library files including SCM and layout symbols logical library entries etc are also prepared in DDB format AutoEngineer objects can be composed of sub elements from different libraries A library or design file can be build up by accessing one or more other libraries and even a particular design file can be used as library for another design Data Consistency Each element is constructed dynamically during load E g when loading a layout element to the Layout Editor first the data pertinent to the layout is read and then the referenced part elements are loaded from the same project file with each part element the referenced padstack symbols are loaded etc This dynamic load process presupposes that all required elements are available in the project file
327. lied The preferably places block capacitors either on top or on the right hand side of the integrated circuits according to the ICs orientation The Full Autoplace features a function for automatically reducing part expansion settings by 25 percent steps until either complete placement is achieved or part expansion is reduced to zero Rip up and Retry Passes The initial placement algorithms are designed to consider only connections to between already placed parts Intermediate placement results might show up with alternate positions to be more optimum for a series of previously autoplaced parts For this reason rip up and retry passes are activated for replacing already placed parts in order to find a more optimum placement Note that preplaced unfixed parts are also processed by the rip up and retry passes It is strongly recommended to fix those preplaced parts which must not be replaced Parts can be fixed using Layout Editor group functions Use the Parts Auto Placement Settings Number of Retries Number of Retries 0 9 2 function to specify the number of retry passes to be applied during the autoplacement process Two retry passes are used on default i e one rip up and retry pass is applied after placing half of the unplaced parts and one rip up and retry pass is applied at the end of the autoplacement process It is recommended to refrain from specifying too many retry passes since this not only increases CPU time requirements b
328. lied for generating the part list and for defining signal names Input Grid BAE supports arbitrary grids and also grid free input Nevertheless it is recommended to use a reasonable grid for placing the symbols to enable easy pin connections Use the following commands to set a 2mm input grid with grid lock this is intended for subsequently creating pin connections in a 1mm grid View Grids Rotation Set Input Grid 2 0 mm Grid Rotation On Library Access The Select Library function from the menu is used for selecting the SCM library from which the symbols should be loaded Use the following commands to check on how the library path is currently set Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib stdsym ddb The name of the currently selected library is indicated with the library name prompt When calling the Schematic Editor a default library path is automatically set according to the system setup see also chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description of the BSETUP utility program An empty string input to the library name query does not change the current library path setting A dash string input resets the library path setting no library selected and or input restores the default library path defined with the setup Under Windows the library file name is specified through file dialog box Use the following commands to check the library path settings Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib stdsym d
329. limits option Height Limit to selectable documentary layer keepout areas is provided with the Other Functions submenu from the Areas Layout Editor menu Height specifications are usually assigned to keepout areas on part level whilst keepout area height limits are usually specified on layout level Intersecting keepout areas with height specifications are treated like documentary distance violations Height DRC errors are indicated using a rectangle with diagonal lines Keepout areas with non zero height limits are not checked against each other and the Height Distance Violations entry for displaying the number of height design rule check violations has been added to the report generated by the Report function from the Layout Editor Utilities menu Copper Fill Net Assignments to Isolated Vias The Set Fill Net function from the Via Functions submenu of the Layout Editor Traces menu can be used to assign copper fill default nets to group selected vias The automatic copper fill functions see chapter 4 6 8 connect isolated vias with copper fill net assignments to corresponding net specific copper fill areas l e this feature can be used to force the generation of heat traps in otherwise plain net specific copper fill areas Copper fill net assignments for vias with existing physical trace or copper connections to signal nets are ignored by the automatic copper fill routines
330. list data that can subsequently be extracted with Bartels User Language or the USERLIST utility program It sets up user definable attributes associated with the physical part These fixed library attributes could be for such information as cost company part number internal stock number etc The formal syntax of the newattr command is newattr S lt attname gt lt attvalue gt where lt attname gt is a user defined attribute name and lt attvalue gt is the attribute value assigned to the attribute of the corresponding part Attribute value assignments can be shown in the BAE layout system by defining the lt attname gt text on the corresponding layout part e g on a documentary layer The newattr command optionally allows for the definition and assignment of pin specific attributes as in newattr S lt attname gt lt attvalue gt to lt pplist gt This feature can be used for specifying arbitrary pin specific attributes such as pin types or pin fanouts for electronic rule checks ERC or for generating net list interfaces to simulators such as PSpice Utilities Page 7 38 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Packager evaluates Spintype pin attribute settings to perform electrical rule checks ERC It is recommended to assign fixed ERC pin types through the logical symbol part definitions The following pin type attribute value settings are supported Output Pin Bi directional Pin Analog Pin sup Po
331. lldown user interfaces Submenus can be attached to menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program is designed to configure cascading menus for the BAE Windows Motif modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button also supports cascading menus This simplifies repeated submenu function calls significantly A series of Windows Motif dialogs are implemented such as display and general parameter settings in all BAE modules SCM plot parameters settings Autoplacement and copper fill parameter settings Autorouter routing batch setup and routing options strategy and control parameter settings and CAM Processor control plot Gerber photoplot and drilling data output parameter settings These dialogs can be activated through the bae_callmenu User Language function The UIFSETUP User Language program is designed to provide menu functions for activating the dialogs in the BAE Windows Motif modules BAE HighEnd Message System A message system is integrated to BAE HighEnd to enable advanced communication between different AutoEngineer program modules The BAE HighEnd Shell e the BAE HighEnd main menu is used as message exchange switchboard Hence the BAE Shell knows only about its own descendants i e descendant BAE tasks must be started using appropriate BAE HighEnd functions New Task from the BAE Shell N
332. logical parts referring to that requested part name This feature should be applied to force the Packager to assign different symbols to the same part whenever necessary e g for op amps with power supply relays etc Use the following commands to set the rpname attribute of the symbol k10 to k1 i e to assign the logical part named k10 to the physical part named k1 Symbols Assign Value Move to k10 240 180 Srpname el Attribute Value k1 Perform the same attribute value assignment as above value k1 for attribute Srpname also for the parts KK100 and KK101 relay contacts relc This will cause the Packager to pack these two symbols together with the relay coil K10 into a physical part named K1 The plname attribute is used for assigning non default package types to logical parts Setting the p1name attribute value for a certain logical part will cause the Packager to assign this logical part to the layout package type defined with the Splname value instead of the default package definition from the logical library Use the following commands to set plname attribute values in order to change the default standard package type assignments of the logical parts c100 c101 r104 and r105 to SMD package types Symbols Em Assign Value Move to c100 140 190 EI plname Return Assign Value Move to c101 30 80 plname Return Assign Value Move to r104 210 130 plname Return Assign Value Move to r105
333. lor table input and display grid angle and grid lock coordinate display mode standard placement angle and mirror mode standard text size library access paths plot file names standard trace widths Mincon function class airline display mode placement matrix copper fill parameters etc are automatically saved with the currently processed layout board and or SCM sheet or with the processed library hierarchy level part padstack pad SCM symbol etc When loading an element the corresponding parameter set is automatically loaded as well thus providing a convenient way of setting up a default design environment suitable for processing the selected database and or design element Element Boundary Workspace At the creation of a new element the system will prompt for the element boundary The element boundary corresponds with the workspace on a paper for manual drawing i e the element boundary defines the overall size of the data element and must not be confused with the board outline or any other artwork drawing It is utilized for preventing the system from creating or placing objects somewhere outside in hidden infinite regions i e nothing can be drawn or placed outside the workspace which otherwise would be possible because of the floating point coordinates supported by the system The element boundary can be enlarged or reduced with the Upper Right Border and Lower Left Border functions from the Settings menu Note
334. ls The BSETUP utility program can be used to define up to 100 different or 12 in BAE Professional simultaneously accessible documentary layers with individual names and characteristics according to special requirements The system allows for the definition of customer specific documentary layers for e g silk screen insertion data solder resist glue spots drill plan and drill overlap control plot markers part spacing check comments measuring etc Each documentary layer consists of the following sides to support double sided SMD design Side 1 Side 2 Both Sides Each documentary layer side is a sub layer of the corresponding documentary layer The Side 1 and Side 2 sub layers are mutually interchanged when performing mirroring The CAM Processor can optionally plot the sub layer together with and or Side 2 Documentary layer definitions have fundamental influence on what can be defined in the layout and which CAM output can be produced Documentary layer definition changes introduced by BSETUP only apply to subsequently defined library symbols to enable data exchange between different configurations lt is strongly recommended to become familiar with the features for defining documentary layers and to define documentary layers according to your specific requirements before starting with the design of real layouts or layout symbols for productive use See chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description of the BSETUP utility program and for the
335. ls AutoEngineer User Manual 3 3 Backannotation Backward annotation with the Backannotation is always required after performing layout net list modifications such as part name changes pin gate swaps or alternate part package type assignments Part names can be changed using the Netlist Part Name function from the menus for interactive part placement Interactive pin gate swaps are applied with the Pin Gatel Swap function from the manual part placement menu Automatic pin gate swap is performed with the Full Autoplacer Single Pass optimize and Multi Pass Optimizer autoplacement functions and can also be performed when using the option with the rip up router of the Autorouter module Alternate package types can be assigned using the Alternate Part submenu function during manual part placement Note that any of the net list modifications mentioned above will get lost when re editing the schematic without running the Backamnotation 3 3 1 Starting the Backannotation Backannotation is fully integrated to the Schematic Editor and can be explicitely started using the Backannotation command from the Utilities menu Automatic Backannotation Requests Processing A feature for automatically processing pending Backannotation requests is integrated to the Schematic Editor functions for loading schematic plans Backannotation requ
336. ls can be assigned to different layers on a single padstack symbol thus defining a particular layout pin type It is recommended to refrain from assigning layers to the copper areas created on pad level i e layer assignment should be disabled on pad level this is the default setting introduced by BSETUP The layer assignment can later be applied on padstack level to minimize the expenditure for adapting layout libraries to different manufacturing technologies Creating a Pad Symbol Use the following commands to create a new pad symbol named via with an element size of 171mm in DDB file demo dab File New Pad File Name demo E Element Name via Element Width mm 4 Element Height mm 1 The display now shows a square frame with a cross in the middle The frame describes the element boundaries of the pad and the cross marks the position of the element origin Defining a Copper Area Use the following commands to define a circle shaped copper area with a diameter of 0 9mm on the currently loaded pad element Areas el Add Passive Copper Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 45 Absolute Y Coordinate mm o Arc Left Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 22 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Setting the Element Boundaries The pad symbol s element boundaries should be reduced to
337. lues are explicitly set for these attributes Measuring The Layout Editor automatically activates a measuring function when placing new text with the hash character as text string This measuring function determines the distance between the two input coordinates subsequently to be specified The resulting text string is built from the corresponding distance value with length units inch or mm retrieved from the current coordinate display mode as selected with the Coordinate Display function from the Settings menu Considering CAM Output Restrictions The Layout Editor supports the definition of arbitrarily shaped areas and pads which can also be rotated at any angle All these features are supported by the intelligent CAM Processor which utilizes a series of automatic fill algorithms with multiple aperture selection and area reduction The CAM Processor automatically optimizes the use of the selected tools and aperture table definitions in order to generate all structures at highest possible precision with regard to the chosen plot parameters and output tolerance ranges The system also provides appropriate error messages and highlight to indicate objects which cannot be plotted using the selected tools and the current plot parameter settings As mentioned above the CAM Processor is able to construct arbitrary polygons When defining pads consideration should however be given to the way in which Gerber photo plot data is gen
338. m existing SCM symbols The logical library name 511name can also be used for displaying SCM symbol names on the layout The Packager automatically transfers SCM symbol pin names to the 11name pin attribute thus allowing logical pin name display in the layout through 11name text definitions on padstack level The physical library name plname is used for assigning non default layout packages and or alternative layout part package types l e selectable SCM symbols can be assigned to layout packages different from the logical library default assignment e g a so14 SMD package could be used instead of the default di114 by assigning the value so14 to the plname attribute or a choice of layout package types could be passed to the layout system through a di114 so14 Splname attribute value assignment see the descriptions of the LOGLIB utility program and the Packager for more details The Backamnotation transfers layout part package type assignments back onto Sulname Used Library Name SCM symbol attributes thus allowing for alternate layout part package type assignments display and or query on SCM plan level The requested part name rpname is used for forcing the packaging of certain SCM symbols to certain layout parts eg assignment to part Ic28 instead of the automatically generated assignment this function is required for special part definitions consisting of different SCM symbols such as relays with strip and contact
339. m of the Bartels AutoEngineer essentially consists of an interactive Schematic Editor with integrated Backannotation and the Packager program module for converting logical into physical netlists Forward Annotation The following sections of this manual describe in detail how to use Packager and Backannotationl 3 1 1 Components and Features Bartels AutoEngineer provides the Packager program module and the Backannotation function for transferring net list data between schematics and layout Figure 3 1 shows the design flow of forward and backward annotation using Packager and Backannotatiorl Editing SCM sheets with the Schematic Editor results in a logical net list The Packager collects the interconnection information from the logical net list and generates a physical net list ready for layout The forward annotation process is controlled by the logical library entries defining the assignments of SCM symbols to layout packages and the corresponding pin mappings see also the description of the LOGLIB utility program The Packager annotates the schematic with the physical pin names to replace the logical pin names and also transfers special information such as pin gate swap definitions part attribute settings power supply pinning etc Layout Net list modifications such as part name changes pin gate swaps or part package type assignments must be backward annotated to the schematics using the Back
340. m placing vias at positions where via pads would intersect with keepout areas on prohibited routing layers Use the following commands to place a keepout area on layer 3 matching the region underneath the switches s1000 through s1009 Areas Add Keep Out Area Layer 3 Move to 0 25 0 4 Move to 0 45 0 4 Move to 0 45 2 4 Move to 0 25 2 4 Done Use the following commands to start the Autorouter the currently loaded layout will automatically be saved File Autorouter Use the following commands to define routing layer 3 to be prohibited and start the Full Autoroute the Autorouter options such as routing grid trace width clearance etc have already been defined with the previous Autorouter session Options Layer Assignment Lol Select Layer Number 3 E Select Layer Type P H V A p T Select Layer Number F ES Autorouter Full Autorouter The Full Autoroutey will a find 100 routing solution with no vias placed inside the via keepout area Note also how the SMD pins of the previously defined power layer Vss see above are automatically connected using short traces with vias Use the following command to return to the Layout Editor after successfully completing the autorouting File Layout Editor PCB Design CAD Page 4 104 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 7 Area Mirror Mode The Mirror Display function from the Layout Editor Areas menu is used
341. me Move to ic10 1 2 1 8 Part Name IC10 IC1 The airlines previously connected to IC10 have been disappeared from IC1 l e the Change Part Name function not only performs a part name change but also replaces the selected part With the commands above the part named 1C10 has been replaced with the part 1C1 which is not defined in the net list Use the following commands to reset this part name change and apply the function to change the net list part name to IC1 note how the airlines connected to IC1 will appear again Parts Change Part Name Move to ic1 1 2 1 8 Part Name IC1 ic10 Netlist Part Name Move to ic10 1 2 1 8 Part Name IC 10 ict PCB Design CAD Page 4 98 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual lt is recommended to use the Change Part Name function with caution Multiple misuse of the Change Part Name function can cause short circuits on routed layouts and it might get very laborious to backtrack part name changes for design corrections The layout net list changes accomplished with the previous operations must be backannotated to the schematics and the logical net list Use the following commands to save the currently loaded layout and return to the BAE main menu File Save Element LC File Main Menu The BAE main menu is activated Use the following commands to switch to the Schematic Editor and run to transfer the physical net list named board in in demo
342. me gt Note that the subpart definition provides a link to the logical library name of the mainpart lt mainllname gt instead of a lt plname gt This feature can also be applied for providing power supply symbols The relationship between the pin names in the SCM symbol and the pin names in the physical part definition could be 1 1 l e the pin names of a resistor could be 1 and 2 and these could translate to 1 and 2 in the physical part In this case only the relationship between the names of the SCM symbol and the physical part need to be defined as in part lt llname gt lt plname gt where the semicolon is used to complete the part command In most cases however additional information is required such as pin gate swap definitions fixed part attributes power supply pins etc with must be provided with part lt commands gt as in part lt llname gt lt plname gt lt commands gt net Command The net command is used to define pins that don t appear in the symbol but need to be connected to particular signals or nets e g power supply pins The net command syntax is net lt netname gt lt pinlist gt where lt netname gt is the signal or net name to connect and lt pinlist gt is a list of the physical pins separated by commas connected to the net Each pin name containing special characters must be enclosed with quotes By preceding the net name with a dollar sign the net command allows for t
343. ment The function can be used to select parts with library names such as so16 for all unplaced 16 pin small outline package types or di1 for all unplaced dual in line package types The option can be used to deselect parts from the set of parts to be subsequently placed PCB Design CAD Page 4 64 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The ist Blocks and Block functions from the Par Se menu can be used for selecting and or deselecting parts which are defined in certain blocks of a hierarchical circuit design l e parts are selected or deselected through block names Part block names are automatically transferred and stored by the Packager utilizing the internal blkname part attribute It has already been mentioned that the Add Pari and Place Next Part functions work on the part set see section Placing Parts in chapter 4 3 2 Use the following commands to set the coordinate display mode to inch and place all parts of the currently defined part set Le the two resistors named x100 and r101 Settings Coordinate Display EI Display Inch Parts Place Next Part Move to 1 0 2 4 E Part Place Next Part H Move to 1 6 2 4 Parts Place Next Part The Place Next Pari function issues the All selected parts have been placed already message if no more part is selected for subsequent placement operations anymore i e all parts of the previously defined part set are already placed
344. ment Line Drill Plan Move to 0 0125 0 0125 E Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Move to 0 0125 0 0125 Done EI Use the following commands to set the input grid to 1 200 inch and define four small square shaped keepout areas on signal layer All Layers at the corners of the pin Grids Rotation Set Input Grid Se 1 200 Inch KO Grid Rotation On Areas Add Keep Out Area All Layers Move to 0 0250 0 0250 Move to 0 0300 0 0250 Move to 0 0300 0 0300 Move to 0 0250 0 0300 Done Copy Area Move to 0 0250 0 0250 Move to 0 0300 0 0250 1 Copy Area Move to 0 0300 0 0250 aa Move to 0 0300 0 0300 ai Copy Area Move to 0 0300 0 0300 EI Move to 0 0250 0 0300 The keepout areas created with the commands above define a special pin contact mode for padstack q1 4 to allow only orthogonal connections This restriction is considered by the Autorouter The definition of padstack symbol q1 4 is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 31 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating a Padstack Symbol for SMD Pins Use the following commands to create a padstack symbol named so with an element size of 172mm in DDB file demo ddb File New m Padstack File Name demo Element Name so Element Width
345. menu item Run User Scrip from the File menu of one of the interpreter environments Schematic Editor Layout Editor Autorouter CAM Processor CAM View or Chip Editor After activating the Run User Script function the name of the required program must be typed in on empty string or question mark input or on mouse click to the program name query a popup menu with the available User Language programs is displayed for selecting the required program with mouse pick User Language programs can also be called by keystrokes i e by pressing a standard key 0 1 9 fal BL fe or a function key F1 F2 F12 This implicit program call facility is available with the BAE function menu active i e this type of program call is possible at any time unless another interactive keyboard input currently is requested The keystroke program name is build from the currently active User Language Interpreter environment scm for Schematic Editor ged for Layout Editor ar for Autorouter cam for CAM Processor cv for CAM View ced for Chip Editor an underscore and the name of the pressed key E g the program named scm f4 is called when pressing function key F4 in the Schematic Editor cam 8 is called when pressing digit key 8 in the CAM Processor ged r is called when pressing standard key Hd in the Layout Editor ar_ is called when pressing standard key in the Autorouter The User Language Interpreter
346. microwave structure generation grid less object orientated routing with automatic placement optimization etc The BAE HighEnd Autorouter also provides features for routing problem recognition and or classification and for learning and automatically applying problem adapted routing strategies and or rules PCB Design CAD Page 4 72 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 1 Starting the Autorouter o he Autoroute function from the Layout Editor File menu is used to start the Autorouter After activating this function the system automatically saves the currently loaded layout and the Autorouter program module starts The Autorouter automatically re loads any previously loaded layout The layout requires a board outline definition to be defined with the Add Board Outline function from the Layout Editor Areas menu and a valid via assignment list use function Select Via from the Layout Editor Parts menu Before starting any autorouter procedure all net list parts must be placed with correct package types inside the board outline no part or pin neither any pre routed trace or via can be placed outside the board outline The following error messages might be issued when activating an Autorouter procedure Board outline not defined Cause PCB board outline definition is missing Fix Layout Editor CI Default via not defined Cause no via assignment Fix Layout Editor Pars
347. mirroring for placing SMDs on solder side Use the following commands to place the next part Parts Add Part Part Name Mirror On Move to 1 8 1 4 An empty string input i e just pressing the return key J to the part name query causes the function to load the next unplaced net list part In the example above the system automatically loads the SMD capacitor named c100 which then is placed on solder side The facility for loading the next net list part without knowing the corresponding part name can also be activated with the function Use this command to place the part named e101 as in Parts Place Next Part Mirror On Move to 1 4 1 4 PCB Design CAD Page 4 51 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to place the relay part named k1 the resistor parts named r100 r101 r102 r103 r104 r105 and the switch named s1000 Parts Place Next Part Move to 0 8 0 8 Place Next Part LC Move to 1 0 2 4 Place Next Part Move to 1 6 2 4 m Place Next Part Cl Rotate Left Move to 1 6 1 2 Place Next Part Rotate Left Move to 1 4 1 2 Place Next Part Move to 2 1 2 1 I Place Next Part Move to 2 1 1 8 Place Next Part Rotate Right Move to 0 2 2 3 The Set Default Angle function can be utilized for subsequently placing a series of parts at certain rotation angles and or mirror modes e g SMD parts Use the following commands to set t
348. mouse button or you can select any other function from the still active Parts menu If you e g want to change to the Add Trace function just choose the Traces main menu item and select the Add Trace function from the Traces menu After selecting a particular function either another menu is displayed or the user is prompted for keyboard input via the input line or graphic input via the graphic cursor is expected in the graphic workarea Any messages displayed in the status line are displayed as long as they are relevant Input prompts e g for coordinate and or length width inputs and error messages contain the name of the processed element if available Graphic cursor inputs are accompanied by a status line message indicating the expected type of input The color of the menu cursor changes to red to designate that the BAE system is waiting for some user input The middle mouse button provides instant access to the menu Le pressing the middle mouse button is possible at any time and from any other function and provides fast access to frequently required display functions such as zoom and pan changing color setups setting the input and or display grid etc Pressing the middle mouse button will also cause a status line display of the current file and element name if no other menu function is currently active The middle mouse button interaction can also be simulated by simultaneously
349. move menu cursor to a function of the currently active function menu hitting the mouse button select an object to be manipulated using the graphic cursor move an element to a certain position in the graphic workarea select an element to be manipulated or a function to be executed by pressing the mouse button Confirm confirm the execution of a function verified by user query Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The following acronyms are used throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer documentation BAE acronym for identifying the Bartels AutoEngineer EDA software BAEICD acronym for the Bartels AutoEngineer IC ASIC design system optionally included with workstation based BAE configurations SCM acronym for the Schematic Editor program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer circuit design system acronym for the graphical PCB Layout Editor program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system acronym for the Autoplacement program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system acronym for the Autorouter program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system NAR acronym for the advanced Neural Autorouter program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system CAM acronym for the CAM Processor program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system CV acronym for the CAM View program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system CED acronym for the Chip Editor program module of the Bar
350. mple illustrates the use of mainpart and subpart for assigning different SCM symbols relay part with two contacts and one coil to the same package loglib Relays part part rel2 mainpart dilrel clat abp to 77 or es swap 1 7 8 14 part rel2sub subpart rel2 slat pm to 276 end Utilities Page 7 44 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The following example shows the definition of part buspart with busses b1 and b2 including the bus signals O 1 2 and 3 the corresponding SCM symbol must have pins b1 and b2 defined for connecting and tapping the bus loglib Bus part definition part buspart sot8 bus 4bl b2 Eelere to AA lat Po BP EA Pb EI to Sp lo Mia end The following example illustrates how to define a virtual part for hierarchical circuit design This applies for the assignment of SCM symbol dff to SCM block aff with pin names s r q and q referring to the module ports defined on the corresponding SCM hierarchy block element sheet loglib EE eelere part dff virtual PITS er ie calil di Es end Utilities Page 7 45 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The following example shows a synthetically generated symbol definition The delay SCM symbol consists of four internally connected 741s04 inverters loglib Synthetically generated Inverter Delay Circuit part delay virtual pin Gm Out architecture part 741s04 a in
351. n CAE Page 2 51 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 4 3 Plug Pin Assignment With the operations above we have defined the complete logical circuitry of our project on sheet 1 of the schematic drawing What still is missing is the plug pin assignment which we can define on a second schematic sheet of the project file Use the following commands to create a second sheet named sheet2 in job file demo ddb and place the text string Plug Pin Assignment also place the x subd9b plug symbol and assign value xsubd9b1 to the plname attribute of that symbol File Cl New Cl Sheet m9 A4 Landscape Text Add Text cc Ta Plug Pin Assignment Place Symbols Add Symbol S sd E CA H Assign Value lg MovetoSymbel D plname You now should connect the signals Vss Vdd and the bus signals OUT 0 3 of BUS to the plug symbol see figure 2 9 for pin assignments Figure 2 9 SCM Sheet Demo Sheet2 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 52 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 4 4 Net Attributes Bartels AutoEngineer supports net specific attributes for controlling the Autorouter such as trace width minimum distance net routing priority and power supply routing width Place both the label NET and the symbol att rw net attribute ROUTWIDTH as shown in figure 2 9 connect the pins of the NET label and the att rw symbol with each other and assign a value of 0 5 to the Sval attribute of the att rw symb
352. n all sheets no matter what hierarchy level the net name is defined on When using a global net name in a sub block all matching nets from multiple referenced sub blocks are connected as well Hierarchical 1AAduF G sub Block SCM Figure 2 10 Hierarchical Circuit Design Sub Block SCM Sheet BLOCK The parameter setting also provides the option for block diagramming support Whilst there are multiple references to a standard Sub Block allowed a Single Sub Block sheet can only be referenced once Single sub blocks are treated like normal SCM sheets by Packager and Backamnotation Le the Packager transfers symbol part names from single sub blocks without Pn prefices to the layout and Backannotation transfers part name changes and pin gate swaps on single sub blocks back to the schematics Circuit Design CAE Page 2 60 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 6 2 Sub block Reference Symbol and Logical Sub block Reference A special SCM symbol is required for referencing any sub block on higher hierarchy levels The pin names of that symbol must match the names of the module ports defined on the corresponding sub block circuit drawing The Packager needs a logical reference for any sub block reference symbol used throughout the schematics This logical reference must be created in the Logical Library by defining a logical librar
353. n critical environment test software installation test jobs backup of real jobs etc until confidence in the rule is established for unrestricted use on real designs Utilities Page 7 51 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 15 ULC User Language Compiler Name ulc Bartels User Language Compiler Synopsis ulc wcon wcoff S ource srcfile lib Tabname l kali libname cp cl dstname I nclude includepath D efine macroid soo ee ro E ee old 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 ld listingdirectory name dp prgname Ko ibmame ulp prgfilename ull libfilename log logfilename Description The Bartels User Language Compiler ULC translates User Language source code into User Language machine programs and or User Language libraries User Language machine programs can be executed by the User Language Interpreter User Language libraries usually are generated from frequently used source code User Language library machine code can be linked to other User Language machine code programs or libraries Library linking can be done either statically at compile time by the User Language Compiler or dynamically at runtime by the User Language Interpreter As an advantage of the User Language library concept frequently used source code needs to be compiled just once and can subsequently be referenced through linking which is much faster than compiling Utilities Page 7 52 Bartels AutoEngine
354. n menu with a series of additional functions and features File View Control Plot Gerber Photoplot Drilling Insertion Settings Utilities Help PCB Design CAD Page 4 119 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 4 In built CAM Processor System Features Automatic Parameter Backup The CAM Processor provides an in built feature for automatically saving important operational and plot parameters with the currently processed layout and or part symbol The following parameters are stored to the current design file when changing to the BAE main menu or to the Layout Editor e CAM parameter backup can only be suppressed when exiting BAE Name of the currently loaded Layout Color Table Input Grid Display Grid Coordinate Display Mode Wide Line Draw Start Width Output Mode Board Outline Output Mode All Signal Layers Output Mode Plot Marker Layer Plot CAM Accuracy Symbol Tolerance Plot CAM Origin Coordinate Plot CAM Rotation Mode Plot CAM Mirroring Mode Power Layer Heat Trap Minimum Distance Power Layer Isolation Minimum Distance Power Layer Heat Trap Range Tolerance Power Layer Isolation Range Tolerance Power Layer Border Width Power Layer Isolation Drawing Width Control Plot Output File Name Device Control Plot Scaling Factor HP GL Plot Pen Width Standard Line Width HP GL Plot Speed HP GL Plot Filling Mode Gerber Output File Name Device Gerber Aperture Table Name Gerber Format Plotter Units Gerber Standard
355. n mirror mode selections A black on white plot is generated for single output layer selections With Multiple Layers plot output the selected layers are plotted with their currently assigned colors and mixed color display on black background PCB Design CAD Page 4 131 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 12 Gerber Photoplot Aperture tables are required for Gerber photoplot outputs The Gerber Photoplof menu of the CAM Processor provides functions for the definition and administration of Gerber aperture tables Aperture tables are stored to the cam dat system file in the BAE programs directory When installing new BAE software versions you should take care not to overwrite cam dat either use update install mode or make a backup of the cam dat system file before installing the BAE software see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for more details Gerber Construction Techniques It is important to make the Gerber aperture tables as efficient as possible to minimize the Gerber photoplot data The reason for this is that an unnecessarily large Gerber file takes up more media space takes longer to transfer by modem and takes longer to copy If the plot is produced by a vector plotter it will also take longer to produce and cost more To make the Gerber data more efficient it is important to take into consideration the way the photoplotter plots pads and tracking The ph
356. n small outline package with an element size of 0 5 0 4 inch in DDB file demo ddb File New Part File Name demo Element Name so14 Element Width mmm 0 5 Element Height mmm 0 4 EJ Use the following commands to define the pins 1 through 7 by loading and placing the so padstack symbol which was created in chapter 4 2 2 Parts Add Part Part Name 1 Library Element Name so Move to 0 10 0 10 Add Part Library Element Name Move to 0 15 0 10 Add Part Part Name 38 Library Element Name Move to 0 20 0 10 Add Part Part Name 4 Patt Name Library Element Name Move to 0 25 0 10 Add Part Part Name 5 Library Element Name Move to 0 30 0 10 Add Part EE EE e Library Element Name Move to 0 35 0 10 Add Part Part Name 7 Library Element Name Move to 0 40 0 10 PCB Design CAD Page 4 38 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to define the pins 8 through 14 by loading and placing the so padstack symbol Parts Add Part Part Name 8 Library Element Name so Move to 0 40 0 30 Add Part Ao Library Element Name Move to 0 35 0 30 Add Part Library Element Name Move to 0 30 0 30 Add Part m Part Name 11 Library Element Name Move to 0 25 0 30 Add Part Part Name 12 Library Element Name Move to 0 20 0 30 Add Part
357. n view management feature Bartels User Language also provides system functions for performing key programming changing menu assignments and defining toolbars These powerful features can be applied for user interface modifications Please note that a large number of additional functions included with the Autorouter menu are implemented through the User Language programs delivered with the BAE software See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language chapter 4 2 lists all User Language programs provided with the BAE software Neural Rule System A series of advanced Bartels AutoEngineer features affecting Autorouter behaviour and procedures are implemented through the Neural Rule System See chapter 6 3 2 for the rule system applications provided with the PCB layout system PCB Design CAD Page 4 77 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 5 Autorouter Options The Options menu is used to define the design rules and technology requirements to be considered by the Autorouter Option parameters can only be set before starting the Autorouting process unless otherwise mentioned On Autorouter security copies the current option parameter settings are stored to the currently processed job file Le Autorouter options need not be redefined on subsequent Autorouter calls unless parameter changes are really required for the layout to be automatically routed Routing Grid S
358. nable hatching width and hatching clearance Hatching is accomplished through trace segments generation The width of the produced trace segments can be set with the Hatching Width function default 0 3mm whilst the spacing between produced trace segments can be set with the Hatching Spacing function default 1 20 inch The Hatching Model function is used to designate the hatching type The default Une Hatching option generates hatch areas with diagonal trace segments The Grid Hatching option generates hatch areas with crosswise intersecting diagonal trace segments The hatching process is activated by calling the Hatch Copper Areal function and selecting the copper area to be hatched Use the following commands to set the coordinate display mode to inch and transform the circle shaped copper area on signal layer 2 of the layout to a line hatched area with a hatching distance of 1mm Settings Coordinate Display Display Inch Areas Copper Fill Hatching Distance Hatching Line Spacing 1 27mm 1 Hatch Copper Area Move to Passive Copper Area Signal Layer 2 0 8 1 8 Use the following commands to set the hatching width to 0 2mm and transform the active copper area signal vdd on signal layer 1 of the layout into a cross hatched area Areas Copper Fill Hatching Width Hatching Line Width 0 30mm 0 2 Hatching Mode Grid Hatching
359. nction from the Miew menu At overlaps of different elements the resulting mixed color is displayed The highlight color is also mixed with the color of the element to be marked thus resulting in a brighter display of that element The Save Colors function from the Nie menu is used to saved the current color table definition to a system file whichever appropriate for the current program module Once a color table has been saved it can be reloaded at any time using the Load Colors function from either the View menu Special color tables e g for library edit for finding unroutes etc can be defined and reloaded on request The default color table to be loaded after the startup of a particular BAE program module is the one named standard Changing some item specific color is accomplished by selecting the desired display item using the left mouse button and then selecting the desired color button from the Change Colors function In the layout system Change Colors provides a feature for fast display item fade out fade in Activating and or deactivating some item specific display is accomplished by selecting the desired display item entry with the right mouse button which works as a toggle between fade out and fade in The system won t loose information on currently defined colors of faded out display items strike through color buttons are used for notifying currently faded out displ
360. nction is only furnished for correct Gerber data processing The Mirror Mode function from the Settings menu is used for optionally mirroring the input data set s to be subsequently loaded The mirror modes provided with the Mirror Model function are Mirroring Off default Mirror at X Axis Mirror at Y Axis and Mirror at Origin respectively Note that input data mirroring is always done before any input data offset specification applies The function from the menu is used to specify whether Gerber coordinate specifications are to be interpreted with trailing and or leading zeros suppressed On default the Trailing Zeros mode for expecting trailing zeros and suppressing leading zeros is used The Leading Zeros mode for suppressing trailing zeros and expecting leading zeros is only valid with Gerber Format 2 3 and Gerber Format 2 4 i e any other Gerber format specification defaults to the Trailing Zeros mode The function can be used for optionally generating RS 274 X format Gerber output Extended Gerber with Embedded Apertures On input RS 274 X Gerber format is automatically recognized by CAM View The function can be used for optionally generating optimized Gerber output with redundant D01 light off plotter control commands eliminated thus significantly reducing the amount of Gerber output plot d
361. neer User Manual Net list design con in MARCONI format LAYOUT board PARTS MARCONI END oul c2 Fil ed c2 ci EE c2 cap50 capis res 2 tebe jell 3 eed El 2 ri 2 net cl 1 gnd rl 1 vee The net lists above can be transferred to BAE by applying the CONCONV program as in the command gt conconv design laylib which causes CONCONV to read the ASCII net list design con check the part list entries against the layout library definitions in laylib dab and store the net list named board to the job file design ddb After successful processing the Layout Editor can be started a layout named board same name as net list for correct connectivity access can be createdw and the net list parts can be loaded and placed using the Parts menu For pin assignment correctness the same layout library as specified with the CONCONV call must be used for loading the parts apply the Select Library See also NETCONV Diagnosis The error messages issued by CONCONV are intended to be self explanatory Warnings function from the Place Next Part function from the Settings menu to select the correct library file Input file identifiers for part names pin names or net names containing special characters must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes Utilities Page 7 23 Bartels Aut
362. new traces and for modifying or deleting existing traces and or trace segments PCB Design CAD Page 4 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Areas The Areas menu is used for defining the board outline for generating copper areas and power planes and for creating documentary lines and or documentary areas Existing areas can be moved rotated mirrored copied and deleted The Areas menu also provides the copper fill functions for defining copper fill workareas for automatic copper fill area generation and or elimination and for hatched copper area creation Text Drill The teg Drill menu is used for creating moving changing and deleting texts on any layout hierarchy level On padstack level the Text Drill menu provides additional functions for defining drill holes Groups The Groups menu provides functions for selecting elements to group for moving rotating mirroring scaling copying deleting fixing releasing saving and loading groups and for replacing symbols in a group Parameter The Paramete menu provides functions for selecting the layout library setting the origin and the element boundaries of the currently loaded element defining power layers selecting the mincon function for the airline display setting the spacing design rule parameters and activating the automatic design data backup feature Utilities The menu provides functions for exiting BAE returni
363. nfo management Cascading Windows Motif Pulldown Menus The Windows and Motif pulldown menu user interfaces of the CAM Processor provide facilities for cascading submenu definitions Le submenus can be attached to other menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program configures cascading submenus for the pulldown menu interfaces of the Windows Motif CAM Processor modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button supports cascading menus to simplify repeated submenu function calls Windows Motif Parameter Setup Dialogs The following Windows Motif parameter setup dialogs are implemented for the CAM Processor Settings Settings General CAM Plot Parameters View Setting Display Parameters Control Plot Settings Control Plot Parameters Gerber Photoplol Settings Gerber Photoplot Parameters Drilling Insertion Setting Drilling Data Output Parameters The UIFSETUP User Language program replaces the parameter setup functions of the Windows and Motif pulldown menus with the above menu functions for activating the corresponding parameter setup dialogs Windows Motif Pulldown Menu Konfiguration When using pulldown menus under Windows and Motif the UIFSETUP User Language program configures the following modified CAM Processor mai
364. ng the system provides a highlight on all objects of the currently routed signal After completing the routing of a certain connection the corresponding airline is removed from the display Short circuits and distance violations introduced by manual routing are immediately indicated by the Online DRC using highlight and or distance error boxes If you fail to connect certain off grid pins with the current input grid settings then you should use the functions for selecting a smaller input grid or even release the grid lock The middle mouse button can be used to activate the menu at any time during manual routing l e important display options such as zoom scale grids colors etc can be changed without cancelling the currently active trace edit function The View menu also provides the Set Edit Layer function for selecting the pick preference layer The pick preference layer is used to resolve ambiguities at the selection of trace elements placed at the same position but on different layers The pick preference layer is also the default routing layer when starting to route from a drilled All Layer pad or from a copper free position On default the pick preference layer is set to signal layer 1 solder side The algorithm for picking trace corners and trace segments picks the trace element with minimum distance from the pick point if more than one possible pick element is within snapping distance This allows for reliable selection of tra
365. ng parameter set is automatically loaded and or activated thus providing a convenient way of activating a default parameter set suitable for processing the selected design Graphical Output and Status Displays The current routing result is displayed graphically and through statistical readouts whilst routing is in progress Graphic output and statistical readout during routing can be deactivated by pressing key fj The Router working Press d to activate display message is displayed whilst router graphic output is deactivated Pressing the d key again reactivates the graphic output and the statistical readout The routing process accelerates by up to 10 percent if graphic output is deactivated A screen redraw is automatically performed after the routing process has finished The number of currently routed connections compared to the total connection count and the global via count are continuously reported in the status line whilst during Autorouting processes Additionally a routing pass info window for displaying internal routing procedure information is provided on the right side of the Autorouter user interface This info window contains a status line for identifying the currently active router pass type L Load Layout s SMD Via Preplacement Pass I Initial Routing Pass R Rip Up Pass P Optimizer Pattern Search Pass o Optimizer Pass and the number n of processed elements in relation to the total number m of elements to be proces
366. ng the left mouse button in the graphic workarea activates a context sensitive menu with specific functions for the object at the current mouse position if no other menu function is currently active The Load Element and or Create New Element file management functions are provided if no element is currently loaded This feature is implemented through an automated call to the SCM MS User Language program Cascading Windows Motif Pulldown Menus The Windows and Motif pulldown menu user interfaces of the Schematic Editor provide facilities for cascading submenu definitions Le submenus can be attached to other menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program configures cascading submenus for the pulldown menu interfaces of the Windows Motif Schematic Editor modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button supports cascading menus to simplify repeated submenu function calls Windows Motif Parameter Setup Dialogs The following Windows Motif parameter setup dialogs are implemented for the Schematic Editor e Settings Setting General Schematic Editor Parameters e View Settings Display Parameters e PlotOutpul Settings SCM Plot Parameters The UIFSETUP User Language program replaces the parameter setup functions of the Windows and Motif pulldown menus with the
367. ng to the BAE main shell calling the Autorouter or the CAM Processor starting the batch design rule check generating net list data from current copper Back Netlist defining area mirror visibility and starting User Language programs PCB Design CAD Page 4 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 14 Customized Layout Editor User Interface Menu Assignments and Key Bindings The BAE software comes with User Language programs for activating a modified Layout Editor user interface with many additional functions startups toolbars menu assignments key bindings etc The BAE ST User Language program is automatically started when entering the Layout Editor BAE ST calls the UIFSETUP User Language program which activates predefined Layout Editor menu assignments and key bindings Menu assignments and key bindings can be changed by modifiying and re compiling the UIFSETUP source code The HLPKEYS User Language program is used to list the current key bindings With the predefined menu assignments of UIFSETUP activated HLPKEYS can be called from the Key Bindings function of the Help menu Menu assignments and key bindings can be listed with the UIFDUMP User Language program The UIFRESET User Language program can be used to reset all currently defined menu assignments and key bindings UIFSETUP UIFDUMP and UIFRESET can also be called from the menu of the KEYPROG User Language program which provides additional facilities for online k
368. nition Query The Schematic Editor Symbols menu provides a function named Show Symbol Logic for displaying logical library part definitions of selectable symbols of the currently loaded SCM sheet Show Symbol Logic decodes and displays the internal logical library part definition stored with the LOGLIB The logical library definition display header provides information on whether the LOGLIB definition was found in the current job file Project or in the default layout library Library The current job file is searched with higher priority The default layout library file name is specified with the LAYDEFLIBRARY command of the BSETUP utility program see also chapter 7 2 The Show Symbol Logic function issues an error message such as File not found on errors accessing the default library An error message such as Symbol logic data symbolname not found is issued if the requested logical library definition is neither available in the job file nor in the default library Packager Backannotation Page 3 11 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Successful Packager Pass Restart the Packager through the BAE main menu and use the following commands to call the Packager for transferring the logical net list in demo ddb to a physical net list named board using library demolib ddb Settings Em All Parameters ED U esignLibrary Name domolibE aaa AA board Start The Packag
369. nly thus ensuring correct spacing between diagonal trace segments and pad corners Figure 4 6 illustrates the effects of off grid and on grid trace corner cutting Routing Traces Ongrid Routing Traces Offgrid Trace no Distance Violation Distance Violation SSeS ate po PA NAE ER X Routing Grid Pad Routing Grid Pad Figure 4 6 Routing Traces Ongrid Offgrid Pin Contact Mode The Pin Contact Model function is used to allow option Use Pin Corners default or avoid option Lock Pin Corners pin corner routing This feature works on approximately rectangle shaped pads and controls whether traces can exit such pads at 45 degree angles or not Routing with pin corner obstruction can produce better looking layouts but could also impede 100 routing Note that connecting pins with a size approximately equal to or smaller than the trace width could fail The Lock Pin Corners option should not be used with designs that include thick traces Note also that bus routing can produce unpredictable results when switched to pin corner obstruction PCB Design CAD Page 4 81 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 6 Autorouter Control The Control menu provides a series of functions for controlling the routing process Optimizer Passes The function is used to set the number of Optimizer routing passes to be automatically activated by the Autorouter function
370. note that suitable menu colors might achieve considerable ergonomic advantages such as better recognition of the currently active menu and or function See chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description of the BSETUP utility program Introduction Page 1 13 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Customizing the BAE User Interface Bartels User Language provides system functions for performing key programming and defining menu assignments and or toolbars It is possible to define key bindings such as key RH for activating User Language program ROTATE New or existing menus and or menu entries can be re configured to support special User Language program calls These features provide a most powerful tool for configuring the menus of the AutoEngineer modules It is a good idea to utilize the User Language startup programs for performing automatic key binding and menu setup Even dynamic changes to the AutoEngineer user interface can be supported with special User Language programs for performing online key and menu programming Note that due to these features your currently configured AutoEngineer user interface might provide special user specific add on functions which are not described in this documentation See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language and its implicit program call features Facilities for cascading submenu definitions are implemented for the BAE Windows and Motif pu
371. nput to the program name query activates a User Language program selection menu User Language programs can also be called by simply pressing special keys of the keyboard This method of implicit User Language program call is supported at any time unless another interactive keyboard input request is currently pending The name of the User Language program to be called is automatically derived from the pressed key i e pressing a standard and or function key triggers the activation of a User Language program with a corresponding name such as ged 1 for digit key f ged r for standard key Kl ged_ for standard key ged_f1 for function key F1 ged f2 for function key F2 etc The Layout Editor User Language Interpreter environment also features event driven User Language program calls where User Language programs with predefined names are automatically started at certain events and or operations such as GED_ST at Layout Editor module startup GED_LOAD after loading a design element GED_SAVE before saving a design element GED TOOL when selecting a toolbar item and GED ZOOM when changing the zoom factor The module startup User Language program call method is most useful for automatic system parameter setup as well as for key programming and menu assignments The element save and load program call methods can be used to save and restore element specific parameters such as the zoom area color setup e
372. ns on the selected alternate package type do not match the net list i e if net list pins are missing on the selected macro Alternate part package type assignments create a backannotation request which triggers automatic Backannotation when loading SCM plans to the Schematic Editor see chapter 2 7 Backannotation requests also prevent the Packager from forward annotation without confirmation see chapter 3 2 3 Mincon Function Airlines Display Unrouted net list connections are displayed as airlines During part placement the Mincon function performs dynamic real time recalculation of these airlines to display minimum length airline sets l e the Mincon function is a most useful utility for achieving an optimum manual placement Use the following commands to test different airline calculation methods supported through the Mincor function and note how the function type affects the way airlines are displayed Settings Mincon Function Corners Horizontal H Mincon Function Pins Vertical H Mincon Function Mincon Off DOU Mincon Function Corners H V Sum m The Airlines Display function from the Parts menu is used to set the airline display mode to be applied during part movement No Airlines switches off the airlines display during part movement Static Airlines does not recalculate the nearest connection points during part movement Dynamic Airlines dynamically recalculates the closest connection points
373. nt variants of a layout including facilities for choosing components with controlled case selection and part value assignment This however is just one example from the wide range of possible database applications utilizing database systems could be worthwhile also in the fields of project and version management address list maintenance production planning and inventory control supplier and customer registers management etc See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of Bartels User Language and its integrated SQL functions Introduction Page 1 21 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 3 2 SCM Database Hierarchy Figure 1 4 shows the structure of the database hierarchy supported throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer SCM system The SCM sheet level is the top hierarchy level of the BAE SCM design system database On SCM sheet level the circuit diagram of a particular design is defined by generating SCM sheets placing symbols and creating connections and busses Labels bus taps and module ports can be placed for defining signal names and for connecting different sheets Graphic and text can be created for documentation purposes such as creating SCM sheet frames including commentary text etc Part and net attribute values can be assigned for setting variable component properties and or for controlling subsequent design processes such as Autorouting or CAM data output On SCM symbol level the schematic part sym
374. ntions used throughout this documentation Organization of this Documentation Chapter 1 describes the Bartels AutoEngineer system architecture provides general operating instructions and introduces the design database Chapter 2 describes in detail how to use the Schematic Editor for creating SCM library symbols and designing circuits Chapter 3 describes how to use the Packager program module and the Backannotation function for performing forward and backward annotation of net list data Chapter 4 describes in detail how to use the Layout Editor the Autoplacement functions and the Autorouter for creating layout library symbols and designing PCB layouts and how to use the CAM Processor and CAM View modules for creating and processing CAM output and manufacturing data for the PCB production Chapter 5 describes how to use the Chip Editor the Cell Placer and the Cell Router for the interactive and or automatic design of IC mask layouts Chapter 6 describes the Bartels Neural Rule System Le how to define neural rules with the Bartels Rule Specification Language how to compile rule specification source files using the Bartels Rule System Compiler and how to apply neural rules throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer design process Chapter 7 describes the utility programs of the Bartels AutoEngineer software Hi Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Related Documentation The Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide des
375. ntrol Parameters Autorouting Control Parameters Autorouter Strategy Autorouting Strategy Parameters Autorouter Batch Setup Autorouting Batch Setup The UIFSETUP User Language program replaces the parameter setup functions of the Windows and Motif pulldown menus with the above menu functions for activating the corresponding parameter setup dialogs When using pulldown menus under Windows and Motif the UIFSETUP User Language program configures the following modified Autorouter main menu with a series of additional functions and features File Edit View Preplacement Autorouter Settings Utilities Help PCB Design CAD Page 4 75 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 54 In built Autorouter System Features Automatic Parameter Backup The Autorouter provides an in built feature for automatically saving important design and operational parameters with the currently processed SCM sheet and or SCM library hierarchy level The following parameters are stored to the current design file when activating the Save Element function Autosave Time Interval Name of the currently loaded Layout Color Table Input Grid Display Grid Grid Angle Lock Coordinate Display Mode Wide Line Draw Start Width Part Airline Display Mode Library File Name Mincon Function Type Parameter sets are stored using the current layout element name When loading a layout the correspondi
376. o be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 17 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 4 BLDRING IC Design Name bldring Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design Build Ring Utility Synopsis bldring ringdescriptionfile Description The BLDRING utility program automatically creates a chip layout template from a description file This file contains informationen about the cells used and sections for placing an outer rectangular ring with bonding pad cells and other arbitrary cell placements Only the placement sequence of the bonding pad cells must be specified for each ring side The actual bonding pad cell placement coordinates are automatically calculated from the cell macro descriptions and the ring dimensions Ring sections which are not occupied by bonding pads are automatically filled with metal structures for carrying two power supply signals through Fixed cell placement coordinate specifications can be relative to the ring outline thus allowing for pre defined structures to be used on chip layouts with different dimensions BLDRING expects the ring description file ringdescriptionfile as argument this file must have the extension rig however this file name extension should be omitted in the command line The name of the output project file and the element name of the chip layout to be created are specified in the ring description file Input File Format Start Data End Data Comments The setup file format must start with the keywo
377. o be simultaneously routed by the Autorouter The signal layer count can range from 2 to 12 The default signal layer count for a particular layout corresponds with the top layer setting of that layout The Layer Assignment function is used to set the preferred routing direction horizontal vertical or all directions for each routing layer With the Layer Assignment function it is also possible to define trace keepout layers e layers where routing is prohibited or to remove layers from the routing layer list which will decrement the signal layer count The default layer assignments are horizontal for layer 1 vertical for layer 2 horizontal for layer 3 vertical for layer 4 etc Changing the routing layer count with function Signal Layer Coun resets the layer assignments Routing layer numbering starts with signal layer 1 solder side The Autorouter simultaneously routes all routing layers Single layer boards can be routed with routing layer count 2 and routing layer 1 defined as prohibited layer All objects placed on prohibited layers are considered by the Autorouter l e via keepout areas on a double sided layout can be defined by placing keepout areas on signal layer 3 of the layout setting the routing layer count to 3 and defining routing layer 3 to be prohibited The Autorouter would then use signal layers 1 and 2 for routing the traces and refrain from placing vias at positions where via p
378. o pin or corner to corner minimization where also the unroute components to be calculated can be selected horizontal only vertical only horizontal vertical sum etc BAE HighEnd utilizes modified data structures for internal connectivity representation and airline calculations The BAE HighEnd Mincon functions run at much higher performance compared to BAE Professional however at the cost of higher memory requirements Design Rule Check The BAE design rule check utilizes full copper sharing features to perform real time recognition of open connections short circuits and distance violations Open connections unroutes are displayed as airlines short circuits are indicated with highlight and distance violations are enclosed by a rectangle The corresponding colors for displaying Airlines Highlight and Errors can be selected with the Change Colors function from the View menu Only modified items are checked real time by the incremental online design rule check thus saving a lot of computing time As board parameters could have changed until post processing it is recommended to use the Batch DRC function from the Utilities menu for a final batch design rule check with the current layout parameter settings before releasing the board The incremental connectivity however does not have parameters and thus is always correct The function from t
379. o the drilling class prompt selects those drill holes for output which are not assigned to any specific drill class Sieb amp Meier The Drill Output and Tool Table Output functions from the Drilingsinsertion menu are used for generating drilling data and drilling tool table output in Sieb amp Meier format The Drill Data Device and Tool Table Device functions can be used to specify default names for the Sieb amp Meier output files The Tool Range function is used to define the tolerance for selecting drill tools The default value for the drill tolerance is 0 10mm The tool table file to be generated with the function provides a listing of all drill diameters used for output with a drill tool number assigned to each drill diameter Up to 99 different drill diameters can be processed The output function aborts with the Too many drill diameters defined error message if more than 99 different drill diameters are defined on the current layout With Sieb amp Meier format each drill hole is listed in a single line providing drill coordinates in 1 100mm integer units With each drill diameter change the appropriate drill tool number is appended to the end of the corresponding drill data line thus representing a command for selecting and or changing the drill tool With the Drill Output function the drill class must be specified thus providing a feature for selecting different types of drill holes for
380. oEngineer User Manual 7 6 COPYDDB Name copyddb Copy Design Database Utility Synopsis copyddb srcfile dstfile ms md mr eekleg eeler SE leen sect ret Eelere rule recover pattern Description The COPYDDB utility program copies selected database class entries and all their references from one DDB Design DataBase file to another COPYDDB can be used as a batch mode driven tool for merging libraries or updating job design files COPYDDB accepts two filenames as arguments srcfile and dstfile are the names of the DDB source file and the DDB destination file these files must be available with extension ddb unless file name extensions are explicitly included with the file name specifications COPYDDB copies elements from the source file to the destination file The merge switch is used to control whether existing destination file entries should be replaced overwritten source file is master or not destination file is master or whether only existing destination file elements should be overwritten replace COPYDDB optionally accepts a key pattern string as argument The pattern denotes the name s of the elements to be copied Wildcards are allowed with the pattern specification All elements of the selected class are copied if no pattern is specified The object class of the element s to be copied is selected with the class switch Utilities Page 7 24 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Options Merge Swit
381. ocessed Contact areas attached to open connections consisting of more than one segment however are displayed with error highlight and the Report function from the Utilities menu counts such an open connection as drawing error If you have problems connecting certain pins at the current input grid settings then you should use the Display functions for selecting a smaller input grid or even release the grid lock Use the following commands to select 1mm input grids for subsequent pin connection interactions View Grids Rotation Set Input Grid 1 0 mm Grid Rotation On View Display The middle mouse button can be used to activate the View menu at any time during symbol placement and or the drawing of geometry and connections Particularly the zoom functions are very helpful at the generation of connections The following example shows how to zoom to a certain window Zoom Window Move to Window Start Point Move to Window End Point The following commands can be used to restore the full view display Zoom All Circuit Design CAE Page 2 40 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Creating Connections The first connection to be created should connect part s1000 with part Ic10 Use the following commands to zoom to the workspace around these two symbols Zoom Window m Move to Window Start Point 40 80 Move to Window End Point 110 170 Use the following commands to connect pin 1 of part s1000 with pin A of pa
382. oduction Page 1 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 1 4 BAE Data Types and Application Concepts The BAE system is comfortable to use with simple instructions aided by convenient user control over menu and mouse The menus and manuals are available in different languages German English etc The standard BAE user interface is the same on all hardware platforms With the BAE windows versions the user can optionally use the windows like BAE user interface with pull down menus It is easy to learn how to work with the system since the functions for creating and modifying objects are quite similar for all object types of the different library hierarchy levels The BAE software also provides most powerful tools for customizing the BAE user interface with menu assignments and online key binding for calling user defined functions The floating point database used throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer has many advantages Firstly it means that there are virtually no grid limits to designs Any pad shape component shape track width board size or shape copper area size or shape etc can easily be generated Secondly it means that online design rule checking DRC of copper and track clearances and void areas run at all time during layout providing instant indication of errors Floating point calculation also means that all geometry is stored extremely accurately The system can either accept metric or imperial numeric input which is automatically conver
383. oek nananana iaado EE eg De Ene aa 1 7 1 1 4 BAE Data Types and Application Concepts esse esse ese EER ERA KERE ER EE RR Re AR EE RR Re AA 1 8 1 1 5 Exchanging Data with other Systems ees esse ER Re ER RA KA RE RR ERA ER RE ER ERA KANAN ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ER Rae ek ee 1 8 Operating the Bartels AutoEngineer ss ee ER E RR EE EE RR R R E ERRRE EE Gee 1 9 1 2 1 BAE Startup and BAE User Interface esse esse esse esse Re Ee ER EG RR Rae ER EG RR Ee ER EG RR Ee RR EG RR Re RR Ee RR Re REG ee 1 9 1 2 2 Function SelecHONni is WEE Ee ES EE Ee ee ee EE 1 12 1 2 3 Basic System FunctiONS eise ees EER ee Re ev slee GE ee Ee ee Re eg eg ee dk seg ee EN RE ee ee ee Ee e 1 15 EN Gree Te N ER AA AN RE EE 1 18 1 25 Special EE RR EE N EE N aa 1 19 BAE Design Database users issues me ee vee gese ees us se ese sewes De See e ese ER 1 20 1 3 1 Database Cone ptt iss a kn kn aa 1 20 13 2 SCM Database Hierarchy io ccciciecsccccecccccccnctsriecestcceseceseterecoutecterssiccsecesssetdestarevecestsetecataesnessucetecstest 1 22 1 3 3 Layout Database HierarChY use sesse ER RE REG RR KEER RR ERGER RR EG ARK ERGER RR ERGER RR REG e RR KEER e RR KERE ee RR ER Ge RR RE ee 1 23 1 3 4 Logical LID rary mmm N OE N e raeas eiiiai 1 24 IX Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual ER 2 Circuit Design GAB aa aaa Dr d 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 ET E EEN 2 5 2 1 1 Components and Features L A RAANG KINANA NANANA NANANA 2
384. of non plated drills see chapter 4 7 13 for details on producing drill data output Text Drill Place Drill Hole LC Drilling Class Done Drill size 0 00mm 3 0 New Drilling Class A Z Z A dash string input to the drilling class prompt can be used to refrain from any drilling class assignment this is the default for drill hole definitions Use the following commands to define a drill symbol by creating a documentary line on the Drill Plan Both Sides documentary layer Areas Add Document Line EI Drill Plan Move to 0 00 0 05 Move to 0 05 0 00 Move to 0 00 0 05 EI Move to 0 05 0 00 Move to 0 00 0 05 Done PCB Design CAD Page 4 33 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to define a keepout area on the All Layers signal layer with size and position corresponding with the drill hole definition Areas Add Keep Out Area All Layers Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 1 5 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Arc Left Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 Absolute Y Coordinate mm 0 Done The keepout area defined with the commands above will prevent the Autorouter from routing over the drill hole The definition of padstack symbol dri113 0 is completed now Do not forget to save this symbol with the following commands File Save Element PCB Design CAD Page 4 34 Ba
385. ogo and the following menu the setup function is only available under Windows Motif the IC Design and Next Task menu items are available only with special software configurations such as BAE HighEnd or BAE IC Design Schematic Layout IC Design Packager CAM View Setup Next Task Exit BAE Move the menu cursor to the Packager menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button Packager Now the Packager program module will load If this fails to happen then check your BAE software installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for details on how to perform a correct installation 3 2 2 Packager Main Menu The Packager user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering the Packager the Setting function with its menu is active The main menu is always available and provides the following functions Start Main Menu Schematic Layout Settings Exit BAE The Settings function is used to set the parameters for the Packager process to be started with the Star function The Main Menu Schematic and Layout functions are used to switch to the BAE Main Menu the Schematic Editor or the Layout system Exit BAE ends the BAE session For designs without existing layout layout element creation for the net list created by the Packager is automatically suggeste
386. ogram Option dp prgname The dp option is used for deleting previously compiled programs from the uicprog vdb file in the BAE programs directory At least one program element name is required Wildcards are supported with the program element name specification if wildcard recognition is activated see option wcon above Warnings are issued when trying to delete non existent programs Program deletion is always processed before any source code compilation in order to avoid compilation process conflicts such as deleting a program immediately after it has been compiled with the same ULC call Delete Library Option dl libname The d1 option is used for deleting previously compiled libraries from the ulcprog vdb file in the BAE programs directory At least one library element name is required Wildcards are supported with the library element name specification if wildcard recognition is activated see option wcon above Warnings are issued when trying to delete non existent libraries Library deletion is always processed before any source code compilation in order to avoid compilation process conflicts such as deleting a library immediately after it has been compiled with the same ULC call Program Database File Name Option ulp prgfilename On default the User Language Compiler stores User Language programs to a file named ulcprog vdb in the Bartels AutoEngineer programs directory The ulp option can be used to select a different Us
387. ograms directory The next BAE session automatically loads and restores the windows dimensions and positions from the configuration file BAE HighEnd stores window positions not only with BAE module names but also with current session window numbers thus allowing for multiple project windows of to be restored with the next BAE session This is very useful when using BAE HighEnd with multi monitor systems Introduction Page 1 12 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual BAE Side Menu User Interface The menu area on the right side of the BAE standard user interface is divided into a main menu and a standard function menu Selections are allowed in both of these menus The permanently displayed main menu is used for activating the more particular function menu displayed below the main menu Each function of the same process can be reached with only one mouse interaction and each other function can be reached with a maximum of only two mouse interactions Within the menu fields of the BAE standard user interface the green menu cursor can be moved with the mouse A particular menu function is selected by moving the mouse to that function and by pressing either the left or the right mouse button To call the function the Layout Editor simply activate the function menu by selecting the main menu item then select the Add Par function from the Parts menu Once the Add Pari function is completed it can be re activated by simply pressing the left or right
388. oit a new and or better routing solution Both the selective rip up and the cross net optimizer passes are assisted by a unique intelligent multi net cleanup algorithm with pattern recognition This algorithm identifies traces blocking unrouted connections and rips up and reroutes multiple connections or even trees at a time to improve the global routing result The Autorouter is capable of moving trace bunches to make space for not yet routed connections push n shove routing Cleanup passes for performing cross net changes are applied during optimization and will considerably reduce via counts and straighten trace paths All advanced routing features are supported by a sophisticated array of heuristic cost parameters which are dynamically adapted to produce quality routing results comparable to those made by skilled layout designers The Bartels Autorouter is capable of simultaneously routing up to 28 layers 16 signal layers and 12 power layers multilayer routing The Autorouter automatically identifies and connects pre placed power supply structures thus ensuring correct power and ground routing The router also utilizes automatic routines for correctly connecting SMD pins to power layers wherever necessary This feature also supports any split power planes placed on the power layers split power plane routing Routing widths are pin specific rather than net specific SMD pins are routed with the anticipated pin routing widths to avoid perpendicular
389. oject layout when double clicking a dab file Right clicking the dab file activates a context menu which provides the choice of starting either the Layout Editor with the default layout or the Schematic Editor with the last modified SCM sheet Please consult also your operating system manual for more details on how to configure applications for startup Introduction Page 1 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual BAE User Interface with Pulldown Menus Standard On default the Windows and Motif versions of the Bartels AutoEngineer are configured with pull down menus This user interface is vertically organized and consists of the main menu bar on top the graphic work area in the middle and an info line followed by the status and input line at the bottom Function menus are activated in pull down mode when selecting the corresponding main menu item Under Windows the submenu from the menu provides the function for activating an Explorer style tree view function menu which can be displayed either to the left or to the right of the graphic workarea After starting the BAE the Bartels company logo and or a copyright note is displayed in the graphic workarea and the status line displays the program version and or the user names 4 BAE GED RM Traces Highlight Net Win Im Figure 1 2 BAE Pulldown Menu User Interface Ifthe Please check your User Authorization message appears then check for correct software aut
390. ol This net attribute assignment will cause the Autorouter to route the net named NET with a trace width of 0 5mm Place the label vdd as shown in figure 2 9 and connect this label to the att rw symbol with value 0 5 for the Sval ROUTWIDTH attribute and to the att_md symbol with value 0 4 for the val MINDIST attribute These net attribute assignments will cause the Autorouter to route the net named vdd with a trace width of 0 5mm and a minimum distance i e spacing of 0 4mm Use the same procedure as described above to define a trace width of 0 6mm for the net named Vss place label Vss and connect it to symbol att rw with a value of 0 6 for the Sval1 attribute Bartels AutoEngineer also supports the PRIORITY and POWWIDTH net attributes for controlling the Autorouter See the description of the LOGLIB utility program for more details on net attribute definitions Finally place the Net Attributes text string to the circuit diagram as shown in figure 2 9 and don t forget to save the circuit drawing 24 5 Tag Symbols Tag symbols can be used for assigning attributes and or attribute sets to groups of parts pins or nets This feature can also be used to introduce more complex design information such as preferences for test procedures or logical relations between parts pins and or nets The Symbol Tagmode function from the Symbols menu can be used to change the currently loaded symbol to either a Netlist Tag o
391. olled with the new Outside Net Type Area Cost Factor 0 5 option to be set through the menu PCB Design CAD Page 4 89 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 5 9 Using the Autorouter Starting the Autorouter You should first start the Layout Editor and load the layout board from the demo ddb DDB file The Autoroute command from the Layout Editor File menu is used to call the Autorouter File Autorouter Setting Autorouter Options The following operations will show how to apply certain router passes for routing our example job using three signal layers Use the following commands to set the signal layer count to 3 Options Signal Layer Count 3 Signal Layers el Use the following commands to select 1 40 inch routing grid without via offset and set the standard trace width and the minimum distance to 0 3mm each Options Em Routing Grid 1 40 Inch no ofs el Trace Width New Default Trace Width 0 32mm 0 3 Minimum Distance New Minimum Distance 0 29mm 0 3 View Layout Display Use the following commands to change trace clipping to 0 1mm and activate the Zoom Al function Vliew Set Clipping Display Traces wider than 1 50mm 0 1 Zoom All PCB Design CAD Page 4 90 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Router Batch Use the following commands to define a router batch process consisting of SMD Via Pre Placemeni with channel width 4
392. onding SMD pads The SMD via pre routing pass prevents the Autorouter from extensively using the SMD outside layers at an early stage of the routing process This strategy achieves earlier 10096 routing success in a wide range of SMT designs Redundant via connections created by SMD Via Pre Place are later eliminated by the Optimizer Full Autorouter The Full Autoroute main menu function is used to start a complete Autorouting process including all router passes such as SMD Via Pre Placement optionally complete initial routing rip up retry routing if necessary and optimization This is the standard procedure for performing complete routing of a board The number of final Optimize passes can be set with the Optimizer Passes function from the menu see above The SMD Via Pre Placer will only be activated if the On option has been selected with the SMD Via Pre Place function from the Control menu Batch Setup and Batch Start The Batch Star function from the Standard Autorouter main menu is used to start a routing process with different user defined router passes The atch Setup function is used to schedule up to ten of the following autorouting procedures to be subsequently processed with the Batch Start function as a ae BEE Optimizer o none remove router pass from batch Single Pass Initial R
393. open connections are indicated since this will almost certainly result in the production of faulty PCBs It is recommended to start the Bartels AutoEngineer from in the directory where the design files should be generated since this considerably simplifies job file access If you intend to process the examples provided with this manual it is recommended to move to the BAE examples directory installed with the BAE software The Layout Editor can be called from the Bartels AutoEngineer main shell Start the BAE shell by typing the following command to the operating system prompt Move the menu cursor to the Layout menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button Layout Now the Layout Editor program module is loaded and the Layout Editor menu is activated If this fails to happen then check your BAE software installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for details on how to perform a correct installation Use the command from the Layout Editor File menu to call the CAM Processor File CAM Processor If a layout element was previously processed in the Layout Editor then this element will automatically be saved and re loaded to the CAM Processor Within the CAM Processor the function from the menu is used to load layout elements of any hierarchy level Use the following commands to load the layout named board from DDB file demo ddb File Load Element Layout The system i
394. or connecting SMD pins to signal inside layers With SMD via pre placement activated the Full Autoroute function will start with the SMD via pre place initial routing pass The SMD via pre placer will as far as possible and or meaningful generate short trace connections to vias for those SMD pins to be wired At SMD fanout routing routing directions result from the shapes and positions of the corresponding SMD pads i e the SMD fanout routing algorithm ignores layer specific routing direction preferences to refrain from blocking PLCC SMD pin channels and or PLCC SMD pins The SMD via pre routing pass is intended for preventing the Autorouter from extensively using the SMD outside layers at an early stage of the routing process thus involving earlier 100 routing success in a wide range of SMT designs The SMD via router does not re rout SMD pins which are already connected to fixed traces and redundant SMD via connections are later eliminated by the Optimizer PCB Design CAD Page 4 82 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Placement Optimization during Rip Up Routing A feature for performing placement optimizations is integrated to the rip up router of the Autorouter The Router P G Swap menu function can be used to activate option Router Pinswap On or deactivate option Router Pinswap Off placement optimization during rip up routing With Router Pinswap Or the rip up router performs pin
395. or easy text rotation visibility rule assignments on SCM symbol level Disolve Rotations creates four copies of the currently loaded symbol at 0 90 180 and 270 degree rotation angles allowing for rotation specific text editing Combine Rotations copies the texts back to symbol and automatically attaches the corresponding rules to the modified texts SCMRULE can be called through or through the function from the Settings menu if UIFSETUP is activated Warning Rotation specific text visibility modes mode can only be set if the scm rul rule definition file including the scm rot vis 0 scm rot vis 90 scm rot vis 180 and scm rot vis 270 rules have been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory l e the rules are not saved with the design When transferring the design onto a different computer the scm rot vis rules must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise text rotation visibility mode assignments won t work Pin Graphic Plot On default graphics graphic lines dotted lines graphic areas on pin marker level are not plotted However the scm pin marker plot rule from the scm rul rule definition file in the User Language directory baeulc can be assigned to the currently loaded SCM sheet to force plot output of pin marker graphics The SCMRULE User Language program can be used for assigning rules
396. or the currently loaded layout using the library source file demolib ddb and re load the layout note how the r04a25 resistor package type is updated with the definition from demolib ddb File m Update Library Layout Element Name Load Element Layout m The Replace Elemen function is used for substituting selectable library elements with definitions from a certain library source file Use the following commands to replace the r04a25 part symbol and the p1206 pad symbol of the current democopy ddb DDB file with the corresponding definitions from the demo ddb DDB file and re load the layout Replacel Element works on DDB file level it doesn t affect elements in main memory File Replace Element Part Replace Element m Pad Please confirm Y N y Load Element Layout File Name Element Name PCB Design CAD Page 4 113 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 10 Back Net List The Back Netlist function from the Utilities menu is most useful for certain applications such as high frequency design where net list data is requested to be automatically generated from the copper located on the PCB The mode of operation of this function should be demonstrated using the currently loaded layout from DDB file democopy ddb Delete the trace which connects the pins NO1 and 4 of the parts named K1 and X1 and reset the definition of power layer vss Traces Delete
397. ore the new SCM sheet and return to the BAE main shell File Save Element File Main Menu Editing an existing SCM Sheet Start the Schematic Editor and use the following commands to reload the previously created SCM sheet element you can select the file and element name via popup menu and mouse pick since you are now accessing an existing element Load Sheet The system now loads the previously created SCM sheet An error message such as File not found is issued if the requested DDB file is not available An error message such as Element not found is issued if the requested element is not available in the selected DDB file When entering the Schematic Editor the system knows the name of the file previously processed in any other BAE module On subsequent file name queries this global project name can alternatively be specified by selecting the button from the file name popup menu or by entering an empty string i e by pressing the return key El to the file name prompt Circuit Design CAE Page 2 31 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 3 2 Symbols On SCM sheet level the appropriate functions from the Symbols menu are used for placing moving and deleting symbols labels and module ports for assigning attribute values and for querying symbol logic definitions The symbol placement routines support access to different selectable SCM symbol libraries The functions provided with the Symbols menu are essentially app
398. ort the Delete function The call from above deletes the parts R104 and ZC1 from the layout and issues the following message 2 Parts deleted PCB Design CAD Page 4 101 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to place the previously deleted parts with correct package types Parts Add Part LC Part Name ic1 Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 1 6 Absolute X Coordinate mm 2 0 Place Next Part Mirror On Rotate Right Jump Absolute Absolute X Coordinate mm 0 35 E Absolute Y Coordinate mm 2 0 Now all parts are placed again on the layout You can check this with the Place next Par function which should issue the A11 parts have been placed already message PCB Design CAD Page 4 102 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 5 Defining and Editing Power Layers The Bartels AutoEngineer layout system provides features for defining power layers and or power planes Use the following commands to define a power layer for signal Vss Settings Set Power Layers DESS Net Name vss End Note how the above mentioned power layer definition removes the airlines connected to the drilled pins of signal Vss Drilled pins are automatically connected to the corresponding power layer i e the CAM Processor will later generate heat traps at the drillings of power layer pins The airlines connected to the SMD pins of signal vss won t be
399. other power planes are allowed the power plane tree detection will always match the innermost power plane for connecting The layer selection menus of the function from the menu allow for the selection of power layers Text can be placed on power layers to add documentary information to the power layers When placing text on power layers the design rule check will perform distance checking against the All Layers and Middle Layers signal layers Power layer text is visible on the PCB only if the corresponding power layer is configured as board outside layer i e as either solder side or component side layer Usually power layers are defined as board inside layers of a multilayer design Text placed on power layers can serve as control information e g for the layout designer or as plot or film archive information PCB Design CAD Page 4 103 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 6 Autorouter Via Keepout Areas There is often the need to define areas where the Autorouter is allowed to rout traces but must not place vias e g underneath special parts Via keepout areas can be defined on a routing layer which is not required for the real layout This via keepout layer should then be prohibited with the Autorouter layer assignment The Autorouter considers all objects placed on prohibited layers and vias and or via drill holes are assumed to be defined on all layers l e the Autorouter refrains fro
400. otoplot Default Line Width T0 Gerber Default Line Width 0 30mm 0 254 Gerber Format m Gerber 2 4 Format Gerber Fill Mode H Line Fill Gerber Output Ti Layer 2 Plot File Name demo Daer The following report is issued by the function after successfully generating the Gerber plot file Number of elash Strucetases a Gee Number of Rectangle Drawn Areas lt r gt Number of Circle Drawn Areas C5 Number of Multi Aperture Areas lt m gt Number of Line Filled Areas lt l gt Number of Heat Traps ssas ene sme aee ee a SW Number ot Overdraw e e lt f gt is the number of structures which have been generated using a flash aperture lt r gt is the number of rectangular shaped areas which have been generated using a square line aperture lt c gt is the number of circles which have been generated with a circular draw of a smaller round line aperture lt m gt is the number of structures which have been generated using multi aperture fill techniques lt 1 gt is the number of structures which have been generated using line fill techniques lt w gt is the number of heat traps which have been drawn using the smallest round line aperture lt e gt is the number of structures which could not be generated within the specified plot tolerance using the smallest aperture It is strongly recommended to refrain from passing Gerber photoplot output with overdraw errors to
401. otoplotter has two drawing modes called line draw and flash A flash is one single flash of light of a size specified with the aperture which produces an image of the same size on the plot film For areas that match apertures a flash code containing only one set of output coordinates is used For areas that don t match apertures efficient drawing techniques are used where possible generating few coordinates but with some shapes and sizes more coordinates are needed With careful design of pads and appropriate Gerber apertures selected very much smaller Gerber data files can be generated making them quicker to copy cheaper to send by modem and require less media space For orthogonally placed square and rectangular pads that have a matching aperture a flash is used For rectangular pads that have sides along the X and Y axis and the smaller side matching a square aperture that aperture is used to draw the pad For rectangular pads and square pads that don t have an aperture that matches that have sides along the X and Y axis and a square aperture exists that is bigger than half the shortest side that aperture is used to draw the pad with two strokes For rectangular pads that don t have their sides along the X and Y axis area fill techniques are used For round pads that have an aperture that matches a flash is used For round pads where no aperture matches area fill techniques are used where line fill will use the nearest smaller aperture to draw the
402. oup functions can be used for a variety of tasks such as replicating circuitry saving and loading SCM templates stealing from existing and proven designs etc Pressing the right mouse button during group movement operations such as Move Group Copy Group or Load Group will activate a submenu which provides functions for placing the group to relative or absolute coordinates Jump Relativel Jump Absolute or rotating and or mirroring the group Rotate Lefi Rotate Right Set Angle Mirror Off Mirror Onl The function is used to replace group selected symbol macros on SCM sheet level or marker macros on symbol level This function is most useful for fast part or pin type replacement technology change Attribute assignments and text positions from the original elements are transferred to the new elements if possible The Load Group function first resets the currently defined group to deselect all currently group selected elements before performing the load operation After successfully loading a group all loaded group elements are automatically group selected The advantage of this feature is that loaded group elements and only these objects can be subject to subsequent group functions without the need to perform any group selection and or deselection Use the following commands to select a group containing the switches 1004 S1005 and S100
403. oup routing component routing area block routing etc The Options menu is used to set fundamental Autorouter options for subsequent router passes These parameters define the design rules and technology requirements to be considered by the Autorouter signal layer count layer assignment routing grid with half grid routing option standard trace width standard minimum distance maximum via count via grid on grid or off grid trace bending pin contact mode The parameters defined from the Options menu are stored with the layout Changes to basic routing option parameters signal layer count routing grid toggle half grid option standard trace width standard minimum distance pin contact mode cause an automatic router restart with discard of current routing results when re entering some standard autorouting process such as Full Autorouter initial routing SMD fan out routing rip up routing optimizing and Load Traces The Control menu provides basic functions for controlling the routing process such as setting the optimizer passes count activate deactivate multi net pattern recognition during rip up and or optimization set the persistence of the rip up router activate automatic SMD fan out routing and turn on or turn off automatic security copy The Strategy menu provides functions for setting the strategy parameters and heuristic cost factors to be used by subsequent router and o
404. outing pass requires a routing channel width specification and a maximum via count setting SMD Via Pre Placement requires a routing channel width specification Optimize requires the number of required Optimizer passes up to 999 Single Net Routing The Route Single Net function from the Autorouter interaction menu activates the single net router The net and or connection to be autorouted by the single net router can be selected by mouse clicking some pin or pre routed trace of the desired net The single net router is commonly used for pre routing power supply signals or critical nets with specific preferences for trace widths clearance layer assignments etc Component Routing The Route Single Par function from the Interaction menu can be used to rout mouse selectable parts i e to autoroute all nets connected to the selected component Fully Automated Placement and Routing The Place and Route function from the nteraction can be used to activate the Full Autoplacer and Full Autorouter function sequence thus allowing for fully automated layout placement and routing PCB Design CAD Page 4 88 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Net specific Airline Display and Net Group Routing The Mincon Function from the Settings menu provides options for controlling ne
405. outo Move to Bus 240 80 Mirror LC Move to Level of Pin KK100 N0 Add Connection Move to Bus Tap OUTO EI Move to Pin KK100 N0 After specifying the bus pin net name the system will load the bustap label symbol which then can be placed on the bus the submenu available during bus tap placement provides the Mirror option which can be used for mirroring the bus tap to the opposite side of the bus The bustap symbol is a special label symbol which is always used for displaying bus pins thus defining sub signals on the corresponding bus ensure that the bustap label symbol is available in the preset library The bus tap net name query also accepts net name range specifications Use the following commands to place three more bus taps named OUT1 OUT2 and OUT3 the previously selected bus tap mirror mode is still activated Connections Tap Bus Net Name Range out 1 3 Move to Bus 240 80 Move to Level of Pin KK100 NC Move to Level of Pin KK101 N0 Move to Level of Pin KK101 NC You should now connect the bus taps OUT1 to pin KK100 NC OUT2 to pin KK101 N0 and OUT3 to pin KK101 NC Please note also the special menu functions for manipulating busses and or bus taps Move Bus Tap Delete Bus Tap Rename Bus Tap Circuit Design CAE Page 2 46 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Schematic Editor provides features for assigning bus signal names to support bus connect
406. output aborts with one of the following error message if neither of these requirements are met Error creating file Error writing ASCII file The CAM Processor will prompt for the output device name after activating the desired output function if no default plot device has been been specified with the Plot Device function Popup menus for fast output file selection are integrated to the Plot Device HP GL Output ES Output HP Laser Output Dump Aperture Table Gerber Output Drill Data Device Tool Table Device Drill Output Tool Table Output and insertion Output functions of the Control Plot Gerber Photoplo and Drillingsinsertion menus Files ending on ass con ddb def exe fre ulc and usf are faded out from the output file menus for data security reasons New output file names can optionally be typed in via keyboard User Language The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated to the CAM Processor i e User Language programs can be called from the CAM Processor and it is possible to implement any user specific CAM Processor function required such as status display parameter setup reports and test functions special CAD CAM output and plot functions customer specific batch procedures etc The CAM Processor provides both explicit and implicit User Language program call facilities User Language programs can be
407. ow the Schematic Editor program module is loaded and the SCM menu will be activated If this fails to happen then check your BAE software installation see the Bartels AutoEngineer Installation Guide for details on how to perform a correct installation Circuit Design CAE Page 2 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 1 3 Schematic Editor Main Menu The Schematic Editor standard sidemenu user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering the Schematic Editor the menu is active and the menu cursor points to the Load Element function The Windows and Motif versions of the Schematic Editor can optionally be operated with a pull down menu user interface providing a horizontally arranged main menu bar on top The WINMENUMODE command of the BSETUP utility program is used to switch between SIDEMENU and PULLDOWN Windows Motif menu configurations see chapter 7 2 for more details The following main menu is always available whilst processing SCM elements with the Schematic Editor Undo Redo Display Files Symbols Connections Graphic Text Groups Parameter Plot Output Utilities Undo Redo The functions provided with the Undo Redd menu allow you to use the Schematic Editor without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone using Undo and then reprocessed with
408. own in the example above the same placement functions apply for labels and symbols l e you can rotate labels set a standard placement angle specify absolute placement coordinates etc Now you should load and place further labels to get a circuit drawing as shown in figure 2 6 connect label Vss to pins V1 E C101 1 and S1006 2 connect label Vdd to pins K10 A1 and KK100 C connect label NET to pin ZC10 B It is recommended to apply the Next Symbol Label function for the repeated placement of the same label You should also utilize the popup menu for selecting the label and or signal name This net name popup menu is activated when pressing a mouse button or typing the question mark string to the net name query The net name popup offers a menu with all signal names of the currently loaded SCM sheet i e the net name menu does contain all those labels which are already connected to pins of the currently defined net list The button of the net name popup menu is used for activating the Next Label function mg EK1BA AP pa KK1B1 far Figure 2 6 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections Labels Circuit Design CAE Page 2 44 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The BAE design system instantly updates the net list with the circuit drawing l e the Schematic Editor is capable of controlling and correlating the net list data with the circuit diagram at any stage of the design process Use the following commands to test th
409. p or part name change is applied in the corresponding layout the physical net list data must be backannotated to the schematics i e special tools might be required for transferring the assignments file information generated by BAE Backannotation back to the original SCM system Input file identifiers for part names pin names or net names containing special characters must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes Utilities Page 7 48 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 743 REDASC Name redasc REDAC ASCII Input Interface Synopsis redasc projectname libraryfile Description The REDASC utility program converts layout data from Redac MAXI systems REDASC transforms layout symbols part lists net lists placement information etc from CDI format to internal BAE DDB Design DataBase format REDASC accepts the CDI file name pro jectname as first argument This file must have an extension of cdi but this extension must not be included with the command line REDASC optionally accepts the layout library file name libraryfile as second argument This file must have an extension of ddb but this extension must not be included with the command line The libraryfile is expected to be in BAE DDB Design DataBase format and must contain the layout part definitions referenced from the net list The required layout library symbols are expected to be defined in the CDI file if the libraryfile argument
410. part 741500 dill4 pin a b y lat a b y to 1 2 3 or 4 5 6 or 9 10 8 or 12 13 11 net gmd 7 net vee 14 swap ill 2 3 4 5 DH 9 10 8 12 13 113 7 Wi ce tt Figure 1 6 Part Data Sheet with Loglib Definition The following sequence of operations is recommended for the definition of a new part create the SCM symbol and store this symbol to a SCM library create the layout part symbol and store this symbol to the central layout library if not yet existing create an ASCII loglib file containing the requested logical library part definition and transfer the loglib file to the central layout library using the loglib utility program Once the above tasks are completed the new SCM symbol can be used for circuit drawing the Packager is able to assign this SCM symbol to the correct layout package and the corresponding layout part is available for placement in the layout For less experienced users it is a good idea to use a test file for new definitions and to perform a Packager test run before releasing new library parts for real projects This should prevent from unintentionally introducing erroneous library definitions to BAE library and or project files Introduction Page 1 24 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 2 Circuit Design CAE This chapter describes in detail how to use the Schematic Editor for creating SCM library symbols and designing circuits
411. pe by defining an area around the items to be selected The Group Elements function is used to select and or deselect single elements of a certain type symbols labels connections graphic or text by picking the desired items The function will stay active with its parameter settings as long as valid pick elements are selected thus omitting the need of reactivating the Group Elements function when selecting a series of objects of a certain type The function is used to deselect all items which are selected to the currently defined group All group selected elements are subject to subsequent group functions such as Save Group Move Group Copy Group and Delete Group The Save Group function is used to save the currently defined group The Save Group function requires a group origin definition which becomes the origin of the new element and is used as the reference point for group load commands When saving groups they are stored as an element of the same type as that from which the group was selected To prevent from unintentionally overwriting existing database elements Save Group prompts for confirmation if the specified element already exists in the destination file The function can be used to reload previously saved groups as well as SCM sheet and or symbol label elements to different SCM plans and or symbols labels l e the Save Group and Load Gr
412. pecification If the user types in an empty string by pressing the return key E to the design library name prompt then the system will automatically refer to the default layout library file name defined with BAE setup see also command LAYDEFLIBRARY of the BSETUP utility program The layout element name is the name of the layout and or the net list to be generated The layout element name is freely selectable when packaging a certain design for the first time If the user types in an empty string by pressing the return key 5 to the layout element name prompt then the system uses the default layout element name defined with BAE setup see also command LAYDEFELEMENT of the BSETUP utility program After successfully processing all SCM sheets the Packager generates a physical net list with the same name as specified for the layout board element That layout board element can then be created parts placed and traces routed For user information purposes the Packager also creates a free list file with file name extension fre The free list is an ASCII file containing an unconnected pins report and statistical information such as net pin counts The system issues the No errors occurred message after successfully completing the packaging process and the user can press any key to return to the BAE main menu Errors during packaging usually result from wrong and or missing logical library entries In this case the logical library must be corrected befor
413. physical part and the logical pin designators A B and Y respectively have been replaced by physical pin names 1 2 3 etc Subsequent Tasks After successfully completing the Packager process the project is ready for layout and you can enter the BAE Layout Editor to start with the PCB design The name of the layout element to be created must match the name of the net list specified with the Packager run l e the layout element name for the above mentioned example project file demo ddb should be board Within the Layout system the library path should be set to library file demolib ddb which has been used for packaging and then the net list parts can be placed e g by repeatedly applying the Place Next Pari function from the menu see chapter 4 3 2 for details Packager Backannotation Page 3 12 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 2 5 Messages This section provides an alphabetically sorted list of all Packager error warning and status messages The ERROR and WARNING prefixes have been omitted since some messages are issued as errors or warnings depending on the Error parameter The messages displayed on screen are logged into a file named bae Log and can be viewed after exiting the Packager The system automatically loads the sheet with the first erroneous SCM symbol and zooms to that symbol when switching immediately to the Schematic Editor after encountering error messages related to speci
414. power pin connection width defined through the net command and power width net attribute The tag_pin_powerpin tag symbol from the ROUTE symbol library can be used for Spowpin pin attribute assignments Alternatively the system supports fixed Spowpin assignments through the logical definition of the symbol newattr Spowpin 1 pinname Circuit Design CAE Page 2 23 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Sviastk net attribute can be used to assign non default via types to nets Net specific via padstack assignments are considered by the Autorouter Snotest net attribute assignments can be used to deactivate automatic test point generation by the Packager for specific nets Sroutdis net attribute assignments can be used to exclude specific nets from the autorouting process The Slayers net attribute can be used to assign net specific routing layers comma separated signal layer numbers for the autorouting process in BAE HighEnd The 5 attribute is padstack specific Text on padstack level is on layout level subsituted with the name of the part on which the padstack is placed This feature can be useful if part names need to be displayed for pins which are placed outside the part body e g during Move Pin operations BAE supports not only the attributes listed in table 2 1 but also arbitrary user defined attributes such as Stolerance Sidentno Spartnumber Sprice Ssupplier Sdelay Sinsertion height etc
415. powerful feature for estimating design alternatives With the Bartels User Language integrated to the Autorouter the user is able to implement enhanced CAD functions and macros user specific placement and autorouting procedures report and test functions etc User Language programs can be called by applying the function from the ile menu or by pressing a key on the keyboard hot key The Autorouter module of the BAE HighEnd system provides advanced autorouting technologies based on patented neural network technology Neural Autorouter The BAE HighEnd Autorouter supports skilled analog signal routing automatic microwave structure generation grid less object orientated routing with automatic placement optimization etc The BAE HighEnd Autorouter also provides features for routing problem recognition and or classification and for learning and automatically applying problem adapted routing strategies and or rules PCB Design CAD Page 4 7 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual CAM Processor The Bartels AutoEngineer layout system allows for the definition and creation of arbitrarily shaped areas and pads which can also be rotated at any angle All these features are supported by the intelligent CAM Processor which utilizes a series of automatic fill algorithms with multiple aperture selection and area reduction l e pad definitions are not necessarily restricted to some particular tool set but may f
416. priate value assignment to the Splname attribute of the SCM symbol e g for assigning an SMD instead of the standard DIL package The pin command defines the logical pins A B and Y of the SCM symbol Take care that this definition agrees with the pin definitions on the SCM symbol or otherwise packaging will fail The xlat is used to allocate the gates of the physical part and to define the logical to physical pin mapping The swap command is used to define the rules for pin and gate swap In the example above the gates are mutually swapable and the gate input pins are also swapable The net command is used to define power supply pins In the example above pin 7 is connected to signal Vss and pin 14 is connected to signal Vda Packager Backannotation Page 3 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Translating the Loglib Definition Use the following LOGLIB call to translate the logical library definition from cd4081 def and store it to the demolib ddb library file gt loglib cd4081 demolib If the definitions in cd4081 def are correct then the LOGLIB utility program should issue the following messages ELS LOGICAL LIBRARY MAINT Program run successfully done Now demolib ddb contains all information required for successfully packaging the project file demo ddb see also the contents of LOGLIB file demolib def which has already been translated to demolib dab Logical Library Defi
417. program module The following error message is issued if no swap is allowed for the selected pins and or gates Not allowed to swap these pins PCB Design CAD Page 4 97 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Use the following commands to swap the gates 1 2 3 and 5 6 4 as well as the pins 12 and 13 of the part named IC10 Parts m Pin Gate Swap Move to ic10 1 2 3 1 4 1 8 Move to ic10 5 6 4 1 5 1 8 Pin Gate Swap Move to ic10 12 1 4 2 1 EI Move to ic10 13 1 3 2 1 Use the following commands to perform a part swap for the resistor parts named R101 and R103 this is allowed because the same attribute values are assigned to these parts Parts Pin Gate Swap Move to r101 1 6 2 4 Move to r103 1 4 1 2 The Netlist Part Name function from the Parts menu is used to change part names in the net list Use the following commands to change the net list part name of connector X1000 to filenameX1 and also change the net list part name of diode V1000 to va Paris Netlist Part Name Move to x1000 2 4 1 5 Part Name X1000 X1 Netlist Part Name Move to v1000 1 2 1 2 Part Name V1000 v2 The function issues the following error message if you try to assign a part name which is already in use for another part Part name already in use Use the following commands to apply the function to change the name of part ZC10 to IC1 Parts Change Part Na
418. programs useful add on tools are supplied such as library management DDB file contents listing BAE software setup and configuration ASCII net list import etc Utilities Page 7 1 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Utilities Page 7 2 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Contents Chapter 7 Utes ANN NGA 7 1 LO e E es ee 7 5 7 2 AKTEN KT 7 6 7 3 BICSET IC Design RR ee be bee Ge bee ect ndn 7 16 74 BEDRING IC EIERE 7 18 K ER e el Lei ei E 7 19 L ME e al CA dp 7 24 Til FONTCON E 7 27 FO JFONTEXTR niek ed ei ed daa waaa aa es 7 29 LG WI oi EE cctsecsccctenciacctvesseundennte endvuntiandeucianoteesenacdaaudiwcdewstaantvessencdenceesrane 7 31 AE os ie EE EE EE EE N EE 7 33 RR LOGLIB EEN 7 34 7 12 NEIGONN 2a NAA NAA 7 47 7 13 REDAS O AGE KAANAK 7 49 LO ITT ee 7 50 7 15 ULC User Language Compiler iese ee RR EER EER AAR ER ARE RE ER RR Ee ERK Ke 7 52 7 16 User Language Interpreter cccccceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 58 Tal USERLIS WEE 7 60 LAB MALCONN EE RE 7 66 Utilities Page 7 3 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Utilities Page 7 4 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 1 BAEHELP Name baehelp BAE Windows Online Documentation Access Synopsis baehelp file Description The BAEHELP utility program activates the Windows default web browsers and loads the optionally specified HTML file or URL BAEHELP automatically loads th
419. providing the list of library elements from the specified library file An empty string input to the library element name query causes the system to use the library element previously selected with the Add Part function if there was already one specified The net list part name selection popups are also provided with the Change Part Name and Netlist Part Name functions from the menu The library element name selection of the function is also implemented for placing pins i e selecting padstacks on layout part symbol level and for loading pads onto layout padstack level Use the following commands to load the part named Ic10 and place it at coordinate 1 2 1 8 Parts Add Part m Part Name ic10 Move to 1 2 1 8 The function checks whether a part with the specified name exists in the net list If the part is defined in the net list then the system knows the package to be used for this part and automatically loads the corresponding part symbol i e dil14 in the example above The system issues an error message such as Element not found if the requested part symbol is not available in the current job file or in the selected library In this case you should use the Select Library function from the Settings menu in to check whether the correct library is accessed Use the following commands to load and place two parts named hol
420. ptimizer passes optimizer routing direction via costs pin channel costs counter direction costs direction change costs packing costs dynamic density cost factor bus bending costs rip up distance costs trace crossing costs diagonal routing costs off grid routing costs PCB Design CAD Page 4 74 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Parameter menu provides functions for selecting the layout library setting the coordinate display mode selecting the Mincon function for the airline display and activating the automatic design data backup feature The utilities menu provides functions for exiting BAE returning to the BAE main shell calling the Layout Editor and starting User Language programs This menu also provides important file management functions such as load and save layout elements or list DDB file contents 4 5 3 Customized Autorouter User Interface The BAE software comes with User Language programs for activating a modified Autorouter user interface with many additional functions startups toolbars menu assignments key bindings etc The BAE ST User Language program is automatically started when entering the Autorouter BAE ST calls the UIFSETUP User Language program which activates predefined Autorouter menu assignments and key bindings Menu assignments and key bindings can be changed by modifying and re compiling the UIFSETUP source code The HLPKEYS User Language program is used
421. r and Bartels Autorouter are registered trademarks of Bartels System Bartels User Language and Bartels Neural Router are trademarks of Bartels System All other products or services mentioned in this publication are identified by the trademarks or service marks of their respective companies or organizations Copyright 1986 2013 by Oliver Bartels F E All Rights Reserved Printed in Germany ll Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Preface The Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual describes in detail how to use the Bartels AutoEngineer CAE CAD CAM design system The following main topics are covered by this manual Introduction System Architecture general Operating Instructions Design Database Circuit Design CAE Schematic Editor Netlist Processing Forward and Backward Annotation PCB Design and manufacturing data processing CAD CAM Layout Editor Autoplacement Autorouting CAM Processor CAM View e IC ASIC Design Chipeditor for interactive IC mask layout Cell Placer and Cell Router for place amp route GDS and CIF import and export Neural Rule System Utility Programs The reader of this documentation should be familiar with the use of his operating system and a text editor for generating ASCII files on his system Kindly note the Copyright before making use of the information provided with this documentation or applying the herein described products The reader should also be familiar with the Notations and Conve
422. r Fill Set Fill Clearance H Copper Clearance Distance 0 30mm 0 35 Min Fill Size mon Min Fill Structure Size 0 10mm 0 15 Insol Area Mode m Keep Islands Fill single area mon Move to Copper Fill Workarea The system fills the selected workarea with active copper assigned to the signal named net and isolated from other signal levels The copper fill process is very laborious and might last a few moments to complete You should perform a screen redraw and examine the results after the copper fille procedure is completed You can reset the copper fill change the copper fill parameters and re apply the copper fill function if you are not satisfied with the results maybe because of either too small or too large structures being generated Use the following commands to reset the copper fill from above and re apply the copper fill with automatic isolated area generation Areas Copper Fill Clear single area Insol Area Mode Delete Islands Fill all areas PCB Design CAD Page 4 108 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The minimum structure size i e the smallest area size to be generated with copper fill has basic meaning for subsequent CAM Processor The copper fill algorithm uses the minimum structure size for automatically rounding off convex corners to avoid acute angled areas You should specify the minimum structure size according to the size of the smallest round aperture defined for Gerber ou
423. r Language program call method is most useful for automatic system parameter setup as well as for key programming and menu assignments The toolbar selection event must be used to start User Language programs which are linked to toolbar elements The zoom event can be used to apply an update request to a design view management feature Bartels User Language also provides system functions for performing key programming changing menu assignments and defining toolbars These powerful features can be applied for user interface modifications Please note that a large number of additional functions included with the CAM View menu are implemented through the User Language programs supplied with the BAE software See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language chapter 4 2 lists all User Language programs provided with the BAE software PCB Design CAD Page 4 144 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 5 Processing Gerber Data General Parameters The Input Offset Gerber Format Circle Mode Mirror Model Trailing Leading Zeros Extended Gerber Optimization and Coord Spec functions from the Settings menu are used to set global parameters for loading and or writing Gerber and or drilling milling data sets The input offset is added to the input coordinates when loading CAM data Different input offsets can be specif
424. r SCM symbol elements label is used for SCM label elements and marker is used for SCM marker elements When loading an element the corresponding parameter set is automatically loaded and or activated as well thus providing a convenient way of activating a default parameter set suitable for processing the selected design and or library element type Circuit Design CAE Page 2 10 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual User Language The Bartels User Language Interpreter is integrated to the Schematic Editor i e User Language programs can be called from the Schematic Editor and it is possible to implement any user specific SCM function required such as status display parameter setup reports and test functions fanout control electronic rule check special plot and or documentation output functions automatic or semi automatic symbol edit routines symbol library management utilities customer specific batch procedures etc The Schematic Editor provides both explicit and implicit User Language program call facilities User Language programs can be started with explicit program name specification using the Run User Scrip function from the File menu empty string or question mark input to the program name query activates a User Language program selection menu User Language programs can also be called by simply pressing special keys of the keyboard This method of implicit User Language program call is supported at an
425. r User Manual Gerber Arc Mode The Gerber Arc Model function is used to enable Gerber I J arc commands option Gerber Arcs instead of applying arc interpolation default option Approx Ares Gerber arc commands should always be used if the photo plotter is capable of interpreting these commands since this feature results in considerably reduced amounts of Gerber output data Extended Gerber The function can be used for optionally generating RS 274 X format Gerber output Extended Gerber with Embedded Apertures Extended Gerber provides the options No Extended Gerber Extended Gerber fixed and Extended Gerber dynamic No Extended Gerber is the default mode for generating standard Gerber data without embedded apertures With Extended Gerber mode selected the Gerber aperture table and the Gerber format selection are included i e embedded with the Gerber output plot file The Gerber aperture table to be used and or embedded can either be the currently active aperture table option Extended Gerber fixed or a dynamically e automatically generated aperture table option Extended Gerber dynamic Note that the dynamic aperture table is generated for the whole layout data rather than for the currently plotted layer only With Extended Gerber the aperture table is automatically transferred to the PCB manufacturer as an integral part of the plot file and no extra aperture table information fi
426. r a irtual Tag Netlist Tag assignments are transferred to the physical net list Virtual Tag assignments are only processed on SCM sheet level The SCM color setup provides the Tag Symbol and Tag Link entries for displaying tags and or tag assignments Usually tags are not plotted Tag symbol pins of certain types are required for assigning tag symbol entries to nets symbols or pins respectively Tag Pin Function from the submenu to be activated with the right mouse button during pin placement can be used to define the pin mode The pin modes provided are Standard Pin for standard symbols and labels Symbol Tag for assigning tags to symbols Pin Tag for assigning tags to pins and Net Tag for assigning tags to nets At least one attribute should be defined with each tag symbol by either placing the required attribute name on tag symbol level or by defining a fixed attribute value assignment with the logical library definition of the tag symbol In the logical library definition of tags each tag symbol pin must be referred by a LOGLIB pin command Pure attribute definition tags must be defined virtual On SCM sheet level tags can be placed using the add Symbol function from the Bymbols menu Once a tag is placed the Assign Symboltags function can be used for assigning tags The target objects to be
427. r and the layout system also accept input for selecting the SCM and or the layout standard library defined through the BAE setup see also chapter 7 2 Please do not forget to save the currently loaded element before exiting from the program or loading or creating another element The system activates a popup menu with options for discarding and or saving changes to prevent from unintentionally discarding design changes in cases where an unsaved element is about to be unloaded When loading a BAE DDB file element the element s modification time is retrieved This modification time is checked against the current time when saving the element User confirmation request is issued if the DDB file element appears to have been changed thus providing advanced support and security for BAE network installations where different users might simultaneously modify the same DDB file element With the BAE standard user interface an intelligent popup menu for optionally selecting directories is integrated to the file name query functions This feature can be activated by selecting the Dir button from the currently active file selection popup menu The BSETUP command PROJROOTDIR see chapter 7 2 can be used to define the root of the directory tree to be displayed for directory name selection on default the current directory relative path name will be used The background color for the directory selection popup menus can be defined using the POPMF ILL option of
428. r hits a mouse button or types a question mark to the library element name prompt then the system will activate a popup menu for selecting the library file If a question mark is specified for the library element name then the system will activate the popup menu for selecting symbols from the given library file e zilog activates the popup menu for selecting symbols from the zilog dab library file Circuit Design CAE Page 2 36 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Bartels AutoEngineer provides features for assigning different schematic symbol types to the same layout package type see the descriptions of the Packager and the LOGLIB utility program for more details Use the following commands to place one coil symbol rels and two contact symbols rele Symbols Add Symbol library Element Name reis E Move to 240 180 m Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name relc Move to 210 80 Next Symbol Label EI Move to 210 60 The symbols placed with the commands above are assigned to a single relay part according to their logical library definition see also the contents of the demolib def logical library file Note that the Packager will allocate a single layout package for these symbols Attribute Value Assignment On SCM sheet level attribute values can be assigned to all parts where the corresponding symbols contain attribute definitions i e lowercase text starting with a dollar sign such
429. r specifying an unplaced net list part name this part is loaded for placement Selecting an already placed net list part prompts for confirmation to replace the placed part Entering an empty string to the part name prompt or selecting the Unpic button loads the next unplaced net list part This feature is also provided with the Place Next Part function and works until all net list parts from the part set are placed The system prompts for the library element name when specifying a part name which is not defined in the net list e g when placing a constructive part Popup menus are provided with the library element name query for selecting the library file and the library element name The library file name list is derived from the layout library path defined with the BAE setup i e all DDB files available in the directory of the layout library path are listed The Lib button or 5 input to the library file name prompt selects the standard layout library defined through the Select Library function from the Settings menu The Project button in the library file name popup selects the current project file A library element name query is activated after selecting the library file Library elements can optionally be selected by typing both the library file name e one of the names displayed with the library file name popup a slash and the library element name to the library element name prompt typing for the element name activates a popup menu
430. rd ring and ends when the end of the file is reached Commentary text can be placed between and Sorry this information is currently being updated Examples Files See also Chip Editor Diagnosis The error messages issued by BLDRING are intended to be self explanatory Utilities Page 7 18 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 5 CONCONV Name conconv Connections Conversion Utility Synopsis conconv projectname libraryfile Description The CONCONV utility program is used for transferring ASCII net list data to the Bartels AutoEngineer Supported net list formats are BARTELS CALAY MARCONI and RACAL Net lists from other systems can often be written in one of these formats providing a convenient link between other schematic systems and the powerful BAE layout facilities CONCONV accepts the net list file name projectname as first argument This file must have an extension of con but this extension must not be included with the command line CONCONV accepts the layout library file name libraryfile as second argument This file must have an extension of dab but this extension must not be included with the command line The libraryfile is expected to be in BAE DDB Design DataBase format and must contain the layout part definitions referenced from the net list CONCONV reads the ASCII net list lt projectname gt con and checks all net list layout symbols with the corresponding entries in the layout library lt l
431. re 1 4 SCM Database Hierarchy Introduction Page 1 22 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 3 3 Layout Database Hierarchy Figure 1 5 shows the structure of the database hierarchy supported throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer PCB design system The layout level is the top hierarchy level of the BAE PCB design system database On layout level the PCB contour is defined the parts from the subordinate layout part level are placed keepout areas power planes and copper areas are defined the traces are routed and finally the CAM output is generated Drawing items and text can be created on layout level for such things as plot registration markers measurement project identification etc On layout part level the layout part symbols i e the part package types are defined and stored to a layout part library A particular layout part symbol is usually defined by placing elements from the subordinate padstack level in order to define the types and positions of the physical pins of the corresponding part Traces and vias e g for printed inductors keepout areas for part clearance check defining via keepout areas etc copper areas drawing information component outline on insertion plan and text for part name reference insertion data pick point attribute value display etc can be created optionally On layout padstack level the layout pin symbols and vias are defined by placing symbols from the subordinate pad level Each p
432. re considered by the Generic Output function The All Pages option from the Windows printer dialog of the Generic Output function plots all elements of the currently loaded database class This allows for the output of e g all layouts of a project All layouts are plotted according to layout specific plot parameter settings such as plot rotation modes The option from the Windows printer dialog allows for the selection of the print area for generic outputs The generic output is automatically scaled to the print page format selected through the Windows printer setup if the size of the element to be plotted exceeds the paper size The page aspect ratio is maintained when automatic plot scaling is applied The status message of the Generic Output function provides information to indicate any non default scaling factor being used for automatic plot to sheet size scaling 4 7 11 Bitmap Plot Output to Windows Clipboard The Output to Clipboard function from the Control Blog menu can be used under Windows for plotting a bitmap of the currently loaded element into the clipboard ready to be imported e g with Paste to other Windows applications capable of processing bitmaps The whole element is plotted on default The Clipping On option can be used to restrict the output to a mouse selectable rectangle The plot dialog box also allows for bitmap size specifications and plot rotatio
433. reasonable grid for part placement to avoid off grid pin placement and to enable pin channel routing for better routing results Please note that smaller routing grids result in quadratic growth of memory requirements for the routing matrix and that CPU time usage during the Autorouting process rises even more dramatically due to a non polynomial growth of the number of possible routing solutions It is recommended to refrain from selecting unnecessary small routing grids PCB Design CAD Page 4 78 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Some routing grid options support routing with via offset see table 4 1 No via offset means that vias are placed in line with the traces e on the routing grid Routing with via offset means that vias can be shifted by half the routing grid at their placement The choice to offset or not must be calculated by the user taking into consideration the routing grid trace width clearance distance and via size Routing with via offset may well allow to use channels which would otherwise be occupied by in line placed vias on adjacent grid channels This can have a significant negative effect on the routing success see figure 4 5 for an illustration The via offsets are calculated for via diameters smaller than 1mm It is recommended to refrain from routing with via offset when using larger vias since this could cause poor routing results Routing without Via Offset Routing with Via Offset Routing Grid Obstruc
434. references for trace widths clearance layer assignments etc For completeness reasons the single net router also supports an option for selectively deleting already routed nets and or connections The Autorouter provides a feature for selectively routing net groups e g busses of a certain circuit block using specific routing options for preferred routing directions trace widths etc The component routing function can be used to rout selectable parts The area block routing function of the Autorouter is used for routing selectable areas and or circuit blocks It is possible to define different routing areas according to circuit topology VO memory digital and or analog part of the design etc and perform autorouting using block specific routing options such as routing grid clearance preferred routing direction bus routing preferences etc During the rip up autorouting process the Autorouter utilizes features for automatically performing selective component and or pin gate swaps in cases where this might result in better routability of swapped parts gates or pins The Undo Redo facilities allow to use the Autorouter without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone by applying the Undo function and then reprocessed with the Redd function Since this is true even for most complex operations such as complete Autorouter passes Undo Redd ensures data security and provides a
435. reviously saved groups as well as layout and or part elements to different layouts and or parts The save and load group facilities can be used for a variety of tasks such as replicating tracking saving and loading PCB templates stealing from existing and proven designs etc The Copy Group and Load Group functions do not perform automatic part and or pin renaming when copying and or loading groups including parts on layout level or padstacks on part level Naming conflicts are resolved by assigning names to parts and or pins and manual renaming is required to correct the name list or some special User Language program must be implemented for solving such name list problems automatically Pressing the right mouse button during group movement operations such as Move Group Copy Group or activates a submenu with functions for placing the group to relative or absolute coordinates Jump Relativel Jump Absolutel rotating the group Rotate Left Rotate Right Set Angle mirroring the group around the X axis using either Mirror Off and or Mirror On or even scaling the group element dimensions and placement coordinates Scale applied after placing the currently processed group The Move Group submenu provides the Set Quadrani option for automatically rerouting traces between the moved group and the rest of the layout after selecting the start point for the group move operation Set Q
436. rful CAE CAD CAM program modules for circuit design PCB printed circuit board layout and IC ASIC design The system is based on the famous Bartels AutoEngineer which has been incorporated in most leading PCB layout systems throughout the world setting new industrial standards of autorouting success and dramatically reducing the requirement for manual routing 1 1 1 BAE Software Configurations The following Bartels AutoEngineer software configurations are available Bartels AutoEngineer Schematics Bartels AutoEngineer Light Bartels AutoEngineer Economy Bartels AutoEngineer Professional Bartels AutoEngineer HighEnd Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design Bartels AutoEngineer FabView All BAE software configurations are provided with the same user interfaces and support different languages English German etc Bartels AutoEngineer features binary compatible design data management on different host platforms i e BAE design data can be transferred as is between all supported hardware and or operating system platforms Windows Linux Unix DOS etc Bartels AutoEngineer Professional Bartels AutoEngineer Professional is the basic BAE software configuration described in this manual BAE Professional is available for PCs with Windows Linux or DOS operating systems The following components are included with the BAE Professional software e Schematic Editor with hierarchical circuit design support Forward Backward Annotation PCB Layout system
437. rocessing the project data It is highly unlikely that this error occurs with today s hardware configurations unless the computer s main memory is used to capacity by other processes Packager Backannotation Page 3 21 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 002 Not yet implemented The selected menu function and or option is not available This is usually due to the use of an intermediate and or preliminary BAE version which displays menu functions or options which are not yet implemented Please be patient the selected function option will be fully implemented in one of the next BAE versions and or builds 021 Optimization End n Parts deleted NOT YET DOCUMENTED 020 Optimization Start n Parts input NOT YET DOCUMENTED 087 Output collision at net netname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 049 Part layoutpartname symbolname overloaded List Logical part symbolname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 050 Part layoutpartname symbolname selected definition or layout macro incompatible with NOT YET DOCUMENTED 128 Part layoutpartname alternate part list deactivated by Splname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 7 089 Part layoutpartname contains unused gate pin layoutpinname NOT YET DOCUMENTED 080 Part layoutpartname different package assignments packagenamel packagename 2 NOT YET DOCUMENTED Packager Backannotation Page 3 2
438. rrelating each layout modification with the net list definitions This high sophisticated layout design feature is called Full Copper Sharing or True Connectivity Full copper sharing enables real time recognition of electrical connections no matter whether connections are created with traces copper areas or vias l e the system supports advanced routing features such as cross connection recognition genuine T connections lining up traces created with group copying implementing routes with arbitrarily shaped copper areas etc The BAE HighEnd layout connectivity evaluation system uses special data structures for storing additional information about the structure of electric connections between copper elements This requires more memory compared to BAE Professional but results in dramatically shortened response times when manually editing large nets or moving parts since only the elements in the neighborhood of the currently processed object have to be considered by the DRC Mincon Function Not yet routed connections unroutes are displayed as airlines During part placement the function performs dynamic real time recalculation of these airlines in order to display minimum length airline sets This makes the Mincon function an indispensable utility for achieving an optimum placement The Mincon Function menu item from the Settings menu is used to set the type of airline display i e to choose the method of calculating unroutes from pin t
439. rt Ic10 Connections Add Connection Move to Pin S1000 1 50 140 E Move to Connection Corner Point 50 110 Move to Pin IC10 A 60 110 Undo function and try again if necessary use a finer input grid If the connection is completed correctly then use the following commands to connect pin 1 of the resistor R100 to this connection Each connection corner point is set by pressing the left mouse button and a connection is completed by pressing the right mouse button After correct completion of the above mentioned work step the pin markers should have become invisible If this is not true then step back using the Connections Add Connection Move to Pin R100 1 60 130 Move to Connection 50 130 A T shaped connection has been created Note how the system places a junction point marker to indicate the connection cross point Circuit Design CAE Page 2 41 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Now you should create further connections to get a circuit drawing as shown in figure 2 5 You can also experiment with the functions for moving cutting and deleting segments and for deleting connection and or nets Apply the and Redo functions for estimating design modifications and returning to the original design stage Please consider the Point to Point function for automatically connecting two selectable points on the currently loaded SCM sheet if at all possible with up to three connection segments
440. rtels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 2 3 Creating Layout Parts On layout part level the layout part symbols i e the part package types are defined and stored to a layout part library A particular layout part symbol is usually defined by placing elements from the subordinate padstack level in order to define the types and positions of the physical pins of the corresponding part Keepout areas for performing clearance checks on placed parts defining via keepout areas etc copper areas drawing information component outline on insertion plan and text for part name reference insertion data pick point attribute value display etc can be created optionally The BAE layout system also allows for placing traces and vias on part hierarchy level The layout level design rule check is deactivated between different traces on part level to allow for the correct representation of special devices such as printed inductors l e pin connections on printed inductors can be created by introducing two connecting traces Short circuits and distance violations to other traces on layout level will still be recognized by the design rule check Since the layout level design rule check will not perform checks between traces defined on the same part it is strongly recommended to apply part level design rule checks at the definition of such parts with the clearance parameters set to the smallest minimum distance s intended for the use of such parts on layout leve
441. ry and to re initialize the display to prepare for loading other data Use the following commands to clear the memory File Clear Memory PCB Design CAD Page 4 148 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 6 Processing Drilling and Milling Data Loading Drilling Milling Data The Load Drill Data function from the File menu is used to load drilling and or milling data The Load Tool Table function for loading a drill tool table must be applied before loading Sieb amp Meier drill data otherwise the Load Drill Data function issues a No tool table loaded error Take care that the tool table corresponds with the drill data to ensure complete and correct drill data management Note that the Load Tool Table function deletes previously loaded drill data from memory The Load Drill Data function allows for the selection of either Sieb amp Meier or Excellon format Both input units and processing of trailing and or leading spaces are automatically derived from the input data file The current Gerber input parameter and or format specifications are automatically used for input data not providing corresponding format commands Excellon input Inch unit specifications are processed using the currently selected Gerber format Gerber Format 2 3 Gerber Format 2 4 etc The function for loading Excellon data features automatic milling data recognition i e Excellon milling
442. ry path defined through SCMDEFLIBRARY LAYDEFLIBRARY Command The LAYDEFLIBRARY command is used to set the default layout library file containing the layout symbols The formal syntax of LAYDEFLIBRARY command is LAYDEFLIBRARY lt libpath gt where lt libpath gt is the path name of the library file lt libpath gt ddb Please note the use of the slash directory and database hierarchies delimiting instead of backslash as in DOS With the layout library path properly set any layout symbol can be accessed by specifying the symbol with the Add Pari function as in lt symbolname gt where lt symbolname gt is the name of the part symbol e g di116 sot23 etc The Layout Editorr command Select Library see menu Bettings can be used to redefine the standard layout library path input resets the library and or gt input restores the library path defined through LAYDEFLIBRARY The LAYDEFLIBRARY also sets the standard library file name to be used for logical library definition queries with the function of the Schematic Editor Utilities Page 7 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual LAYDEFELEMENT Command The LAYDEFELEMENT command is used to set the default element name used when the enter key only is pressed in response to the layout board Element Name system prompt The formal syntax of the LAYDEFELEMENT command is LAYDEFELEMENT lt la
443. s The pin routing width specification must follow the spin definition and must be separated from spin by a comma character Each net in the RACAL format is defined by a command in the form ADD TER lt part gt spin lt net gt TER lt part gt spins lt part gt spin lt part gt spins The RACAL net list must end with the keyword END Each net in the Marconi format is defined by a command in the form lt part gt spin lt part gt spins lt part gt pin lt net gt Utilities Page 7 20 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Examples Net list design con in Bartels AutoEngineer format LAYOUT board PARTS el amp capo c2 5 Capo El ki res tl zs tebe CONNECT Aer c2 A SF ner er AE El 2 EN gnd PRIORITY 2 MINDIST 0 4 t1 1 cl 1 0 4 vcc PRIORITY 1 ROUTWIDTH 0 5 c2 1 r1 1 END Net list design con in CALAY format LAYOUT board PARTS el cap50 C2 caps EI ki res tl tebc CALAY netd e2 2 ELIA met e204 ELE AE gnd Eed O A ee CA GYS aha END Utilities Page 7 21 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Net list design con in RACAL format LAYOUT board PARTS cd Capos e2 cap lS EE EE tL tebc RACAL ADD TER c2 net1 sTER KI ADD TER Se net2 TER SE el ADD TER LS gnd sTER gi ADD TER C2 I vee TER ell END END Utilities Page 7 22 Bartels AutoEngi
444. s Plot CAM Mirror LC Mirroring Off Mirroring On X Backside M Off X Backside M On Y Backside M Off Y Backside M On Mirroring Off produces output as displayed on the screen Mirroring On produces output mirrored at the X axis crossing the CAM origin X Backside M 0ff mirrors all coordinates at the X axis crossing the CAM origin except for the texts which are plotted unmirrored performs X axis text mirroring only mirrors all coordinates at the X axis crossing the CAM origin and additionally performs Y axis text mirroring Y Backside M On performs Y axis text mirroring only Figure 4 10 illustrates the effects of the different mirror options Mirroring Off Mirroring On X Backside X Backside Y Backside Y Backside Mirroring Off Mirroring On Mirroring Off Mirroring On Figure 4 10 CAM Mirror Modes With all mirror modes the position of the CAM origin must be considered With mirroring activated the CAM origin should be set to the upper left corner of the layout element to ensure positive coordinates output With the CAM origin set to default automatically replaces the CAM origin to produce positive output coordinates only To indicate CAM mirror mode settings a mirror mode specific example text and an arrow are placed at the CAM origin marker if CAM mirroring and or rotation is selected All Layers Mode The All Layers Mode function is us
445. s Left The standard rotation angle setting above will cause symbols to be automatically rotated by 90 degree on subsequent load operations Use the following commands to place some more symbols at 90 degree rotation angles Symbols Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name c Move to 30 80 Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name d Move to 220 180 Add Symbol Part Name Library Element Name s 1dil Move to 50 140 Next Symbol Label Move to 90 140 Next Symbol Label Move to 130 140 Next Symbol Label Move to 170 140 Use the following commands to reset the standard rotation angle to O degree and place some more symbols Symbols Set Default Angle 0 Degrees Left Next Symbol Label Move to 80 70 Next Symbol Label Move to 80 50 Next Symbol Label Move to 80 30 Circuit Design CAE Page 2 35 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual All library symbols stored to the project file are directly available for repeated load operations l e we can also place the symbol CD4081 which was created in chapter 2 2 2 and stored to the project file demo dab without accessing an external library file Use the following commands to place some CD4081 symbols note that mouse click and popup menu features are utilized for specifying the part name and selecting the library element i e no keyboard input is necessary for performing the following operations Symbols Add S
446. s are PRINT and PRINTFOR The formal syntax of the PRINT command is PRINT lt parameters gt where lt parameters gt specify the list of output items separated by commas Output items enclosed in quotation marks are printed as literal text QUOTES keyword can be used to print quotation marks The TAB keyword prints a tab character The CR keyword prints a newline Other output items can be specified with attribute names as listed below followed by lt length gt lt decimals gt where lt length gt is the output length and decimal ss is the output precision for the corresponding number and or string value Negative lt length gt values apply for left aligned output and S lt length gt lt decimals gt will include leading zeros Default values are 3 for lt decimals gt and output item length for the lt length gt value The lt length gt value is adjusted to the output item length if necessary Distance values can be converted to mm or inch units by appending MM or INCH respectively The PRINT command can be applied as in PRINT QUOTES PINWIDEH 337 QUOTES output 3 756 sy PRINT QUOTES PINWIDTH 7 3 QUOTES output oos TEE AY PRINT QUOTES PINWIDTH 7 3 QUOTES As output 18 7536 Mz The PRINT command syntax allows for uppercase and or lowercase name and or attribute value outputs by adding blank separated UPPER or LOWER keywords after name or attribute speci
447. s can be provided on request Bartels AutoEngineer FabView Bartels AutoEngineer FabView is a low cost PCB layout viewer with manufacturing data output functions BAE FabView is intended for PCB manufacturing departments and service providers who only have to produce manufacturing data and print plot outputs but don t have to edit layouts BAE FabView can be used together with BAE Professional and or BAE HighEnd BAE FabView provides the same functionality however the functions for saving layout design changes to BAE project files are deactivated Introduction Page 1 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 1 2 BAE System Components Bartels AutoEngineer basically consists of a Schematic Editor a Layout Editor with Autoplacement and Autorouter and a CAM Processor with a supplemental module for viewing and processing CAM data A Packager program module and a Backannotation function are provided for automatic forward and backward annotation of net list data from the schematics to the layout and vice versa BAE supports all phases of modern computer aided PCB design including schematic capture physical PCB layout featuring powerful Autoplacement and Autorouting facilities and finally generating all of the required manufacturing data and documentation See figure 1 1 for a design flow diagram of the Bartels AutoEngineer CAE CAD CAM Gerber Photoplot LAYOUT HPGL F Penplot Layout Editor with PCLHP Schematic Editor Autoplac
448. s can be used to save and restore element specific parameters such as the zoom area color setup etc The toolbar selection event must be used to start User Language programs which are linked to toolbar elements The zoom event can be used to apply an update request to a design view management feature Bartels User Language also provides system functions for performing key programming changing menu assignments and defining toolbars These powerful features can be applied for user interface modifications Please note that a large number of additional functions included with the CAM Processor menu are implemented through the User Language programs delivered with the BAE software See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language chapter 4 2 lists all User Language programs provided with the BAE software Neural Rule System A series of advanced Bartels AutoEngineer features are implemented through the integrated Neural Rule System See chapter 6 3 2 for the rule system applications provided with the Bartels AutoEngineer Some of these applications allow for special manufacturing data outputs and for extended control over manufacturing data generation processes PCB Design CAD Page 4 121 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 5 Plot Parameters The CAM Processor supports a series of general parameters for controlling the CAM output such as plot tolerance CAM rotation CAM mirror mod
449. s menu provides functions for creating modifying and deleting connections and or busses on SCM sheet level Selecting the Connection Point Marker Use the following commands to select the marker symbol tconnector to be the connection point marker for indicating T shaped connections Settings Set Junction Point Please confirm Y N y Junction Point Name junction tconnector The connection point marker is a special marker symbol The connection point marker symbol should contain a normal graphic area instead of a contact area as with the pin marker symbols The connection point marker symbol junction is assigned on default note that the system expects this marker symbol to be available in the SCM standard symbol library see also the description of the SCMDEFLIBRARY command supported by the BSETUP utility program Graphic Control Function Input Grid Contact areas on pin symbols are utilized for displaying net list changes on SCM sheet level As soon as a pin is connected correctly the contact area defined on the corresponding pin marker will disappear thus providing most useful graphical indication of net list changes This feature is required since BAE allows connections ending at any point as to be utilized for bus definitions see below Note that single segment pin connections will also cause the pin contact area to fade out thus providing a convenient way of marking pins which should not be connected as already being pr
450. s tapping sub bus definitions bus naming etc Both numerical and arbitrary alphanumerical names can be used for bus signals Incremental net list data update is included with all bus definition features The SCM library even supports bus synthesis on part level thus providing highest flexibility at the creation of symbols of any complexity The BAE system supports hierarchical circuit design It is possible to define SCM block circuit diagrams which then can be referenced from other SCM plans using special block symbols For correct net list data management a distinction between global and local signals is possible The Undo Redd facilities allow to use the Schematic Editor without fear of causing damage Up to twenty commands can be reversed or undone by applying the Undo function and then reprocessed with the Redo function Undo Redo ensures data security and provides a powerful feature for estimating design alternatives With the Bartels User Language integrated to the Schematic Editor the user is able to implement enhanced CAE functions and macros user specific post processors report and test functions etc User Language programs can be called by applying the function from the File menu or by pressing a key on the keyboard hot key The Schematic Editor provides a series of enhanced features such as group functions arbitrary attribute definitions and part and or net attribute value settings au
451. scription file test fon containing definitions for and with 4 corner points and 2 polygons each Library font name FONT test x ASCE Code 38 For UM CHAR 33 Lower vertical line POLY 1675 16797 Upper vertical Mine POLY Whe d3 6 Ao ASCII code 34 for mu CHAR 34 Left line POLY 12720 47 32 7 js Righe line 7 POLY 16 32 247 207 END The font description file listed above can be transferred to the font library file ged fnt by applying FONTCONV as in gt fontconv test ged Files ged fnt BAE font library file in BAE programs directory See also FONTEXTR Diagnosis The error messages issued by FONTCONV are intended to be self explanatory Warnings FONTCONV overwrites existing fonts in the destination file without any comment Utilities Page 7 28 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 8 FONTEXTR Name fontextr Font Extraction Utility Synopsis fontextr fontname libraryfile Description The FONTEXTR utility program analyzes BAE internal vector font data and generates an editable ASCII font description file FONTEXTR accepts the font name fontname as first argument This is the name of the font to be extracted from the font file FONTEXTR writes the ASCII font data to a file named lt fontname gt fon FONTEXTR accepts the font library file name 1ibraryfile as second argument This file must have an extension of fnt but this
452. sed by the current router pass display n m The status line ends with the current pass number c and the total number p of passes to be processed display c p The values displayed with the router pass status line cannot be used for accurate total routing time predictions since the required time for completing the routing of each net and or connection strongly depends on the current routing complexity The menu is used to set parameters for controlling graphical output The zoom functions Zoom All Zoom In Zoom Out are used to select the workspace to be displayed Usually one would use Zoom Al to display the complete Autorouter work area i e the workspace designated by the board outline Zoom All is the default setting after starting the Autorouter The functions for changing the zoom factor Zoom In and Zoom Out and the Redraw function can only be executed if layout data is already loaded The Change Colors function is used to change the current color setup The Load Colors function is used to load a predefined color table On default the Autorouter uses the color table named standard from the ged dat system file of the BAE programs directory It is recommended to use a color setup which displays all routing layers When routing with blind and buried vias it is also a good idea to change the color setup to distinguish different via types The function is used to set the width at whi
453. selected with the Assign Symboltags function must correspond with the tag pin types of the selected tag symbols i e either a symbol a pin or a net named by label can be assigned to each tag pin The attribute value assignments of net list tag symbols are automatically transferred to the assigned target objects by the Packager Special processing of predefined attributes such as plname Srpname Sroutwidth Spowwidth etc stays in effect The Sroutwidth attribute can be tagged to pins to define pin specific routing widths by assigning the required millimeter distance value 2 4 6 Templates Certain parts of the circuitry such as legends plug pin assignments or router control definitions often are quite similar or even equal for different designs The Bartels AutoEngineer data base concept supports multiple use of such circuit design templates i e templates can be defined and referred as if they would be library elements Templates can be saved and copied either by using group functions Save Group Load Group or by applying the function from the menu and utilizing the COPYDDB utility program for copying requested SCM elements to desired project files Circuit Design CAE Page 2 53 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 4 7 Exiting the Schematic Editor Don t forget to save the currently edited SCM element before exiting the Schematic Editor File Save Element Returning to Main Menu
454. sertion equipment and pick and place machines The CAM Processor produces insertion data in generic format where all texts placed on a selectable insertion data layer are listed with coordinates in 1 100mm integer units and rotation angles in degree units It is recommended to define a special documentary layer for insertion data output and to place the S text string on that layer on each part symbol thus representing the part name placed at the pick point for the automatic insertion equipment e g at pin 1 for parts with drilled pins or at the part pin gravity point for SMDs The insertion data documentary layer should be defined with the PHYSICAL text attribute to fix the positions of insertion data text strings See also chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description of the LAYDOCLAYER command of the BSETUP utility program The Insertion Output function from the Drilling Insertion menu is used to generate insertion data output After activating the nsertion Output function the user is prompted for the insertion data layer and the insertion data output file name Note the Multiple Layers option provided with the layer selection menu of the function This option can be used for writing the insertion data of multiple selectable layers to a single output file With the Multiple Layers option a popup menu is provided for selecting and or deselecting insertion data output layers using the left or right mouse button The button is use
455. sferring the design onto a different computer the trace edit display mode rules must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise trace edit display mode assignments won t work Via Check Range for Manual Routing A Layout Editor design rule check function for displaying valid via positions during manual routing can be activated with the Nia Check Range function from the Other Functions submenu of the The via check range is specified in multiples of the currently selected input grid with valid via check ranges from 1 to 5 A via check range of 1 only checks the current grid point a via check range of two includes all grid points adjacent to the current grid point thus totalling the via check area to 9 grid points etc Valid via positions are indicated through a small white circle with a diameter equal to the width of the currently routed trace but not exceeding 40 percent of the input grid width The via check is deactivated if the input grid is disabled or if the No Via Check option from the Nia Check Range function is selected Neural Rule System Page 6 9 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Dashed Polygon Line Display Assigning one of the poly dashi poly dash2 or poly dash3 rules from the polygon rul rule definition file see User Language directory baeulc to a documentary line cause the documentary line to be displayed in dash mode poly dash1 creates standard mode dash lines poly dash2 creates
456. si ie AGE Ke AE di Ge Ke BE Ke ee Ki ad REESEN 4 4 1 Part SOU EER EE EE EE EE OE N LE EE EE 4 4 2 Matrix Placement 4 4 3 Initial Placement sirinin se Rae EE KERE EE RE AE EGO RE KROEG EE EGO RE ERGE EE Ke ARE EG RE ERG EE Ke EE EG Ge AGE 444 Placement Optimization esse AA 4 71 PUTO ROUTE Ee 4 72 4 5 1 Starting the Autorouter Laan GA stews ender Ge ede ee NE ek Re EN ARA 4 73 4 5 2 Autorouter Main MENU uses ee Aa 4 74 4 5 3 Customized Autorouter User Interface use esse esse Re RR EER RE AR EER RE RR RE AR Re RR EE ER Ee RR Re ER Ee RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 75 4 5 4 in built Autorouter System Features esse esse Re ER RA ER Rae ER RE ER Rae ER RE ER Rae ER Re NANANA ER Rae ek ee 4 76 d ch lt AutOrouter Options ii N Ese AO Naan Di naa ee Ee gee dee 4 78 4 5 6 Autorouter Control iseer ese RE AREA AA 4 82 4 57 Autorouter Strategy i s iseer AA KERE EE De Ee en Rek Koi ok ee aaa 4 84 4 5 8 Autorouter FUNCTIONS ee EER RR EE RR RR EER RR REG RR ERGE RR RE RARR RR aaae ARK RARR RR RE adie RR ai Dadana a iaiaeiaeiaa aani RE 4 87 4 5 9 Using the AutorouteF sees sees ee RR EER AA 4 90 Special Layout Feature S iss sessies ss sesde gawe G AGAR GANAGG GHANA 4 94 4 6 1 Batch Design Rule Check Report esse esse esse EER EER ER ERA EE EG A EREEA EER GA ER E RA ER EG RR ERA EER Ge ER Ee ER Rae RR Ee ea 4 94 4 6 2 Color Setup Color Tables Pick Preference Layer esse ese ese Re RE EE AE RE RR EE ER EE RR EE ER Ee ER EE E
457. sical part The formal syntax of the xlat command is salta sp IisieE NE CONE pprt i Or sopas NOE a or pEIISE NG where lt l1plist gt is a list of the logical pin names on the SCM symbol and lt pplist gt are the corresponding physical pin lists The logical pin name set can translate to more than one physical pin name set to provide gate definition features The number and sequence of the pin name definitions must match xlat commands with alternations i e xlats with or options for gate specifications automatically introduce cross part gate swap definitions if no explicit swap internal command is defined with the corresponding part swap Command The swap command defines the way in which pins and gates can be swapped when working in the layout system l e the definitions stored with the swap command is used by the BAE layout system to check whether particular pin gate swaps are allowed or not The formal syntax of the swap command is swap lt swapdefinition gt where lt swapdefinition gt defines the relationship between pins and gates These definitions use brackets to identify the swap hierarchy as in Pin Group Swap 1 T Gate Swap KA tt Pin Swap III where the square brackets can be omitted if no pin group exists Optionally the internal keyword can follow the swap keyword to forbid swaps between different parts newattr Command The newattr command enables information to be included in the physical net
458. sition the origin to make absolute coordinate references easier even for one command A special submenu can be activated with the right mouse button when manipulating objects in the graphic workarea placing moving elements creating polygons etc This submenu provides functions for specifying absolute or relative coordinate values accepts an absolute coordinate value referring to the origin of the currently loaded element Jump Relativel accepts a coordinate value relative to the previous input coordinate value eg when drawing polygons Floating point coordinates can be specified where fractional paris of corresponding numeric values must follow the decimal point Coordinate values are interpreted either in mm units or in inch units depending on whichever default input units are defined with the USERUNITS setup parameter see also chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description on how to define USERUNITS with the BSETUP utility program Non default metric input is forced by attaching mm to the input value Non default imperial input is forced by attaching the double quote character to the input value Metric and imperial values can be mixed arbitrarily Precision throughout the whole system is ensured with BAE s floating point database based on common internal system units The system also support polar coordinate input through the Polar coordinates button and subsequent radius and angle value prompts Attaching an R to the angle value will force
459. ss A Z Excellon Drill Data Sorting Drill Data The fort Drill Data function from the Utilities menu is used to activate an algorithm for sorting the currently loaded drill data to minimize the distances between subsequent drill holes Note that Sort Drill Data performs separate sorting on each of the currently loaded drilling data sets Overall sort on multiple drill data sets can be applied by loading all data sets save them as single data set clear the memory reload the single data set and run the Sort Drill Data function on the reloaded data set Note also that the complexity of the drill sort algorithm grows quadratically with the number of drillings per tool thus raising CPU time requirements enormously when working on large layouts and or panels gt 1000 drill holes Use the following commands to sort the currently loaded drill data and write the sorted drill data to a file named demosort dri1 Utilities Sort Drill Data File Save Drill Data Drill Data File Name demosort drl PCB Design CAD Page 4 150 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 8 7 Retrieving Layouts from Gerber Data Loading Gerber Data All of the required Gerber data must be loaded to the CAM View module before generating a layout from that Gerber data When loading Gerber data for layout generation the line drawn structures should be loaded to their respective layers whilst the flashed structures can be loaded to e
460. ssing is drawing and or text information required for documentation purposes or CAM output Creating Drawing Information for the Insertion Plan Use the following commands to create a documentary line on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer for indicating the part contour Areas Add Document Line Insertion Plan Move to 0 15 0 05 Move to 0 45 0 05 Move to 0 45 0 15 Move to 0 15 0 15 Move to 0 15 0 05 Done Use the following commands to create two insertion Plan Side 2 documentary lines connecting the part contour with the pins Areas Add Document Line Insertion Plan Move to 0 10 0 10 Move to 0 15 0 10 Done Copy Area Move to 0 10 0 10 Move to 0 45 0 10 PCB Design CAD Page 4 36 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Defining the Part Name Reference Use the following commands to place the text string on the Insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer Text Drill Add Text EI Document Layer Insertion Plan Text se Move to 0 15 0 05 The text string is utilized as a variable for indicating the name of corresponding references on superior hierarchy levels l e a text string placed on layout part level will display pertinent part reference names e g IC01 R20 V2 on the PCB layout Such reference text definitions can also be placed on a special layer for generating insertion data The C
461. ssues the Cannot load character font error message if the font used in the loaded element is not available in the ged fnt font file from the BAE programs directory Without character font data the CAM Processor fails to plot any text defined on the currently loaded layout element You should either supply the requested character font e g use the FONTCONV utility program or assign an existing font to the layout element using the Select Foni function from the Layout Editor red menu before producing any CAM output PCB Design CAD Page 4 117 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7 2 CAM Processor Main Menu The CAM Processor standard sidemenu user interface provides a menu area on the right side consisting of the main menu on top and the currently active menu below that main menu After entering the CAM Processor the menu is active and the menu cursor points to the Load Element function The Windows and Motif versions of the CAM Processor can optionally be operated with a pull down menu user interface providing a horizontally arranged main menu bar on top The WINMENUMODE command of the BSETUP utility program is used to switch between SIDEMENU and PULLDOWN Windows Motif menu configurations see chapter 7 2 for more details The following main menu is always available whilst processing layout data with the CAM Processor Display Control Plot Gerber Photoplot Drilling Insertion Plot Parameters Utilit
462. t Size 2 00mm 3 Move to 4 11 Use the following commands to place the amp string text size 4mm for denoting the AND gate function of the symbol Text m Add Text EI Text amp Text Size Text Size 3 00mm 4 Move to 6 4 Use the following commands to place the gate name CD4081 with a text size of 1mm Text Add Text Text CD4081 Text Size EE N Ee Move to 5 1 Use the following commands to define a commentary text referring the p1name attribute text size 1mm is still activated Text Add Text Text plname Commentary Text Move to 5 0 The Schematic Editor distinguishes between standard and commentary text Both standard text and commentary text are displayed on the screen but only standard text will be plotted thus featuring a mechanism of fading out certain text and or attributes on the generation of plot data Texts can also be defined with frames Such definitions are possible with the Frame 1 Frame 2 and Open Frames options from the submenu to be activated with the right mouse button whilst moving texts with the Add Ted and or function Frame 1 creates a surrounding box at 1 8 text height distance Frame 2 creates a surrounding box at 1 4 text height distance removes the vertical frame line at the text origin Open Frames can be applied to define labels with dynamically adjusted text frames to be attached to connections Using large pens for plot o
463. t graphic operation These include important functions such as setting rotation angles and mirroring during placement specifying direct coordinate input Jump Relative Jump Absolute during placement or polygon point definition performing layer changes or setting trace widths during manual routing generating arcs whilst drawing lines or defining areas defining text sizes whilst moving texts finishing a manually routed trace or a polygon definition etc Each area and line or trace in the Bartels AutoEngineer is defined as a polygon The corresponding menus for the creation and manipulation of such items are Graphic in the Schematic Editor and Areas or Traces in the Layout Editor BAE supports different polygon types such as graphic area graphic line and dotted line in schematics or passive copper area active copper area keepout area documentary area documentary line copper fill workarea and trace in the layout system Each polygon can consist of an arbitrary number of polygon points and arc segments An arc segment is created by defining the arc segment start point then choose the requested orientation with submenu function Arc Lefi or Arc Right and select the arc center point and finally define the arc segment end point When finishing the polygon definition with the Done submenu function the system distinguishes between area and line definitions and the last polygon point is connected to the first point when creating
464. t specific airline display Nets which are faded out from airline display are excluded from the autorouting process Net specific airline display settings can be changed between router passes This allows for consecutive router passes to route different groups of nets such as busses of a certain circuit block or signals with certain attributes with specific routing options for preferred routing directions maximum via counts etc Area Block Routing in BAE HighEnd The Autorouter of BAE HighEnd considers net specific routing areas to be defined as documentary areas on signal layers with rule assignments containing a net type predicate for the net type See the nettype rul file in the User Language programs directory baeulc for net type rule definitions Up to eight different routing area net types can be assigned to each layout Routing areas and rule assignments with the GEDRULE User Language program must be defined in the Layout Editor Within a routing area the Autorouter can only route nets with a matching Snet type attribute Nets without Snettype value or with a nettype value different to the net type assignment of a certain routing area must not be routed in that area unless they connect to pins inside the routing area Nets of a certain net type are not restricted to net specific routing areas however they are preferably routed in the corresponding routing areas Routing outside the net specific routing area can be contr
465. tandard Trace Width Standard Minimum Distance The Bartels AutoEngineer works as a grid based router unless the gridless router of the Autorouter see below is activated The Routing Grid function from the Options menu is used to define the routing grid before starting the Autorouting process Table 4 1 lists the selectable standard routing grids Table 4 1 Autorouter Grids Standard Trace Width Standard Minimum Distance Routing Grid Via Offset mmj ml bei ri esel Lal mad o2 ma aal Lal al el a real JL o bi avo 2 aen os zl oa a aaen JL aal sl ul 2 een JL ad sl ul a The default routing grid setting at the first Autorouter call for a particular layout is 1 40 Inch std Each routing grid change is stored with the layout and also sets the standard trace width and minimum clearance distance values to the default settings for that grid see table 4 1 for the grid specific default values Both the standard trace width and the standard minimum distance can be changed after specifying a new routing grid use functions Trace Width and Minimum Distance respectively Note however that the sum of trace width minimum distance must not exceed the current routing grid otherwise the Autorouter issues an Incompatible options selected error message when starting the routing process note warnings such as Accepted for smaller default trace width and or Accepted for smaller minimum distance and modify
466. tc placed on the same signal layer PCB Design CAD Page 4 55 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Moving Part Names and Part Attribute Texts The Move Name function from the ed and or Parts menu is used to move part names Use the following commands to move the names of the SMD resistors named x104 and r105 on top of the parts Text Drill Move Name Move to r104 2 1 2 1 Move to 2 1 2 15 0 Move Name Move to r105 2 1 1 8 Move to 2 1 1 85 The Move Attribute function from the Parts and or Ted menu can be used for moving and or placing selectable part attributes Attribute text offsets defined through override the global text offset set with Move Name The attribute to be moved is selected through a mouse click on the attribute text Since part names are internally stored as attributes the Move function can also be used to move part names without changing the placement of other part attributes Part names and part attribute texts of group selected parts can be reset to their library defined default positions using the function implemented with the GEDGROUP User Language program Measuring The Layout Editor automatically activates a measuring function when placing new text with string This function determines the distance between the two input coordinates subsequently to be specified The resulting text string emerges
467. tc The toolbar selection event must be used to start User Language programs which are linked to toolbar elements The zoom event can be used to apply an update request to a design view management feature Bartels User Language also provides system functions for performing key programming changing menu assignments and defining toolbars These powerful features can be applied for user interface modifications Please note that a large number of additional functions included with the Layout Editor menu are implemented through the User Language programs delivered with the BAE software See the Bartels User Language Programmer s Guide for a detailed description of the Bartels User Language chapter 4 2 lists all User Language programs provided with the BAE software Neural Rule System A series of advanced Bartels AutoEngineer features are implemented through the integrated Neural Rule System See chapter 6 3 2 for the rule system applications provided with the PCB layout system PCB Design CAD Page 4 20 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 42 Layout Library Symbol Design The Bartels AutoEngineer is shipped with an extensive layout library Nevertheless you might require a certain layout symbol which has not yet been defined in these libraries This section shows in detail how to create layout library symbols The example symbols are created starting with the lowest DDB hierarchy level l e first of all some pad and padstack symbols are de
468. ted The Heat Trap Model options also support for different processing modes for pins and vias It is possible to decide whether heat trap connections should be generated for both pins and vias option Pin amp Via Heat Traps for pins only option Traps for vias only option Mia Heat Traps or if direct connections only should be generated option Direct Connect The Direct Connect option of the Heat Trap Mode function deactivates automatic heat trap generation when filling active copper The default Heat Trap Mode option Use Heat Traps is used to activate automatic heat trap generation i e to create thermal relieves for copper area connections With Use Heat Traps selected the system prompts for the heat trap junction width and an optional heat trap specific clearance distance where invalid inputs won t change current settings On default the heat trap junction width is set to 0 3mm and the heat trap clearance is set to zero i e heat traps are isolated using standard minimum clearance settings BAE HighEnd provides the HT Junction option for specifying the maximum heat trap connections count 1 2 3 or 4 The default heat trap generation sequence is left right bottom top PCB Design CAD Page 4 107 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Copper Fill Workarea Definition Copper fill wor
469. ted Channel Routing Grid Free Channel Trace Via Obstructed Channel Trace Via Obstructed Channel Figure 4 5 Routing with or without Via Offset The standard trace width is the track width to be used for routing the connections The standard trace width applies for all nets except for those where certain net attributes are defined If a routwidth net attribute value is set for a particular net then the entire net is routed with that routing width If a powwidth value is set for a particular net then all library defined power supply pins of that net are connected with that power width The standard minimum distance sets the default minimum clearance distance to be considered by the Autorouter when routing the connections The standard minimum distance applies for all nets except for those where non default minimum distance values are assigned with the mindist net attribute The Autorouter automatically performs high priority processing of nets with net attribute values set The priority net attribute can be used to specify explicit net specific routing priorities See the LOGLIB utility program description in chapter 7 11 of this manual for more details on how to use net attributes for controlling the routing process PCB Design CAD Page 4 79 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Signal Layer Count and Layer Assignment The Signal Layer Coun function from the Options menu is used to specify the number of signal layers t
470. ted to floating point information A powerful Undo Redd function is provided to ensure data security and to allow for comfortable evaluation of different design modifications Real time graphic interaction re display at zoom and pan moving graphic elements etc is self evident as well as graphical built in features such as definable color tables or display query and highlight of elements connections and errors etc A pool is used for managing data in main memory This also controls basic features such as the display functions or Undo Redo Complex operations such as moving parts are extremely fast since all data is converted in real time from internal hierarchical representation to vector polygon oriented display mode Fast workspace and clipping window checks are performed on graphical elements to guarantee high speed re display These functions are implemented with internal programming interfaces to support different graphic controllers Large objects like wiring paths and areas are stored in compressed internal format to avoid redundant memory usage An entire trace path located on a particular layer occupies just one pool element as well as e g a 84 pin PGA on subsequent placement only the connectivity is stored separately the geometry refers to the symbol instantiated with the first placement request The maximum number of pool elements on 32 bit computer systems is 2431 2 147 483 648 l e the pool on non virtual systems is l
471. tels AutoEngineer IC ASIC design system CP acronym for the Cell Placement program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer IC ASIC design system CR acronym for the Cell Router program module of the Bartels AutoEngineer IC ASIC design system UL acronym for the Bartels User Language programming language ULC acronym for the Bartels User Language Compiler ULI acronym for the Bartels User Language Interpreter VI Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Documentation Conventions Unless otherwise mentioned the following symbolic conventions are used throughout the Bartels AutoEngineer documentation Lineprint Lineprint font represents text output generated by the system Boldface Boldfaced words or characters in format or command descriptions represent topic definitions or syntactic terminals i e commands or keywords to be inserted directly Emphasize Emphasized text is used for optical accentuation Double quotes denote names and or path names or enclose characters and or character sequences directly to be inserted Square brackets enclose optional items in format or command descriptions Braces enclose a list of items in format or command description from which one has to be chosen A vertical bar separates items in a list of choices lt gt Angle brackets enclose the logical name of a key on the keyboard In format or command descriptions angle brackets enclose values to be supplied gt Bold
472. tem management procedures significantly All system supported rules can be conveniently set through menu assigned User Language programs In depth knowledge of the Neural Rule System is not necessary for these rule system applications Neural Rule System Page 6 5 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 6 2 Rule Definition 6 2 1 Bartels Rule Specification Language Rules and or rule sets can be defined using a programming language similar to Prolog however with special operators to find not only all possible but rather the optimum solution to a given rule system query or output request Rules can be specified for and assigned to individual items such as parts nets traces etc The Rule System also supports more complex tasks such as special design rule checks or autorouter passes with certain parameter setups according to the routing problem The Rule System uses a neural net approach to focus the rule evaluation on the probably best path 6 2 2 Bartels Rule System Compiler The RULECOMP utility program is the compiler to be used for translating Bartels Rule Specification source code See Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 7 14 for a more detailed description of the RULECOMP utility program Compiled rules are either applied automatically by certain in built BAE system functions or can be activated with customer defined User Language programs Neural Rule System Page 6 6 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 6 3 Rule System
473. ter File Autorouter Use the following commands to reduce the signal layer count to 2 and reload the data produced by the preceding router pass Options Signal Layer Count 2 Signal Layers Autorouter Load Traces The Load Traces function fails to load the traces previously routed on layer 3 since the signal layer count is now set to 2 l e the router progress message in the status line will indicate 9 open connections max 44 of 53 routes and a via count of 8 instead of 13 after finishing the Load Traces function Use the following commands to switch off preferred routing direction optimization and start the Full Autorouter to complete the routing Strategy Optimizer Direction Normal Autorouter Full Autorouter The completes the routing now on two instead of three signal layers and with 6 vias Use the following commands to return to the Layout Editor File Layout Editor PCB Design CAD Page 4 92 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual After correctly performing all operations of this chapter the PCB layout example should look like the one shown in figure 4 7 o a ME Ma Figure 4 7 Layout after Autorouting PCB Design CAD Page 4 93 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 6 Special Layout Features This section describes advanced features and special functions provided with the BAE PCB design system 4 6 1 Batch Design Rule Check Report The Batch DRC fun
474. ter might cause irreparable damage of design data Design Data Backup Kindly note the importance of backing up your design data when working on real projects Every now and then we are asked to restore damaged design data on faulty hard disks A hard disk can suffer a genuine loss of data by headcrash or other hardware defects and we are not able to help if not even a simple backup has been performed A regular backup of your project DDB files is strongly recommended You can also use the Autosave function from the Settings menu see above for activating the automatic design data backup feature Releasing Manufacturing Data Before generating and releasing manufacturing data you should always perform a complete design rule check using the Batch DRC function from the Utilities menu of the Layout Editor Subsequently the DRC result should be examined with the Report function Never start the CAM data output if clearance violations or short circuits are indicated since otherwise you might produce useless PCBs in almost any case Also ensure that the CAM process does not cause any troubles such as overdraw errors Apply CAM View on generated Gerber data for visual checks Furthermore it is recommended to perform extensive tests on prototypes before starting any mass production You should be able to achieve good project and production results with the Bartels AutoEngineer if you follow these instructions
475. tes according to the current Color Assignment With Layer Assignment the Change Colors function provides a layer selection menu With D Code Assignment the Change Colors function prompts for a D Code number and a drawing mode where Flash selects flashed structures 1 Line selects line drawn structures and b Border selects drawing area outlines The default D Code color setup is light gray for flashed structures gray for line drawn structures and red for border lines Use the following commands to select the yellow color for the line drawn structures which have been generated using D Code 10 View Color Assignment D Code Assignment Change Colors Gerber D Code Number 10 999 10 Mode f lash l ine b order Move to Desired Color yellow Black color assignments can be used to suppress the display of selected elements Report The Report function from the Utilities menu provides a statistical report on what apertures and or D Codes are how often used for what kind of structures Use the following commands to activate the Repor function Utilities Report After activating the command above the following listing should appear in the graphic workarea DIO 0 30 mm Rnd Lines 58 D11 0 25 mm Rnd Lines 454 Die 1 52 mm Rnd Flashed 64 D18 2 54 mm Rnd Flashed 16 Lines A 1 40 mm Sqr Flashed 20 Struc
476. teus SCM Layout Save Date US Format Spltsdate2de SCM Layout Save Date German Format two digit year display Spltsdate2us SCM Layout Save Date US Format two digit year display Spltstime SCM Layout Save Time Spltpname Layout element name for last Packager run SPltpname Layout element name for last Packager run uppercase Spltpdatede Date German Format of last Packager run Spltpdateus Date US Format of last Packager run Spltpdate2de Date German Format two digit year display of last Packager run Spltpdate2us Date US Format two digit year display of last Packager run Spltptime Time of last Packager run Spltcname Layout Element Name pltcdatede Date of last name update German Format Attribute Name Function Meaning Spltcdateus Date of last name update US Format Spltcdate2de Date of last name update German Format two digit year display Spltcdate2us Date of last name update US Format two digit year display Spltctime Time of last name update pltfbname File Base Name Element specific Project File Name without ddb extension P1tfbname File Base Name Element specific Project File Name without ddb extension uppercase pltfbsname File Base Short Name Element specific Project File Name without ddb extension and directory path P1t fbsname File Base Short Name Element specific Project File Name without ddb extension and directory path uppercase Spltecomment DDB Element Comment Element spec
477. th the keyword SETUP and must end with the keyword END Commentary text can be placed between and LAYMENUTEXT Command The LAYMENUTEXT command is used to set the names of the most used signal layers in the BAE layout system menus The formal syntax of the LAYMENUTEXT command is LAYMENUTEXT LINE lt line gt lt text gt lt layer gt where lt line gt is the menu line number in range 1 to 12 lt text gt is the text to be displayed in the layer selection menus and lt layer gt is the signal layer to be used range 1 to 100 A special LAYMENUTEXT command format is given by LAYMENUTEXT TOPLAYER lt text gt The above command above defines the menu text for the top signal layer option of the layer selection menus LAYPADLAYER Command The LAYPADLAYER command is used to enable or disable layer assignments on BAE layout library pad hierarchy level The formal syntax of the LAYPADLAYER command is LAYPADLAYER ENABLE and or LAYPADLAYER DISABLI eal EI The LAYPADLAYER command is historic and is used to support earlier versions of the BAE software It is strongly recommended to use the DISABLE option when creating new layout elements The pad layer assignment should only be enabled for updating old job files LAYPLTMARKLAY Command The LAYPLTMARKLAY command defines a documentary layer to be used by the CAM Processor for film registration marks This layer
478. th the layout and the net list After successfully generating the connectivity the system is capable of instantly controlling and or correlating each layout modification with the net list definitions This highly sophisticated layout design feature is called Full Copper Sharing or True Connectivity Full copper sharing enables real time recognition of missing parts open connections short circuits etc The load layout function issues the Connected pins missing warning message if certain net list parts are not yet placed on the layout Use the following commands to set the coordinate display mode to inch which is preferable for the subsequent operations Settings Coordinate Display Display Inch From now on Inch units are used during graphic cursor movement for displaying coordinates in the info field PCB Design CAD Page 4 44 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Board Outline The design of a new layout should start with the definition of the board outline This is a continuous polygon line defining the perimeter of the PCB Use the following commands to create a board outline as shown in figure 4 2 Areas Add Board Outline E Move to 0 1 0 3 m Move to 0 2 0 3 Arc Left Move to 0 4 0 3 Move to 0 6 0 3 Move to 2 8 0 3 Move to 2 8 2 2 Move to 2 3 2 7 Move to 0 4 2 7 m Arc Left Move to 0 4 2 5 Move to 0 2 2 5 Move to 0 1 2 5 Done The boar
479. the previous chapter You should change to the directory where the demo dab file resides Start the Schematic Editor through the BAE main menu and use the following commands to call for transferring the physical net list named board from the demo ddb design file back to the schematics Utilities Backannotation Design File Name demo Layout Element Name board Backannotation displays the following messages ELS BACKANNOTATION UTILITY Design File Name Layout Element Name No error occurred The No error occurred message means that was successfully completed and the logical net list in project file demo ddb has been annotated with the physical net list named board Backannotation produces an assignment file named demo ass which is not required by the BAE design system You can use the part name changes report and the logical to physical pin mapping lists provided with this ASCII file for backannotating to foreign CAE systems Backannotation annotates physical net list modifications such as part name changes and pin gate swaps to the schematic sheets You can check this by examining the SCM sheet elements after successfully running the Backannotation Packager Backannotation Page 3 29 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 4 Net List Utilities Within the Bartels AutoEngineer design process the net list is usually created with the Schemati
480. the BAE design database The user is able to implement user specific programs for exporting any data such as part lists net lists geometry data drill data insertion data test data milling data etc in freely definable formats User Language programs can be called by applying the Run User Scrip function from the File menu or by pressing a key on the keyboard hot key CAM View The CAM View module provides features for displaying Gerber data drilling data Sieb amp Meier and or Excellon and milling data Excellon in order to check CAM data validity and to estimate the efficiency of tool usage CAM View features multiple input and sorted output with variable offsets and adjustable aperture tables to support panelization CAM View also provides a powerful function for translating Gerber data to BAE layout design data i e with CAM View the user is able to import Gerber data produced by foreign PCB layout systems With Bartels User Language integrated to the CAM View module the user is able to implement enhanced CAM View functions and macros user specific batch procedures report and test functions etc User Language programs can be called by applying the function from the File menu or by pressing a key on the keyboard hot key PCB Design CAD Page 4 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 41 2 Starting the Layout System It is recommended to start the Bartels AutoEngineer from the directory where the desi
481. the BSETUP utility program After successfully processing the layout the Backannotation will generate a modified logical net list in the project file For user information purposes also creates an assignments file under the design file name with extension ass The assignments file is an ASCII file containing an annotation report part name changes logical to physical pin mapping The system issues the No errors occurred message after successfully completing the Backannotation process and the user can press any key to exit from the Backamnotation function Errors during Backannotation usually result from a wrong layout element name specification and or from missing logical net list data Missing SCM symbols and or parts could also prevent the Backannotation from completing successfully The Backamnotation lists missing symbols parts These must be replaced on the SCM sheet s to allow for subsequent processes to be completed successfully the missing parts problem could also be solved by simply re running the Packager instead of the Backannotation but all netlist specific layout modifications scheduled for such as pin gate swaps would then be lost Packager Backannotation Page 3 28 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 3 3 Example This section describes how to run Backamnotation on the demo ddb example project file which has been created in
482. the Bedel This is true even for complex processing such as group functions or User Language program execution ensures data security and provides a powerful feature for estimating design alternatives Display The View or Display menu can either be activated by selecting the corresponding main menu item or by pressing the middle mouse button Activation through the middle mouse button is even possible whilst performing a graphical manipulation such as placing or moving an object The or menu provides useful functions for changing display options such as zoom window zoom scale input and or display grids grid and or angle lock color settings etc The Viey or Display menu also contains advanced display functions such as Find Par and Highlight Nef Files The Fies menu provides functions for creating loading saving copying replacing and deleting DDB elements The Files menu also allows to load and or store color tables or to call important database management functions such as listing DDB file contents and performing library update Symbols On SCM sheet level the functions from the Symbols menu are used for placing moving and deleting symbols labels and module ports for assigning attribute values and for displaying symbol logic definitions from the Logical Library On symbol and label level the functions from the Symbols
483. the FRAMECOLOR BSETUP command see also chapter 7 2 Directories with subdirectories are displayed in hierarchically arranged graphic frames Directories without subdirectories are displayed with their name only Directories including files with extension ddb DDB files are marked by appending a plus sign to the end of the directory name The Ned button of the directory selection menus is used to scroll in the directory selection menu The Zoom button can be used to switch to a more detailed display of the selected directory the Parend button can be used to switch back to the directory survey Selecting the bori button will cancel the file name query An error message such as No subdirectories found is issued if there are no subdirectories available in the directory defined by PROJROOTDIR After selecting a valid directory the file name query is reactivated with the file names of the selected directory provided for selection With the Windows and Motif user interfaces of the BAE software Windows and or Motif specific popup menus for file name selection with directory navigation and listboxes for element name queries are automatically provided The file and element name queries provide default names current project file name selected library current element name etc if at all possible and or appropriate The Delete Element functions from the File menus can only be applied to
484. the following commands to return to the BAE main menu the currently loaded SCM element is automatically saved File Main Menu Now the BAE main menu is activated Use the following commands to run the Packager to transfer the SCM changes to the layout i e to the physical net list named board the demo ddb job file can be used as design library since it contains all of the information required for packaging Packager Design File Name demo Design Library Name demo Layout Element Name board The Packager issues the No error occurred message after successfully completing the forward annotation to the layout Hit any key to return to the BAE main menu and use the following command to start the Layout Editor Layout Now the Layout Editor is activated Use the following commands to load the annotated layout Load Element layout w A connectivity generation is accomplished after loading the layout Note that there are no airlines connected anymore to the parts IC1 and R104 since the package types have been changed for these parts Use the following commands to delete all parts with changed package type assignments introduced by net list modifications Parts Delete Update Please confirm Y N y The confirm prompt is only activated if there are parts placed with wrong package types The function can be used for checking the layout for wrong package types simply type n to the confirm prompt if you want to ab
485. the screen However this layout contains only those objects which are directly defined on the layout The lower level library elements parts padstacks pads are not displayed since they have not been copied with the Save Element As function to prevent from overwriting existing library elements in the democopy ddb destination file The system will issue either the connected pins missing message or the Cannot load all elements display not complete message in the status line Use the following commands to correlate the job specific library of DDB file democopy ddb with the contents of DDB source file demo ddb File Update Library Layout File Name Element Name si Sites File Name demo After a few moments the system should issue a Library elements replaced message which means that all library elements referenced from the currently loaded layout have been copied from the specified library source file Use the following commands to re load the layout in order to display the library update Update Library works on DDB file level it doesn t affect elements in main memory File Load Element Layout File Name Element Name PCB Design CAD Page 4 112 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Update Library function can also be used to correlate the job specific library with the contents of a different layout library file Use the following commands to perform a library update f
486. thout the dab extension Spltfbsname displays the project file name without the ddb extension and without the directory path The pltecomment system attribute can be used to assign and display DDB element comments Element comments can be assigned through the File Element Comment submenu or for the currently loaded element through the Settings Settings dialog The element selection dialogs are displaying element comments together with the element names The SCM PDF output functions are displaying SCM sheet comments rather than SCM sheet element names when creating tables of contents for SCM plans The Packager supports net name assignments through the netname net attribute Such net names have priority over net name assignments through label connections l e the Snetname attribute can be used to control net name assignments for nets with different labels which would otherwise be named after the label which comes first in the alphabet Snettype pin attributes are automatically transferred to connected nets The Snettype value mixed is assigned to nets with different nettype attribute values The BAE HighEnd Packager automatically transfers drcb1k pin attributes to connected nets The drcblk attribute value addresses a BAE HighEnd design rule check parameter block to be assigned to the corresponding net The Spowpin pin attribute setting causes the system to set a symbol pin s connection width to the
487. tion with a long time to application user period We are aware of the fact that the signal router could produce unpredictable results e g elimination of connections in cases where symbol movement might cause net list conflicts It is recommended to move symbols in a step by step approach rather than to move long distances and to refrain from placing symbols onto each other You can always use the function and retry in cases where you are not pleased with the result Circuit Design CAE Page 2 45 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Busses The next operation is to connect the pins on the right side of the relay contacts KK100 and KK101 to a bus First of all use the following commands to zoom to a suitable workspace Zoom Window LC Move to Window Start Point 190 40 Move to Window End Point 290 100 Use the following commands to define a bus Connections Add Connection Move to Connection Start Point 240 90 Move to Connection Corner Point 240 50 Move to Connection End Point 250 50 Define Bus Move to Connection EI The definition of a bus is accomplished by defining a connection without pin contacts and then selecting that connection with the Define Bus function The system uses beam shaped outlines for displaying bus connections Use the following commands to define the bus tap OUTO and connect that bus tap with pin NO of part KK100 Connections Em Tap Bus Net Name Range
488. to 0 1 2 7 Done Delete Group The Pin Gate Swap function from the Parts menu is used to perform manual pin gate swaps Use the following commands to swap the pins 1 and 2 of the switches named s1000 s1001 s1002 and s1003 respectively Parts Pin Gate Swap Move to s1000 1 0 2 2 3 ii Move to s1000 2 0 5 2 3 JE Pin Gate Swap Move to s1001 1 0 2 2 1 I Move to s1001 2 0 5 2 1 Ri Pin Gate Swap Move to s1002 1 0 2 1 9 000 Move to s1002 2 0 5 1 9 Maa Pin Gate Swap Move to s1003 1 0 2 1 7 00 Move to s1003 2 0 5 1 7 Mia Note how the Pin Gate Swap function provides graphical pin gate swap indicators A circle 0 6mm diameter Workspace color is displayed for every pin gate swap enabled pin when the Pin Gate Swap function is activated The indicator for the first selected pin turns into a filled square leaving only swappable pins marked by circles and character codes for the possible swap operations The character codes are P for pin swap G for gate swap and A Array for gate group swap Selecting black for the Workspace color deactivates the pin gate swap indicator display Each pin gate swap is performed using the corresponding pin gate swap definition from the Logical Library see also chapter 7 11 for a description of the LOGLIB utility program and chapter 3 2 for a description of the Packager
489. to list the current key bindings With the predefined menu assignments of UIFSETUP activated HLPKEYS can be called from the Key Bindings function of the Help menu Menu assignments and key bindings can be listed with the UIFDUMP User Language program The UIFRESET User Language program can be used to reset all currently defined menu assignments and key bindings UIFSETUP UIFDUMP and UIFRESET can also be called from the menu of the KEYPROG User Language program which provides additional facilities for online key programming and User Language program help info management The Windows and Motif pull down menu user interfaces of the Autorouter provide facilities for cascading submenu definitions Le submenus can be attached to other menu items The UIFSETUP User Language program configures cascading submenus for the pulldown menu interfaces of the Windows Motif Autorouter modules This allows for easy submenu function location and activation without having to activate and probably cancel submenus The function repeat facility provided through the right mouse button supports cascading menus to simplify repeated submenu function calls The following Windows Motif parameter setup dialogs are implemented for the Autorouter Settings Setting General Autorouter Parameters View Setting Display Parameters Preplacement Settings Automatic Placement Parameters Autoroute Options Autorouting Options Autorouter Co
490. to SCM elements Warning The pin marker plot rule can only be set if the sem cul rule definition file and thus the scm pin marker plot rule has been compiled with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP RULECOMP stores the compiled rules to the brules vdb file in the BAE programs directory l e the rules are not saved with the design When transferring the design onto a different computer the scm pin marker plot rule must be transferred to this computer as well otherwise pin marker graphic plot requests won t work Plot Elements Visibility Control option are available in the submenu of the Set Group Rules and Select Elements functions from the menu On default all SCM elements except for comment texts and tag symbols are plotted The option can be used to assign the Disable Plotting attribute to other elements Plot disabled elements are displayed on screen using the Variant Attributes color Plot visibility modes are saved with design variants thus allowing for variant specific plot outputs Neural Rule System Page 6 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 6 3 2 PCB Design Rule System Applications Part Type specific Graphic and Text Display Part type specific graphics and texts can be defined by assigning rules containing 11nvis predicate value settings Logical Library Name Visibility for examples see the layout llname rules in the layout rul definition file of the User Language programs directory bae
491. to set the standard line width to 0 25mm and the scaling factor to 0 75 and generate a Postscript output file named plot1 ps for the currently loaded SCM sheet Plot Output Cl Plotter Pen Width Plotter Pen Width 0 10mm 0 25 Plot Scale Plot Scale Factor 1 0 0 75 Postscript Output Plot File Name plott ps The system issues the following message after successfully generating the Postscript output Postscript output done Circuit Design CAE Page 2 58 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 5 5 Generic Output under Windows A generic print plot output function is implemented with the Windows versions of the BAE PC software l e any print plot output feature supported by the current Windows operating system configuration is also supported with the Schematic Editor of the BAE Windows software Use the following commands to activate the Windows print plot menu Plot Output Em Generic Output The Windows printer dialog specifications for the number of copies page sorting mode and page range are considered by the Generic Output function The All Pages option from the Windows printer dialog of the Generic Outpui function plots all elements of the currently loaded database class This allows for the output of e g all sheets of a schematic circuit All SCM sheets are plotted according to specific plot parameter settings such as plot rotation modes The opt
492. to trace impedance layer specific clearance paramaters for DRC and copper fill functions internal data structures optimized for high Autorouter performance advanced Neural Rule System features rule driven Neural Autorouter nettype specific routing area definitions net specific maximum via count settings net specific maximum connection length settings CAM output to suppress unconnected inner layer pads BAE HighEnd is data compatible to BAE Professional in both directions requested data transformations are automatically applied during element load procedures Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design BAE HighEnd can be upgraded to a fully featured ASIC design system Bartels AutoEngineer IC Design BAEICD is a complete CAD CAM system for the physical design of integrated circuits gate arrays standard cells custom ICs and or ASICs BAEICD consists of a series of system components such as IC Mask Editor IC Autoplacement IC Autorouter and IC DRC Design Rule Check GDS II and CIF standard interfaces are provided for converting foreign data and or producing CAM output mask data bonding data etc The BAEICD CAM tools include a module for displaying CIF data in order to perform visual CAM output checks Net list data is usually transferred by the BAE Packager after defining the circuitry with BAE Schematics which provides features for hierarchical circuit design Alternative solutions for importing foreign third party netlist data format
493. tomatic part naming with definable part name patterns virtual symbols for company logos or circuit legends net highlight automatic reconnection at symbol movement etc Net list modifications introduced to the layout such as pin gate swaps or part name changes are reflected back to the SCM automatically by applying Backannotation Circuit Design CAE Page 2 5 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 21 2 Starting the Schematic Editor It is recommended to start the Bartels AutoEngineer from the directory where the design files should be generated since this considerably simplifies job file access If you intend to process the examples provided with this manual it is recommended to move to the BAE examples directory installed with the BAE software The Schematic Editor can be called from the Bartels AutoEngineer main shell Start the BAE shell by typing the following command to the operating system prompt gt pao E The AutoEngineer comes up with the Bartels logo and the following menu the Setup menu items are available only with special software configurations such as BAE Windows Motif the IC Design and Next Task HighEnd or BAE IC Design Schematic Layout IC Design Packager CAM View Setup Next Task Exit BAE function is only available under Move the menu cursor to the menu item and confirm this choice by pressing the left mouse button Schematic N
494. tomized Layout Editor User Interface ees esse ee Ee Ee RR EER Re RR EE ER EG RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee ek Ge ee 4 12 4 1 5 in built Layout System Features uses sesse ee Re RR EER RE RR EE AR RE AR EE e RR RR Re AR Re RR Ee RR Ee RR Ee AR Ee RR Ee ek Rae ee 4 13 Layout Library Symbol DeSiQn scssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 21 4 2 1 Creating LayoutPads AA EKG Ee ee NA anag 4 22 4 22 Creating Layout Padstacks aaa GAN ABRA 4 27 4 2 3 Creating Layout Parts ii seer AG aaa 4 35 Designing PCB LavoutS issie eds Ee se ed dee ee KEER Ee ed ewe Ed EE ed ede de eke de 4 42 4 3 1 Creating and Editing PCB LayoutS esse esse esse ese ER Re ER RE ER ERA ER RE ER Re ER Re e ER Ree RR Re A ER Eee RR Re e ERA RR Ge ER ee EE 4 43 4 3 2 Paris E ET EE 4 48 4 3 3 Textand Graphip EE ER AA N EE NAAN BA AR 4 55 43 4 Traces TL EE 4 59 Autoplacement AE G GA KAG BEANS GAGANA ANA 4 63 4 4 1 Part SOU EEN 4 64 4 4 2 Matrix Placement ees see ee nana RR EER na EE RR RR EER RR RE EER RR ERGER AA 4 66 4 4 3 Initial Placement 444 Placement Optimization NA AARAL 4 71 Auto Ged EE OE N EE N kEi 4 72 4 5 1 Starting the Autorouter Seed aED 4 73 4 5 2 Autorouter Main MENU sees ee Aa 4 74 4 5 3 Customized Autorouter User Interface uses esse Re RR EER RE AR EE AR EE aan 4 75 4 5 4 In built Autorouter System Features esse esse Re ER RE na RE ER RE ER EG ER RE ER Rae ER Re A ER Rae ER R
495. tput to ensure that Gerber photoplot data can be generated without overdraw errors see also chapter 4 7 of this manual Copper Fill Complexity The CPU time and memory requirements of the copper fill algorithm strongly depend on the quantity and complexity of the structures to be isolated and or generated Orthogonal structures make the job much easier than e g arc shaped objects since a lot more time consuming geometric distance calculations and complex floating point operations are required for the latter Figure 4 8 elucidates how the complexity of the objects to be isolated and particularly their mutual positioning strongly affects memory requirements during copper fill Note however that figure 4 8 does not show what large amount of temporary data is required for the area reduction and expansion algorithms used for generating correct copper fill areas Defining more smaller copper fill workareas instead of a few large ones can often be the workaround when running into memory problems using the copper fill function on main memory limited PC systems 2 Copper Areas 2 Copper Areas 5 Copper Areas 8 Polygon Points 8 Polygon Points 34 Polygon Points 7 Copper Areas 9 Copper Areas 23 Copper Areas 68 Polygon Points 88 Polygon Points 248 Polygon Points Figure 4 8 Automatic Copper Fill Complexity You can use one of the Octagonal Corners Octagonal Circles and Octagonal Corners Circles options inste
496. trace width and or minimum distance until either of the messages Minimum distance value accepted 0r New default trace width accepted is issued You should set the trace width and minimum distance values to 0 2mm each if you intend to route an SMD layout with 1 40 inch routing grid since this allows the Autorouter to use the pin channels of SO packages Note that the 1 60 inch routing grid i e the complete routing matrix is internally shifted by 1 120 inch thus enabling the Autorouter to place two traces between adjacent pins of DIL packages which are placed on 1 10 or 1 20 inch grid The option of the function can be used to specify arbitrary routing grids such as some metric grid for special pin grids Arbitrary routing grid settings will set both the standard trace width and the minimum distance to half the value of the routing grid l e a routing grid specification of e g 1 1mm will set the trace width and the minimum distance to 0 55mm each The built in off grid recognition of the Bartels AutoEngineer allows for off grid placement of pins and pre routed traces l e the Autorouter is able to connect objects which are not placed on the routing grid e g plug pins on metric grid Note however that on grid items make the job much easier for the Autorouter since off grid routing is quite time consuming and could even prevent the Autorouter from connecting certain items in a simple way It is recommended to use a
497. tribute value assignments work similar to rlname assignments Srlext assignments cause the Packager to transfer symbols using non default logical library definitions with specific name extensions separated from the base name by an underscore 1 This allows for the selection of part definitions with e g standardized manufacturer specific library attribute settings or non default standardized package assignments The predefined attributes Sval value Spow power Stype comment Scommentge and Smanufacturer are optionally used throughout the delivered BAE libraries The user is free to apply these attribute definitions and or to assign corresponding attribute values on demand The Spartside part system attribute can be used to block attribute value top or force attribute value bottom part mirroring These settings have priority over any other mirror modes during interactive and automatic part placement operations Parts violating these placement preferences are marked by the DRC and the Utilities Repor functions list such parts in a part side error list The ROUTE library provides the tag sym partside tag symbol for assigning Spartside attribute values The Splttime current time pltdatede current date German Notation and p1tdateus current date US notation system attributes are substituted with the current time and or the current date when displayed and or plotted on SCM sheet or layout level The pltstime
498. tures reported with aLines of length zero mode are unexposed Gerber coordinates Moving Gerber Data The Move Data Set function from the File menu can be used for moving previously loaded Gerber data sets The data to be moved can be selected from a popup menu where available data sets are listed according to the load sequence Each data set entry of the popup menu displays the layer s the offset to origin the mirror mode and the input data file name After PCB Design CAD Page 4 147 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual selecting the desired data set the user must specify the movement vector by selecting the start and end point of the movement During these selections the input grid corresponds with the current display grid settings Pressing the right mouse button during data set movement activates a context menu with functions for performing absolute and or relative jumps Writing Gerber Data The Save Gerber Data function from the File menu is used to write currently loaded Gerber data of a selectable layer to a named file Use the following commands to select Gerber format 2 3 and write the Gerber data currently loaded to layer 2 to a Gerber file named demo 12 925 Settings Gerber Format Gerber 2 3 Format E File Save Gerber Data Layer 2 Plot File Name demo 12 925 The Clear Memory function from the File menu is used to delete the currently loaded data from memo
499. uadrant first expects an interactive selection of a quadrant origin and then prompts for the quadrant Upper Right Upper Left Lower Left Lower Right Subsequent group move operations are only applied on group selected elements and or points placed within the selected quadrant It is possible to move parts of a layout and to reroute the connections to the moved group Note however that the algorithm applied by the group move functions for rearranging traces is not a genuine routing algorithm and is designed to be applied on horizontal and or vertical move operations only For more complex group shift operations it is recommended to discard the routing and perform a re routing using the appropriate Autorouter procedures The Load Group function first resets the currently defined group to deselect all group elements before performing the load operation After successfully loading a group all loaded group elements are automatically group selected l e only loaded group elements are subject to subsequent group functions PCB Design CAD Page 4 17 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual The Layout Editor supports different options for displaying group selected elements during group movement operations The behavior of this feature can be controlled with the function which provides the following display modes Groups Display Mode Moving Picture Off
500. ually performing pin gate swaps Input Grid BAE supports arbitrary grids and grid free input Nevertheless it is recommended to use a reasonable grid for part placement thus avoiding off grid pin placement and enabling pin channel routing to make the routing job easier and to yield higher routing density Use the following commands to set a 1 10 inch input grid with grid lock View m Grids Rotation Set Input Grid 1 10 Inch Grid Rotation On Library Access The Select Library function from the menu is used for selecting the layout library from which the part symbols should be loaded Use the following commands to check the current library path selection Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib laylib ddb The name of the currently selected library is displayed with the library file name prompt When calling the Layout Editor a default library path is automatically set according to the system setup see also chapter 7 2 of this manual for a description of the BSETUP utility program An empty string input to the library name query does not change the current library path setting A dash string input resets the library path setting no library selected and or input restores the default library path defined with the setup Under Windows the library file name is specified through file dialog box Use the following commands to check the library path settings Settings Select Library Library Name c baelib
501. ucture Such structures produce overdraw plot errors which are reported and or indicated with highlight It is strongly recommended to refrain from passing CAM output with overdraw errors to the PCB manufacturer since this could produce PCBs containing short circuits The Remove Error Marks function from the Utilities menu can be used to reset the overdraw error display Board Outline and Plot Markers The Border Model and Reg Marks Mode functions are used to designate whether the board outline and or the plot markers should be plotted together with other layers With the Plot Border Off option of the Border Model function the board outline can be plotted only when selecting the Border plot layer With the Plot Border On option the board outline is plotted together with any other plot layer With the Plot Reg Marks OH option of the Reg Marks Mode function the plot markers can be plotted only when selecting the corresponding plot markers documentary layer With the Plot Reg Marks On option the plot markers are plotted together with any other plot layer The plot markers documentary layer can be defined with the LAYPLTMARKLAY command of the BSETUP utility program see chapter 7 2 for more details On default the Plot Border On and the Plot Reg Marks On options are used PCB Design CAD Page 4 124 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 4 7
502. ugh the Srlname Requested Logical Library Name attribute are permitted The following part command format is used for deleting part assignments from the logical library delete part lt lliname gt The part command provides special format part lt llname gt virtual which does not reference any physical part This is applied to avoid errors when symbols have been used in the schematic that don t relate to parts in the PCB e g company logos drawing borders etc This format is also used for setting net attributes see below The part command also allows for the definition of pure logical parts by using the keyword logical as in part lt llname gt logical Utilities Page 7 35 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Logical parts do not have a physical package assignment and can be used for generating logical e g EDIF net lists for PLD and or LCA design Some parts have elements that require different symbols for example relays The symbol for the relay s coil is very different from that of the contacts and springsets and these may well need to appear on different sheets of the schematics One symbol is chosen to be the main symbol and given a logical library name whilst the other symbols are given other logical library names The relationship between the symbols is defined using the keywords mainpart and subpart asin part lt mainllname gt mainpart lt plname gt part lt subllname gt subpart lt mainllna
503. ugs switches LEDs etc which are to be excluded from the placement optimization or manually pre routed traces e g for power supply which must not be changed by the Autorouter A specific highlight for indicating fixed elements is activated during fix and release operations All functions for manipulating and or copying fixed elements parts traces vias preserve and or copy existing fixed modes This also means that the Layout Editor trace functions for interactive routing keep traces fixed flags when processing pre routed fixed traces l e when manipulating pre routed fixed traces there is no need of re fixing such traces to prevent the Autorouter from re routing and or rejecting pre routed traces Polygons Areas In the Layout Editor the functions from the Areas menu are used to create and or modify polygons and or pad shapes Each polygon definition is associated with a layer and or a polygon type and can contain an arbitrary number of arcs The definition of an arc is applied by selecting either the Arc Left or the Arc Righi option from the submenu to be activated after specifying the arc start point subsequently the system expects the arc center point specification and the arc definition is completed with the arc end point selection The system provides instant display of the resulting circle and or arc during interactive input of the arc center and end points At the definition of full circles the input of the arc end point is
504. ulc to documentary layer polygons and or texts on layout part level These part elements are only displayed on layout level if the 11nvis predicate value matches the part 11name Logical Library Name attribute value This e g allows for the definition of footprints eg SMD s1206 with different insertion plan graphics for capacitors e g 1l1name cl and resistors e g llname r Layout Placement Preferences The rot0 rot 90 rot 180 rot270 mirroron and or mirroroff rules from the partp1c rul rule definition file in the User Language directory baeulc can be assigned to parts padstacks or pads to define placement preferences such as rotation and or mirror modes for these elements These rules are automatically considered by the manual and autoplacement functions from the Layout Editor and the Autorouter After compiling the partp1c rul file with the Rule System Compiler RULECOMP the LDEFMANG User Language program can be used on part padstack or pad level to set these rules Trace Edit Display Mode The lay edit wide filled lay edit wide outline and lay edit wide filldist rules from the layout rul rule definition file see User Language programs directory baeulc can be assigned to layouts to force unfilled or filled or filled wide trace segments display during manual routing The Edit Display function from the GEDTRACE User Language program can be used for assigning one of the trace edit display modes ine Display default trace se
505. ully support the demanded technology The CAM Processor automatically optimizes the use of the selected tools and aperture table definitions to generate all structures at highest possible precision with regard to the chosen plot parameters and output tolerance ranges The system also provides appropriate error messages and highlight features to indicate objects which cannot be plotted using the selected tools and the current plot parameter settings In built functions are available for producing HP GL pen plot PCL laser print and Postscript output and for supporting configurable drivers for Gerber photoplotting with freely definable aperture tables The CAM Processor also provides programming data for auto insertion and pick and place equipment solder mask drill data and SMD adhesive masks CAM output is generated considering general parameters such as tool tolerance scaling factor CAM rotation and or mirroring freely definable CAM origin etc Special plot parameters for generating negative power layer and split power plane plots are also supported With the flexibility of easily preparing all of the required output data the BAE user has free choice amongst photo plot producers and PCB manufacturers With the Bartels User Language integrated to the CAM Processor the user is able to implement enhanced CAM functions and macros user specific and or batch driven post processors report and test functions etc User Language provides unrestricted access to
506. ures Figure 1 1 Bartels AutoEngineer System Flow Diagram sesse esse ee Rae ER RE ER ERA aa 1 7 Figure 1 2 BAE Pulldown Menu User Interface aa 1 10 Figure 1 3 BAE Side Menu User Interface use esse esse ee Ee ER RR EE ER RE RR EE AR Ee NANANA 1 11 Figure 1 4 SCM Database Hierarchy uee sees see ee Rae Re ER RE ER RE ER RE ER RE ER RE ERG A K REG e RR EA RR Re e KRAKE Re ER EA RR Ee e KRAKE ee Ka 1 22 Figure 1 5 Layout Database HierarChY ees ee esse ee ERGE RR KEER asana 1 23 Figure 1 6 Part Data Sheet with Loglib Definition ER RE ERA ER RE ER EA ER RE ER EA ER ERA RR EA ER Re A RR A EREe ee Ee 1 24 Figure 2 1 SCM Library Symbols na Figure 2 2 SCM Symbol e KE UA Figure 2 3 SCM Library ACCESS iis tees see Bek Ee Ee Vse Re Ee EER Ee EK NEESS EUREN EEN Figure 2 4 SCM Sheet with Symbols Figure 2 5 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections ese se ee RE RE EE AE EE AR EE EER AR EE ERGE AR RE ER ee RE e mannna 2 42 Figure 2 6 SCM Sheet with Symbols Connections Labels ees esse Re RR RR RE AK RE EE AR EE KEER EE Ee EE 2 44 Figure 2 7 SCM Bus Connections amar Figure 2 8 SCM Sheet Demo Sheet1 Figure 2 9 SCM Sheet Demo Sheet2 Figure 2 10 Hierarchical Circuit Design Sub Block SCM Sheet BLOCK esse sees se esse ese Ee Ee Ee Ke ee 2 60 Figure 2 11 Hierarchical Circuit Design Block Symbol DFF with Loglib Definition 2 61
507. us connections Better routability of high density layouts with a random connection distribution however can be achieved using smaller segment fit values Mirroring Mode The part mirroring mode has effect on the placement of SMD parts only With the No SMD Mirroring default option SMD parts can only be placed on the PCB part side SMD Mirroring is used to allow unrestricted placement of SMD parts on both the part side and the solder side The SMD 2 Pin Mirroring option restricts automatic part mirroring to 2 pin SMDs only thus allowing for solder side placement of small parts such as block capacitors whilst placement of SMDs with more than 2 pins is forced onto the PCB part side Use the Parts Auto Placement Settings Em Mirroring Mode No SMD Mirroring SMD Mirroring SMD 2 Pin Mirroring function to select the desired SMD mirroring option Rotation Mode The part rotation mode is used to apply either unrestricted or restricted automatic part rotation in 90 degree steps With the 0 270 Degree Rotation default option all parts can be placed at arbitrary 90 degree rotation steps Option 0 90 Degree Rotation can be used to restrict part rotation i e to allow no rotation or 90 degree left rotation only Restricted part rotation can be used to simplify subsequent insertion processes which will also result in a reduction of CPU time required by the placement algorithms Use the Parts Auto Placement
508. use function from the Settings menu Placing Text Grids Rotation and Set Input Grid Use the following commands to place the DEMO text string adjacent to the right top of the board outline with a text size of 4mm on the insertion Plan Side 2 documentary layer Text Drill LC Add Text Document Layer Insertion Plan Cl Text DEMO Set Angle Le Angle Deg R ad 45 Text Size II Text Size 2 54mm 4 Move to 2 4 2 6 Use the following commands to place the Component Side text string with text size 2 54mm on the PCB component side signal layer Top Layer Layer n Parts Text Drill Add Text Layer n Parts Text Component Side Text Size LC Text Size 4 00mm 2 54 Move to 1 00 2 55 The Text Size function which can be activated whilst placing texts sets the default text size for subsequent calls to the Add Text function Use the following commands to place a rotated and mirrored text with string Solder Side on the PCB solder side signal layer 1 Text Drill Add Text Layer 1 Text Solder Side Set Angle Angle Deg R ad 180 Mirror On Move to 1 80 2 55 Texts placed on signal layers are subject to the design rule check Le the DRC will issue distance errors for intersections between signal layer texts and other objects pads traces copper areas texts e
509. ut also can result in a deterioration of intermediate placement results since small parts such as block capacitors might not be correctly replaced with their clusters PCB Design CAD Page 4 70 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 444 Placement Optimization The placement optimization features of the BAE layout system include functions for automatic part and pin gate swap The part swap facility mutually exchanges identical components at their insertion position in order to minimize unroutes lengths The pin gate swap facility analogously performs an iterative exchange of gates and or pins and pin groups where gates or groups can also be swapped between different parts The admissibility of pin gate swaps is fairly controlled with appropriate library definitions Either single pass or multi pass optimization can be applied Different swap methods can be selected through the P G Swap Method function with the default Both Swap Methods option to perform both component and pin gate swap Only Part Swap to switch off pin gate swap and Only Pin Gate Swap to switch off component swap Applying placement optimization usually causes a significant simplification of the routing problem thus considerably reducing runtime at the subsequent Autorouting process Use the following commands to perform a triple pass placement optimization with both component and pin gate swaps Parts m Auto Placement Settings
510. utputs can cause the negation lines of small texts being merged with text frames The Standard Text option resets all text frame definitions The submenus of the Add Text Move Text and Copy Ted functions also provide the No Rotation and Center options for switching the selected text into norotate mode and or center aligning the text at its placement position Text in norotate mode is displayed and or plotted without rotation on any database hierarchy level The No Rotation and Center text modes can be reset by applying the option from the same submenu Circuit Design CAE Page 2 19 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Bartels AutoEngineer supports arbitrary part attributes on symbol level A particular attribute is defined by a text consisting of the S character followed by the lowercase attribute name Attributes are like variables i e on SCM sheet level values can be assigned to attributes The attributes listed in table 2 1 have special meanings due to BAE specific conventions Table 2 1 Special BAE Aitributes Attribute Name Function Meaning Reference Name Ur Ki Logical Reference Name Sllname Logical Library Name plname Physical Library Name and or Alternate Layout Part Package Types Sulname Used Library Name Alternate Layout Part Package Type Assignment Srpname Requested Part Name Srbname R
511. value settings are supported out Output Pin biai Bi directional Pin Analog Pin sup Power Supply Pin The ERC issues a warning message such as Net netname has only inputs if a net with one or more input pins has no normal bi directional or power supply output pin A warning message such as Driver collision on net netname is issued if a normal output pin is connected to another output pin a bi directional pin or a power supply pin Packager Backannotation Page 3 8 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 3 24 Example This section describes how to run the Packager on the demo ddb example project file which has been created in the previous chapter e you should change to the directory where the demo dab file resides Faulty Packager Pass Start the BAE main menu call the Packager as described in chapter 3 2 1 and use the following commands to run the Packager for transferring the logical net list in demo ddb to a physical net list named board using library demolib ddb Settings All Parameters Resign Library Name dom E EENS voor IN Start Errors will occur during packaging and the following messages are displayed BARTELS PACKAGER Design File Name demo Library File Name demolib ayout Element Name board Active Schematic Sheet sheetl ERROR Part cd4081 not in library Abort Database not changed
512. wer Supply Pin The ERC issues a warning message such as Net netname has only inputs if a net with one or more input pins has no normal bi directional or power supply output pin A warning message such as Driver collision on net netname is issued if a normal output pin is connected to another output pin a bi directional pin or a power supply pin The syntax of the newattr command also allows for the assignment of variant specific attributes by specifying a comma separated variant number after the attribute name quotes This allows for the assignment of different fixed attributes to different predefined project variants such as 110 Volt and 230 Volt or deutsch and english newattr attribute values without variant number specification are assigned to the default base variant The newattr command can be used to trigger automatic ID attribute value generation by the Packager through the assignment of id symid extension and partid extension values id creates consecutive ID values id1 id2 etc The symid extension and partid extension values append the specified extension with underscore to the schematic symbol name and or layout part name partid diffpairl results in Ziel diffpairl ic2 diffpairl etc Automatic ID generation is useful if a newattr command refers to multiple pins as this allows to create a reference between pins as required for differential pair indication The newattr command accepts special unique attribute
513. with a selectable name to the cam dat system file Use the following commands to define a round line aperture with 0 3mm diameter and D Code 10 at aperture table index 1 Edit Aperture Table Gerber Aperture Table Index 1 900 1 Aperture R ound S Q uare T hermal S pecial A rea r E Aperture Diameter Side Length 0 127mm 0 3 Drawing Mode A II F lash L ine Gerber D Code Number 10 999 10 Gerber Aperture Table Index 1 900 Loading Gerber Data The Load Gerber Data function from the Pied menu is used to load Gerber photoplot data files The user is prompted for the Gerber plot file name after specifying layers for line drawn structures and flashed structures respectively The line draw and flash layer assignment is required by the features for decoding Gerber data to BAE layout data see below Gerber input layer assignments can also be utilized for panelization where Gerber data from different layers must be written to separate data files Layer assignments can also be used for comparing different Gerber file versions of the same layout When loading different Gerber files versions to different layers then the common structures are displayed with mixed colors resulting from the colors assigned to the input layers if the Layer Assignment option is selected with the Color Assignment function from the View menu
514. with a user specified name to the ged dat system file in the BAE programs directory When starting the Layout Editor or any other layout program module the color table named standard is automatically loaded Any other color table available in ged dat can be loaded using the function from the menu It is a good idea to define color tables for certain tasks such as stackdef for padstack editing e with drill holes and drill plan visible or unroutes for fast open connections recognition i e with airlines visible only At the definition of color tables it is to be considered that screen redraw functions will take longer if more objects must be displayed It is recommended to define task specific color tables to display only those objects which are important for the corresponding task The Set Edit Layer function is usually used to allow selection on a specific layer It also has the useful hidden function of loading a layer specific color table These color tables have specific names and if they don t exist there will be no change in the color display See table 4 3 for the color table names assigned to the pick preference layers lt n gt is the layer number respectively Table 4 3 also lists short layer names which can optionally be used in certain layer menus for selecting layers via keyboard input Table 4 3 Pick Preference Layer Color Tables and Short Layer Names Layer Color Table Name Layer Name Signal Layer lt n gt lt n gt Si
515. x Placement Matrix Enabled Flag Copper Fill Isolation Distance Copper Fill Minimum Area Structure Size Copper Fill Trace Cutout Mode Copper Fill Island Delete Mode Copper Fill Heat Trap Mode Copper Fill Heat Trap Width Hatching Line Spacing Hatching Line Width Hatching Mode Parameter sets are stored with special names according to the currently processed layout database hierarchy level The layout element name is used for layout elements parameter set name part is used for layout part symbol elements padstack is used for layout padstack elements and pad is used for layout pad elements When loading an element the corresponding parameter set is automatically loaded and or activated as well thus providing a convenient way of activating a default parameter set suitable for processing the selected design and or library element type PCB Design CAD Page 4 13 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Layer Assignments The layer assignment is most important for the creation and modification of layout symbols and for the design of layouts The system provides the following layers and or display items Signal Layers 1 100 Signal Layer Top Layer Signal Layer All Layers Signal Layer Middle Layer Power Layers 1 12 Documentary Layers 1 100 Board Outline Airlines Drill Holes Workarea Origin Errors Highlight Drill A Z Fixed Glued The signal layers are subject to the design rule check On the sign
516. xlen loglib loglib Net Attribute Minimal Length Net Attribute Maximal Length part net minlen part net maxlen pin ix 7 pin ix 7 netattr minlen val x 5 netattr maxlen val x 5 end end Figure 3 3 Net Attribute Definitions Packager Backannotation Page 3 33 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual Chapter 4 PCB Design CAD This chapter describes how to use the Layout Editor the Autorouter the CAM Processor and the CAM View for creating layout library symbols and designing PCB layouts and for generating and processing CAM output and manufacturing data for the PCB production The examples presented in this chapter introduce the concepts and advanced features of the BAE PCB design system in a logical sequence and will take the user from the creation of layout library symbols and the design and modification of a PCB layout through to the generation of manufacturing data for the PCB production The PCB design example is based on the circuit drawing and net list data prepared in the preceding chapters and will be subject to further processing in the following chapter The reader should work through this chapter without missing any sections to gain full understanding of the BAE PCB design system Once a command has been used and or explained the operator is assumed to have understood its function and be able to perform it again Subsequent instructions containing this command will be less verbos
517. xt Figure 1 5 Layout Database Hierarchy Introduction Page 1 23 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 1 3 4 Logical Library The Bartels AutoEngineer logical library provides the link between the SCM library and the layout library The logical library contains information about the assignment of SCM symbols to layout packages including gate definitions and pin mapping pin gate swap rules predefined power supply pins fixed part attributes etc All these definitions can be entered to an ASCII file to be subsequently transferred to a BAE DDB file using the LOGLIB utility program see chapter 7 11 of this manual for a description of the LOGLIB utility program The logical library definitions are required by the Packager for compiling logical net list data created by the Schematic Editor to physical net list data which can be processed by the BAE layout system see chapter 3 2 of this manual for a more detailed description of the BAE Packager During a Packager run the logical library entries are checked against the corresponding layout library symbols for ensuring correct pin mappings Please note that the Packager can evaluate only one library file at the same time i e both the required logical library data and the requested layout library data must be stored to the same DDB file Figure 1 6 shows a LOGLIB file example containing a logical library part definition according to the manufacturer s part data sheet loglib
518. y Warnings The listfile argument is the name of the ASCII file to be created by LISTDDB LISTDDB does not perform any file existence check and the destination file is overwritten without any comment It is strongly recommended to refrain from specifying existing file names unless the destination file is not needed any more Utilities Page 7 33 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 7 11 LOGLIB Name loglib Logical Library Maintenance Synopsis loglib loglibfile libraryfile Description The LOGLIB utility program compiles an ASCII text file containing the relationship between logical symbols and physical parts into a Design DataBase DDB file The information transferred by LOGLIB includes assignment of SCM symbols to layout parts logical to physical pin mapping pin gate swap definitions predefined power supply pins fixed part attributes etc This information is required by the Packager for translating logical net lists generated by SCM into physical net lists processed by the layout system and it is also required by Backannotation for transferring net list changes pin gate swap part name changes from the layout to the schematic circuit LOGLIB accepts the loglib file name loglibfile as first argument loglibfile is an ASCII file containing logical library part definitions This file must have an extension of def but this extension must not be included with the command line LOGLIB accepts the layout library file name
519. y amp connect1 part 74ls04 a amp connectl y amp connect2 part 741s04 a amp connect2 y amp connect3 part 741s04 a amp connect3 y out end Files The symbol and part library directory installed with the Bartels AutoEngineer software contains the LOGLIB def files for alle SCM library files All LOGLIB files of the software are already compiled into the laylib ddb layout library file See also Packager The functionality for compiling Logical Library definitions is also implemented through the con_compileloglib User Language system function Diagnosis The error messages issued by LOGLIB are intended to be self explanatory Warnings Input file identifiers such as part names pin names or net names containing special characters must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes The Packager copies logical library definitions from the specified layout library to the project file when first referenced Certain SCM or layout symbol modifications from the project file such as pin name changes must be reflected by a logical library definition update l e LOGLIB must be applied to the project file if the original logical library definition has already been transferred to the project file during an earlier Packager run The Packager issues error messages such as Part not found in library Part not defined or Pin not found loglib definitions are wrong or missing Utilities Page
520. y file entry for the sub block reference symbol This LOGLIB entry must define a virtual part with the name of the sub block reference symbol For referencing the sub block the LOGLIB command call with the blockname of the sub block as argument must be used See also chapter 7 11 of this manual for a more detailed description of the LOGLIB utility program Figure 2 11 shows the sub block reference symbol DFF and the corresponding logical sub block reference for the sub block circuit drawing in figure 2 10 Note that figure 2 11 also illustrates how to define busses on sub block reference symbols Loglib Definition loglib part dff virtual pin s r q q bus hyper call block Figure 2 11 Hierarchical Circuit Design Block Symbol DFF with Loglib Definition Circuit Design CAE Page 2 61 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 6 3 Top Level Circuit Drawing Figure 2 12 shows how the sub block symbol DFF from figure 2 11 is used in a higher level schematic drawing The circuit drawing in figure 2 12 contains three DFF symbols named DFF 1 DFF 2 and DFF 3 each referencing one BLOCK sub block circuit drawing Figure 2 12 Hierarchical Circuit Design Top Level SCM Sheet Circuit Design CAE Page 2 62 Bartels AutoEngineer User Manual 2 7 Backannotation Backward annotation with the Backannotation is always required after performing layout net list modifications such as part name ch
521. y time unless another interactive keyboard input request is currently pending The name of the User Language program to be called is automatically derived from the pressed key i e pressing a standard and or function key triggers the activation of a User Language program with a corresponding name such as scm 1 for digit key fi scm r for standard key scm for standard key g scm f1 for function key Fil scm f2 for function key F2 etc The Schematic Editor User Language Interpreter environment also features event driven User Language program calls where User Language programs with predefined names are automatically started at certain events and or operations such as SCM ST at Schematic Editor module startup SCM LOAD after loading a design element SCM SAVE before saving a design element SCM TOOL when selecting a toolbar item and SCM ZOOM when changing the zoom factor The module startup User Language program call method is most useful for automatic system parameter setup as well as for key programming and menu assignments The element save and load program call methods can be used to save and restore element specific parameters such as the zoom area color setup etc The toolbar selection event must be used to start User Language programs which are linked to toolbar elements The zoom event can be used to apply an update request to a design view management feature Bartels User Language also provides
522. ymbol Part Name 000 Library Element Name 8 Select Button Project Select Element cd4081 Move to 60 110 Ma Next Symbol Label Move to 100 110 E Next Symbol Label Move to 140 110 000 Next Symbol Label Move to 180 110 aia The popup menu for selecting the SCM library file provides access to all library files of the predefined library path as well as to the job specific library selectable with the Project button The subsequently activated popup menu for selecting the library symbol simultaneously provides access to the table of contents of the selected SCM symbol library the symbol load function can be canceled by selecting the Abort button The system also provides features for directly accessing certain library files of the predefined library path Use the following commands to access the symbol z80 from the library file zilog ddb Symbols Add Symbol Part Name El brary Element Name zilog z80 E Now the symbol z80 is picked with the graphic cursor and can be placed Use the following commands to abort this operation Abort Aborting the symbol load function will prevent the system from copying the symbol from the library file to the currently edited project file thus avoiding redundant database entries in the job file The general syntax for specifying the library element name is lt library_file_name gt lt library_element_name gt If the use
523. ymbols placed on the layout the parts contain the named references to the padstack symbols defined on the part and the padstacks contain the unnamed references to the pad symbols used on these padstack All references of a certain element are transparent throughout the corresponding DDB file When loading or copying that element all pertinent references are automatically be loaded and or copied Homogeneity All database classes are subject to general file and database management functions Le the Schematic Editor is suitable for creating and manipulating SCM plans as well as for editing SCM library elements such as symbols labels and pins The same is true for the Layout Editor concerning the creation and manipulation of layouts parts padstacks and pads All functions are automatically adjusted to the current environment and database hierarchy level Corresponding menus and functions from the Schematic Editor and the Layout Editor are quite similar Le the SCM function is equivalent to the Layout Editor Add Trace function and the Layout Editor Add Par function is used for placing parts on layouts for placing padstacks on parts or for placing pads on padstacks whichever is appropriate for the currently loaded element This concept creates far reaching analogies for the processing of objects of different database classes and makes it fairly easy to learn how to use the BAE design system File Format All program modu
524. yout elementname gt where lt layout elementname gt is the default layout board element name This command considerably simplifies the work with the BAE layout modules since on corresponding user queries the default layout element name can be specified just by pressing the return key E PROJROOTDIR Command The PROJROOTDIR command is used to set the directory root path for the optional directory selection menus of the BAE file access functions The directory popup menus display all subdirectories of the root directory specified with the PROJROOTDIR command The formal syntax of the PROJROOTDIR command is PROJROOTDIR xrootdir5 where lt rootdir gt is the path name of the directory selection root directory If there is no PROJROOTDIR command defined in the setup file then the current directory is used on default Examples for lt rootdir gt are root directory of the current drive d root directory of PC drive D c cad data directory cad data on PC drive CH pcb projects directory pcb projects of the current drive etc The lt rootdir gt entry must not contain any special characters such as or WINMENUMODE Command The Windows and Motif versions of the BAE software can be operated with either the BAE standard user interface with side menus or with the windows like user interface with pull down menus The WINMENUMODE command is used to activate the desired user interface Use the following command to
525. ystem from assigning and or transferring any attribute value to the net list Attributes are part of the net list and are annotated by the Packager thus providing access from the layout e g by appropriate text definitions on selectable documentary layers The USERLIST utility program and Bartels User Language can be utilized for performing automatic attribute value assignments and or for evaluating attributes for cost analysis production planning manufacturing control purchasing and ordering management producing output data for third party systems etc Part Name Pattern BAE supports patterns for symbol names to follow if a name is not specified when the symbol is placed on the SCM sheet Use the following commands to define a part name pattern for the currently loaded CD4081 symbol Symbols Part Name Pattern Part Name Pattern IC With the commands above a part name pattern consisting of the string Ic and two digits for the numbering is defined The default pattern for symbols without a part name pattern definition is N i e the default pattern consists of N and four digits for the numbering The start number for automatic part numbering emerges from 10 with pattern 100 with pattern 1000 with pattern etc This helps to avoid conflicts when renaming layout parts afterwards Parts are renamed on the layout e g for improving the legibility of the insertion plan for manual insertion
526. zation parameters number of passes and the pin gate swap method The placement start point results from the board outline gravity point No part can be placed using the Full Autoplacer function if the board outline gravity point is outside the board outline e g on L shaped PCBs then in this case either Cluster Placer or Area Place must be used instead of Full Autoplacer If no board outline is defined then the placement start point results from the absolute origin of the currently loaded layout element In this case it is recommended to zoom to overview after completing the placement process since parts can be placed beyond the currently defined and or visible layout element boundaries Cluster Placer After activating the Cluster Placer function the user is expected to select the placement start point interactively The first part selected for placement is positioned at the placement start point The Cluster Placer function analyzes the net list to classify the nets and parts contained in the net list Parts are grouped to clusters and these clusters are subsequently placed on the layout with respect to pre calculated cluster dependent placement priorities Each cluster is grouped by selecting a multi pin part and a series of connected parts with less than four pins Parts which are connected to power signals only such as block capacitors are postponed during cluster generation and will

Bartels AutoEngineer® User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bartels AutoEngineer&reg; User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bartels AutoEngineer® User Manual